STD Spec R DMT 2016 Online

DEPARTMENT OF INFRASTRUCTURE
2015/2016
standard specification
for road maintenance
miscellaneous provisions ■ provision for traffic ■

earthworks and drainage ■ conformance testing ■
grading and gravel sheeting ■ stabilisation maintenance ■
bituminous surface maintenance ■ spray sealing for maintenance ■
concrete maintenance ■ drainage maintenance ■
protection works maintenance ■ road furniture maintenance ■
pavement marking ■ landscape maintenance ■
slashing and weed control ■ traffic signal maintenance ■ street sweeping ■
aerodrome maintenance ■ road and marine amenity maintenance ■
protective coatings ■ measurement and payment ■ referenced documents ■
This document specifies the general standards of

materials and workmanship required by the
Department of Infrastructure
for maintenance of the road network

PO Box 61
Palmerston NT
0831
ABOUT THIS SPECIFICATION

This document was prepared by the Department of Infrastructure and specifies the general standards
of materials and workmanship required by the Department for road maintenance works. It brings
together standard terminology and methods for road maintenance work across all regions of the
Northern Territory.
It is designed to be used as a reference document for road maintenance projects, using a schedule of
rates form of payment. The Standards quoted are current as of July 2015.
The text has been edited to specify only the types of road maintenance work performed by the
Department and is applicable to all regions of the Northern Territory. The text has been developed
through consultation with Department of Infrastructure Officers with extensive experience in civil works
in the Northern Territory.
This Standard Specification will remain unchanged until an updated version is published in July 2016.
This specification is also available electronically in PDF from the DOI Specification Services website:
http://www.nt.gov.au/infrastructure/techspecs/index.shtml
INFORMATION
For further information regarding this Standard
Specification contact:
Manager Specification Services
Department of Infrastructure
PO Box 61, Palmerston NT 0831
Telephone: (08) 8946 5021
Email: [email protected]
This document was first published in January 1999 and has

been revised and reprinted annually
Revised and Re-issued October 2015
Thanks to Wicking for providing

the caricatures which help
enliven a rather mundane subject.
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR ROAD MAINTENANCE 2015/2016
REFERENCE TEXT
REFERENCE
Read this Standard Specification in conjunction with the Request For Tender/Quotation, the Project Specific
Requirements and with the Drawings, if any. Only those parts of the Standard Specification which refer to the
works being carried out apply and those items are listed in the Schedule of Rates which is attached to the
Response Schedules for the particular Contract. This document may be used as a blanket reference
specification referring generally to the standards of materials and workmanship required by the Department
for road maintenance works.
PROJECT SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS

The selection of specific items or materials for the works being carried out are those items listed in the
Schedule of Rates in the Response Schedules for the particular Contract. Any additional work or any
changes to the reference specification will be specified in the Request for Tender/Quotation document,
usually in the Project Specific Requirements section.
PRECEDENCE
Any provision in the project specification in the Request for Tender/Quotation document, including the
Project Specific Requirements, or on the project drawings, shall override any conflicting provision in this
Standard Specification.
HOLD AND WITNESS POINTS

These apply whether Quality Assurance is included in this project or not. Refer to the definitions of Hold
Points and Witness Points in the Miscellaneous Provisions section of this reference specification.
SITE COPY
Retain a copy of this document on site for the duration of the works.
COPYRIGHT
This reference specification is based on the Department of Infrastructure Roadworks Master Specification
and modified to suit road maintenance works.
This document is copyright protected and the property of the Government of the Northern Territory and must
not be retained, copied, or used without authority.
ISSN 1835-2588 Print edition

ISSN 2205-8656 On-line edition
STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD MAINTENANCE

DoI REFERENCE TEXT – October 2015
Page 3
This page intentionally left blank.

Page 4
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR ROAD MAINTENANCE 2015/2016
REFERENCE TEXT
CONTENTS
1. MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS ........................................................................................ 7

2. PROVISION FOR TRAFFIC ............................................................................................... 17
3. EARTHWORKS AND DRAINAGE ...................................................................................... 28
4. CONFORMANCE TESTING ............................................................................................... 32
5. GRADING AND GRAVEL SHEETING ................................................................................ 44
6. STABILISATION MAINTENANCE ...................................................................................... 52
7. SPRAY SEALING MAINTENANCE .................................................................................... 55
8. BITUMINOUS SURFACE MAINTENANCE ........................................................................ 68
9. CONCRETE MAINTENANCE ............................................................................................. 80
10. DRAINAGE MAINTENANCE .............................................................................................. 84
11. PROTECTION WORKS MAINTENANCE ........................................................................... 89
12. ROAD FURNITURE MAINTENANCE ................................................................................. 94
13. PAVEMENT MARKING MAINTENANCE ......................................................................... 105
14. LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE ......................................................................................... 110
15. SLASHING AND WEED CONTROL ................................................................................. 123
16. TRAFFIC SIGNALS AND INTELLIGENT TRANSPORT SYSTEMS MAINTENANCE ..... 131
17. STREET SWEEPING........................................................................................................ 176
18. AERODROME MAINTENANCE ....................................................................................... 179
19. ROAD AND MARINE AMENITY MAINTENANCE ............................................................ 182
20. PROTECTIVE COATINGS ............................................................................................... 193
21. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT ................................................................................... 209
22. REFERENCED DOCUMENTS ......................................................................................... 232
23. NORTHERN TERRITORY CLIMATE ZONE TABLE ........................................................ 250

Page 5
This page intentionally left blank.

Page 6
MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
1. MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS Provide hard copies of the text information in A4

portrait format and in Microsoft Word document
1.1 STANDARDS electronic format.
Comply with the Acts, Regulations, Guidelines Provide the amended information and drawings to
and Codes applicable to the works. Comply with the superintendent progressively as the work
the requirements of Authorities with jurisdiction proceed, with or before the claim for the variation
over the works. Conform to the Standards and which led to the need to amend the information
Publications quoted throughout this document and drawings to accurately reflect the as built
unless specified otherwise. Refer to conditions.
REFERENCED DOCUMENTS.
1.5.1 Amended drawings – Hold Point
1.2 THE CONDITIONS OF TENDER AND
Hold Point - Before the work commences provide
CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT
a proposed procedure for recording and
The Conditions of Tender and the Conditions of submitting the amended drawings.
Contract contain additional requirements which
Use an independent surveyor who is eligible for
apply to works carried out under any contract
membership of the Institution of Surveyors
awarded by NT Government, including any works
Australia or the Institution of Engineering and
carried out using this specification.
Mining Surveyors Australia to record the changes
1.3 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT and variations.
The Standard Specification for Environmental 1.6 DEFINITIONS
Management applies for all construction and
The terms used in this specification are in
demolition work for building and civil works carried
accordance with the definitions laid down in
out by or on behalf of the Northern Territory
AS 1348 unless specified otherwise in the
Government. (An electronic copy of this document
Definitions clauses.
is available at:
AAPA
http://www.nt.gov.au/infrastructure/techspecs/inde
x.shtml Aboriginal Areas Protection Authority.
The Standard Specification for Environmental APVMA
Management takes precedence over this Australian Pesticides and Veterinary Medicines
specification. Authority.
1.3.1 Standards in Conflict
ASTM
Where conflict arises between a referenced
American Society for Testing and Materials.
standard and particular clauses of this
specification the specification prevails. Base
1.3.2 Overseas Standards The layer of pavement immediately above the
subgrade or sub-base and/or below the
Where no Australian Standard exists standards
bituminous surfacing extending for the full width of
published by the British Standards Institute (BSI)
the traffic lanes.
or the American Society for Testing Materials are
referenced. Carriageway
That portion of a road for the use of vehicles, that
1.4 PROJECT SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS
is between kerbs or barriers where these are
Comply with all provisions in the PROJECT provided, including shoulders and auxiliary lanes.
SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS (PSRs) in the
Catch Drain
Request For Tender (RFT) or on the project
drawings. Any conflicts must be advised in writing A surface channel constructed along the high side
to the Superintendent for clarification. of a road or embankment, outside the batter, to
intercept the water.
1.5 AS CONSTRUCTED INFORMATION -
CLC
WITNESS POINT
Central Land Council.
Document all changes and variations of the
design as the work proceeds. CSR
Contractor Service Request.
Witness Point - Provide amended versions of the
information and drawings which reflect the as built DLPE
conditions. Department of Lands, Planning and the
Environment
Provide hard copies of drawings, and CAD format
in AutoCad (Dwg.) or Microstation or as requested DLRM
by Superintendent. Department of Land Resource Management

Page 7
Dry Density Ratio (DDR) PSRs

The percentage ratio of the field dry density of a Project Specific Requirements – appear in RFT -
material to the modified maximum dry density of amendments to specified requirements published
that material. This property is also termed Relative in Standard Specification reference texts.
Compaction. Recycled plastic
EMP Products from recycled and processed plastic
Environmental Management Plan. wastes that have undergone processes in order to
EPA create new plastic products: proprietary products
included.
Environmental Protection Authority.
Remove
Excess Haulage
Pick up and transport material to be removed to
Haulage for the distance in excess of 15 km one an approved disposal site. Use plant and
way. equipment appropriate for the material to be
Formation Width removed and appropriate for the terrain.
The width of cut or fill, including table drains, out RFT, RFQ
to the points of any batters. Request for Tender, Request For Quotation
High Risk Construction Work Provisions applicable to one are equally
applicable to the other.
Has the meaning given to it in the WHS Act.
Rock
Hold Point
Hard naturally occurring elastic material which is
Obtain the Superintendent’s written approval for
not significantly affected by immersion in water
that particular part of the works.
and cannot be dug with construction equipment
IRI normally used for the particular operation.
International Roughness Index, stated as a Roughness
numerical value. The roughness of the finished road surface in IRI
Material Extraction Areas as measured by a Roughness Meter approved by
(Formerly known as Borrow Pits) Superintendent.
An excavation outside the formation limits for RTO
obtaining fill, gravel, rock, rubble and other Registered Training Organisation.
materials. RWA
max.
Restricted Work Area.
Maximum. SDS
min.
Safety Data Sheet formerly referred as Materials
Minimum Safety Data Sheet (MSDS).
MMDD Shall
Maximum Modified Dry Density. Is indicative of a mandatory requirement unless
NATA the context clearly indicates otherwise.
National Association of Testing Authorities. Shoulder
NLC The layer of material immediately above the sub
Northern Land Council. base or subgrade and adjacent of the pavement.
NTCP/NTCOP Stop Berm
NT Code of Practice – located in NTMTM. An independent blockage of a table drain or a
diversion of flow into a culvert.
NTMTM
Sub-Base
Northern Territory Materials Testing Manual.
One or more layers of material placed over the
http://www.nt.gov.au/infrastructure/publications/m subgrade and below the basecourse and
aterialstesting/index.shtml shoulders.
NTTM Subgrade
Northern Territory Test Methods – located in Top 150 mm of material below subgrade surface.
NTMTM.
Subgrade Surface
Pavement
The prepared surface immediately beneath the
The portion of a road constructed for the structural pavement and shoulder layers.
support of, and to form the running surface, for
traffic.

Page 8
Surface Formation 1.7 PROTECTION OF CULTURALLY AND

The formation of a road from material generally HISTORICALLY SIGNIFICANT ITEMS
cut from the table drains. Specification Reference
Table Drain Block Refer to the Northern Territory Government
A block constructed in a table drain to divert water Standard Specification for Environmental
into an offlet drain. Management and to the RFT.
TCD Safeguard sacred Aboriginal relics and places, as
Traffic Control Diagram. defined by the Sacred Sites Act, within the road
reserve. Where there is uncertainty as to the
TMP
existence of sacred sites or relics, seek
Traffic Management Plan. confirmation from the Aboriginal Areas Protection
URL Authority (AAPA).
Uniform Resource Locator – an internet web Safeguard any heritage assets including trees, as
address. defined by the NT Heritage Conservation Act,
Waste Disposal (waste, rubbish, surplus items, which may be affected by the works.
surplus material). Comply with conditions included in any Aboriginal
Other material is to be removed and disposed of Areas Protection Authority (AAPA) clearances or
in compliance with the Waste Management and approvals applying to the site of the works.
Pollution Control Act. These other materials are to Observe the restrictions imposed by any
be disposed of in approved waste disposal sites Restricted Works Areas conditions applying to the
or facilities. site of the works.
Weeds Ensure all personnel working on site, including
sub-contractors, are aware of any areas affected
Weeds include both declared and non-declared
by these conditions.
species.
Ensure all personnel working on site, including
Declared weeds are plant species declared under
sub-contractors, comply with the requirements
the Weeds Management Act. Land managers
outlined in this clause.
have a legal obligation to manage these species.
Notify the Superintendent immediately if any items
Non-declared weeds are plant species which may
are found which are suspected of being items of
represent a hazard to the public, impact road
significance in terms of this clause. Protect the
reserve assets or affect the aesthetics of a
items and the area surrounding where they were
landscaped area. These plants can be exotic or
found. Do not carry out any works in the area
native in origin. Non-declared weeds and their
surrounding where the items were found.
appropriate management methods will be
identified by superintendent as part of the The Superintendent will advise the Contractor
contract. what actions are to be taken and when work may
resume in the affected areas.
WHS
Work Health and Safety. Also can be a reference 1.8 ESTABLISHMENT
to the NT Work Health and Safety (National 1.8.1 General
Uniform Legislation) Act and its Regulations and Allow in the tender for establishment on site,
their companion Codes of Practice (NT and including, but not necessarily limited to, the
Commonwealth). following:
Witness Point Mobilisation
Give the Superintendent sufficient prior notice, in Transportation to and establishment on site,
writing, of an action so that that part of the works including all ongoing costs, of all the requirements
may be inspected. to complete that stage of the work. Mobilisation
WMB will not be paid for work within 40 km of the
Weeds Management Branch, a division of DLRM. regional post office. Refer to the Mobilisation
diagram in MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT or
You and Your
determined by regional requirements.
Indicative of the Contractor, any Sub-Contractor
(If applicable) Refer to Project Specific
engaged to provide services under this contract,
Requirements section of Request for Tender.
and any personnel engaged by either to provide
services under this contract. Demobilisation
Removal and transportation from site of all
temporary and construction facilities and
equipment. Restoration of the site, on Practical
Completion of the works, compatible with
environs.
Page 9
1.8.2 Camp Site/Compound/Workshop – - Vehicle license to carry explosives.

Hold Point - Shot Firer’s certificate.
Hold Point - Obtain written permission from the Inspect and record the condition of all structures
owner or lessee of the land. Provide a copy to the and services subject to possible effect by use of
Superintendent. explosives before and after blasting operations.
Pay all costs associated with the use of the
1.12 MATERIAL EXTRACTION AREAS AND
site(s).
WATER SOURCES – HOLD POINT
Refer to the Department of Health-Environment
Specification Reference
Health Fact Sheet No.700 Requirements for
Mining and Construction Projects for camp site Refer to the Northern Territory Government
requirements. It is available online at Standard Specification for Environmental
http://www.health.nt.gov.au/Environmental_Health Management and to the RFT.
/Health_Risk_Assessment/index.aspx Material Extraction Areas adjacent to the works
Maintain all facilities in good condition. will be allowed provided that all the clearances
and approvals listed in the Approvals For Material
Remove all facilities, unless otherwise agreed in
Extraction Areas clause in the Standard
writing with owner or lessee of land, and restore
Specification for Environmental Management are
the site to a clean and tidy condition upon
obtained.
completion of the works.
Hold point – Provide copies of clearances and
Assume all responsibility for any current and
approvals to the Superintendent before
consequential damage caused to the site as a
commencing works.
result of occupation. Rehabilitate site similar to
site conditions prior to disturbance. Material Extraction Areas will not be permitted
within 125 m of the road centreline unless
Refer to Acts, Regulations And Codes Applicable
otherwise agreed upon by the Superintendent.
To The Works And Authorities With Jurisdiction
Over The Works table in the REFERENCED 1.12.1 Administration
DOCUMENTS section. Take responsibility for locating, selecting,
operating and rehabilitating all Material Extraction
1.9 TIME LIMIT FOR ATTENDANCE
Areas and water sources.
Unless otherwise specified, the works must be
Determine any constraints on the use of potential
attended within the following time limits:
Material Extraction Areas and water sources,
− Generally the work must be attended including sites of significance, environmental and
within 3 working days of notification. salinity etc.
− For urgent call outs within and outside of 1.12.2 Crushing or Screening – Witness Point
normal working hours the Contractor must The crushing or screening plant to be used on the
be mobilised within 2 hours of notification. project subject to this contract must be certified as
− For priority works, which involve health, fit for use by a competent person.
safety and security, the Contractor must The certification of fitness for use must have been
be mobilised within 6 working hours of issued not more than one year prior to the date of
notification. the scheduled completion of the works plus one
1.10 EVIDENCE OF UNSCHEDULED calendar month.
WORKS A competent person is defined in the NT Work
When requested by the Superintendent the Safe Bulletin 09.01.16 Competent Persons for
Contractor will provide evidence for any Inspection and Maintenance of Plant.
unscheduled works. Witness Point – Provide documentary evidence
The requirement for evidence shall include the of the certification that the plant is fit for use
provision of certified copies of the following: issued by a competent person.
- Material invoices Provide documentary evidence of that person’s
- Specialist sub-contractor invoices skills and qualifications which indicate their
- Time sheets, time records, vehicle log competence as defined in the NT Work Safe
books and photos. Bulletin cited above.
The provision of satisfactory evidence is a This evidence is to be provided within 2 weeks of
prerequisite to Payment for the work and the award of the contract.
percentage on-cost. 1.12.3 Operation of Material Extraction Area
1.11 EXPLOSIVES - HOLD POINT ACCESS
Hold Point - Provide evidence of the following Mark out with flags or other clear markings both
requirements of NT Worksafe: proposed access route to Material Extraction Area
- License to carry and store explosives.
Page 10
and boundaries of Material Extraction Areas or 1.12.4 Rehabilitation of Material Extraction

proposed Material Extraction Areas. Areas
Obtain approval from Superintendent before Rehabilitate existing pits, or progressively
commencing extraction or track construction rehabilitate new pits:
works. − Backfill all test pits.
Construct only one access road to each pit. − Respread unused material and rip 0.5 m deep
Confine all transport operations to the access at 3 m spacing along the contours.
road.
− Remove and dispose of all rubbish and debris
Provide and maintain adequate road drainage. in approved disposal sites.
Provide and maintain erosion and sedimentation − Replace stockpiled topsoil and cleared
controls to the access track and the Material vegetation uniformly over the extraction area.
Extraction Areas.
− Batter walls at three horizontal to one vertical
EXTRACTION where excavation is less than 1 m depth, and
Strip 100 mm minimum depth top layer throughout six horizontal to one vertical where depth
the area of operation. exceeds 1 m.
Stockpile stripped material clear of drainage to a − Rehabilitate the access road.
maximum height of 1.5 m. − Repair any erosion damage to the site.
Side slopes of sand or gravel to be not steeper Rehabilitate the site to prevent future erosion
than one vertical to two horizontal at any time and sedimentation issues.
when the excavation is unattended. Refer to PROJECT SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS
By-products of the excavation operations to be section of Request for Tender.
removed or buried unless otherwise required. 1.12.5 Stream Sites
Stabilise stockpiles to prevent erosion by using, Contact the EPA or Environmental Services prior
for example, systems such as silt fences. For to conducting any work in a stream site.
longer term stockpiles grassing and battering to
1:4 as well as silt fences are options. EXCAVATION LIMITS
LIMIT OF EXCAVATION − Not within 200 m upstream or downstream of
any road structure, pipeline or gauging station.
− Not within 6 m of any fence line or utility
service. − Not in a manner liable to cause erosion or
further disturbance to the watercourse.
− Not within sight of road traffic.
− Not within 15 m of the trunk of a tree and not
− Not within 125 m of any road or railway centre under the branches of any tree.
line.
CONDITIONS
− For waterways: Refer to the Department of
Land Resource Management web page titled − Leave sizeable islands to ensure groupings of
Land Clearing for the procedures and trees that will withstand stream bed erosion.
processes to be followed. The URL is: − Maximum batter slope: Two horizontal to one
http://www.lrm.nt.gov.au/land-clearing. vertical.
− Maximum area: 1 ha. Align the long side with 1.12.6 Inspection
the contour. Allow authorised personnel from the EPA to enter
− Maximum width: 50 m. the site at any time.
− Maximum depth: 2 m. 1.12.7 Records
− Leave natural vegetation buffer strips 25 m Provide the following details on completion:
width between pits. − List of areas used.
− Do not dump or stockpile any material in these − Chainages of area along the public road.
25 m buffer strips, − Direction and length of haul road.
− Stockpile cleared vegetation and subsequently − Approximate volume of material removed from
spread over the surface of the extraction area. each site.
Existing pits within 125 m of a public road may be Provide suitable forms for such records to the
used provided: Superintendent.
− No significant revegetation exists, 1.12.8 Water Extraction
− Extension proceeds away from the road, Comply with DLRM requirements for water
− Site is rehabilitated after use. extraction as they relate to road construction and
maintenance.

Page 11
On completion of the works advise the from stockpile sites at conclusion of work. For
Superintendent the total volume of water rural work, prepare unused aggregate into one
extracted. neat and tidy stockpile, per aggregate size.
Take measures to minimise erosion, Construct stockpiles at least 1 m high and batter
sedimentation, site disturbance and damage sides 1V: 1.5H.
caused by the extraction and transportation of the
Trim neatly to facilitate measurement.
water. Install appropriate temporary control
devices or systems. Neatly stockpile all waste materials from the
screening process.
Rehabilitate disturbed or damaged areas.
1.14 PLANT AND EQUIPMENT
1.13 STOCKPILES
Refer to the Northern Territory Government
Standard Specification for Environmental
Management and to the RFT.
1.14.1 General
Stockpiles are to be located in previously cleared
areas. Do not clean spray bars or other contaminated
equipment on the work site.
If no clear area is available within a reasonable
distance from the work site obtain approval from Clean plant and equipment in a location and in a
the Superintendent prior to clearing a new area. manner which prevents pollution of the
surrounding environment.
The stockpile is to be located within the
boundaries of the site of the works. Clean plant and equipment before it is brought on
to the site and immediately before it leaves the
Construct gravel foundation for stockpiles with
site to make it pest and weed free.
100 mm compacted thickness. Trim and compact
to 95% relative compaction. Plant and equipment is to be inspected and
maintained as necessary during the course of the
Do not create a stockpile within;
works. Emissions and fluid leaks are to be
− An environmentally sensitive area. minimized by ensuring plant and equipment are
− A vegetated area without prior approval for well maintained, in good repair and in good
clearing as stated above. working order.
− On a flood plain. 1.14.2 Mobile Plant Machinery - Broadband
Alarm
− For waterways: Refer to the Department of
Land Resource Management web page titled Standards
Land Clearing for the procedures and AS 4742: Machine-mounted forward and reverse
processes to be followed. The URL is: audible warning alarm (withdrawn)
http://www.lrm.nt.gov.au/land-clearing. ISO 9533: Earth-moving machinery - Machine-
− Where it will affect a site with cultural or mounted audible travel alarms and forward horns
heritage significance. - Test methods and performance criteria
− Within 5m of the boundary of the cleared area. Definitions
Cover stockpiles with plastic sheet or other Broadband alarm: Pulsed acoustic signal that
appropriate materials to prevent pre-coat, fines comprises a range of frequencies and sometimes
and dust from being released in to the referred to as quacker, woosher, non-tonal
environment during rain or wind events. reversing beepers or white sound.
Stockpiles in urban areas are not permitted. Broadband/White-Sound Alarm Requirement:
Provide a separate site for each aggregate size. Broadband Alarms (White Sound) must be fitted
Allow 15 m between adjacent sites. to all construction vehicles and mobile plant
before commencement of works.
Ensure sites are well drained and on hard ground. Ensure that installation and operations of the
Avoid contamination by dust. alarm/warning systems are sufficient before
Maintain access roads and stockpile sites. commencement of works, including, but not
limited to:
Avoid sites under trees, telephone lines, overhead
transmission lines or where overhead clearance is - All alarms clearly audible above the noise
less than 6 m. level of the machinery or vehicles.
- Alarms are automatically activated when
Remove from site any non-conforming aggregate. reverse gear is selected in the vehicle to
For work in or close to regional centres, towns which it is fitted, or when the machine to
and urban areas, remove all unused aggregate
Page 12
which the alarm is fitted is switched on and is - any site safety rules, with the detail of
in use. arrangements for ensuring that all persons
- Directional nature of the broadband alarm is at the site, whether employees, contractors,
appropriate for works. suppliers or visitors, are informed of the
rules;
1.15 WORK HEALTH AND SAFETY
- the hazard identification, risk assessment
Comply with Work Health and Safety (NUL) Act
and risk control information for all work
and Regulations and applicable Codes of
activities assessed as having safety risks;
Practice.
and
1.15.1 Safety Officer – Witness Point
- The safe work method statements for all
Witness point - Appoint a Safety Officer and high-risk construction work.
notify the Superintendent of the officer’s name.
1.15.3 Work Involving Chemicals
Ensure the Safety Officer is capable and available
at all times as required by the Standards.
and Regulations.
The Superintendent retains the right to revoke the
SDS documentation for chemicals used during the
appointment of the Safety Officer at any time, and
works must be held on site at all times during the
direct that another person be appointed.
works.
1.15.2 Work Health and Safety Management
Spill clean-up equipment and materials,
Plan - Hold point
appropriate for the type and quantities of
Hold point - If the Act requires it, provide a copy chemicals used on site, must be kept on site at all
of the site specific Work Health and Safety times during the works. They must be kept in a
Management Plan before commencing work. readily accessible location. The equipment and
Comply with the Work Health and Safety (National materials must be maintained and replenished as
Uniform Legislation) Act and Regulations and any needed.
applicable Codes of Practice. Staff trained in the use of the spill clean-up
A person with control of a construction project, equipment and materials must be on site at all
irrespective of monetary value of the contract, times during the works.
where five or more persons are working, or are Report all chemical spills to the Superintendent.
likely to be working simultaneously on a
Where appropriate, also report spills to the NT
construction site must ensure that:
Pollution Hotline, phone 1800 064 567.
- a site-specific Work Health and Safety
Chemicals include, but are not limited to, paints,
Management Plan is prepared before the
fuels, oils, herbicides, pesticides, tars, lubricants,
work commences; and
cleaning products (domestic and industrial types),
- The plan is monitored, maintained and kept inks, dyes, toners, fertilizers etc.
up to date during the course of the work.
1.16 FENCING AND SHORING OF OPEN
The person with control of the construction project
EXCAVATIONS
must ensure that the Work Health and Safety
Management Plan includes but not limited to: Comply with Work Health and Safety (NUL) Act
and Regulations.
- a statement of responsibilities, listing the
names, positions and responsibilities of all Design, construct and maintain the excavation
persons who will have specific and shoring in a safe and satisfactory condition.
responsibilities on the site for Work Health Support trenches in saturated or unstable ground
and Safety; with close timbered shoring or similar.
- the detail of arrangements for ensuring Ensure fencing and access / egress requirements
compliance with the Work Health and are identified and implemented to comply with
Safety induction training requirements of Workplace Health & Safety (NUL) Act and
this national standard; Regulations.
- the detail of arrangements for the co- 1.17 WORK ON RAILWAY SITES – HOLD
ordination of health and safety issues of POINT
persons engaged to undertake construction
work;
and Regulations.
- the detail of arrangements for managing
Carry out work within railway sites to the approval
Work Health and Safety incidents when
of the owner and operator of the railway.
they occur, including the identities of and
contact details of all persons who will be The Contractor must comply with all requirements,
available to prevent, prepare for, respond to conditions and directions of the owners and
and manage recovery from such incidents; operators of the Railway pursuant to the Northern
Territory Rail Safety Act when carrying out work

Page 13
under the Contract within 100 metres of the Infrastructure (DoI) Road Information
Railway. Management System (RIMS) data sheets.
Obtain any approvals or licences required for such Verify the accurate locations of all work performed
work. under the Contract to enable the Government
Comply with the terms of any current existing Asset Management Database to be updated.
interface agreement for work within the railway 1.19.1 Road Asset Information
sites. The Superintendent will provide a current Road
Procure railway track possession, railway track Information Management System (RIMS) data
isolation and access to railway land necessary for sheet listing when the Contract is awarded and
the construction of the works. provide regular updates, as required, throughout
Provide documentation detailing all interfaces the Contract.
between the works under the Contract and the The data sheet listing will include the following;
Railway or Railway land. The Contractor must − Each road under the Contract,
fully comply with the terms of the plan.
− The respective identification number,
The contractor indemnifies in the Principal in
respect of any claim made by or liability to any − The respective Permanent Reference Points
person arising out of: (PRPs) and chainages.
- The performance of work on, over or near Work will be located by reference to the
the Railway, and information contained on the data sheet listings.
- The procurement or utilisation of a Railway 1.20 CONSTRUCTION INDUSTRY WHITE
track possession or track isolation CARD
(including any postponement, improper use All workers on site are to have completed
or delay in relinquishing them). “General Safety Induction Training for the
Give 14 days written notice to the owner and Construction Industry” (CPCCOHS1001A) and
operator of intent to commence work and provide hold a valid current NT White Card issued in their
a work plan showing safe working conditions for name by NT WorkSafe.
the site. Site specific and Task specific induction training is
Hold Point - Do not commence work until the still required for all work sites and is to be
work plan has been approved by the owner and provided by the employer.
operator of the rail system. Provide copies of the
1.21 AREAS FOR VEHICLE AND PLANT
work plan and of the approval to carry out the
MOVEMENT AND PARKING
works to the Superintendent.
Restrict vehicle and plant movement, turning and
If work is required to be carried out within 3 m of
parking to the area of the works or to previously
the actual rail line, this work must be co-ordinated
sealed, cleared or disturbed areas not within the
through the Superintendent.
area of the works.
1.18 WORK IN THE VICINITY OF TRAFFIC If no suitable previously sealed, cleared or
COUNTING STATIONS – HOLD POINT disturbed area is available obtain
Hold Point - Prior to commencing any excavation, Superintendent’s approval prior to clearing or
boring of holes, blasting, rock breaking, soil disturbing any area for these purposes.
compaction or similar activity in the vicinity of Rehabilitate any area newly cleared or disturbed
traffic counter station detector loops, obtain the for these purposes at the completion of the works.
location of the cables.
Protect the areas cleared or disturbed and
This information is available from Department of adjacent areas against erosion and
Transport, Transport Infrastructure Planning sedimentation.
Division, contact 8924 7531.
1.22 PROJECT NOTICE BOARDS-SUPPLY,
Follow all directions and instructions issued by the
ERECT AND MAINTAIN PROJECT NOTICE
Transport Infrastructure Planning Division in
BOARDS
relation to work in the vicinity of such cables.
Confirm if project notice board is required. If
1.19 DISTANCE MEASURING EQUIPMENT required allow to supply and install a notice
Install distance measuring equipment with a digital board/project sign in accordance with the NTG
display capable of measuring to one metre, in all standard drawings, wording and image to be
relevant work and supervisory vehicles within 4 supplied.
weeks of the Contract being awarded.
Ensure that the measurement of kilometres is
consistent with the Permanent Reference Points
(PRPs) taken from the Department of

Page 14
1.23 ASBESTOS Negotiated Rate

Comply with the requirements of NT WorkSafe Where a type of works is described but does not
and the Work Health and Safety (N.U.L) Act and appear in the Schedule of Rates or is not defined
Regulations. Refer to the Code of Practice – How in the Specification and not included in the
to Safely Remove Asbestos and the Code of Schedule Of Rates items, a rate shall be
Practice - How to Manage and Control Asbestos negotiated to cover the works required.
in the Work Place. The item of works may then be included in the
1.24 CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITY Schedule Of Rates at the Superintendent’s
AND SUBMISSIONS discretion.
1.24.1 Warranties – Witness Point 1.27 DIVING WORK
Witness Point - Provide the standard 1.27.1 General
manufacturer’s warranty. Name the Principal as
Comply with the Work Health and Safety (NUL)
the warrantee.
Act and Regulations.
Contractors to submit details of warranties
outlining the responsibilities of the manufacturers Comply with ADAS Operation Manual or DRDC
and contractors for the period of warranty. (formerly DCIEM) Diving Manual or NOAA Diving
Manual.
1.24.2 Contractor’s Environmental
Management Plan (CEMP) – Witness 1.27.2 Standards
Point
AS/NZS 2299 Occupational diving operations
Witness Point - Submit details of procedures to
protect the environment. Refer to the Standard AS/NZS 2299.1 Standard operational practice
Specification for Environmental Management. AS/NZS 2299.2 Scientific diving
Submission of a Contractor’s Environmental
Management Plan (CEMP) may be required. AS 2815 Training and certification of occupational
1.24.3 Inspection Test Plans (ITPs) – Witness divers
Point AS 2815.1 Occupational SCUBA diver – Standard
Witness Point - Submit ITPs detailing all AS/NZS 2815.2 Surface supplied diving to 30 m
procedures and test plans to be undertaken.
1.24.4 Project Control Plan (PCP) – Witness AS 2815.3 Air diving to 50 m
Point AS 2815.4 Bell diving
Witness Point - Submit a project control plan for
AS 2815.5 Dive supervisor
the project which sets out in detail all control
procedures for the project. A framework Project 1.27.3 Definitions
Control Plan document is available at DOI
ADAS Australian Diver Accreditation
Specification Services webpage:
Scheme
x.shtml. DRDC Defense Research and
This document is to be prepared by the Contractor Development Canada
and not a third party. NOAA National Oceanic and
1.25 URGENT WORKS ATTENDANCE Atmospheric Administration (USA)
The contractor may be required to respond to WHS(NUL) Work Health and Safety (National
urgent works that are outside the standard Uniform Legislation)
maintenance service level.
1.27.4 Diver Qualifications
1.26 OFFICER AND VEHICLE
Provide evidence of competency for all personnel
The contractor may be required to supply a undertaking diving work (general occupational
suitably qualified and competent person diving or high risk diving as applicable). Minimum
acceptable to the Superintendent to perform other competencies required are the competencies
works associated with the contract, including road required by ADAS deemed by ADAS to be
inspections, responses to reports and emergency appropriate for the works to be undertaken. Refer
requests. to AS 2815 (set).
The Contractor shall equip that person with a
suitable vehicle, mobile communication, and all
necessary equipment to attend the request.

Page 15
1.27.5 Dive Safety Log 1.27.10 Response if a crocodile is spotted

Maintain and provide Dive Safety Log (in Ensure or personnel move to a safe place.
accordance with Regulation 180, of the
Contact the Crocodile Management Unit of the
WHS(NUL) Regulations). To be provided for
Parks and Wildlife Service
review on request and at completion of works.
Refer to AS/NZS 2299 (set). - Darwin All hours 0419 822 859 or
0401 118 776 or Office hours 8999 4691
1.27.6 Dive Plan
- Katherine All hours 0407 958 405 or
Submit a Dive Plan (in accordance with Office hours 8973 8849
Regulation 178, of the WHS(NUL) Regulations).
To be submitted after contract award and at least If safe and practical to do so, monitor the
14 days prior to commencement of diving works. movement of the crocodile(s) so that the
Refer to AS/NZS 2299 (set). personnel from the Crocodile Management Unit
can be told of the crocodiles last known location.
The Dive Plan is to include:
1.28 OTHER REQUIREMENTS
- the method of carrying out the diving work
(If applicable) Refer to PROJECT SPECIFIC
to which it relates;
REQUIREMENTS section of Request for Tender.
- the tasks and duties of each person
involved in the dive;
- the diving equipment, breathing gases
and procedures to be used in the dive;
- as applicable, dive times, bottom times
and decompression profiles;
- hazards relating to the dive and measures
to be implemented in the control of risks
associated with those hazards;
- emergency procedures.
1.27.7 Crocodile Hazard Management
Provide a Crocodile Hazard Management Plan
where diving work is to occur in waters known to
have, or suspected of having, crocodiles. The plan
can include, but not be limited to;
- Having spotters at water level and on a
bridge
- Minimizing movement of vessels once
diving work commences to reduce risk of
attracting crocodiles
- Establishing a communication plan and
having a communications system or
methodology in place so that all parties
conducting the activity can communicate
with each other
1.27.8 Dive Cage
Diving work in waters known to have, or
suspected of having, crocodiles is to be carried
out by divers who are protected by a dive cage.
This dive cage should be engineered for the task
and can be mounted to either a service barge or
other watercraft or lowered from a bridge,
depending on the task environment.
1.27.9 Crocodile Net
If a crocodile net is the only viable option provide
details of the construction of the net and its
support systems and provide details of the risk
management plan which will be in place during
use of the net.

Page 16
PROVISION FOR TRAFFIC
2. PROVISION FOR TRAFFIC 2.3 DEFINITIONS

Long term
Applies when traffic guidance is required to
operate for more than one shift, irrespective of
whether it is day or night.
Short term
Applies when work is started and completed in
one shift and the road is returned to normal
conditions by the end of that shift.
Traffic Controller
The person responsible for the control of traffic on
2.1 GENERAL public roads utilising a stop-slow bat.
Minimise obstruction and inconvenience to the 2.4 WORKZONE TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT
public. 2.4.1 Traffic Management Personnel
Ensure public safety is accommodated at all work
sites. All personnel engaged in the works must have a
current valid NT Construction Induction White
A traffic escort vehicle is required for all resealing
Card, or equivalent qualification recognised by
works.
WorkSafe NT. Evidence must be available on site
Assume responsibility for the safe conduct of in the form of a card.
traffic through, past or around the works, 24 hours
a day, from possession of the site to completion of Only persons qualified in nationally accredited
all works, defects liability period (if any) and units of competency in WorkZone Traffic
handover. Management can be utilised for traffic
management at worksites. The four levels of
Comply with the Acts, Regulations, Codes and
accreditation are:
Guidelines applicable to the works. Comply with
the requirements of Authorities which have − Workzone Traffic Supervisor (WZ3)
jurisdiction over the works or the sites of the − Workzone Traffic Controller (WZ2)
works.
− Workzone Traffic Management Plan Designer
Comply with the Work Health and Safety (NUL) (WZ1)
Act and Regulations.
− Escort mobile road marking operations (WZ 4)
2.2 STANDARDS
The Superintendent may grant approval for the
Conform to the current editions of the following use of a “Trainee Traffic Controller” within the
Standards and Publications unless specified work site. Such approval will only be considered
otherwise: AS 1742.3 Manual of uniform traffic after submission of a written request. A Trainee
control devices - Traffic control devices for works Traffic Controller cannot commence work until
on roads. such approval has been granted and received in
AS 1742.9 Manual of uniform traffic control writing.
devices – Bicycle facilities 2.4.2 Trainee Traffic Controller
AS 1742.10 Manual of uniform traffic control A Trainee Traffic Controller must meet all of the
devices – Pedestrian control and following criteria:
protection
− be an employee of the Traffic Control Provider,
AS/NZS 1906.1 Retroreflective materials − hold a valid current Australian motor vehicle
AS/NZS 3845.1Road safety barrier systems driver’s licence,
AS 4191 Portable traffic signals − be registered with a Northern Territory

Registered Training Organisation (NT RTO) to
AS/NZS ISO 3100 Risk management undertake the RII09 Resources and
Infrastructure Industry Training Package unit of
NTTM NT Test Methods.
competency “RIIWHS205D Control Traffic with
NTMTM NT Materials Testing Manual. a STOP/SLOW Bat” (or the replacement unit of
competency if and when applicable),
AUSTROADS Guide to Road Design
− only work under the direct supervision of a
AUSTROADS Guide to Bridge Technology Controller (WZ2) ,
NT WorkSafe All Relevant Bulletins − have commenced training to become a
qualified Controller (WZ2) and complete all
Page 17
assessments of competency within 8 weeks of − hold a valid current Australian motor vehicle
registration. driver’s licence, and either
The direct supervision of a Trainee Traffic − successful completion of RII09 Resources and
Controller is defined as the constant personal Infrastructure Industry Training Package unit of
oversight of the work by a Workzone Traffic competency “RIICWD503D Prepare Workzone
Controller (WZ2). Traffic Management Plans” (or the
2.4.3 WorkZone Traffic Controller (WZ2) replacement unit of competency if and when
applicable) training course through an Northern
The following prerequisites must be met to enable Territory Registered Training Organisation, or
NT accreditation as a Traffic Controller (WZ2):
- successful completion of the RII09 Resources
− hold a valid current Australian motor vehicle and Infrastructure Industry Training Package
driver’s licence, and either unit of competency “RIICWD503D Prepare
− successful completion of the RII09 Resources Workzone Traffic Management Plans” (or the
and Infrastructure Industry Training Package replacement unit of competency if and when
unit of competency “RIIWHS205D Control applicable) training course through a
Traffic with a STOP/SLOW Bat” (or the Registered Training Organisation from another
replacement unit of competency if and when State or Territory AND successfully completed
applicable) training course through an Northern a bridging course through a Northern Territory
Territory Registered Training Organisation, or Registered Training Organisation in the above
unit of competency.
− successful completion of the RII09 Resources
and Infrastructure Industry Training Package 2.4.6 Escort Mobile Road Marking
unit of competency “RIIWHS205D Control Operations (WZ 4)
Traffic with a STOP/SLOW Bat” (or the The following pre requisites must be met to
replacement unit of competency if and when enable Northern Territory accreditation as an
applicable) training course through a Escort mobile road marking operations (WZ 4):
Registered Training Organisation from another − hold a valid current Australian motor vehicle
State or Territory AND successfully completed − driver’s licence, and either
a bridging course through a Northern Territory − successful completion of the RII09
Registered Training Organisation in the above Resources and Infrastructure Industry
unit of competency. Training Package unit of competency
2.4.4 WorkZone Traffic Supervisor (WZ3) “RIICRM201D Escort mobile road marking
operations” (or the replacement unit of
The following prerequisites must be met to enable
competency if and when applicable) training
NT accreditation as a Traffic Supervisor (WZ3):
course through a Northern Territory
− hold a valid current Australian motor vehicle Registered Training Organisation, or
driver’s licence, and either − successful completion of the RII09 Resources
− successful completion of the RII09 Resources and Infrastructure Industry Training Package
and Infrastructure Industry Training Package unit of competency “RIICRM201D Escort
unit of competency “RIIWHS302D Implement mobile road marking operations” (or the
Traffic Management Plan” (or the replacement replacement unit of competency if and when
unit of competency if and when applicable) applicable) training course through a
training course through an Northern Territory Registered Training Organisation from
Registered Training Organisation, or another State or Territory AND successfully
completed a bridging course through a
− successful completion of the RII09 Resources Northern Territory Registered Training
and Infrastructure Industry Training Package Organisation in the above unit of competency.
unit of competency “RIIWHS302D Implement
Traffic Management Plan” (or the replacement 2.4.7 Traffic Escort Vehicle – Resealing
unit of competency if and when applicable) Works
training course through a Registered Training Provide a traffic escort vehicle for all work sites
Organisation from another State or Territory where resealing works are undertaken under the
AND successfully completed a bridging course contract. The vehicle must have, as a minimum,
through a Northern Territory Registered one rotating beacon light. The escort vehicle is to
Training Organisation in the above unit of be the lead vehicle for traffic permitted to pass
competency. through the work site at the direction of the traffic
2.4.5 WorkZone Traffic Management Plan control personnel. The escort vehicle is to control
Designer (WZ1) the speed of the traffic to ensure safety of road
works personnel. The driver of the escort vehicle
The following prerequisites must be met to enable is to have adequate skills and knowledge to be
NT accreditation as a Traffic Management Plan able to maintain safety of the public and of the
Designer (WZ1): roadworks personnel.
Page 18
2.4.8 NT Accreditation in WorkZone Traffic 2.5.3 Works on Roads

Management − Project scope inclusive of works to be
NT accreditation is provided by the following undertaken, staging of works, duration of
process: works (work hours)
− Existing Traffic and Speed environment
− Completion of training course (or courses) as
outlined above, − Roles and Responsibilities
− Obtain WorkZone Traffic Management ID − Traffic Management Responsibility Hierarchy
Card from NT Motor Vehicle Registry. − Project Representatives
2.5 TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT PLAN (TMP) − Traffic Management Administration
Standard: To AS 1742.3 Traffic control for works 2.5.4 Statutory Requirements
on roads. − Work Health and Safety (NUL) Act and
Provide a Traffic Management Plan and Generic Regulations
Traffic Control Diagrams of a complex and − Provide details on the TMP of responsibilities
noncomplex nature per activity as required for the and authorities of all key personnel on the
scheduled works. project including project manager, line
2.5.1 Traffic Management Plan – Hold Point managers (site engineers, supervisors etc.),
Hold Point – Submit the Traffic Management contractors and workers, safety personnel and
Plan, with the Traffic Control Diagrams prior to traffic management personnel
commencing the works. − Requirements of personal protective
Provide specific or generic Traffic Control equipment, plant and equipment
Diagrams (TCD) per activity as required and/or as − Procedures for incidents or accidents
specified.
2.5.5 Monitoring and Measurement
The Traffic Management Plan (TMP) is required to
− Site Inspections and Record Keeping
be designed by a Northern Territory accredited
Traffic Management Plan Designer. Include the − TMP Auditing
details of the TMP Designer’s name, accreditation − Public Feedback
number and date of expiry of accreditation on the
− References
TMP.
2.5.6 Management Review
Design the TMP in conformance with the
requirements of AS 1742 – ‘Manual of uniform − TMP Review and Improvement
traffic control devices Part 3: Traffic control for − Variations to Standards and Plans
works on roads’. Produce the plan by electronic
− Attention to hazards for non-motorised road
means and submit electronically to the
users
Superintendent.
2.5.7 Planning
Include sufficient details on the TMP to explain the
potential hazards, the assessed risks and the − Risk Identification and Assessment –
proposed treatments for the proposed work Critical element to identify and assess
activities and work site which may include some foreseeable potential hazards associated
or all of the following: with the work activities and work site
2.5.2 Project Information − Legal and Other Requirements –
Confirmation of use of up-to-date
− Purpose and Scope
information and legislation
− Project Location
− Traffic Assessment (Vehicular Traffic)
− Site Constraints/Impacts − Volume and Composition
− Traffic Management Objectives and Strategies − Existing and Proposed Speed Zones
− Principal for the Works; Principal − Intersection Capacity
Contractor/Design Consultant including contact − Existing Parking Facilities
details − High Wide Loads
− Public Transport
− Responsibilities including role responsibility
Special Events and Other Works
and authority of key personnel, management
Non-motorised Road Users
hierarchy including site representatives and
contact details of the responsible personnel − Cyclists and Pedestrians
− People with Disabilities
− Prior approvals (if any) granted by the Road − School Crossings
Authority with relevant reference number. Site Assessment
− Access to Adjoining Properties
− Environmental Conditions
Page 19
− Impact on Adjoining Road Network − The correctness and currency of accreditation

Works Programming of all personnel associated with traffic
− Work Sequence management at the work site.
− Night Works Where the Auditing Officer deems modifications to
− Emergency Planning Traffic Management are required for reasons of
− Consultation and Communication public safety or safety on the work site, an
Approvals Instruction to Contractor (ITC) will be issued
− Road, Utility and Service Authorities requesting immediate correction. If modifications
− Public Notification are deemed necessary but not urgent, corrections
− Notification to Other Agencies are to be made at the earliest practicable
2.5.8 Implementation opportunity.
2.6.1 Non Compliance
− Hazard Identification, Risk Assessment and
Control Where personnel associated with traffic
− Traffic Control Diagrams management at work sites are found not to have
− Traffic Control Devices current accreditation to an appropriate level in
− Signs WorkZone Traffic Management, the
Superintendent may direct the Contractor to
− Pavement Markings
cease work, make the site safe, and withdraw
− Variable Message Signs
plant, equipment and personnel from the road
− Delineation
reserve.
− Temporary Speed Zones
− Emergency Arrangements 2.7 WORK IN RURAL AREAS – HOLD POINT
− Site Access Hold Point - Undertake work during daylight
− Communicating TMP Requirements hours only unless approval is given by the
2.5.9 Submission Of Traffic Control Superintendent for special circumstances.
Diagrams
2.8 WORK IN BUILT UP AREAS
Provide specific or generic Traffic Control
2.8.1 Working Times – Hold Point
Diagrams (TCD) per activity as required and/or as
specified. Program work, provide and install traffic
management devices/controllers, equipment,
Where a traffic management situation is not materials etc., accordingly so that traffic flows are
covered by a generic TCD, submit the specific not impeded during the following hours, from
TCD to the Superintendent 5 working days prior to Monday to Friday, excluding Public Holidays:
undertaking the required works. Submited TCDs
Table 2.1 – Restricted Work Hours In Build Up
shall, in turn, then become generic.
Areas
For Urgent Works, advise of the generic TCD or
submit the specific TCD within 2 working days. 0700 hours to 0900 hours.
Provide amended TCDs which incorporate 1530 hours to 1730 hours.

changes which have been approved by the This table is only an example of peak traffic
Superintendent on site within two working days of periods in urban areas.
the authorisation of the change Hold Point - Obtain Superintendent’s approval if
2.6 AUDITS OF WORK SITE TRAFFIC proposing to work inside these hours.
MANAGEMENT Remove or cover signs or devices as appropriate
Appropriately qualified and experienced Auditing to stop confusion during these hours. Further
Officers from DoI Road Projects may perform restrictions may apply should the DoI deem it
random audits of traffic management at work sites appropriate to do so. Concessions to work within
as part of their daily routine duties. The Auditing these hours may be approved by the
Officer will hold current NT accreditation as a Superintendent, should the need arise and the
Traffic Management Plan Designer. Project officer deems it necessary.
Officers may collect information on behalf of, and Do not operate construction vehicles used in
for forwarding to, the Auditor. conjunction with the proposed works, either SV
Audits undertaken will include verification of: plated or vehicles in excess of 19 m on public
− The Traffic Management Plan held on site roads during peak traffic times (see above,
working times) or in any way impede peak traffic
− The Traffic Control Diagram(s) held on site flow during these times. Vehicles in excess of 19
− Traffic control devices established in m in length are only permitted to travel on roads
accordance with the Traffic Control Diagram designated for road trains unless an appropriate
permit from the Motor Vehicle Registry has been
obtained in advance of using such routes.

Page 20
2.8.2 Traffic Lanes signs requirement. The signs remain the property
Maintain at least 2 lanes (one in each direction) of the Contractor.
open to traffic at all times unless permitted 2.9.2 Multi Panel Signs
otherwise on duplicated roads and maintain at The use of multi panel sign configuration for
least one lane open on two lane roads with “Traffic Controller Symbolic” & “Prepare to Stop”
appropriate traffic control in place accordingly. being mounted on one multi sign frame shall
Obtain the written permission of the conform to AS 1742.3.
Superintendent if it is necessary to fully close a
The use of the “Prepare to Stop” sign is
road.
mandatory in conjunction with the symbolic traffic
Program works so that the closure of turning lanes controller sign where traffic are required to stop at
is minimised. the controllers position, therefore DoI approves
Obtain prior written approval from the relevant making this the exception to the “No multi sign
Local Government or Council if traffic is to be rule”.
detoured onto their road network or the proposed These signs must be on the one frame either side
works affects their network/assets accordingly. by side or one above the other. The individual
Provide a copy of all relevant approvals with the signs are to be 900 mm x 600 mm minimum each
traffic management plan. when used stand alone, but may be reduced in
size on a multi panel sign frame provided that the
2.9 WARNING DEVICES
legend and / or symbol size are not reduced.
Take care when placing warning signs, work
DoI will allow a multi panel sign frame for this use
signs, traffic management devices, or plant and
only in accordance with the directions herein and
equipment within the road reserve to ensure that
those contained within AS 1742.3.
these do not interfere with or restrict sight lines,
particularly at intersections and ensure that the Mount signs on Oz Spike posts or similar, or set in
devices are not obscured by trees or other concrete in accordance with the requirement for
objects. permanent speed sign installation.
Ensure that road work signs reflect the current 2.10 NT SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR
conditions of the site. Remove or cover signs ROAD WORK SIGNS
such as T1-5 (worker symbolic), temporary speed 2.10.1 Sign erection
reductions and the like, when not appropriate,
Refer to the Definitions clause.
such as when no persons are on site. Refer to
AS 1742 for guidance on the appropriate use of Refer to Table 2.2 – Sign erection
these signs. requirements.
2.9.1 Works in Progress Signs Ensure that signs are clean, free of damage and
comprise of a minimum of Class 1 retroreflective
For proposed works which are expected to be in
material in accordance with AS/NZS 1906.1.
progress for greater than 14 days, display signs,
sized 1200 x 900mm with 100mm high black Duplicate all temporary work signs (place on both
Helvetica medium lettering on a white background sides of roads within the work site) on all multilane
displaying the following details: work sites, irrespective of the duration of the
works, unless there is insufficient room available
− The nature of the works.
to do so, such as the median width being not
− The start and end date of the works. sufficient to accommodate the signs. Where
− The Contractor’s business name. necessary, seek direction from the Superintendent
where this condition cannot be complied width.
− The Contractor’s business phone number.
2.10.2 Advance warning signs
− The Contractor’s after hours phone number.
In urban areas T1-1 (road work ahead) signs and
− The name of the Traffic Management Plan T2-16/17 (end road work) signs at short term work
supervisor. sites are not mandatory, however, they may be
Display these signs prominently at the extremities used if deemed appropriate. Use these signs at
of all works in progress and in addition to the work all long term or rural work sites.

Page 21
Table 2.2 – Sign erection requirements

Application Requirements
Long term Place all signs a minimum 1 m lateral clearance from the travelled path and a minimum of
rural areas: 1.5 m from the lower edge of the sign to the ground.
Place all signs a minimum of 2.2 m from the lower edge of the sign to the ground in
locations where they could be obscured by parked vehicles, vegetation or trees or may
Long term interfere with pedestrian routes. On traffic islands or medians the heights for signs shall
urban areas: comply with the “short term all areas” requirements where it is deemed appropriate but
only if they are not obscured by parked vehicles and if they do not interfere with pedestrian
routes.
Display all signs prominently and place a minimum of 200 mm from the lower edge of the
sign to the ground, except regulatory signs such as speed, no parking signs etc., which
Short term all shall be mounted a minimum of 1.5 m from the lower edge of the sign to the ground.
areas: Place all signs a minimum of 2.2 m from the lower edge of the sign to the ground where
they could be obscured by parked vehicles, vegetation or trees or may interfere with
pedestrian routes.
Only use T1-25 (road work on side road) signs on 2.10.5 Variable message signs (VMS)
major or arterial roads or highways where works Where major disruptions or changes to the traffic
are being conducted on a lower hierarchy road i.e. part are likely to occur, provide electronic variable
roads with lower volume or speeds that intersect message signs in the following situations a
with such a major or arterial road or highway. Do minimum of 2 days before any changes occur,
not use these signs on lower hierarchy roads that where changed conditions and or delays are to be
intersect with a major or arterial road or highway. experienced by the general public, particularly
2.10.3 Star pickets & fence droppers peak hour traffic;
Do not use star pickets for support of road work − At all approaches to intersections,
signs, bunting, flagging, fencing, etc. within 9 m of − At approaches to detours and / or,
the trafficked path. Issues of sign, bunting,
− At approaches to major works alterations.
flagging, fencing, etc. stability can be addressed
by prudent use of properly manufactured sign Erect variable message signs on all approaches 7
legs, sand bags, Oz spike posts and or fence days before “turn on” of new traffic signals.
droppers. Assume full responsibility for the safe location of
Do not use star pickets or any other non-frangible the variable message signs.
items such as steel drums, for delineation or any Use electronic variable message signs capable of
other purposes within 9 m of the edge of the displaying a minimum text size as specified in
trafficked lanes. Bollards, cones and flagging are AS 1742.3 and containing at least 3 lines with a
appropriate alternatives. minimum of 8 characters per line.
Fence droppers may be used as sign supports or The Superintendent may provide details of the
legs and bunting or flagging supports on the messages to be displayed and the locations of the
condition that that the droppers are securely variable message signs.
embedded into the ground and the sign, bunting Do not, under any circumstances, use variable
or flagging is sufficiently secured to the droppers. message signs for private advertising, within the
Maintain prudent use of end caps to ensure the NT Government road reserve or visible from the
minimisation of any hazards to workers and the NT Government road reserve without the written
public and the specified sign heights can be approval of the Superintendent.
achieved.
2.10.6 Multi Message Signs
Star pickets may be used for fencing support
Do not use multi message signs. Stand-alone
within the work site, provided appropriate action is
signs must be used.
taken to reduce any associated hazard for
workers within the site and they are not within 9 m 2.10.7 Work Zone Speed Limits - Mandatory
of the travelled path of motorists. Where work zone speed limits are being proposed
2.10.4 Non-Standard signs – Hold Point to be changed, the proposed temporary speed
limits must be approved by the Superintendent
Obtain specific approval from the Superintendent
prior to implementation of the proposed speed
before using signs not included in AS 1742.3.
limits.
Erect speed limit signs in accordance with clause
SIGN ERECTION.
Page 22
All Traffic Management Practitioners must record 2.11 EXCAVATIONS, STOCKPILES AND
in their Daily Diaries time, date, location GRADIENTS WITHIN WORK ZONES AND
photographs of each approach, of speed limit CLEAR ZONES
installations and removals for legal purpose. 2.11.1 NT WorkSafe Guideline in Relation to
These logs are required to be sent to the DoI Excavations
Permit Officer at the completion of each project or
Provide shoring to all trenching or excavations
monthly for long term projects greater than 1
which are deeper than 1.5 m and where a person
month, via the Roads Reception 8999 4699, or
is required to enter unless an engineer certifies
faxed to 8999 4682.
that shoring is not required. Provide a copy of the
2.10.8 Temporary Speed Limits – Hold Point Engineer’s certification on request.
Submit temporary speed limit authorisation Comply with the provisions of the Code of
applications to alter speed limits to the Practice for Excavation Works available from Safe
Superintendent, 2 working days prior to the Work Australia. Comply with the NT Work Safe
implementation of temporary speed limits, for Codes of Practice and Safe Work Australia Codes
approval under the Control of Roads Act. of Practice applicable to the works.
Place repeater speed limit signs along the road, 2.11.2 DoI requirements for excavations,
which has a temporary speed limit imposed, after stockpiles or other gradients
all intersections with other roads within the speed
limited area. Comply with the following DoI requirements for
excavations, stockpiles or other level change
Design the Traffic Management Plans so that
greater than 150 mm in addition to Appendix D of
speed limits lower than the following minimums
AS 1742.3:2009 Protection and delineation at
are not required.
excavation works.
Table 2.3 – Target Lowest Speed Limits
Implement the minimum protection requirements
Application Target speed
in accordance with AS 1742.3 during each work
limit not lower
day, however, if any excavations, stockpiles or
than
other steps in level change greater than 150 mm
Urban or built up areas. 40 km/h are to be left in place longer than one work shift or
are left unattended for any period of time, during
Bridge works, when restricting 40 km/h any day, overnight or weekend and adequate
traffic to one lane and only in clearance in accordance with AS 1742.3 is not
conjunction with a stop-traffic available, protect them by prudent use of
situation. A safety barrier approved road safety barriers, backfilling,
conforming to the relevant Test covering and or removing from site accordingly.
Level in accordance with
AS/NZS 3845 shall also be 2.12 TEMPORARY PAVEMENT MARKING
used. Where new pavement surfacing or existing
All other rural works. 60 km/h unless pavement resurfacing is being undertaken, install
site conditions temporary raised reflective pavement markers at
warrant a lower the end of each day and prior to the loss of
speed limit. daylight at 24 m maximum spacing.
If so instructed by the Superintendent, temporary
line marking at the end of each day may also be
2.10.9 Road Safety Barriers
required until completion of the works when the
Design, install and maintain all road safety permanent line marking is reinstated.
barriers used within the NT Government’s road
reserve in accordance with AS 1742.3, Only use temporary raised reflective pavement
AS/NZS 3845.1 and any other relevant and markers that conform to AS 1742.3, Section 3.9.
current Australian Standard associated with the For long term road construction works where
works being proposed. sealed detours merge into existing sealed
Failure to meet the requirements of the relevant pavements, or where sealed side roads merge
and current standards may result in the project into sealed detours, line mark transition areas in
being suspended by DoI or other relevant accordance with the standard drawing for Line
authorities, such as NT Work Safe, without cost to Marking CS 1520 and in accordance with
that authority until the project meets the required AS 1742, including the setting out of arrows,
safety standards. letters, numerals and chevrons.
2.12.1 Removal of Temporary Line marking
All line removal works must be carried out in such
a manner as to not endanger the health, safety or

Page 23
amenity of employees, road users or the general Table 2.4– Side Track Minimum Requirements
public. Part 1
Carry out removal of markings in such a manner
Roadway Type
as to minimise damage to pavement surfaces. Side track
Obliterate markings so as they are no longer characteristic National Secondary Local
recognisable as marking. When arrows, letters or Highway Highway Road
figures are to be removed, the removal pattern Carriageway
must be in the shape of a rectangle or square to Width
10 m 8m 6m
minimise confusion to the motorist, particularly in
wet weather and poor lighting conditions. Design Speed 80 km/h 60 km/h 40 km/h
The removed marking and the material and the Horizontal
material used to remove the marking must be Curve radius
with 3%
250 m 150 m 50 m
contained, collected and disposed of in an
superelevation
environmentally acceptable manner. Refer to DLP
Road Network Technical Directive RNDTD08-01 Vertical Curve
radius (crest)
2,500 m 1,000 m 400 m
Removal of Line Marking.
2.13 TRAFFIC CONTROL - WITNESS POINT Vertical Curve
radius (sag)
1,000 m 600 m 400 m
Modify the Traffic Management Plan during the
works to suit site conditions if required or Pavement Width 8m 6m 4m
requested by the nominated DoI Contact Officer.
Gravel
Witness Point - The Superintendent must Pavement
appraise all changes to the TMPs and TCDs prior Thickness
150 mm 100 mm 50 mm
to implementation of any changes, unless there is (when specified)
an urgent need for amendments to mitigate Lateral
hazards. In situations where immediate hazard Clearance to
mitigation is necessary the changes may be Obstruction 2.5 m 1.2 m 1.0 m
implemented and the Superintendent advised of (from edge of
the changes as soon as practicable thereafter. carriageway)
If an incident occurs within, adjacent to, on
approach to or departure from the work site, make Table 2.5 – Side Track Minimum Requirements
a photographic record of the traffic control Part 2
devices, site conditions, placement of plant and
equipment etc., as soon as practical after the Item Requirement
event. Advise the Superintendent of the incident As in Traffic Control
Signs/Warning devices:
as soon as possible. Plan.
Only permit single lane operation of two way At all fills, curves and
Guideposts:
traffic when traffic is directed by accredited WZTM crests.
controllers and signs or portable traffic signals etc. Flood gauge posts: At all floodways.
are employed, dependant on the site conditions
and after obtaining the appropriate approvals. Total length at any
5 km max.
Organise Police control as required, or as one time:
requested by the Northern Territory Police should Gravelled/Sealed
the need arise. Side track type:
Refer to PSRs
2.14 SIDE TRACKS FOR DETOURS Compact top 150 mm to 95% relative compaction.
2.14.1 Construction Match side tracks neatly to the existing road
Provide side tracks for detours when it is system.
impractical to provide for traffic on the existing Provide sufficient resources to direct and assist
road system. Design and construct side tracks to traffic, when side tracks become restricted.
conform to AGRD Austroads Guide to Road
Carry out immediate remedial works when traffic
Design and the following minimum standards:
is delayed by poor side track conditions or surface
condition is dangerous.
Provide and maintain adequate drainage. Ensure
drainage measures do not cause or accelerate
erosion.

Page 24
2.14.2 Maintenance 2.17 TEMPORARY BRIDGING – HOLD

Maintain the existing road network, and all side POINT
tracks, in use by the public. Design and construct any temporary bridging in
Prevent dust nuisance by water spraying at accordance with the Austroads Guide to Bridge
regular intervals to keep surface moist. Technology.
Do not use waste oil as a dust suppressant. Hold Point - Obtain written approval from the
Regional Manager, Road Projects prior to
Remove debris and rubbish.
commencement of any such works.
Maintain road signs and guide posts in a clean
Ensure all environmental approvals have been
state.
obtained prior to the commencement of the works.
Table 2.6 – Side Track Maintenance Hold Point - Provide copies of approvals obtained
Requirements by Contractor to the Superintendent prior to the
Surface commencement of the works.
Maintenance required Provide and erect signage, fencing, road safety
type
barriers and or guard railing etc. to prevent
Sealed Patch and repair all surfaces. accidental access to the feature being bridged.
Surfaces: Grade and roll shoulders.
2.18 CONTRACTOR'S PLANT AND
Regrade and roll to maintain a EQUIPMENT - HOLD POINT
Unsealed
comfortable riding quality at design
Surfaces: Provide public traffic right of way at all times
speed.
unless traffic control is in use.
2.15 ACCESS TO ADJACENT PROPERTIES Keep parking and materials storage clear of
AND SIDE ROADS trafficked areas and clear zones in accordance
Maintain access to adjacent properties and side with applicable AUSTROADS guides.
roads at all times to a level appropriate for the Do not leave equipment or tools unattended as a
type and frequency of traffic. hazard to the public.
Provide and erect proposed and approved signs Hold Point - On roads carrying significant traffic,
detailing alternative access, only after approval floodlight the road and area within 50 m of the site
from the Superintendent is obtained. when working at night, if approved by the
Ensure adequate access is maintained for Superintendent, to a ground level luminance of
pedestrians and cyclists as required, including 10 lux minimum.
delineated access if existing paths are being 2.18.1 Mobile Plant - Broadband Alarm
closed as part of the works. Standards
2.16 TEMPORARY PEDESTRIAN ACCESS AS 4742: Machine-mounted forward and reverse
Conform to: AS 1742.9 and AS 1742.10. audible warning alarm (withdrawn)
Maintain access for pedestrians, cyclists and ISO 9533: Earth-moving machinery - Machine-
persons with disabilities passing through and mounted audible travel alarms and forward horns
around the work site. Where existing paths are to - Test methods and performance criteria
be demolished or will become inaccessible or Definitions
modified due construction works, provide Broadband alarm: Pulsed acoustic signal that
temporary access to a standard not less than the comprises a range of frequencies and sometimes
pre-existing or pre-construction standard. referred to as quacker, woosher, non-tonal
Temporary access must; reversing beepers or white sound.
− Be clearly delineated and have adequate Broadband/White-Sound Alarm Requirement:
width and height clearance. Provide all construction vehicles and mobile plant
− Be smooth, free draining and free of fitted with Broadband Alarms (White Sound)
obstructions and loose material. before commencement of works.
− Provide clear guidance where paths change Ensure that installation and proper operations of
direction. the alarm/warning system is sufficient before
commencement of works including but not limited
− Be illuminated by temporary lighting in urban
to:
areas to assist path users where existing
street lighting has been removed or affected - All alarms clearly audible above the noise
by the works. level of the machinery or vehicle.
- Automatically activated when reverse gear is
− Be arranged so that path users are clearly selected.
visible to vehicle drivers and plant operators - Directional nature of the broadband alarm is
at road crossing points. appropriate for works.

Page 25
2.18.2 Rotating Beacons on Plant 2.21 PORTABLE TRAFFIC SIGNALS

Provide beacons or other vehicle mounted Use portable traffic signals conforming to the
warning devices on the highest point of the cabin requirements of AS 1742.3 and AS 4191.
roof or superstructure of all plant and equipment Complete the portable traffic signal authorisation
and in accordance with clause 3.12 ‘Vehicle form (available from DoI Traffic section) to seek
mounted signs and devices’ of AS 1742.3 where formal approval from the Superintendent to use
these are being used within the road reserve. Fit the proposed portable traffic signals and the
beacons with globes rated at a minimum of 75 proposed time settings.
watts. Do not use strobe lights. Portable traffic signals are for short-term traffic
Ensure that the light is operational whenever the control applications only. Where traffic signal
plant or equipment is working on, or within 9 control is being proposed for periods greater than
metres of, the roadway. 2 months in a single location, consider the
Ensure that the light is visible from all approaches installation of temporary traffic signals.
and not obscured by exhaust stacks, back hoe For the area under the control of portable traffic
arms etc., or are covered in dust. signals, limit the lengths to no more than 1150 m.
Protect the lights from damage by scrub etc. Use the time settings in the Time Settings clause
as a guide for red time clearance and maximum
2.19 ROAD WORK ZONE LENGTH green times. Frequently observe the prevailing
Conform to the requirements of AS 1742.3. traffic conditions and vehicle speeds and amend
the times for the site as appropriate. Submit the
2.20 TRAFFIC SIGNAL AND COUNT
changes to the Superintendent as soon as
STATIONS
practicable thereafter.
2.20.1 Traffic Signals
2.21.1 Temporary Speed Limits – Hold Point
Prior to commencement of the works and for the Impose a controlled area speed limit not
duration of the works clear the work and co- exceeding 80 km/h if the portable traffic signals
ordinate with the DoI Traffic Section for the
would otherwise be in a higher speed limit zone.
appropriate region.
Hold Point - Work zone speed limits require
This includes all works within the trafficked lanes;
approval from the Superintendent prior to
− 150 m prior to the stop line implementation.
− 50 m past the stop line 2.21.2 Sight Distance
− that affects the normal daily traffic flow at the Maintain a sight distance on the approach to
intersection or for road reserve or median portable traffic signals of not less than 150 m. If
excavations greater than 150 mm this cannot be achieved, use appropriate advance
− within the area defined by the traffic signal warning signage to advise road users in advance
poles and associated pits of the sight line obstruction of the impending traffic
signals ahead.
− between the traffic signal poles and
associated traffic signal control cabinet In cases where queuing traffic is extending past
the advance warning signage, install further
2.20.2 Traffic Count Stations advance warning signs and speed zone signs
Count Stations have in-pavement detection further in advance, to prevent collisions at the end
systems installed and cutting off or closing traffic of the queue awaiting a green light. Avoid
lanes can have an impact on their operation. excessive traffic queuing by use of, and
adjustment of, appropriate time settings on the
Prior to the commencement of work within the portable traffic signals whenever possible.
trafficked lanes within 50 m of traffic signals or
within 20 m of a count station controller, clear the
work and co-ordinate for the duration of the works
with the DoI Traffic Section for the appropriate
region.
A map of count station locations is available from
Department of Transport, Transport Infrastructure
Planning Division, contact 8924 7531, or from the
Annual Traffic count reports at:
www.transport.nt.gov.au/publications/traffic-
reports

Page 26
2.21.3 Time Settings 2.22 RESTORATION

Table 2.7– General Time Settings Upon completion of works:
− Remove all temporary warning signage and
Mode All Min. Max. Amber
other traffic control devices.
Red Green Green
− Remove all temporary works and reinstate the
Manual: M F M S areas to their original state, including the
Fixed S F S S removal and disposal of seal and dragging
time: windrows and debris back across the side
track carriageway.
Vehicle S F S S − Stabilize all areas impacted by the works to
Actuated: prevent erosion.
F: Fixed at 15 seconds. − Where applicable reseed with local native
M: Set the manual control switch each cycle. grasses and trees and shrubs.
S: Needs to be selected and preset by − Comply with the requirements of the
operator for each site. Environmental Approvals and Clearances
issued by DoI, DLPE and DLRM, Environment
Heritage and the Arts Division, Environmental
Assessment and Policy Section, for the
Table 2.8 – Amber Time
project.
Approach Speed Amber Time − Reinstate permanent traffic control devices
Below 70 km/h 4 seconds temporarily removed during the works.
Above 70 km/h 5 seconds 2.23 OTHER REQUIREMENTS
Table 2.9 - Red and Green Times
Distance
Between Distance
Max. Stop Lines Between Stop
All Red
Green at traffic Lines at traffic
Period
Period Signals (m) Signals (m) –
(s)
(s) – Clearance Clearance
speed 20 speed 40 km/h
km/h
2 30 0-30 0-50
5 35 34-45 50-90
10 35 45-75 90-150
15 40 75-105 150-210
20 40 105-135 210-270
25 45 135-165 270-330
30 45 165-195 330-390
40 50 195-250 390-500
50 50 250-310 500-620
60 60 310-365 620-730
70 70 365-415 730-830
80 80 415-465 830-930
90 90 465-525 930-1050
100 100 525-575 1050-1150

Page 27
EARTHWORKS AND DRAINAGE
3. EARTHWORKS AND DRAINAGE Management for more details on stockpile

management.
STUMPS: Stumps and other material unsuitable
for mulching may be buried in disused gravel pits
during rehabilitation of the pits.
GRASSES: Do not mulch grass clods, roots or
other components containing viable propagules.
This material may be buried in disused gravel pits.
STOCKPILES: Stockpile mulched material on the
site at a maximum height of 2 m for use during
reinstatement work.
3.1 OUTLINE DESCRIPTION
URBAN AREAS: Stockpile mulch on the site for
This section specifies the maintenance
reuse and deliver surplus mulch as directed by the
requirement for drainage, and the maintenance
Superintendent (within 10 km of the site) for use in
requirement for formation and subgrade on
local landscaping projects.
periodic pavement maintenance projects.
RURAL AREAS: Stockpile mulch on the site for
Maintain pavement dimensions in accordance
reuse and power blow surplus mulch into the
with Drawing No. CS 2100.
adjacent natural vegetated areas adjacent to the
3.2 STANDARDS works.
Comply with the Acts, Regulations, Guidelines 3.5 EARTHWORKS IN CUT
and Codes applicable to the works. Comply with
3.5.1 Description
the requirements of Authorities with jurisdiction
over the works. Conform to the Standards and Operations necessary for excavation, irrespective
Publications quoted throughout this document of the type of material and subsurface conditions,
unless specified otherwise. Refer to including:
REFERENCED DOCUMENTS. − working cuttings so that material meeting
Specification Reference standard fill requirements is used for the
subgrade,
Standard Specification for Environmental − disposal of excess excavated material,
Management and to the RFT. − compaction of material below the subgrade
surface, and
3.3 DEFINITIONS
− shaping and trimming of formation within
Refer MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS section,
cuttings.
Definitions clause.
3.5.2 Rock – Hold Point
3.4 FORMATION WIDTH CLEARING Hold point - Obtain agreement from the
3.4.1 Clearing Superintendent to the extent of the excavation.
Clear the formation of the road a minimum width Excavate rock encountered in the subgrade,
of 2 metres on each side past the outside batters formation, or drain.
of the table drains. Avoid forming pockets of shattered material below
Recut the outer batters or table drains, ensuring the level of the excavation.
the prevention of any excess materials from Remove all loose material.
washing back into the table drains, offlet drains
culverts or other drainage structures. Trim the excavation to shed water and minimise
erosion.
In rural and remote non-urban areas cleared
vegetation free from declared weeds can be used In subgrade, replace excavated material with
on site for rehabilitation and erosion control works. select fill compacted to 95% relative compaction.
3.4.2 Mulching 3.5.3 Unsuitable Material and/or Weathered
Rock – Hold Point
Mulch all cleared, weed free, vegetative matter in
mechanical brush chippers to a maximum size of Hold point - Obtain directions from the
100 mm as the clearing work proceeds. Do not Superintendent before works commence.
stockpile cleared material for later mulching, Excavate unsuitable material and/or weathered
unless this material is suitable for mulching. rock encountered in the subgrade, formation, or
Acquire approval to stockpile from Superintendent drain.
or remove from site. Do not mulch declared Avoid forming pockets of shattered material below
weeds which are seeding or non-woody declared the level of the excavation.
species. Otherwise bury or burn material on site.
Remove all loose material.
See Standard Specification for Environmental

Page 28
Trim the excavation to shed water and minimise − Place and work the material until interlock is
erosion. achieved.
In subgrade: Replace excavated material with − Advance the fill by full width construction. Side
select fills compacted to 95% relative compaction. dumping shall not be undertaken. The
3.6 EARTHWORKS IN FILL construction face will be concave, with the
shoulder face well in advance of the centre,
3.6.1 Description except when filling in swamps or soft material
Earthworks in fill includes winning, hauling, when the advancing face ends shall be
placing and compacting material on all prepared convex.
areas including: Scours and Washouts. − Rock Dimensions.
General Filling, includes holes, pits and other
− Maximum vertical dimension: one - third of the
depressions.
height of fill being placed.
3.6.2 Benching
− Maximum horizontal dimension: one - half of
Cut a bench at the toe of the lower side batter the height of the fill being placed.
when natural surface inclines at steeper than eight
horizontal to one vertical. − Construct to 300 mm below the bottom of the
subgrade layer. Within 300 mm of the bottom
Ensure the bench slopes downwards towards the of the subgrade layer use the Compacted
centre line of the road and is 3 m wide to provide Layer Method or Rocky Material Method, with
a sound key for the toe of the fill. a maximum particle size of 150 mm.
Terrace the existing surface where side slopes
are steeper than three horizontal to one vertical to 3.7 FILL MATERIAL
provide a key for the fill. 3.7.1 General Fill
3.6.3 Construction Methods Use the best locally available material.
Fill by any of the "Compacted Layer", "Rocky Use fill material, whether cut or borrow, that is free
Material" or "Rock Fill" method. of organic matter and has a minimum soaked
Select appropriate method(s). CBR (California Bearing Ratio) of 20 at 95%
MMDD (Maximum Modified Dry Density) (to
Compacted Layer Method AS 1289), and a plasticity index between 2 % and
Use where material generally does not contain 15%.
cobbles, boulders or broken rock. 3.7.2 Standard Fill
− Deposit and spread the material in uniform Conform to the following properties:
level layers to a maximum thickness of
250 mm loose measurement for the full width Table 3.1 – Standard fill properties
of fill. Property Value
− Compact each layer to the specified
compaction (refer Table 4.8 - Dry Density CBR 4 day soaked at 95% MMDD 20 min.
Ratios for Conformance) before placing the to AS 1289:
next layer. Maximum Particle Size: 100 mm
− Use standard fill for the subgrade. Plasticity Index: 2 - 15%
Rocky Material Method
3.7.3 Select Fill
Use where material contains some cobbles and
boulders (maximum size 600 mm) with sufficient Select fill will be comprised of gravel,
fines for the work to be free of voids. decomposed rock or broken rock, free from
organic matter and lumps of clay.
− Break up rocks bridging between adjacent
materials to prevent cavities being formed. Conform to the following:
− Maximum rock dimension: 600 mm or Table 3.2 – Select fill grading
one-half the height of fill at the section where AS Sieve (mm) % Passing (dry weight)
the rock is placed.
75.00 100
− Spread material in layers approximately equal
to the maximum rock size. 9.50 30 - 100
− Work the rocky material in each layer until it is 2.36 15 - 65
firm and unyielding.
0.075 5 - 25
− Construct to the bottom of the subgrade layer.
Rock Fill Method
Use where material is predominantly cobbles or
boulders with insufficient fines to fill voids.

Page 29
Table 3.3– Select fill properties Divert table drains into offlet drains at intervals not
exceeding 150 m, or as specified. Refer to
Property Value PROJECT SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS.
CBR 4 day soaked at 95% 30 minimum Remove all obstructions including dead trees,
MMDD to AS 1289: fallen branches and regrowth.
Plasticity Index: 2 - 15% maximum Extend drains as far as required to prevent water
ponding in the table drains, with length to be
Linear shrinkage 2 – 6%.
minimum 50 m.
3.8 REMOVAL OF EXCESS MATERIAL- HOLD Ensure the capacity of the offlet is not less than
POINT the capacity of the table drain, and is of similar
Generally this work applies to the removal of cross section and dimensions.
unsuitable material such as silt, rubble, and sand, Align and grade the offlet so that the water drains
debris dumped on windrows, floodways, away without scour and damage, and to disperse
pavements and drains. water as sheet flow or into natural watercourses,
Work does not include new works in cut, or heavy at a gradient not to exceed 1:40 (1.5%).
excavation of rock. Divert the table drain offlet drain neatly around
Haul and dump and spread excess material: natural obstacles such as large rocks and trees.
− Not less than 125 m from the new road centre 3.10.3 Table Drain Blocks
line, or Construct or rehabilitate and trim table drain
− To spoil dump sites specified. Clear site of blocks at offlets.
organic material/topsoil prior to stockpiling Construct blocks from standard fill conforming to
material. the following requirements:
− Spread excess material, level to less than Plasticity Index: 6% minimum.
1.5 m high. Stabilize to prevent erosion. Sheet Length: To extend from edge of shoulder
with topsoil. to top of outer table drain batter.
Ensure dumps do not dam surface water or Width: 3 m minimum, at the top,
streams or damage the works or other property. measured parallel to the road
Ensure dumping is not in streams nor within 25 m centre line.
of a stream. Dump and spread the material in Height: To edge of shoulders.
legally acceptable location using legal methods.
Max. Slope: 1: 0.67 (1.5:1).
Comply with AAPA clearances.
Compaction: Layers not exceeding 250 mm
Comply with environmental management compacted thickness.
approvals, including within the road reserve.
3.10.4 Stop Berms
Hold Point - Obtain approval from Superintendent
prior to hauling and dumping and spreading Construct or rehabilitate and trim stop berms at
excess material. locations diverting the flow from table drains into a
stream or culvert.
3.9 PREPARATION AND MAINTENANCE OF Construct berms from standard fill conforming to
SUBGRADE SURFACE the following requirements:
Trim surface to the compliance tolerances Plasticity Index: 6 % minimum.
specified free of depressions and free draining.
Height: To edge of shoulders.
Maintain and repair any damage to the prepared
surface prior to placing further material. Max. Slope: 1: 0.67 (1.5:1).
Compaction: Layers not exceeding 250 mm
3.10 EARTHWORKS FOR DRAINAGE compacted thickness.
3.10.1 Table Drains 3.10.5 Catch Drains
Construct or rehabilitate and trim to the Construct or rehabilitate and trim catch drains.
dimensions shown on the drawings. Carry out prior to formation, subgrade, and other
Remove all obstructions including dead trees, drainage works.
fallen branches and regrowth. Depth: 500 mm (minimum) into solid
Grade to prevent ponding of water. ground.
Shape to direct water discharge into culverts, Gradients: Ensure free flow, prevent ponding
offlet drains or watercourses. of water, prevent scour.
Grades shown below are as ratios of rise: run. Outlets: As terrain permits construct at
3.10.2 Table Drain Offlets frequent intervals to reduce scour.
Construct or rehabilitate and trim to the shape of a Construct a block on continuous
trapezoidal drain with maximum batter slope 1: 2. grades to divert water into culverts
or drains.
Page 30
Offset: 2 m (minimum) and 4 m Table 3.4 – Conformance Tolerances – Earthworks

(maximum) beyond the edge of and drainage
the cutting. Item Requirement
Divert the drain neatly around large rocks and Formation Width: Not less than shown on the
trees. drawings.
3.11 REPAIR EXISTING FORMATION WIDTH Subgrade Surface: As shown on the drawings.
Cut back the existing formation and pavement as Subgrade Width: Not less than shown on the
shown on the drawings by not less than 150 mm drawings.
on each edge to sound densely compacted Batter: Not steeper than the specified
material to form a uniform edge (curved or straight slope.
where applicable). Maximum variation: At any point from specified plane
Repair the formation width generally with material of batter shall be 150 mm in
earth and 300 mm in rock.
cut from the table drains to achieve the formation
dimensions in accordance with Drawing No. Table Drain Invert: Maximum 75 mm above or below
CS 2100-3. specified level, free of
depressions capable of ponding
3.12 TRIM AND COMPACT UNPAVED water.
AREAS Plant Requirements; use plant in proof rolling
Shape, grade and compact verge areas as procedures that comply with the following
specified. Refer to PROJECT SPECIFIC requirements:
REQUIREMENTS. Static smooth wheeled rollers with a mass of not
3.13 SURFACE FORMATION less than 12 tonnes and a load intensity under
either the front or rear wheels of not less than 6
Form the road generally with material cut from the tonnes per metre width of wheel.
table drains, in accordance with the typical cross
section. Pneumatic tyred plant with a mass of not less than
20 tonnes and with a ground contact pressure
Allow for construction to the specified height
under either the front or rear wheels of not less
above natural surface by local widening of table than 450 kPa per tyre and a ground contact area
drains. 2
of not less than .035 m per tyre.
3.14 COMPACTION Check areas for level tolerance and layer
Mix to a homogeneous material and compact with thickness before proof rolling.
no compaction planes and free of cracking to Proof roll each layer immediately following
conform to the Dry Density Ratios specified in the completion of compaction. If proof rolling is
Table 4.15 - Dry Density Ratios for carried out at a later time, water the surface and
Conformance in CONFORMANCE TESTING roll with the test roller prior to commencement of
and the conformance clauses in this section. proof rolling.
3.15 CONFORMANCE Compliance; the proof rolling requirements are
3.15.1 Tolerances deemed to comply when an area withstands proof
rolling without visible deformation or springing.
Finish earthworks and drainage to a smooth
compacted and uniform surface within the limits in Remedial work; remove and reconstruct areas
Table 3.4 – Conformance Tolerances – that deform or break up.
Earthworks and drainage. 3.15.2 Conformance Testing – Hold Point
3.15.1 Proof Rolling – Hold Point – Witness Ordering procedures; refer to CONFORMANCE
Point TESTING for testing requirements and test
Proof roll all areas and obtain satisfactory results ordering procedures.
before ordering conformance testing of those Subgrade surface will be tested only when it is
areas. within level tolerance and conforms to proof
Hold Point - Submit a proof rolling procedure to rolling.
the Superintendent for approval including the Check subgrade surface levels prior to testing.
method of preparing an area and the extent of Hold Point – Obtain the Superintendent’s
proof rolling before commencing proof rolling. approval of subgrade conformance prior to placing
Witness Point - Give the Superintendent not less further material.
than 24 hours’ notice of the location and 3.16 OTHER REQUIREMENTS
commencement time for the proof rolling.

Page 31
CONFORMANCE TESTING
4. CONFORMANCE TESTING Hold Point - The selected test methods must be

approved by the Superintendent before testing is
done.
Comply with the Acts, Regulations, Guidelines
over the works. Conform to the Standards and
Publications quoted throughout this document
unless specified otherwise. Refer to
4.5 ITP SUBMISSION – HOLD POINT
Hold Point - Submit: ITPs, detailing all
procedures and test plans to be undertaken to
This section specifies the conformance testing complete the project, before commencing work.
criteria for use in road maintenance works.
4.6 SPECIFIC TESTS
4.2 GENERAL
Conduct field density testing using Nuclear
The Contractor will be responsible for process Density Gauges in accordance with NTCP 102.1
control testing. and AS 1289.5.8.1.
The Superintendent will carry out all conformance Conduct CBR moulding using a compaction
tests nominated to be the Superintendent's hammer conforming to the requirements of
responsibility through Panel Period Contracts. AS 1289.
The Contractor will be responsible for ordering the
4.7 PANEL PERIOD CONTRACTORS
conformance tests.
The Principal has in place Panel Period Contracts
4.3 DEFINITIONS with NATA (National Association of Testing
Process Testing Authorities) accredited testing companies. The
The testing required to be carried out by the Superintendent will provide a list of the Panel
Contractor to ensure that the work is in Period Contractors to be used for conformance
accordance with the contract documents. testing on the contract when the contract is
Conformance Testing awarded. The Superintendent reserves the right to
use other NATA accredited laboratories when
The testing to be carried out by the
panel contractors are unable to carry out specific
Superintendent to ensure that the work complies
tests.
with the contract documents.
ITP 4.8 ORDERING TESTING
Inspection Test Plans When required, in accordance with the contract
documents, order the conformance testing in
NATA
writing directly from the Panel Period Contractors.
National Association of Testing Authorities Order all testing using the DoI Test Request
NTCP Form. Include on the order the following
NT Code of Practice – in NTMTM information:
NTMTM − Lot boundaries including start and finish
chainages, length and width,
NT Materials Testing Manual
NTTM − Type of layer,
NT Test Methods – in NTMTM − Type of tests required,
− Date and time when lot will be ready for
4.4 TEST METHODS – HOLD POINT testing.
The methods contained in the NTMTM shall take Start with the first Contractor on the list and rotate
precedence over all other test methods and in sequence for each set of tests. Do not bypass
procedures, and are used in conjunction with any Panel Period Contractor on the list unless that
relevant Australian Standards. Panel Period Contractor provides a written
http://www.nt.gov.au/infrastructure/publications/m explanation that he is unable to carry out the
aterialstesting/index.shtmlWhen testing cannot be required testing to the time frames listed in: Table
performed to the test methods stated, these - Testing and Reporting Completion Times. In this
methods may be substituted with State Road instance, the written explanation must be provided
Authority test methods so testing can be to the Superintendent at the same time as the
performed. order for testing. Panel Period Contractors that
Where required tests are not included in the are unable to carry out the required testing will be
NTMTM use the appropriate Australian Standard. placed at the end of the rotation sequence.
Page 32
CONFORMANCE TESTING
4.8.1 Conformance Testing and Payment 4.11 CONFORMANCE TESTING RESULTS

The Superintendent will pay for all conformance The Panel Period Contractor will provide interim
testing directly to the Panel Period Contractor and NATA endorsed test results to the Contractor
selected to perform the conformance tests within the scheduled times (in working days –
required under the contract and nominated as the Monday to Friday) from the time of completion of
Superintendent’s responsibility. all the field tests. The interim test results will
comprise of final, completed test results and are
If any tests fail to meet specification, all retesting
not preliminary estimates. Interim test results may
costs will be a negative variation to the contract.
not be NATA endorsed. Testing and Reporting
Failures in bitumen tests; refer to Superintendent.
Completion times
When testing has been ordered and the site is not
ready for testing at the time specified by the Refer to: Table 4.13 – Testing and Reporting
Contractor, the Contractor will bear the cost of Completion Times part 1 of 2
time and travel incurred by both the Panel Period Table 4.13 – Testing and Reporting
Contractor attending to conduct the conformance Completion Time part 2 of 2.
tests and the Superintendent, where applicable.
The cost will be a negative variation to the Refer to Clause 4.14 for Tables
contract.
4.11.1 Lot Testing
4.8.2 Process Testing
Conformance will be based on lots.
The Contractor is responsible for the ordering up
and payment for all process tests carried out. Give each lot a lot number.
Number the lots using a logical system. Maintain
4.9 NOTICE OF TESTING – WITNESS POINT a register of all lots and lot numbers. Include the
Give the Panel Period Contractor written notice in location of each lot on the lot register. Provide a
advance of each stage of the works requiring copy of the lot register to the Superintendent upon
conformance testing, including re-testing. request.
Witness Point - Provide the Superintendent with Lots defined by the contractor must be clearly
a copy of the request for testing simultaneously marked out on the construction site.
with the request being sent to the Panel Period Lots of work will be selected by the Contractor,
Contractor. based upon:
Any communication with the Panel Period − A lot will represent no more than one shift's
Contractors, other than the ordering of testing or production
inquiring on the timing of test results, must be
forwarded through the Superintendent. − A lot will ,be continuous and will have been
brought to completion at the same time,
Provide the Superintendent with the results of
process control testing as identified in the relevant − A lot will be composed of essentially
ITP with all requests for conformance testing. homogeneous material with no distinct
changes in attribute values.
Witness Point - Notify the Superintendent prior to
any rework of failed lots. Each lot will be subject to conformance testing in
accordance with NTCP 102.1.
4.10 TEST FREQUENCIES
Defective sections will be excluded from the lot to
Refer to: be tested and identified as a separate lot, and will
Table 4.5 – Test Frequencies for Bitumen also be subjected to lot testing.
Spray Sealing Quality of the lot will be judged as conformance or
Table 4.6 – Asphalt Testing Frequencies - non-conformance of each lot. This will be based
During Works on all tests conducted on the lot in accordance
Table 4.7 – Asphalt Testing Frequencies - with NTCP 102.1.
After Works Completed – Part 1 Conformance of materials is based on samples
Table 4.8 – Asphalt Testing Frequencies - After from the finished works.
Works Completed – Part 2 When lots fail to satisfy the conformance criteria,
Table 4.9 - Test Frequencies For Soils – Part 1 reprocess the entire lot and resubmit for retesting.
of 2 Should the lot under consideration be subdivided
Table 4.10 - Test Frequencies For Soils - Part 2 then each subdivision will be classed as a lot and
of 2 each subdivided lot will be subject to lot testing.
Table 4.11 - Test Frequencies For Aggregates Non-conforming lots which are subdivided after
And Pavement Surfaces testing will be treated as separate lots and each
and every subdivided lot will be retested.
Table 4.12 - MMDD Curing Times
Refer to Clause 4.14 for Tables
Page 33
CONFORMANCE TESTING
4.11.2 Conformance of Compaction for Soils Table 4.2 – Multiplier Values for
Density test locations will be selected by the Soils
laboratory on a stratified random basis in Values of the Multiplier k for
accordance with NTCP 103.1. Characteristic Mean Dry Density Ratio
(Rc)
In situ density is expressed as a percentage of the
Maximum Modified Dry Density. One Modified Dry Number of tests
k
Density test for each in situ density test will apply. per lot (n)
In situ density will be determined and reported in 6 0.50
accordance with NTCP 102.1 and relevant
Australian Standards. 7 0.54
A minimum of three tests will apply to each and 8 0.56
every lot.
9 0.59
The Mean Dry Density Ratio (R) is calculated as
follows: 10 0.61
R=
∑x i 15 0.68
n 20 0.72
xi = an individual test result 4.11.5 Conformance of Compaction for
n = the number of results in the lot. Asphalt
The Characteristic Mean Dry Density Ratio (Rc) is Relative compaction (R) is the percentage ratio of
calculated as follows: the in-situ density of the compacted asphalt and
the reference density of the asphalt for a particular
Rc = R − ks
lot. The reference density will be the mean of the
where: maximum density measurements determined from
R = the mean dry density ratio for the lot the asphalt testing for a particular lot.
k = the multiplier in the below Table. – The Characteristic Value of Relative Compaction
MULTIPLIER VALUES FOR SOILS. (Rc) is calculated as follows:
s = the standard deviation. Rc = R − ks
The Standard Deviation (s) is calculated as
follows: where:
∑ (x − R)
2 R = the mean density ratio for the lot
s=
i
(n − 1) k = the multiplier in Table 4.3 – Multiplier Values

for Asphalt.
where: s = the standard deviation.
xi = an individual test result The Standard Deviation (s) is calculated as
R = the mean of n results follows:
n = the number of test results in the lot.
∑ (x − R)
2
s=
i
When less than 6 tests are used to determine
conformance of a lot the Mean Dry Density Ratios (n − 1)
in Table 4.15 - Dry Density Ratios for where:
Conformance, Column A apply.
xi = an individual test result
When 6 or more tests are used to determine
conformance of a lot the Characteristic Mean Dry R = the mean of n results
Density Ratios in Table 4.8 Dry Density Ratios n = the number of test results in the lot.
For Conformance, Column B, apply.
4.11.3 Dry Density Ratios for Conformance
Refer to Table 4.15 - Dry Density Ratios for
Conformance.
4.11.4 Table – Multiplier Values for Soils

Page 34
CONFORMANCE TESTING
4.11.6 Multiplier Values for Asphalt 4.12.2 Testing – Hold Point

Hold point - Superintendent to approve conformance
of stabilised layer prior to priming. Refer to Table 4.4.
Table 4.3 – Multiplier Values for
Asphalt Table 4.4 – Stabilised Layers Conformance
Values of the Multiplier k for
Characteristic Mean Dry Density Ratio Attribute Requirement
(Rc) are shown in the following table.
Refer to the table
Number of tests per lot DRY DENSITY
k
(n) Dry Density RATIOS FOR
Ratio: CONFORMANCE in
5 or less 0.0
the Conformance
6 0.719 Testing Section.
Stabiliser ±10% of the
7 0.755
Application designated value
8 0.783 Rate/Content averaged for each lot
Stabiliser content
9 0.808
shall not vary by
10 0.828 more than 0.5%
absolute between top
The work represented by a lot will be [i] and bottom half of a
assessed as the characteristic value of layer at any location
in-situ air voids where: as determined in
Stabiliser
− Characteristic Value of Air Voids Distribution: accordance with
(%) = 100 – Rc NTTM 204.8.
Stabiliser content shall
4.12 STABILISED LAYER CONFORMANCE
not vary by more than
4.12.1 Tolerances [ii] ±0.5% from the
For stabilised layers conform to the tolerances designated value in
specified in Table 4.4 – Stabilised Layers any point.
Conformance
±1.5% of moisture
[i] content determined at
Moisture Content preliminary trial.
during
Compaction:
±1.5% of optimum
[ii]
moisture content.
[i] apply if a preliminary trial is carried out (i.e. total

area over 1000m2)
[ii] apply if a preliminary trial is not carried out (i.e.
areas under 1000m2)
Take samples for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, Linear
Shrinkage, California Bearing Ratio from the
unstabilised pavements.


Page 35
CONFORMANCE TESTING
4.14 ADDITIONAL TABLES
Table 4.5 – Test Frequencies for Bitumen Spray Sealing

Cutback Bitumen/
Test No. Property Straight Run Binder Polymer Modified Bitumen
Emulsions
AS/NZS 2341.2, Minimum 1 per
Dynamic Viscosity (60ºC) Minimum 1 per project -
AS/NZS 2341.3 project
AS/NZS 2341.4 Dynamic Viscosity (135ºC) - Minimum 1 per project -
AS 2341.12 Penetration (25ºC) - 1 per project -
AS/NZS 2341.13 Durability of base binder 1 per project 1 per project
Loss on Heating (%mass)
AG:PT/T103 1 per project 1 per project 1 per project
max.
AG:PT/T111 Dynamic Viscosity (165ºC) - - 1 per 20 000L
AG:PT/T112 Flash Point (ºC) min. 1 per project 1 per project 1 per project
AG:PT/T121 Consistency (60ºC) - - 1 per 20 000L
0
AG:PT/T121 Stiffness at 15 C (kPa) - 1 per 20 000L
Torsional Recovery at 25ºC,
AG:PT/T122 - - 1 per 20 000L
30s (%)
o
Toughness at 4 C,
AG:PT/T124 1 per project 1 per project 1 per project
100mm(Nm) min.
AG:PT/T131 Softening Point (ºC) - 1 per project 1 per 20 000L

Page 36
CONFORMANCE TESTING
Table 4.6 – Asphalt Testing Frequencies - During Works

Test Method No. Test Method Minimum Test Frequency
(Standard No.) (Aspect being tested) Daily Production Daily Production
<100 tonnes >100 tonnes
- Mixing temperature Every mix Every mix
- Laying temperature Every 30 minutes Every 30 minutes
Asphalt surface temperature
- at commencement of Every Mix Every mix
compaction
AS/NZS 2891.7.1 Maximum Density 1 No. 1 per 100 t *
AS/NZS 2891.7.3
AS/NZS 2341.3 Viscosity of Binder 1 per shift 1 per shift
AS/NZS 2891.3.1 Bitumen content 1 No. 1 per 100 t *
AS/NZS 2891.3..2 Particle size distribution 1 No. 1 per 100 t *
AS/NZS 2891.3..3
or WA730.1
AS/NZS 2891.5 Stability 1 No. 1 per 100 t *
AS/NZS 2891.5 Flow 1 No. 1 per 100 t *
* One test per nominated tonnage or part thereof.
Table 4.7 – Asphalt Testing Frequencies - After Works Completed – Part 1

Test Method No. Test Method Frequency
AS/NZS 2891.1.1 Thickness of layer 1 per core
AS 2891.1.2
AS 2891.1.3
AS/NZS 2891.8 Voids and density relationships for compacted 1 per core
asphalt mixes
AS/NZS 2891.9.1 Determination of bulk density of compacted asphalt 1 per core
AS/NZS 2891.9.2
AS/NZS 2891.9.3
AG:PT/ T231 Deformation resistance of asphalt mixtures by the 1 per Type per 1000 t
wheel tracking test
Table 4.8 – Asphalt Testing Frequencies - After Works Completed – Part 2

Carry out density testing as soon as practicable after completion of works. Conform to the
following number of cores per lot:
2
Area (m ) >5000 1000 – 5000 500 – 1000 50 – 500 <50
2
1 per 1 per 500m
2
No. of Cores 1000m or or minimum 4 3 1
minimum 10 5

Page 37
CONFORMANCE TESTING
Table 4.9 - Test Frequencies For Soils – Part 1 of 2

Type Of Test General Standard Select Subgrade Sub-Base Basecourse Bridge Bridge Culvert Culvert
Fill Fill Fill/Sand Backfill Backfill Backfill Backfill
Clay Fill Using Std. Using Select Using Using
Fill Fill Std. Fill Select Fill
2 2 2 2 2
Field Density 1 in 3,000 m 1 in 3,000 m 1 in 1 in 1,000 m 1 in 1,000 m 1 in 1,000 m 3 tests per 3 tests per 3 tests 3 tests per
2 3 3 3 3
(FDD) by (min. of (min. of 3,000m (min. of (min. of (min. of 100 m 100 m per 10 m 10 m
NTCP 102.1 3 tests per 3 tests per (min. of 3 3 tests per 3 tests per 3 tests per lot)
and lot) lot) tests per lot) lot)
AS 1289.5.8.1 lot)
Modified 1 per FDD 1 per FDD 1 per FDD 1 per FDD 1 per FDD 1 per FDD 1 per FDD 1 per FDD 1 per 1 per FDD
Compaction FDD
(MMDD) by
AS 1289.5.2.1
2 2 3
Particle Size - - 1 per each - 1 in 5000 m 1 in 5000 m - 1 per 300 m - 1 per
3 3
Distribution by 2,000 m (min. of 1 (min. of 1 test 300 m
AS 1289.3.6.1 test per lot) per lot)
2 2 2
Plasticity Index - 1 per each 1 per each 1 in 5,000 m 1 in 5000 m 1 in 5000 m 1 per each 1 per each 1 per 1 per each
3 3 3 3 3
AS 1289.3.1.1, 2,000 m 2,000 m (min. of 1 (min. of 1 (min. of 1 test 300 m 300 m each 300 m
3
AS 1289.3.2.1, test per lot) test per lot) per lot) 300 m
AS 1289.3.3.1
2 2 2
Linear - 1 per each 1 per each 1 in 5,000 m 1 in 5000 m 1 in 5000 m 1 per each 1 per each 1 per 1 per each
3 3 3 3 3
Shrinkage by 2,000 m 2,000 m (min. of 1 (min. of 1 (min. of 1 test 300 m 300 m each 300 m
3
AS 1289.3.4.1 test per lot) test per lot) per lot) 300 m
California 1 per each 1 per each 1 per each 1 in 5 FDD 1 in 5 FDD 1 in 5 FDD 1 per each 1 per each 1 per 1 per each
3 3 3 3 3 3
Bearing Ratio 2,000 m 2,000 m 2,000 m (min.1 of test (min.1 of test (min.1 of test 300 m 300 m each 300 m
3
by per lot) per lot) per lot) 300 m
AS 1289.6.1.1
* run = 1 pass of cement spreader.
FDD = Field Density

Page 38
CONFORMANCE TESTING
Table 4.10 - Test Frequencies For Soils - Part 2 of 2
Type Of Test Subgrade Sub-Base Basecourse
Pavement Layer - 1 per FDD 1 per FDD

Thickness by
NTTM 216.1
2
Ball Embedment by - - 1 in 5,000 m
NTTM 215.1
2
Pavement Degree of - - 1 in 5,000 m
Saturation
prior to Sealing by
AS 1289
Stabiliser Spread Rate by 1 per run * 1 per run * 1 per run *
NTTM 204.7
2 2 2
Stabiliser Content by 1 per 1000 m with a min. of 3 tests 1 per 1000 m with a 1 per 1000 m with a
NTTM 204.1 min. of 3 tests min. of 3 tests
2 2 2
Stabiliser Distribution by 1 per 1000 m with a min. of 3 tests 1 per 1000 m with a 1 per 1000 m with a
NTTM 204.8 min. of 3 tests min. of 3 tests
Soluble Salt Content of - 1 per water source -
Construction Water
* run = 1 pass of cement spreader.
FDD = Field Density

Page 39
CONFORMANCE TESTING
Table 4.11 - Test Frequencies For Aggregates And Pavement Surfaces
Type Of Test Aggregate Pavement Marking Pavement Surface
Particle Size Distribution by
1 in 250 t - -
AS 1141.11.1
Los Angeles Abrasion Value by
1 in 250 t - -
AS 1141.23
Particle Shape by AS 1141.14 at 2:1
1 in 250 t - -
ratio
Flakiness Index by AS 1141.15 1 in 250 t - -
Average Least Dimension by
1 in 250 t - -
AS 1141.20.1, AS 1141.20.2 *
Sulphate Soundness by AS 1141.24 1 in 1,000 t - -
Percentage of Crushed Faces by
1 in 250 t - -
AS 1141.18
Polished Aggregate Friction Value by 2
- - 1 in 20,000 m
AS 1141.40 or AS 1141.41
Surface Texture Depth by 2
- - 1 in 5,000 m
NTTM 305.1
As nominated by
Skid Resistance by NTTM 304.1 - -
Superintendent
As nominated by
Roughness - -
Superintendent
Retroreflectivity of Pavement Marking
- 1 per 1,000 m -
by NTTM 404.1 or NTTM 404.3
Wear Assessment of Road Marking
Paints – Image Analysis to As nominated by
- -
AS 4049.3:2005 Appendix K, Method Superintendent
A Photographic Method
* Take Average Least Dimension samples only from the stockpile on the project site.
Table 4.12 – MMDD Curing Times

Material Type Plasticity Field Moisture Content (FMC) Curing time – min.
Non plastic Sand PI < 2 Any 2 hours
Non Plastic Gravels
PI < 2 FMC < 2 % MC, below OMC 6 hours
Absorbent stone
Low Plasticity
PI up to 10 FMC < 2 % MC, below OMC 6 hours
Gravel and Sands
Medium Plasticity
PI 10 to 20 FMC < 1 % MC, below OMC 12 hours
Gravel and Sands
Heavy clays 20 + FMC < 2 % MC, below OMC 24 hours up to 7 days
MC = Moisture Content FMC = Field Moisture Content
Irrespective of FMC all materials must be cured for a minimum of 2 hours after preparation.
Check and report sub-base and basecourse thickness to nearest 5 mm at each modified compaction test
sample site.

Page 40
CONFORMANCE TESTING
Table 4.13 – Testing and Reporting Completion Times Part 1 of 2
Attribute being tested Time Allowed Time Allowed
for Interim for NATA
Report in Endorsed
Working Days Report in
(Monday to Working Days
Friday) (Mon to Fri)
** Time for completion may be extended by each additional day required for the curing of materials
and each additional overnight stay.
For work in remote areas the testing and reporting completion times may be increased by a maximum of
2 days, subject to approval by the Superintendent.
SOILS
Field Density 3 5
Modified Compaction ** 3
5
Modified Compaction – Oversize ** 3
Pavement Layer Thickness 2 4
Particle Size Distribution 3
Plasticity Index (Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit) ** 3 5
Linear Shrinkage 3
Moisture Content 1 3
CBR – Soaked (Completion time includes Modified Compaction) ** 7 9
Cement Content of Stabilised Materials (Heat of Neutralisation) 3 5
Cement Content (EDTA Method) 6
Lime/Cement Content of Uncured Soil (EDTA Method) 6 8
Lime Content of Stabilised Materials (E.D.T.A Method) 6
Bitumen Content of Stabilised Materials 2 4
Stabiliser Spread Rate 1 3
Soluble Salt Content of Construction Water 2 4
Standard Ball Penetration Test 1 3
Unconfined Compressive Strength (7 Day result) excluding
8 10
compaction
AGGREGATE
Specific Gravity 2
Particle Size Distribution 2
Particle Shape, by Proportional Calliper 2
4
Flakiness Index 2
Average Least Dimension (Direct Measurement) 2
Clay and Fine Silt (Settling Method) 2
Particle Density and Water Absorption of Fine Aggregate 3
Particle Density and Water Absorption of Coarse Aggregate 3 5
Sulphate Soundness 8 10

Page 41
CONFORMANCE TESTING
Table 4.14 – Testing and Reporting Completion times Part 2 of 2

Attribute being tested Time for Interim Time for NATA
Report Endorsed Report
AGGREGATE (continued)
Los Angeles Value 2
Pavement Surface Texture Depth 2 4
Crushed Particles 2
CONCRETE
Consistency of Concrete – Slump Test 1 3
Making, Curing and Compressive Strength (28 day result) *** 29 31
Making, Curing and Compressive Strength (7 day result) *** 8 10
ASPHALT
Bitumen Content and Aggregate Grading 3
5
Stability and Flow of Mix 3
Air Voids and Density Relationship 4 6
Density of Thin Lift Asphalt by Nuclear Gauge 2 4
Bulk Density of Asphalt 4 6
Kinematic Viscosity of Bitumen 3 5
BITUMEN
Dynamic Viscosity (60ºC) 1 3
** Time for completion may be extended by each additional day *** Time for completion is related to the curing time
required for the curing of materials and each additional overnight stay. specified.
For work in remote areas the testing and reporting completion times may be increased by a maximum of 2 days, subject to approval
by the Superintendent.

Page 42
CONFORMANCE TESTING
Table 4.15 - Dry Density Ratios for Conformance

Works Components A B
Mean Dry Characteristic Mean
Density Ratio Dry Density Ratio
(R) in % (Rc) in %
(“n” is 3 to 5) (“n” is 6 or greater)
Natural surface to subgrade, fill, batters, 90.0 or greater 90.0 or greater Conformance
table drain blocks, fill for water course, 89.9 or less 89.9 or less Non-conformance
unpaved areas
Subgrade, sub-base, unsealed base, 95.0 or greater 95.0 or greater Conformance
shoulders, select fill, levees, structures 94.9 or less 94.9 or less Non-conformance
and culverts in fill, bridge foundation
backfill, bridge abutment fill
Sealed basecourse 100.0 or greater 99.0 or greater Conformance
99.9 or less 98.9 or less Non-conformance
Stabilised basecourse 98.0 or greater 97.0 or greater Conformance
97.9 or less 96.9 or less Non-conformance
Backfill all test excavations with the material and density ratio specified for that layer stabilised with at
least 3% cement (by mass).

Page 43
GRADING AND GRAVEL SHEETING
5. GRADING AND GRAVEL SHEETING 5.3 GRADING GENERALLY

Provide a finished graded surface free of ruts,
5.1 STANDARDS corrugations, depressions, excess loose material
Conform to the following standards and and debris.
publications unless specified otherwise: Maintain pavement dimensions in accordance
- AS 1141- Methods for sampling and testing with Drawing No. CS 2100.
aggregates. 5.4 GRAVEL SHEETING GENERALLY
- AS 1289- Methods of testing soils for Provide a finished gravel surface trimmed and
engineering purposes tightly compacted, conforming to standards in
- NTMTM- NT Materials Testing Manual. CONFORMANCE TESTING.
Specification Reference Maintain pavement dimensions in accordance
with Drawing No. CS 2100.
Standard Specification for Environmental The standard drawing showing the typical cross
Management and RFT. section shows the ideal carriageway width and
actual widths may vary on individual roads.
5.2 OUTLINE DESCRIPTION Maintain the existing carriageway width of
This section specifies the maintenance individual roads in the contract. This may, in
requirement for gravel sheeting on unsealed some cases, require extra passes of the grader or
roads, the maintenance grading of unsealed other equipment.
roads, and the maintenance grading of shoulders Do not grade over the crown of the road. Maintain
and verges of sealed roads, including the the profile as per the standard drawing.
associated drainage. Drainage is specified in
EARTHWORKS AND DRAINAGE, and measured
as per that section when not associated with road
maintenance.
5.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

5.5.1 Maintenance grading of unsealed roads
For works associated with maintenance grading of unsealed roads and verges the following table indicates
the expected maximum achievable daily production per grader under normal weather conditions.
Table 5.1 – Maintenance grading of unsealed roads

Work Type Distance Number of passes
Opening Grade 40km Minimum 1 Pass
Carriageway Grade 15km Minimum 4 passes
Grade Between Inverts 10km Minimum 7 passes
Full Maintenance Grade 5km Minimum 9 passes
Grade and Roll 12km Minimum 7 passes
Grade, Water and Roll 8km Minimum 7 passes
Rip and Re-compaction 2km As required
5.5.2 Maintenance grading of unsealed shoulders on sealed roads
For works associated with maintenance grading of unsealed shoulders and verges on sealed roads the
following table indicates the expected maximum achievable daily production per grader under normal
weather conditions
Table 5.2 – Maintenance grading of unsealed shoulders on sealed roads
Work Type Distance Number of passes
Dry Grade 7km Minimum 3 passes
Full Maintenance Grade 5km Minimum 5 passes
Part Maintenance Grade 10km Minimum 3 passes
Grade and Roll 10km Minimum 3 passes
Grade, Water and Roll 6km Minimum 3 passes
Rip and Re-compaction 3km Minimum 5 passes

Page 44
5.6 STANDARDS Table 5.4 – Natural Gravel Properties

Comply with the Acts, Regulations, Guidelines Application
the requirements of Authorities with jurisdiction Northern Southern Unsealed Sub-
Attribute Area - Area – Base And Base
over the works. Conform to the Standards and Sealed Sealed Shoulder
Publications quoted throughout this document base Base* Material
REFERENCED DOCUMENTS. Liquid 30%
Limit (LL) 25% max 30% 35% max max
5.7 DEFINITIONS
Refer to Definitions in MISCELLANEOUS
Plasticity 1-
PROVISIONS.
Index (PI) 1-6% 1 - 10% 4 – 12 % 10%
5.8 MATERIALS
5.8.1 Natural Gravel Linear 0-6%
Obtain material from sources of naturally Shrinkage 0-3% 0 - 6% 2–8%
occurring deposits. in accordance with the (LS)
Material Extraction Areas and Water Sources PI x %
clause in MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS. 400
passing max
180 max 300 max 400 max
Produce required properties by crushing, 0.425 mm
screening, mixing or other processes necessary. Sieve
Ensure particles are tough, durable and of a California
tightly binding nature free of organic or other Bearing
deleterious matter. Ratio
(CBR) 30
80 min 80 min 50 min
Natural gravel to conform to Table 5.3 – Natural min
4 day
Gravel Particle Sizes and to Table 5.4 – Natural
soaked
Gravel Properties. (AS 1289)
at a 95%
relative 100% 100% 95%
Table 5.3 – Natural Gravel Particle Sizes MMD
density of MMDD MMDD MMDD
D
AS
Sieve Percentage Passing (Highest CBR value to be reported)
(mm) Los
Type 1 Type 2 * Type 3 * Type 4 Angeles
Abrasion 50 max 50 max 60 max 60 max
75.0 100 100 (LAA)
Loss
37.5 80-100 100 80-100
Note: Southern Area- Sealed Base* applies to south of a line
19.0 50-80 70 - 100 100 60-100 connecting Birrindudu - Dunmarra - Wollogorang.
5.8.2 Fine Crushed Rock
9.5 35-65 50 - 80 70 - 100 50-95
Manufacture from clean, hard durable rock free
4.75 25-50 35 - 65 50 - 80 40-80 from natural gravel, clay, loam or other
2.36 15-40 25 - 50 35 - 65 30-65 deleterious substances. Fine crushed rock to
conform to Table 5.5 – Fine Crushed Rock
0.425 7-20 10 - 30 15 - 35 20-50 Sizes and to Table 5.6 – Fine Crushed Rock
Properties.
0.075 3-13 4 - 16 6 - 20 5-25
Table 5.5 – Fine Crushed Rock Sizes
* Grading Types 2 and 3 are for Base and
AS Sieve (mm) Percentage Passing
Shoulder.
37.5 100
19.0 90-100
13.2 75-90
9.5 60-80
4.75 38-60
2.36 25-45
0.425 12-26
0.075 6-14

Page 45
5.9 GRAVEL SHEETING

Table 5.6 – Fine Crushed Rock Properties 5.9.1 Terminology
The term gravel sheeting refers to the sheeting of
Liquid limit (LL) 25% max pavement and shoulders with gravel, sand clay or
Plasticity Index (PI) 1-6% other suitable approved materials.
5.9.2 Gravel Resheeting – Lots greater than
Linear Shrinkage (LS) 1-3% 2
600m
Dust Ratio (DR) 25-50 Gravel sheet pavement and shoulders in section
2
(% passing 0.075mm)/(% passing lots greater than 600 m .
0.425mm) x 100 Locate and push up gravel material in accordance
CBR, 4 day soaked at 100% 100 min with the Material Extraction Areas and Water
MMDD (AS 1289) Sources clause in MISCELLANEOUS
PROVISIONS.
Los Angeles Abrasion (LAA) loss: 35max
Coarse grained rock 25%max Use gravel material complying with the Materials
Fine grained rock clause in this section.
Load, haul to site and dump gravel material.
PI x % passing 0.425mm sieve 180 max
Place, mix, compact and trim the material to the
5.8.3 Blends of Natural Gravel and Fine specified layer thickness in accordance with this
Crushed Rock section.
Not permitted in urban areas for sealed 5.9.3 Stockpile Gravel Material
pavements. Locate, push up and stockpile gravel material in
Material to conform to the Natural Gravel tables. accordance with the Material Extraction Areas and
Water Sources clause in MISCELLANEOUS
5.8.4 Sand Clay PROVISIONS.
Obtain Sand Clay from sources of naturally Stockpile materials complying with the Materials
occurring deposits. clause in this section.
Material to conform to the requirements in Table Trim stockpile to a uniform shape for ease of
5.7 – Sand Clay Grading and in Table 5.8 – measurement.
Sand Clay Properties.
5.9.4 Gravel Resheeting from Stockpile
Gravel sheet pavement and shoulders in section
2
Table 5.7 – Sand Clay Grading lots greater than 600 m .
Load from existing stockpile, haul to site and
AS sieve (mm) Percentage Passing dump gravel material.
4.75 80 - 100 Place, mix, compact and trim the material to the
specified layer thickness in accordance with this
2.36 60 - 100
section.
0.425 30 - 60 5.9.5 Gravel Repairs to Wash outs and Blow
0.075 14 - 28 outs
Gravel sheet repair pavement and shoulder wash
outs and blow outs in section lots less than
2
600m .
Table 5.8 – Sand Clay Properties
Locate and push up gravel material in accordance
Property Required value with the Material Extraction Areas and Water
Plasticity Index 20% maximum for Sources clause in MISCELLANEOUS
sealed pavements PROVISIONS.
15 % maximum for Use gravel material complying with the Materials
unsealed pavements. clause in this section.
Load, haul to site and dump gravel material.
Linear Shrinkage 1% - 8%.
CBR, 4 day soaked at 50 minimum.(AS 1289) specified layer thickness in accordance with this
95 % MMDD section.

Page 46
5.9.6 Gravel Repairs to Wash outs and Blow

outs from Stockpile – Lots less than
600m
2 Table 5.9 – Final Surfaces Tolerances
Gravel sheet repair pavement and shoulder wash Straight Edge Maximum 5 mm in 3 m.
outs and blow outs in section lots less than Deviation:
2
600m . Compacted Thickness: Not less than shown on
Load from existing stockpile, haul to site and the drawings.
dump gravel material.
Width: Not less than shown on
the drawings.
specified layer thickness in accordance with this
section. 5.10.2 Proof rolling procedure - Hold Point
5.9.7 On-Formation Placing and Mixing Hold Point - Submit a proof rolling procedure to
Place material in uniform layers over subgrade the Superintendent for approval including the
surface or lower layers of the pavement. method of preparing an area and the extent of
proof rolling.
Remove segregated and contaminated material
from the site. 5.10.3 Proof rolling notice - Witness Point
Manually remove materials such as timber, Witness Point - Give the Superintendent not less
branches, roots and the like. than 24 hours’ notice of the location and
commencement time for the proof rolling.
Do not place material on a previous layer that has:
Proof roll all areas and obtain satisfactory results
− become waterlogged or cracked; and/or
before ordering conformance testing of those
− otherwise deteriorated. areas.
Mix the material uniformly throughout with water Plant Requirements; use plant in proof rolling
to achieve a moisture content within 2 % of the procedures that comply with the following
optimum for the specified conforming Dry Density requirements:
Ratio. Static smooth wheeled rollers with a mass of not
Ensure water is clean and free from oil, alkali, less than 12 tonnes and a load intensity under
organic or any other deleterious substances, and either the front or rear wheels of not less than 6
that the total soluble salts content is less than tonnes per metre width of wheel.
3,000 mg/litre, total dissolved salts. Provide Pneumatic tyred plant with a mass of not less than
evidence of construction water salt contents. 20 tonnes and with a ground contact pressure
5.9.8 Compaction under either the front or rear wheels of not less
Compact in uniform layers not less than 100 mm than 450 kPa per tyre and a ground contact area
2
nor greater than 200 mm compacted thickness. of not less than .035 m per tyre.
Achieve a homogeneous mass with no Check areas for level tolerance and layer
compaction planes. thickness before proof rolling.
Conform to the Dry Density Ratios specified in Proof roll each layer immediately following
Table 4.15 - Dry Density Ratios for completion of compaction. If proof rolling is
Conformance in CONFORMANCE TESTING. carried out at a later time, water the surface and
5.9.9 Trim Final Pavement Surface roll with the test roller prior to commencement of
proof rolling.
Trim with a dense textured surface, free of
laminations. Compliance; the proof rolling requirements are
deemed to comply when an area withstands proof
Remove sticks and any loose material. rolling without visible deformation or springing.
Ensure surface is free of cracking. Remedial work; remove and reconstruct areas
Do not introduce new material to the surface after that deform or break up.
final compaction. 5.10.4 Conformance Testing – Hold Point
Where pavement thickness is 200 mm or greater, Ordering procedures; refer to CONFORMANCE
scarify to not less than 100 mm depth and TESTING for testing requirements and test
recompact where finish not achieved. ordering procedures.
Where pavement thickness is less than 200 mm Only the finished compacted base and shoulder
scarify and recompact to full depth where finish conforming to proof rolling and layer thickness will
not achieved. be tested.
5.10 CONFORMANCE OF GRAVEL Hold Point – Obtain the Superintendent’s
SHEETING approval for pavement conformance prior to any
5.10.1 Tolerances surfacing work.
Final surfaces shall conform to the following:
Page 47
Backfill and compact all test holes with cement Cut the pavement and shoulders to remove all
stabilised quality material which is the same as corrugations and fill in all ruts, holes and
the layer being tested. depressions.
5.10.5 Ride Quality Spread the accumulated material uniformly over
Surface roughness (IRI) to be less than 2.4. the pavement and shoulders to a thickness of 25
to 40 mm to fill depressions and to obtain the
Ride quality requirements represents an absolute
typical cross section as shown on the Drawing No.
upper limit and all field values to be less than a
CS 2100.
value specified.
Reinstate table drain blocks in accordance with
Lotting and averaging out of field values not
EARTHWORKS AND DRAINAGE.
permitted.
5.11.4 Maintenance Grade – Between Batters
Rectify all areas where Surface Roughness
exceeds specified level. Grade the road formation width between the tops
of both outer batters.
5.11 MAINTENANCE GRADING OF
Remove all obstructions including dead trees,
UNSEALED PAVEMENTS
fallen branches and regrowth from areas to be
Refer to Table 5.1 – Maintenance grading of graded.
unsealed roads in Performance Requirements in
Win suitable material from the area between the
this work section.
tops of outer batters and the edges of the
5.11.1 Opening Grade shoulder. Ensure that vegetation material is not
Open roads to conventional vehicles by grading included.
after damage by rain. Cut the pavement and shoulders to remove all
Any undamaged pavement may be by-passed by corrugations and fill in all ruts, holes and
the grader. depressions.
Where damaged pavement is encountered, grade Spread the accumulated material uniformly over
the pavement running surface to remove the pavement and shoulders to a thickness of 25
corrugations and fill in ruts, holes and to 40 mm to fill depressions and to obtain the
depressions. typical cross section as shown on the Drawing No.
Repair scours. Recover material from the batters CS 2100.
and drains at scours to restore shape to the Remove windrows from table drains, offlet drains,
formation. creek crossings, floodways and culvert entrances
Repair creek crossings and floodways leaving no and outlets.
windrow on either side. Reinstate table drains and table drain blocks in
In the case of saturated table drains, it may only accordance with EARTHWORKS AND
be possible to open grade the centre of the DRAINAGE.
pavement, removing sand and debris to the 5.11.5 Full Maintenance Grade
shoulder. Grade the road formation width between the tops
5.11.2 Maintenance Grade – Carriageway of both outer batters.
Grade the carriageway pavement and shoulder Remove all obstructions including dead trees,
surface. fallen branches and regrowth from area to be
Cut the pavement and shoulders to remove all graded.
corrugations and fill in all ruts, holes and Remove windrows which contain vegetation or
depressions. other unsuitable materials by spreading them
Spread the trimmed material evenly across the full evenly outside of the outer batters.
width of the carriageway to a thickness of 25 to Win material from windrows which contain
40 mm to fill depressions and to obtain the typical suitable material and the area back to the edge of
cross section as shown on the Drawing No. the shoulder. Ensure that vegetation material is
CS 2100. not included.
5.11.3 Maintenance Grade – Between inverts Cut the pavement and shoulders to remove all
Grade the area between the inverts of both table corrugations and fill in all ruts, holes and
drains. depressions.
Remove all obstructions including dead trees, Spread the accumulated material uniformly over
fallen branches and regrowth from area to be the pavement and shoulders to a thickness of 25
graded. to 40 mm to fill depressions and to obtain the
typical cross section as shown on the Drawing No.
Win material from the area between the inverts of
CS 2100.
both table drains and the edges of the shoulder.
Ensure that vegetation material is not included.

Page 48
Remove windrows from table drains, offlet drains, evenly over the carriageway, and to be between
creek crossings, floodways and culvert entrances the outer edges of the shoulders.
and outlets. Reinstate table drain blocks in accordance with
Reinstate table drains, offlet drains, table drain EARTHWORKS AND DRAINAGE.
blocks, catch drains and benches in cut in 5.11.8 Rip and Re-compaction
accordance with EARTHWORKS AND
Grade the road formation width between the tops
DRAINAGE, and cut new offlet drains where
water ponds or where directed by the
Superintendent. Remove vegetation from areas to be graded, and
remove windrows which contain vegetation or
5.11.6 Grade and Roll
other unsuitable materials by spreading them
Mainly associated with damp or wet roads. evenly outside of the outer batters.
Grade the area between the inverts of both table Win material from windrows which contain
drains. suitable material and the area back to the edge of
Remove all obstructions including dead trees, the shoulder. Ensure that vegetation material is
fallen branches and regrowth from area to be not included.
graded. Cut the pavement and shoulders to remove all
Win material from the area between the inverts of corrugations and fill in all ruts, holes and
both table drains and the edges of the shoulders. depressions.
Ensure that vegetation material is not included. Spread the accumulated material uniformly over
Cut the pavement and shoulders to remove all the pavement and shoulders to fill depressions
corrugations and fill in all ruts, holes and and to obtain the typical cross section as shown
depressions. on the Standard Drawing.
Spread the accumulated material uniformly over Scarify and/or rip the full width of the pavement
the pavement and shoulders to fill depressions and shoulders, mixing both won and in-situ
and to obtain the typical cross section as shown materials to obtain a uniform homogenised blend
on the Drawing No. CS 2100. of 150 mm compacted thickness.
Roll the surface to achieve a uniform and tightly Wet mix blended materials and compact to
bound surface free of corrugations, ruts and minimum 95% of maximum modified dry density
depressions. (MMDD). Trim and finish to produce a uniform and
Compact with a minimum of 10 passes of a 15 tightly bound surface free of ridges etc.
tonne multi tyred roller. Passes to be distributed Reinstate table drains, offlet drains and table drain
evenly over the carriageway, and to be between blocks in accordance with EARTHWORKS AND
the outer edges of the shoulders. DRAINAGE.
Reinstate table drain blocks in accordance with 5.11.9 Reformation and Re-compaction
EARTHWORKS AND DRAINAGE. Grade the road formation width between the tops
5.11.7 Grade Water and Roll of both outer batters.
Grade the area between the inverts of both table Remove vegetation from areas to be graded, and
drains. remove windrows which contain vegetation or
Remove all obstructions including dead trees, other unsuitable materials by spreading them
fallen branches and regrowth from area to be evenly outside of the outer batters.
graded. Win material from windrows which contain
Win material from the area between the inverts of suitable material and the area back to the edge of
both table drains and the edges of the shoulders. the shoulder. Ensure that vegetation material is
Ensure that vegetation material is not included. not included.
Cut the pavement and shoulders to remove all Cut the pavement and shoulders to remove all
corrugations and fill in all ruts, holes and corrugations and fill in all ruts, holes and
depressions. depressions.
Spread the accumulated material uniformly over Spread the accumulated material uniformly over
the pavement and shoulders to fill depressions the pavement and shoulders to fill depressions
and to obtain the typical cross section as shown and to obtain the typical cross section as shown
on the Drawing No. CS 2100. on the Drawing No. CS 2100.
Wet mix and roll to produce a uniform and tightly Top up with nominated compacted depth gravel
bound surface free of corrugations, ruts and material conforming to the Materials clauses of
depressions. the specification.
Compact with a minimum of 10 passes of a 15 Scarify and/or rip the full width of the pavement
tonne multi tyred roller. Passes to be distributed and shoulders, mixing both won and in-situ

Page 49
materials to obtain a uniform homogenised blend level with the top of the seal to provide a smooth
of 150 mm compacted thickness. transition between the shoulder and the seal.
Wet mix blended materials and compact to Roll the shoulder surface to achieve a uniform and
minimum 95% of MMDD. Trim and finish to tightly bound surface free of corrugations, ruts and
produce a uniform and tightly bound surface free depressions.
of ridges etc. Compact with a minimum of 4 passes of a 15
Reinstate table drains, offlet drains and table drain tonne multi tyred roller, evenly on each shoulder.
blocks in accordance with EARTHWORKS AND Take care not to damage the seal when cutting or
DRAINAGE. spreading. If the seal is damaged repair the
5.12 MAINTENANCE GRADING OF damage with cold mix.
UNSEALED SHOULDERS, BATTERS AND Remove all material from the sealed surface after
DRAINAGE OF SEALED ROADS each day's work with a power broom, prior to
Refer to Table 5.2 – Maintenance grading of removing work area signs.
unsealed shoulders on sealed roads in 5.12.3 Grade Water and Roll
Performance Requirements in this work section. Grade the area between the invert of the table
Provide a finished surface free of ruts, drain and the edge of seal.
corrugations, depressions, excess loose material, Reinstate table drain blocks in accordance with
and debris and level with the sealed surface. EARTHWORKS AND DRAINAGE.
Attain and maintain pavement dimensions with Remove all obstructions including dead trees,
standard Drawing No. CS 2102. fallen branches and regrowth from area to be
Ensure that there is no shoulder material left on graded.
the seal. Win suitable material from the area between the
Remove all vegetation from area to be graded. invert of table drain and the edge of the shoulder
5.12.1 Drainage Maintenance Grade and ensure that vegetation material is not
included.
Grade the road formation width between the top of
the outer batter and edge of shoulder. Spread the accumulated material uniformly over
the shoulders and finish to the standard shape,
Reinstate table drains, offlet drains and table drain
level with the top of the seal to provide a smooth
blocks in accordance with EARTHWORKS AND
transition between the shoulder and the seal.
DRAINAGE.
Provide thorough mixing with water and rolling to
Remove all obstructions, including dead trees,
produce a uniform and tightly bound surface free
fallen branches and re-growth from areas to be
of corrugations, ruts and depressions.
graded and remove windrows which contain
vegetation or other unsuitable materials by Compact with a minimum of 4 passes of a 15
spreading them evenly outside of the outer tonne multi tyred roller, evenly on each shoulder.
batters. Take care not to damage the seal when cutting or
Win material from windrows which contain spreading. If the seal is damaged repair the
suitable material and the area back to the edge of damage with cold mix.
the shoulder. Ensure that vegetation material is Remove all materials from the sealed surface
not included. after each day's work with a power broom, prior to
Spread the accumulated material uniformly over removing work area signs.
the verge and finish to the standard shape. 5.12.4 Rip and Re-compaction
5.12.2 Grade and Roll Grade the road formation width between the top of
A grade and roll operation will generally be the outer batter and edge of seal.
ordered following rain, resulting in sufficient Reinstate table drains, offlet drains and table drain
moisture in the shoulder material to gain effective blocks in accordance with EARTHWORKS AND
compaction. DRAINAGE.
Grade the area between the invert of the table Remove vegetation from areas to be graded, and
drain and the edge of seal. remove windrows which contain vegetation or
Remove all obstructions including dead trees, other unsuitable materials by spreading them
fallen branches and re-growth from area to be evenly outside of the outer batters.
graded. Win suitable material from windrows or batters
Win suitable material from the area between the and ensure that vegetation material is not
invert of table drain and the edge of the shoulder. included.
Ensure that vegetation material is not included. Spread the accumulated material uniformly over
Spread the accumulated material uniformly over the shoulder and finish to the standard shape,
the shoulder and finish to the standard shape, level with the top of the seal to provide a smooth
transition between the shoulder and the seal.
Page 50
Scarify and/or rip the full width of the shoulder, 5.14 REMOVAL OF ROAD MATERIALS
mixing both won and in-situ materials to obtain a FROM CATTLE GRIDS
uniform homogenised blend of 150 mm Remove any gravel or fill material which enters
compacted thickness. cattle grids during maintenance operations.
Wet mix blended materials and compact to
5.15 PROTECTION OF ROAD FURNITURE
minimum 95% of MMDD. Trim and finish to
produce a uniform and tightly bound surface free Remove, protect, store, replace any road furniture
of corrugations, ruts and depressions. damaged during the work and reinstate all
removed or damaged road furniture items within
Take care not to damage the seal when cutting or
the work zone as the work proceeds.
spreading. If the seal is damaged repair the
damage with cold mix. 5.16 OTHER REQUIREMENTS
Remove all material from the sealed surface after (If applicable) Refer to PROJECT SPECIFIC
each day's work with a power broom, prior to REQUIREMENTS section of Request for Tender.
removing work area signs.
5.12.5 Reformation and Re-compaction
Grade the road formation width between the tops
Remove vegetation from areas to be graded, and
remove windrows which contain vegetation or
other unsuitable materials by spreading them
evenly outside of the outer batters.
Win material from windrows which contain
suitable material and the area back to the edge of
the shoulder. Ensure that vegetation material is
not included.
Cut the pavement and shoulders to remove all
corrugations and fill in all ruts, holes and
depressions.
Spread the accumulated material uniformly over
the pavement and shoulders to fill depressions
and to obtain the typical cross section as shown
on the Drawing No. CS 2100.
Top up with nominated compacted depth gravel
material conforming to the Materials clause in this
work section.
Scarify and/or rip the full width of the pavement
and shoulders, mixing both won and in-situ
materials to obtain a uniform homogenised blend
of 150 mm compacted thickness.
Wet mix blended materials and compact to
minimum 95% of MMDD. Trim and finish to
produce a uniform and tightly bound surface free
of ridges etc.
Reinstate table drains, offlet drains and table drain
blocks in accordance with EARTHWORKS AND
DRAINAGE.
5.13 PROTECTION OF RAILWAY LINES
Prevent damage to railway lines and other railway
assets when maintenance equipment crosses at
railway crossings.
Lift grader blade and rippers during crossing.
Remove any dirt and debris deposited onto tracks
by maintenance equipment crossing.
Advise the appropriate rail authority immediately if
railway line tracks are damaged.

Page 51
STABILISATION MAINTENANCE
6. STABILISATION MAINTENANCE 6.4.6 Materials to be Wet Mixed

Pulverise and wet mix the existing pavement and
6.1 OUTLINE DESCRIPTION shoulder layer including seal.
This section specifies the stabilisation 6.5 IN-SITU STABILISATION
requirements of materials for use in sealed and
6.5.1 Preparation of Subgrade Layer
unsealed roads, shoulders, verges and inverts,
and the in-situ wet mixing of existing pavement Remove the top 150 mm base course layer, or
and shoulders by pulverisation. other nominated requirements, and stockpile to
one side of formation for re-use. Refer to PSRs.
6.2 STANDARDS
Avoid contamination of base-course material.
Comply with the Acts, Regulations, Guidelines
Extend the base-course preparation 5 m each end
of the required section.
over the works. Conform to the Standards and Shape and trim the surface to alignment, levels
Publications quoted throughout this document and cross sections necessary to produce the final
unless specified otherwise. Refer to subgrade levels and compacted thickness.
REFERENCED DOCUMENTS. 6.5.2 Preparation of Pavement and Shoulder
Layer
6.3 DEFINITIONS
Optimum Moisture Content Scarify the existing pavement sections and new
material, where necessary, full depth before
The amount of water by mass, expressed as a
spreading.
percentage of the dry mass of the material, at
which maximum modified dry density (MMDD) is Tyne the surface lightly when quicklime is used.
obtained with the stabiliser added. Compact lightly to reveal irregularities in the
spread material and to permit the stabilising
6.4 MATERIALS
equipment to traverse the area without excessive
6.4.1 Stabiliser displacement of the surface.
Lime: Hydrated Ca(OH)2 or Quicklime CaO Shape and trim the surface to the alignment,
conforming with AS 1672.1. levels and cross-sections necessary to produce
Do not use agricultural lime (Calcium Carbonate). the final levels and compacted thickness.
Cement: To AS 3972 - type GP or GB. 6.5.3 Commencement & Continuity of Work
Supply and store as specified in product Safety Complete full width stabilisation in one day.
Data Sheet (SDS). Cease stabilising during the following conditions:
6.4.2 Additives – Hold Point − Wet weather or if rain is likely to fall.
Hold Point - Use additives only with the approval − Windy periods which could cause loss of
of the Superintendent. stabiliser, or dust nuisance.
Follow manufacturer's recommendations when 6.5.4 Spreading – Hold Point
using retarders, water reducing or other additives.
Select the spread rate to achieve an unconfined
6.4.3 Water compressive strength of 1.5 to 2.0 MPa.
Ensure water is clean and free from oil, alkali, Spread the cement using a computerised cement
organic matter and other deleterious substances, spreader.
and that the total soluble salts content is less than
3,000 mg/litre (total dissolved salts). Calibrate and check the spread rate prior to
commencement.
For Southern Regions amend the maximum salt
content as instructed by the Superintendent. Adopt the following rate for 150 mm thickness
layers for tender purposes:
6.4.4 Curing Agent 2
Cement: 6 kg/m
Surface applied curing membrane other than the 2
use of water to be: Hydrated Lime: 8 kg/m
Bitumen emulsion ARS Grade 320, or Hold Point - Assess spread rate based upon test
results of materials to be stabilised. Obtain the
Cut-back bitumen Class AMC 2 or AMC 3. Superintendent's approval of the spread rate.
6.4.5 Materials to be stabilised QUICKLIME
Stabilise the existing subgrade layer or the Water the spread material sufficiently to allow full
existing pavement and shoulder layer. slaking. Avoid over-watering.
Refer to EARTHWORKS AND DRAINAGE and
GRADING AND GRAVEL SHEETING for
specification for top-up materials properties.

Page 52
LIME SLURRY CEMENT STABILISATION

Mix the lime slurry initially in a separate paddle Complete the compacting and finishing within two
mixer or similar. hours of adding water.
Use a mechanical sprayer with agitation to 6.5.7 Finishing
maintain a lime/water ratio within ±10 % of the Finish the final surface to a smooth, dense,
initial ratio. closely knit surface, free from compaction planes
Lime/water ratio: Generally between 1:2 and cracks and finished to the tolerances
(i.e. 1 tonne per 2,000 litres) and 1:0.8 (i.e. 1 specified.
tonne per 800 litres), measured by mass. Do not fill or add material to the surface of the
6.5.5 Mixing – Hold Point pavement to meet tolerance requirements.
Use plant capable of: Maintain the surface material at not less than its
− mixing the stabiliser with the nominated optimum moisture content during all finishing
material uniformly over the full depth to be operations.
stabilised; and Reconstruct non-complying areas at no cost to the
− adding water uniformly to the materials while Principal.
mixing with application rate between 0 to 10% 6.5.8 Construction Joints
(by mass) of the material being mixed. LONGITUDINAL JOINTS
Use purpose designed pavement re-claimer with Minimise longitudinal joints by stabilising the full
an undercut rotor stabiliser. width of traffic lanes or wider as one continuous
Hold Point – For small areas in remote locations operation.
obtain Superintendent's approval for use of Keep the joints straight or following the road
alternative plant suitable for the particular curvature as appropriate.
situation, including rotary hoes and graders. TRANSVERSE JOINTS
Mix until uniform in colour and free of lenses, Form joints following any break in excess of two
pockets or clumps of stabiliser. hours in the continuity of the stabilisation
Pulverise clayey material until at least 90% operations.
passes 19 mm sieve. Cut the end of the material to a plane face at an
Add water to the materials during mixing to angle not exceeding 45 degrees from the vertical.
achieve a moisture content suitable for Check the surface adjacent to the joint with a
compaction. straight edge prior to recommencement and
CEMENT STABILISATION further cut back the joint as necessary to achieve
Commence compaction and finishing immediately surface tolerance.
following satisfactory mixing. 6.5.9 Curing
LIME STABILISATION Keep the finished surface damp, without leaching,
Shape the treated layer to the approximate until further construction or curing operations are
section after satisfactory mixing and lightly carried out.
compact. Alternatively cure by applying a bitumen emulsion
Cure for a period of 24 to 72 hours. or a bitumen primer as specified.
Commence final mixing. Apply the bituminous curing membrane as soon
Add water during final mixing if necessary to as possible after mixing and compaction but no
achieve moisture content suitable for compaction. later than 24 hours after relative compaction
results are available.
Mix until uniform in colour and free of lenses,
pockets or clumps of lime. Application rate for bitumen emulsions: 0.3 to
2
0.45 litres/m .
6.5.6 Compaction
Maintain clear of vehicular traffic for four days.
Compact parallel to the centre line of the
pavement and for the full depth of the stabilised 6.6 PULVERISATION AND WET MIXING
layer. Prepare pavement and shoulder layer, mix,
Commence compaction at the lower edge of the compact, and finish the layer all in accordance
pavement and work progressively towards the with the in-situ stabilisation clauses.
crown or the higher edge. Break up and pulverise the existing pavement and
Allow for progressive and uniform overlap shoulder layer including the existing sealed
between passes. surface with a pavement re-claimer to a maximum
Wet the surface lightly after compaction to reduce particle size of 37.5 mm, incorporating the broken-
moisture loss and lay the dust when necessary. up seal into the layer.

Page 53
Use reclaimer plant capable of pulverising COMPACTION

previous cement stabilised layers. The Superintendent will carry out conformance
Make allowance for 2% Cement added and mixed testing.
to the existing materials. Allow for transportation Check areas for level tolerance and layer
of the material in the rate for the works. thickness before testing.
6.7 CONFORMANCE Sample only from the finished compacted
6.7.1 Tolerances pavement complying with level tolerance and
layer thickness.
For stabilised and wet mix layers conform to the
tolerances specified in GRADING AND GRAVEL Proof roll all areas with maximum pneumatic tyre
SHEETING and with the following: roller units.
Remove all areas that breach up or deform and
Table 6.1 – Conformance of stabilisation -
reconstruct as specified.
additional tolerances
Dry Density Ratios will be determined 24 hours
Property Required value after final compaction.
Dry Density Ratio: Refer to Table 4.15 - Dry Backfill test holes within 24 hours of testing with
Density Ratios for new stabilised material.
Conformance in Hold Point – Obtain the Superintendent approval
CONFORMANCE TESTING for conformance of the stabilised layer prior to
priming.
Stabiliser ±10% of the designated value
Application averaged for each lot 6.7.3 Surface Roughness
Rate/Content: Surface roughness testing will be carried out by
the Superintendent at the discretion of the
Stabiliser Do not vary the stabiliser
Superintendent.
Distribution: content by more than 0.5%
absolute between top and 6.8 OTHER REQUIREMENTS
bottom half of a layer at any (If applicable) Refer to PROJECT SPECIFIC
location as determined in REQUIREMENTS section of Request for Tender.
accordance with
NTTM 204.8.
Moisture Content ±1.5% of optimum moisture
during content.
Compaction:
Samples for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, Linear
Shrinkage, CBR will be taken from the
unstabilised pavements.
6.7.2 Testing – Hold Point
2
Average one test per 1000 m for the layer under
consideration with a minimum number of three
tests.
STABILISER APPLICATION RATE
The Contractor is responsible for checking the
application rate.
Determine the stabiliser application rate in
accordance with NTTM 204.7.
Determine the stabiliser content in accordance
with NTTM 204.1.
Refer to CONFORMANCE TESTING for test
frequencies.
Correct application deficiencies by the application
of additional stabiliser and remixing if mixing has
already commenced.
STABILISER CONTENT
The Superintendent will carry out conformance
testing.

Page 54
SPRAY SEALING MAINTENANCE
7. SPRAY SEALING MAINTENANCE AGPT04K-09 Guide to Pavement Technology –

Part 4K: Seals.
7.1 OUTLINE DESCRIPTION AGPT-T190-14 Specification Framework for
This section specifies the requirement for Polymer Modified Binders.
bituminous spray seal work for areas greater than
AP-G41-15 Bituminous Materials Sealing
300m².
Safety Guide.
Refer to BITUMINOUS SURFACE
MAINTENANCE for details of spray sealing work AP-T235-13 Guide to the Selection and Use of
for areas less than 300m², patching work using Polymer Modified Binders and Multigrade
hot mix and cold mix asphalts and crack sealing Bitumens.
work. AP-C87-15 Austroads Glossary of Terms.
7.2 STANDARDS ASTM D 1298-12b Standard Test Method for
Comply with the Acts, Regulations, Guidelines Density, Relative Density, or API Gravity of Crude
and Codes applicable to the works. Comply with Petroleum and Liquid Petroleum Products by
the requirements of Authorities with jurisdiction Hydrometer Method.
over the works. Conform to the Standards and 7.2.3 Other
unless specified otherwise. Refer to NTMTM NT Materials Testing Manual.
REFERENCED DOCUMENTS. ASTM American Society for Testing Materials.
7.2.1 Australian Standards NT Weeds Management Act.
AS 1141 Methods for sampling and testing Specification Reference
aggregates
AS 1160 Bitumen emulsions for Refer to the Northern Territory Government
construction and maintenance of Standard Specification for Environmental
pavements Management and to the RFT.
AS 1742 Manual of uniform traffic control 7.3 DEFINITIONS
devices Refer to Definitions in BITUMINOUS SURFACE
AS 1906.3 Retroreflective materials and MAINTENANCE.
devices for road traffic control 7.4 SCOPE
purposes – Raised pavement Spray sealing treatments for routine maintenance
markers (retroreflective and non- include:
retroreflective) − Prime,
AS 2008 Residual bitumen for pavements − Primerseal,
AS 2106 Methods for the determination of − Initial Seal or Reseal,
the flash point of flammable − With conventional bitumen, cutback bitumen
liquids (closed cup) - General or bitumen emulsion binder,
AS 2157 Cutback bitumen − With modified binder,
AS/NZS 2341 Methods of testing bitumen and − Incorporating geotextile fabric reinforcement,
related roadmaking products Spray sealing work consists of:
− Supply and delivery of materials,
AS 2341.6 Methods of testing bitumen and
− Storage and handling of raw materials,
related roadmaking products -
− Precoating of aggregate,
Determination of density using a
hydrometer − Preparation of pavement surfaces,
− Preparation of bituminous materials,
AS 2341.9 Methods of testing bitumen and
− Application of primer and/or primer binder
related roadmaking products -
and/or binder,
Determination of water content
− Spreading and rolling of aggregate,
AS 2341.13 Methods of testing bitumen and − Removal of loose aggregate.
related roadmarking products –
Long-term exposure to heat and 7.4.1 Cycle and Pedestrian shared Path
air Maintenance
AS 3568 Oils for reducing the viscosity of All relevant design principles contained in
residual bitumen for pavements Austroads Guide to Road Design Part 6A:
7.2.2 Austroads Pedestrian and Cyclist Paths must be integrated
in the design of cycle ways, pathways and
AGPT04H-08 Austroads Guide to Pavement associated infrastructure. Refer to Design
Technology – Part 4H: Test Methods.
drawings (if any) and conform to local Council
Page 55
requirements. Refer to PROJECT SPECIFIC 7.5.4 Bitumen

REQUIREMENTS section of Request for Tender. Standard Classes of bitumen to conform to the
requirements of AS 2008.
7.5 MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS
7.5.1 Aggregates Manufacture all AS 2008 bitumens in a refinery
and have NATA endorsed certificates of
Aggregates must be clean, hard, durable, skid manufacture.
resistant, dry crushed stone, or gravel of uniform
quality free from declared weeds and their seeds Durability Value, in accordance with
and other deleterious material, and conform to the AS/NZS 2341.13 – Long-term exposure of
properties specified. Minimum two crushed faces. bitumen to heat and air, shall be a minimum of 7
days with no maximum value.
Nominate source of aggregate supply. Submit to
the Superintendent current NATA endorsed test Multigrade bitumen to comply with AGPT-T190-14
result certificates providing evidence that the Specification framework for polymer modified
nominated aggregate supply conforms to binders.
specified properties. Aggregate used for testing 7.5.5 Cut Back Bitumen
must be sampled from project site.
Conform to the requirements of AS 2157 and
Conform to Table 7.4 - Aggregate Grading and Table 7.6 - Cut Back Bitumen Properties.
Average Least Dimension, and to Table 7.5 -
Aggregate Properties. Designation is by AMC class.
Refer to Clause 7.22 for Tables Refer to Clause 7.22 for Tables
7.5.2 Cutter and Flux 7.5.6 Bitumen Emulsion

A rapid setting bitumen emulsion made with
Cutter is to be Kerosene or Jet A1 Aviation bitumen Class 320.
Turbine Fuel – conform to Table 7.1 – Cutter oil
properties. Do not use diesel products. Refer to PROJECT SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS
in the Request for Tender document for details of
Table 7.1 – Cutter oil properties type of emulsion to be used.
Property Min. Max. Test Method Conform to the requirements of AS 1160.
Density at ASTM D1298 Utilise within 90 days of manufacture.
o 3 775 830
15 C, km/m AS/NZS 2341.6
Distillation Spraying temperature: 60% bitumen content 30
Initial Boiling 140 - ASTM D86 to 60º C.
o
Point C Generally Bitumen emulsion to be;
Distillation
Final Boiling - 280 ASTM D86 Type; CRS
o
Point C Binder Grade; 170
o
Flash Point C
(Penksy- %Binder; 60
38 - AS 2106.2
Martens closed 7.5.7 Polymer Modified Binder
cup)
Water content, A mixture of Standard Class bitumen and
- 0.1 AS/NZS 2341.9 elastomeric polymer or crumb rubber additive.
% by volume
Viscosity, mPa.s All conformance testing to be carried out in
o - 2.0 ASTM D445
at 40 C accordance with Australian Standard Test
Refer AS 3568 – 1999 Table 1 for complete table. Methods.
7.5.3 Precoat and adhesion agents Base binders for the production of PMB must
Precoat and Adhesion Agents are to be in the meet the specification limits outlined in Table 7.7
concentrated form and not contain Diesel as part – Base Binder for Polymer Modified Bitumen
of the mixture. from the refinery. All base binders must be tested
Precoat all aggregates to conform to the following: for conformance to ensure compliance before
manufacture into PMB’s.
Precoat mixture is to be 100/0/100/1 and not
contain Diesel as part of the mixture. Polymer Modified Binders must conform to the
requirements outlined in Table 7.8 – Polymer
Bitumen residue (by mass): 50%. Modified Binders for Sprayed Sealing
Kerosene (by Mass) 50% Applications.
Adhesion agent (by mass): minimum 1%
Refer to Clause 7.22 for Table

Page 56
Manufacture of Polymer Modified Binders must binder application rates were applied at greater
meet the requirements of the “Guide to than 105% of the designated volume.
Manufacture, Storage and Handling of Polymer
7.9.2 Prime, primer seals and enrichment
Modified Binders, Australian Asphalt Pavement
coats
Association, 2013”.
Provide bitumen complying with; Table 7.8 –
7.6 SPRAYERS AND PERSONNEL
Polymer Modified Binders for Sprayed Sealing
Sprayers must have current calibration accredited Applications.
by a tester nominated on the Australian Asphalt
Generally bitumen class 320 for cut back as
Pavement Association website. All calibrated
follows:
sprayers must be listed on the Australian Asphalt
Pavement Association website. A copy of the Prime: AMC 0 to AMC 00
calibration certificate must be with the vehicle at Primer Seal: AMC 5 to AMC 6
all times. Enrichment Coat: CRS 170/60
Calibrate sprayers yearly. (If applicable) Refer to PROJECT SPECIFIC
REQUIREMENTS in the RFT for cut back
Ensure sprayer driver and operator are skilled and
requirements.
trained with an understanding of sprayer
calibration and an appreciation of the Cut-back bitumen to be mixed on site.
requirements of the work.
Heat bitumen to a temperature appropriate for
Ensure relevant personnel understand the types achieving final spraying temperature making
and quantities of the various materials and allowance for incorporation of the unheated cutter.
mixtures to be used.
Add unheated cutter to heated bitumen and
Bitumen Spraying plant and equipment must be in circulate until a homogeneous mixture is
good working condition at all times. achieved.
7.7 PREPARATION OF PAVEMENT Spray immediately circulation is complete.
Remove raised reflective pavement markers. Allow at least three days to elapse after priming
Repair any damage to the pavement surface before applying the binder coat. Ensure primer
caused by the removal of raised reflective soaks in and dries off before applying binder coat.
markers with an emulsion/sand mixture before
sealing. Keep traffic off the primed surface for 3 days after
priming. Use a primer seal if traffic cannot be kept
Sweep the pavement surface to remove loose off surface for 3 days.
stones, dust, dirt and foreign matter immediately
7.9.3 Straight Run Binder Coats
before spraying.
Provide bitumen Class 320 complying to AS 2008
Do not use steel brooms on fine crushed rock type as follows:
or low plasticity type materials or on airstrips.
Cross Reference
Maintain the prepared surface.
Austroads Technical Report AP-T68/06 – Update
Extend sweeping clear of the area to be sealed. of the Austroads Spray Seal Design Method
Remove adherent patches of foreign material with Austroads - Guide to the Selection and Use of
a steel scraper. Polymer Modified Binders and Multigrades – AP-
Dampen the prepared surface lightly immediately T235-13 (2013)
before spraying (for priming and primersealing Standard Specification for Roadworks, Spray
only). Sealing (Department of Infrastructure) AS2008 -
Remove water from the surface of primed or Bitumen for Pavements (2013)
sealed pavements before applying binder. Definitions
Do not allow traffic on the prepared surface. S10E – A class of polymer modified bitumen,
7.8 SETTING OUT used for spray seal work, with an elastomeric
modifier, conforming to specified binder
Mark out by string line or paint.
properties in the Standard Specification for
Include pavement widening. Roadworks It must be manufactured from bitumen
that conforms to the classes in AS2008.
7.9 BINDER COAT REQUIREMENTS
7.9.1 General SAMI – Strain Alleviating Membrane Interlayer. A
layer of seal sprayed onto an existing cracked
The Contractor must rectify bleeding or flushing
surface, prior to asphalt resurfacing.
seals during the defined defects period where

Page 57
Priming and Primer Sealing Modified Binders, Australian Asphalt Pavement

Association, 2013”.
Region Binder Type
− Initial seal coat: Class S10E
All Class C240/C320* − Reseal coat: Class S10E
* - applied in cutback form Store, mix, heat and spray the polymer modified
Tack Coat and Enrichment binder as recommended by the polymer
manufacturer.
Region Binder Type
Both coats of two coat seals shall contain
All CRS170/60* polymer.
* - applied in emulsion form Allow for adhesion agent in Bitumen item.
Initial Seal Work 7.9.5 Binder Coats, Tender Quantities

Spray Rates: Calculated using Austroads
Region Binder Type Design Method.
Darwin, Katherine, East Arnhem S10E (If applicable) Refer to PROJECT SPECIFIC
Tennant Creek, Alice Springs REQUIREMENTS for spray rates used as a basis
for calculating tender quantities.
Resealing Work
7.10 SAMPLING OF BINDER
Region Binder Type 7.10.1 Test Request
All S10E Darwin Urban areas – Test requests are to be
sent to the panel period contractor to witness
SAMI Work (Using 14mm aggregate) sampling and arrange testing.
Region Binder Type All other areas - the supplier is to sample and
deliver the sample to DoI staff within 48 hours.
All S25E
7.10.2 Supply of Sampling Containers
Selection of binder type other than those specified
above can be considered in special circumstances Supply all sampling containers as required for
and to the approval of the Executive Director Civil sampling purposes.
Construction (Chief Engineer) Civil Services. For − Sample containers are to be leak proof and
example, resealing a heavily cracked surface may having a capacity of not less than one litre.
require a S20E or S25E binder type or crumb
rubber S45R. − Sample containers must be clean, rust free
and capable of receiving a product at high
Material properties for S10E binders and other temperatures.
binder types are contained in the Standard 7.10.3 Definition of Sampling
Specification for Roadworks, Spray Seal section.
− A sample is three containers of product
For further guidance refer to Austroads - Guide to collected at the same time from the same
the Selection and Use of Polymer Modified supply source.
Binders and Multigrades (TT1357 2012)
− One sample container is for the Contractors
Heat to spraying temperature but do not exceed analysis.
the maximum. Avoid heating bitumen in quantities − Two sample containers are for the
excess to requirements Department to analyse.
Prevent foaming. − Note: Refer to the Superintendent for
requirements if samples are non-conforming.
Ensure product meets the requirements of the
specification at point of delivery. 7.10.4 Frequency of Samples
Refer to CONFORMANCE TESTING.
7.9.4 Polymer Modified Binder Coats
7.10.5 Collection of Samples - Witness Point
Provide bitumen in conformance with Table 7.8 –
Polymer Modified Binders for Sprayed Sealing Take samples prior to addition of adhesion
Applications blended with the required polymer agents.
as follows:
Conformance test sampling is to be collected at
Prepare the product in a manufacturing or point of delivery.
blending plant that complies with the “Guide to the
Manufacture, Storage and Handling of Polymer Ensure bulker has adequate sampling cocks
installed so as samples can be taken on transfer

Page 58
from the bulker to the sprayer. Do not take 7.12 PRECOATING AGGREGATE
samples from the spray wagon. All aggregates used must be dry before
Witness Point – Take samples from the point of precoating.
delivery on transfer from the bulker to the sprayer No precoat is required for SAMI and Emulsion
or as directed. Where transfer is for works in the seals, unless stated in the response schedules.
urban area or for small works ensure that Apply a uniform film of precoating material to the
conformance testing is ordered and samples are aggregate.
taken at the point of transfer from bulker to
Aggregate which has been excessively precoated
sprayer.
will be rejected.
All sampling must be in accordance with Precoating is to take place at preapproved site
Australian or Austroads standards. The supplier is stockpile locations unless otherwise approved by
to perform the sampling. Ensure staff carrying out the Superintendent.
sampling are competent in sampling methods.
All precoating must be performed with a powered
Ensure sampling techniques do not allow shaking screen deck precoater which removes
contamination of the samples. dust, dirt and oversize materials and evenly
applies precoat to the aggregate.
Where samples are not collected, 10% reduction
adjustments (Table 21.1 Payment Adjustments 7.13 ADHESION AGENT - MANDATORY
in MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT) will apply to Use 1% adhesion agent in the binder. Written
the total materials represented. Superintendent approval must be obtained for
Refer to Table 7.8 – Polymer Modified Binders variation of this rate.
for Sprayed Sealing Applications. Circulate in binder for 20 minutes before spraying.
7.10.6 Identification of Samples Provide the Superintendent a copy of the Safety
Data Sheet information of the adhesion agent
Mark samples with the following information on
prior to its intended use.
the container at the time of collection.
7.14 SPRAYING – WITNESS POINT
− Container number.
− Sample number. Witness Point - Give the Superintendent
48 hours’ notice of intention to spray bitumen.
− Date and time of sample taken.
Store bitumen at lowest practical temperature and
− Designation or Classification of Materials.
for the shortest possible duration.
− Sample Temperature.
Comply with the following temperature control
− Tanker/Sprayer Identification Number. requirements for polymer modified binders:
− Name of Supplier. Table 7.2 – Temperature control
− Road Name and number. requirements for polymer modified binders
− Site Identification. Property Straight Polymer
− Location and Chainage. Run Binder Modified
7.10.7 Storage and Delivery of Samples Binder
Store all samples taken to prevent accidental Temperature at 175 to 180 to

damage or contamination. Submit sample point of spraying 185 ºC 200 ºC
containers at the completion of each days
spraying. Holding time at 7 days 2 days
spraying maximum maximum
7.10.8 Stockpile Sites
temperature
Refer to Stockpiles clause in MISCELLANEOUS
PROVISIONS. Temperature for 130 to 140 to
7.11 SUPPLY OF AGGREGATE medium term 150 ºC 160 ºC
storage
Supply and deliver aggregate into stockpiles at
the locations specified in the PROJECT 30 days 7 to 10 days
Holding time for
SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS section of the RFT.
medium term
The quantity of aggregate delivered is to be within storage
3
5 % or 20 m of the specified quantity, whichever
Seek approval to vary these requirements.
is the lesser.
Remove bitumen from the site when temperature
limits are exceeded.

Page 59
7.14.1 Atmospheric Conditions − Average Least Dimension (ALD) (1 per

250 tonne - minimum 3 tests)
Commence spraying only when pavement
temperature: − Flakiness Index (FI) of the aggregate, (1 per
250 tonne - minimum 3 tests)
− is in excess of 20ºC, or
− Ball Penetration testing (for new seal work)
− has been in excess of 15ºC for at least one
hour. − Dryback results (for new seal work)
Refer to Conformance Testing for sampling
For cutback work, commence spraying when requirements of aggregates.
pavement temperature is in excess of 10 ºC.
Hold Point – Do not commence spraying until the
For emulsion work, commence spraying when spray rates are advised by the Superintendent.
pavement temperature is in excess of 5 ºC.
Spray rates to be at 15 ºC adjusted in accordance
Cease spraying if rain threatens, or in windy or with Table 7.9 - Bitumen Equivalent Volumes.
dusty conditions.
For primers, primer seals and polymer modified
Protect the work in the event of a sudden change binders, the rate of application refers to the whole
in weather by closing the affected section of road of the mixture, including all modifiers, cutback
or by rigidly controlling traffic speed. materials, combining oils and adhesion agents.
7.14.2 Preparing the Sprayer For enrichments and emulsion seals, the rate of
application refers to the whole of the mixture.
Circulate the mixture.
Check the horizontal and vertical alignment and 7.14.4 Preparation for Sprayer Run – Witness
the cleanliness of the spraybar and its extensions. Point
Determine the appropriate number of nozzles for Record the volume and temperature of the
the width to be sprayed. Ensure the end nozzles sprayer contents while it is on level ground.
fitted are EAN18W.
Supply Sprayer Tank dips before and after each
Check that the nozzles in use are symmetrical sprayer run.
about the sprayer.
Witness Point - Allow visual inspection when
Check the alignment and setting of the nozzle to requested.
ensure that the fans of material from intermediate
nozzles are parallel and at an angle of 30º to the Determine the length of sprayer run from the
centre line of the spraybar. Ensure that the fans available quantity in the sprayer and the
from the end nozzles are parallel to each other application rate. Ensure the area to be sprayed is
and at an angle of 45 degrees to the centre line of not greater than the area that can be covered by
the spraybar. aggregate in the loaded trucks.
Set the height of the spraybar so that the lower Start and finish each spray run on a protective
faces of the nozzles are 250 mm (or that specified strip of paper placed on the pavement. The paper
on the calibration certificate) above the pavement to be wide enough to ensure the sprayed material
when the sprayer is full. is being discharged correctly over the full width of
spray. Place sufficient protective paper to protect
Fit an end shield to the spraybar when necessary road fixtures.
to prevent spraying material on the kerb, or to
counter any wind effects which would compromise Place paper on the pavement and masking
uniform spraying. around areas to be sprayed or wherever the
sprayer is stationary on the road pavement.
Position the guide rod to conform to the setting
out and edges of spray. Check by making a Seal joins are only allowed where line marking is
dummy run. to be placed. No joins are allowed in wheel paths.
7.14.3 Application Spray Rates – Hold Point Excess overspray and spills must be removed
before sealing works proceed.
Application spray rates shall be determined by the
Superintendent, using appropriate Austroads 7.14.5 Installation of Temporary Pavement
design methods. Markers
For new seals and reseals, supply the following to Temporary Pavement Markers to conform to
the Superintendent, 3 working days prior to the AS 1906.3.
planned commencement of sealing, to allow the Spacings of temporary pavement markers to be in
spray rates to be calculated: accordance with AS 1742.
− Particle Size Distribution (1 per 250 tonne -
minimum 3 tests)

Page 60
7.14.6 Sprayer Run Aggregate spread in excess of the application rate

designated in the procedure will be removed and
Attain uniform spraying speed before spraying
stockpiled at full cost to the Contractor.
commences.
7.15.1 Aggregate Spread Rates
Avoid an excess or deficiency of material due to
faulty overlap at longitudinal joints when spraying Spread the aggregate evenly and uniformly over
a road in half-widths. the sprayed surface at a rate complying with
Table 7.3 – Aggregate spread rates.
Overlap to be 300 mm with an intermediate
nozzle. Use a mechanical automated spreader, manual
spreader boxes are not to be used.
Do not use end nozzles on an overlap.
Rerun or hand cover bare or insufficiently covered
Make allowances for “Fog Spraying” when joining
areas after the first spreading.
to existing seals.
Remove all excess aggregate.
Cease spraying before the level of material in the
tank falls to a level which reduces the full Table 7.3 – Aggregate spread rates
discharge of the pump.
Remove and dispose of all paper as per the EMP. Straight Run Binder Coats
Clean off any sprayed material from road fixtures. Aggregate Traffic Application Rate
Size Volume
7.14.7 Hand Spraying
Plan work to minimise the requirement for the use 10mm and >200 900/ALD m2/m3
of a hand sprayer. greater vehicles/day
Any strips of pavement not adequately covered 10mm and < 200 850/ALD m2/m3
with sprayed material to be sprayed later with the greater vehicles/day
hand attachment.
7mm and 900/ALD m2/m3
7.15 APPLICATION OF AGGREGATE – less
HOLD POINT
Supply current test results of materials to be used.
Load aggregate into tip trucks using an approved Polymer Modified Binder Coats
aggregate loader which removes dust, dirt and
Aggregate Traffic Application Rate
oversize stone while applying precoat. Size Volume
Hold Point - Obtain approval from the
Superintendent for use of the proposed aggregate 10mm and >300 750/ALD m2/m3
loader before commencing aggregate loading greater vehicles/day
operations.
10mm and < 300 800/ALD m2/m3
Apply aggregate to sprayed binder within: greater vehicles/day
− 10 minutes where the pavement temperature 7mm and 160 – 200
is 20ºC or greater. less m2/m3
− 5 minutes where the pavement temperature is
between 15 and 20ºC. Two Coat Seals
Polymer Modified Binders: Apply aggregate within Aggregate Application Rate

5 minutes irrespective of pavement temperature. Size m2/m3
Apply aggregate to emulsion coat before the 10 1050 – 1100 /
emulsion breaks. ALD
Spread the aggregate evenly and uniformly over
2 3
the sprayed surface at a rate of 900/ALD m /m . 7 (ALD 1100 – 1150 /
Seek approval for variations to this rate. known) ALD
Use a mechanical spreader. 5 or 7 (no 250 - 300

ALD)
places after the first spreading. 5 or 7 (no 175 - 225
ALD)

Page 61
7.15.2 Rolling Rate Using a suction type broom to sweep all loose
aggregate from the carriageway at completion of
Roll the treated surface with self-propelled rubber
rolling, remove from site.
tyred rollers with a minimum tyre pressure of
600 kPa and a minimum wheel load of 1 tonne. Re-roll the surface after sweeping to ensure
uniform bedding of aggregate in binder.
Roller speed on the first pass to be between 5 and
10 km/h, with subsequent passes between 15 and 7.16 TRAFFIC ON RESEALS
25 km/h.
Cross reference: PROVISION FOR TRAFFIC,
Conform to the following: Workzone Traffic Management, Traffic Escort
Vehicle- Reseal Works.
− Entire area to receive one roller pass
immediately after covering. Co-ordinate work to minimise traffic delays.
− 75% of rolling within 1 hour of covering. Prohibit traffic:
− 100% of rolling within 2 hours of covering. − until at least 3 passes of a roller has taken
place or until sufficient rolling has taken place
Minimum Rolling Rate: 1 roller hour per to prevent damage to the applied seal,
2,000 litres of binder. whichever is greater; and
Ensure a uniform distribution of aggregate. Drag − from adjacent strip of roadway during
broom to distribute surplus aggregate but do not spraying.
dislodge embedded aggregate. Drag broom Sweep all loose aggregate from the carriageway
before 50% of rolling is complete. Drag brooms at completion of rolling.
are no to be rotary brooms.
7.17 WASTE MATERIAL
For two coat treatments, double the specified Refer to the Northern Territory Government
rolling rate if the second coat is to be applied Standard Specification for Environmental
immediately or the surface is not to be trafficked. Management and to the RFT.
Roll in daylight hours only.
In urban areas, remove all excess aggregate by
Sweep all loose aggregate from the carriageway suction broom. Ensure no aggregates are
at completion of rolling. distributed onto the verge.
Ensure aggregate on the final surface is uniformly Remove from the site and legally dispose of all
distributed and firmly held by the binder. waste material.
Adjust drag broom to distribute surplus aggregate, Clean and remove all aggregate from the
but not to dislodge embedded aggregate. Ensure shoulders and verges in urban areas.
aggregate on the final surface is uniformly Urban areas aggregate removal / sweeping
distributed, and firmly held by binder. regime:
Re-roll the surface after sweeping to ensure Initial sweep after rolling has concluded
uniform bedding of aggregate in binder. Second sweep after 24 hours
Third sweep after 48 hours.
7.15.3 Rolling Rate Airstrips Sweep all aggregate from the extremities of the
Roll the treated surface with at least one self- shoulders in rural areas.
propelled rubber tyred roller with a minimum 7.18 REPORTING
weight of 20 tonnes.
7.18.1 Spraysheets
Rubber Tyred Minimum Rolling Rate: One 20 Supply to the Superintendent at the end of each
tonne roller hour per 800 litres of binder. days production spraysheets that record the
Steel Drum Roller Minimum Rolling Rate: One following information for all spray runs conducted.
pass on the second coat.
− Contractors Name
Ensure a uniform distribution of aggregate. Drag − Project Details
broom to distribute surplus aggregate but fo not
− Contract Number
dislodge embedded aggregate. Drag broom
before 50% of rolling is complete. Drag brooms − Specification schedule number
are not to be rotary brooms. − Road Name
Ensure aggregate on the final surface is uniformly − Product Type Sprayed
distributed and firmly held by the binder. − Precoat type used, Precoat litres / m3
Roll in daylight hours only. − Aggregate supplier, Aggregate Type,
Aggregate size
− Run number, Start Time of spray run
Page 62
− Pavement Temperature, Ambient

Temperature
− Start Chainage of spray run – actual km of
road
− End chainage of spray run – actual km of road
− Total Length, Width of spray run
− Total area of spray run
− Temperature of product at spraying
− Start Dip, End Dip
− Total sprayed hot, Correction factor, Total
sprayed cold
− Application rate cold
− Ordered application rate
− Percent of application rate ordered
− Number of rollers used
− Bitumen sample number
− Signature of contractor representative
− Signature section for client representative
7.19 CONFORMANCE
7.19.1 Tolerances
Final surfaces shall conform to the following:
Aggregates are to conform to Table 7.5 -
Aggregate Properties. Refer to Clause 7.22 for
Tables
Skid resistance determined by NTTM 304.1.
Final surfaces with non-conforming skid
resistance will be rejected.
Rectify non-conforming work by methods
approved by the Superintendent. Rectification
work is at the Contractor’s expense, including the
cost of testing.
Remove from the site binder which has been
overheated or has deteriorated or become
contaminated prior to its application to the road.
Spray rates applied at less than 95% or more than
105% of the rate indicated in the procedure will be
rectified by resurfacing at the Contractor’s
expense inclusive of all materials.
7.20 ADJUSTMENT TO VOLUMES FOR
SPRAY RATES
This includes the prime coat, enrichment coat,
emulsion coat, primerseal and seal coats.
Refer to Table 7.9 - Bitumen Equivalent
Volumes and MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
CLAUSES for schedules of adjustments.

Page 63
7.22 TABLES
Table 7.4 - Aggregate Grading and Average Least Dimension

Sieve Size % Passing (Dry Mass)
(mm) Nominal Size of Aggregate
20 mm 16 mm 14 mm 10 mm 7 mm 5 mm
26.5 100
19.0 85 - 100 100
16.0 - 80 - 100 100
13.2 0 - 15 0 – 20 85 - 100 100
9.5 0-5 0–2 0 - 15 85 - 100 100
6.7 0-2 0-5 0 - 15 85 - 100 100
4.75 0-2 0-5 0 - 15 85 - 100
2.36 0-2 0-5 0 - 15
1.18 0-2 0-5
Min. ALD * 12.0mm 9.5mm 8.0mm 5.5mm 3.5mm 2.5mm
* Refer to Test Methods AS 1141.20.1, AS 1141.20.2. - Direct Measurement.
Table 7.5 - Aggregate Properties
Traffic Count
(Annual Average Daily Traffic (AADT):
Aggregate Property Two Lanes)
Less than 300 to More Than

300 VPD * 6,000 VPD 6,000 VPD
AS 1141.14 Misshapen Particles: Calliper Ratio 2:1 25 % max 15 % max 12 % max

AS 1141.15 Flakiness Index 35 max 30 max 25 max
AS 1141.23 Los Angeles Abrasion (LAA):
Fine Grained Aggregate 30 % max 25 % max 20 % max
Coarse Grained Aggregate 40 % max 35 % max 30 % max
AS 1141.24 Sulphate Soundness 15 % max 12 % max 10 % max
AS 1141.40, AS 1141.41 Polished Aggregate Friction
40 min 40 min 45 min
Value
* VPD (Vehicle per day).
AS 1141.18: Crushed particles in coarse aggregate derived from gravel. Ensure 80% minimum by mass is
classified as crushed particles.
AS 1141.25.1 Degradation factor – Source rock (Washington Degradation Test). Igneous rocks shall have a
minimum value of 50.
AS 1141.26 Secondary minerals content in igneous rocks shall not exceed 25 %.
AS 1141.29 Accelerated soundness index by reflux. Igneous rocks shall have a minimum value of 94.
AS 1141.50 Resistance to stripping of cover aggregates from binders. The maximum stripping value of
precoated aggregate (precoat shall contain 1 % adhesion agent.) shall be 10 %.

Page 64
Table 7.6 - Cut Back Bitumen Properties
Class Viscosity (Dynamic) At Approximate Parts Bitumen Spraying Temperature

AS 2157 60ºC Pa.sec To Cutter deg. C
Light
AMC 00 0.008 - 0.016 100 - 100 Ambient
AMC 0 0.025 - 0.05 100 - 80 35 - 55
AMC 1 0.06 - 0.12 100 - 50 60 - 80
Medium
AMC 2 0.22 - 0.44 100 - 40 75 - 100
AMC 3 0.55 - 1.10 100 - 30 95 - 115
AMC 4 2.0 - 4.0 100 - 20 110 - 135
Heavy
AMC 5 5.5 - 11.0 100 - 12 120 - 150
AMC 6 13.0 - 26.0 100 - 7 135 - 160
AMC 7 43.0 - 86.0 100 - 3 150 - 175
Table 7.7 – Base Binder for Polymer Modified Bitumen

Specification limit Specification limit
Property
minimum maximum
o
Viscosity at 60 C, Pa.s 140 380
o
Viscosity at 135 C, Pa.s 0.25 0.65
o
Penetration at 25 C (100g, 5s),pu (pu unit is
40
0.1mm)
o
Flashpoint C 250 N/A
Matter Insoluble in toluene, percent mass N/A 1.0
Short Term effect of heat and air
(Rolling Thin film Oven Test)
o N/A
Viscosity of residue at 60 C as a
300
percentage of original
Long term effect of Heat and air, days 7
o 3
Density at 15 C, t/m TBR

Page 65
Table 7.8 – Polymer Modified Binders for Sprayed Sealing Applications

Test Method Binder Property PMB Class
S10E S20E S25E S35E S45R S55R
PEFORMANCE RELATED PROPERTIES
AGPT/T121 Consistency at 60 ºC (Pa.sec) min. 400 2000 6000 350 1800 4000
AGPT/T121 Stiffness at 15 ºC (kPa) max. 140 130 95 160 180 140
AGPT/T131 Softening Point (ºC) min. 48 65 80 48 55 62
AGPT/T132 Compression Limit at 70 ºC, 2kg (mm) min. NA NA NA NA 0.2 0.2
INDEX PROPERTIES
AGPT/T121 Elastic Recovery at 60 ºC, 100s (%) min. NA NA 85 NA 25 35
AGPT/T121 Elastic Recovery at 15 ºC, 100s (%) min. NA NA 65 NA 30 50
AGPT/T124 Toughness at 4 ºC, 100mm (Nm) min. TBR TBR TBR TBR TBR TBR
HANDLING PROPERTIES
AGPT/T103 Loss on Heating (% mass) max. 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6
AGPT/T111 Viscosity at 165 ºC (Pa.sec) max. 0.55 0.55 0.8 0.55 4.5 4.5
AGPT/T112 Flash Point (ºC) min. 250 250 250 250 250 250
PRODUCTION CONTROL
AGPT/T122 Torsional Recovery at 25 ºC, 30s (%) min. 22 50 52 16 25 30
AGPT/T141 Rubber Content by analysis (%) NA NA NA NA TBR TBR
Note 1. Class of PMB: S=Sealing, E=Elastomeric Polymer, R=Granulated Crumbed Rubber
Note 2. NA means not applicable for that PMB class, TBR = To be reported
Note 3. AG:PT Test Methods are available from Austroads Guide to Pavement Technology Part 4H: Test Methods
Note 4. Manufacturers to target consistency of 450 Pa.sec at 60 ºC for S10E, within the range 400 to 600 Pa.sec.
Note 5. Manufacturers to target consistency of 3200 Pa.sec at 60 ºC for S20E, within the range 2000 to 5000 Pa.sec.

Page 66
Table 7.9 - Bitumen Equivalent Volumes
Equivalent Volumes of Bituminous Material Measured at Higher Temperature Converted to 15ºC (15ºC Converted Higher Temperature).
Interpolate to determine equivalent volumes at temperatures other than those shown.
TEMP.(ºC) FACTOR TEMP.(ºC) FACTOR

15 1.0000 (1.0000) 120 0.9356 (1.0688)
40 0.9844 (1.0158) 130 0.9296 (1.0757)
50 0.9782 (1.0223) 140 0.9237 (1.0826)
60 0.9720 (1.0288) 150 0.9178 (1.0896)
70 0.9659 (1.0353) 160 0.9119 (1.0966)
80 0.9597 (1.0420) 170 0.9060 (1.1038)
90 0.9537 (1.0486) 180 0.9002 (1.1109)
100 0.9476 (1.0553) 190 0.8944 (1.1181)
110 0.9416 (1.0620) 200 0.8886 (1.1253)
210 0.8829 (1.1326)

Page 67
BITUMINOUS SURFACE MAINTENANCE
8. BITUMINOUS SURFACE MAINTENANCE size is determined optically under a petrographic

microscope or by calibrated hand lens.
8.1 OUTLINE DESCRIPTION Flux oil
This section specifies the repairs and minor A petroleum distillate added to bitumen produce a
rehabilitation to existing bituminous surfaces and long term reduction in its viscosity.
pavements with asphalt, and includes the repair of Hot mix asphalt
potholes, edge defects, surface deformations and
A hot mixed homogeneous blend of bitumen,
cracks.
aggregates, sand, mineral fillers produced at an
This section specifies the requirement for sealing approved asphalt plant. It is delivered, placed and
2
works of less than 300m in area. compacted hot.
8.2 STANDARDS Ensure that the asphalt has a current mix design
Comply with the Acts, Regulations, Guidelines to the requirements of AGPT Part 4B Asphalt.
and Codes applicable to the works. Comply with Job mix
the requirements of Authorities with jurisdiction The mix utilised for asphalt surfacing which is
over the works. Conform to the Standards and determined from laboratory testing of proposed
Publications quoted throughout this document materials and complies with the specified
unless specified otherwise. Refer to properties.
NATA
Refer to Standards in SPRAY SEALING.
National Association of Testing Authorities.
NTCP
Refer to the Northern Territory Government Northern Territory Code of Practice.
NTMTM
Northern Territory Materials Testing Manual.
Traffic Escort
NTTM
Refer to PROVISION FOR TRAFFIC, WorkZone
Northern Territory Test Methods.
Traffic management, Traffic Escort Vehicle –
Reseal works. Pavement Profiling
The use of a pavement profiler to remove worn,
8.3 DEFINITIONS
oxidised, aged or out of shape pavements, and for
Reference should be made to AUSTROADS – correcting poor surface conditions to make the
AP-C87-15 Austroads Glossary of Terms to give pavement suitable for re-sheeting or resealing.
definitions on all aspects of Bituminous Surfacing
PMB
works where required.
Polymer Modified Binder.
Adhesion agent
Precoating material
A substance used for the purpose of promoting
the adhesion between binder and aggregate. A material used for precoating aggregate to
promote adhesion of bitumen. Do not use diesel.
ASTM
Prime
American Society for Testing and Materials.
An application of a Primer to a prepared base
Coarse grained aggregate
without cover aggregate to provide penetration of
Where the average grain size of the constituent the surface temporary waterproofing and to obtain
minerals is greater than 1mm. The average grain a bond between the pavement and the
size is determined optically under a petrographic subsequent seal or asphalt. It is a preliminary
microscope or by calibrated hand lens. treatment to a more permanent bituminous
Cold Mix Asphalt surface. Do not use diesel products.
A premix, blended from bitumen, aggregate, sand, Primerseal
and mineral filler, and having a flux oil in the An application of primer binder with a fine cover
binder. It is workable at ambient temperatures. aggregate to a prepared base to provide
Cutter penetration of the surface and retain a light cover
A light petroleum distillate (kerosene) added to aggregate. Do not use diesel products.
bitumen to temporarily reduce its viscosity. Reseal
DoI A seal applied to an existing sealed, asphalt or
Department of Infrastructure. concrete surface.
Fine grained aggregate Regulation patching
Where the average grain size of the constituent Surface repairs and shape correction without dig-
minerals is less than 1 mm. The average grain out and/or squaring up, will usually not be straight

Page 68
sided due to irregularities in the pavement and Trim edges to sound material, creating angle
feathering repair techniques. sides to the bottom.
Reconstruction patching Tack coat the sides, bottom and lip of pothole for
Repairs with profiling, dig-out and/or squaring up, a minimum width of 20 mm with bitumen
may be confined to the surface course or extend emulsion. Remove excess tack coat. Place
through all courses. patching material in layers no greater than 3 times
the nominal size, and thoroughly compact.
Seal
Finish the pothole slightly higher than adjacent
A sprayed application of bituminous binder into
pavement surface, between 3 mm and 5 mm.
which aggregate is incorporated. May include
more than one application of binder and Level the patch by hand raking, motor grader or
aggregate, and may include geotextile fabric. pull type blade.
Wearing surface Remove all loose aggregate around the edges of
the patch so patch can be raked and rolled to a
The section of pavement upon which the traffic
smooth junction with the old surface.
travels. This includes the layer(s) of asphalt or
spray seal in a flexible pavement above the base. Compact asphalt material with hand tamper for
small holes and where possible, compact by using
8.4 IDENTIFICATION AND TYPES OF a rammer or vibrating plate.
FAILURES
Compact large patches with a vibrating smooth
The Superintendent will identify the defect and drum roller.
then order the appropriate method of repair by
Hot mix can be topped with a light application of
issue of a Contractor Service Request (CSR).
sand to prevent pick up. Remove all waste
Defect types are grouped into one of the following materials from the road reserves and dispose in
modes of pavement distress; an approved manner.
Deformations: 8.5.2 Temporary patching – Hold Point
Includes: corrugations, depressions, rutting, and Hold point - Temporary patching with aggregate
shoving. and emulsion requires approval of the
Cracks Superintendent. For such work, keep traffic off the
Cracks promote water entry and can be a primary patch until patch is stable.
cause of other defects including deformations and 8.5.3 Regulation Patching
potholes. Patch defect areas where only the surface needs
Edge breaks repair. Applies to deformations.
Occur along the interface of a sealed pavement The Superintendent will specify the suitable type
and unsealed shoulder. of hot mix asphalt for the patch material in the
Potholes CSR.
Steep sided or bowl shaped cavities or Remove all debris and any loose materials on the
delaminations extending into layers below the pavement.
wearing course, usually due to failures associated Repair any potholes or cracks as required, refer
with an aged, cracked or debonded bituminous other clauses.
surface. Apply a tack coat to the area under repair at the
Patch application rate to suit surface conditions.
An area of pavement surface where the original Supply, place, spread and compact the asphalt in
has been replaced or covered. layers until finished surface is flush with the
Surface texture deficiencies existing surface.
Includes polishing, ravelling, bleeding. Generally Compact in layers approximately 3 times the size
rectified by reseal not specified in this section. of the mix aggregate and bring up to surface in
layers level with the intended surface profile.
8.5 REPAIR OPERATIONS
Compact smaller holes with vibrating plate
Undertake repair operations to rectify identified compactor and/or mechanical tampers.
distress modes.
Compact larger patches with a small vibrating
8.5.1 Pothole Patching roller.
Applies to potholes, delaminations, and edge Depending on the size of the patch, level by hand
break defects. raking, a pull type drag, or paver.
Hole must be meticulously cleaned before repair, Remove all aggregate larger than the feather
all loose and unbounded material must be edge so that the edges of the patch can be raked
removed. and rolled to a smooth junction with the old
surface.

Page 69
Brush off and remove all loose material from area. cement for granular materials or 3% lime for clay
2
8.5.4 Reconstruction Patching materials. (Allow 10 kg/ m for 150 mm depth).
Patch defect areas requiring squaring up and or Supply, place, spread, mix and compact base
the removal of distressed pavement. course gravel in 100 mm maximum layers until
flush with the existing surface.
The Superintendent will specify the suitable type
and size hot mix asphalt for patch material in the Broom the surface of the patch and remove waste
CSR. material from the site.
Excavate the area to the required depth with Apply spray seal or emulsion to the patch and
reclaimer/profiler plant, and clean excavation of all overlap the existing surfacing by 100 mm.
loose aggregate, dust and water. Apply 10 mm size aggregate to the surface.
Cut back the edges of the hole to sound material, Rectify any failure of the surfacing at no additional
cut the side vertically in order to provide shoulders cost.
against the movement of the patch, and square 8.5.6 Crack Sealing
the bottom.
For cracks wide enough to be treated, first clean
Square up the surface shape of the patch to the crack with air pressure, and then fill with a
provide a neat appearance. Refer to Pothole binder having viscosity low enough to enable it to
patching clause. be poured or worked into cracks.
Apply a tack coat to the sides and bottom of the Do not undertake crack sealing when wet.
hole. Avoid applying too much tack coat so as not
Take care to ensure that the cutback bitumen,
to induce a condition known as a fatty patch.
bitumen emulsion, rubberised bitumen or latex
Supply, place, spread and compact the asphalt in modified bitumen used does not bridge across the
layers in the hole until finished surface is flush crack at the surface.
with existing surface.
Assist the binder to penetrate cracks by using a
Compact in layers approximately 3 times the size squeegee.
of the mix aggregate and bring up to surface in
Lightly sand the surface to prevent traffic picking
layers level with the intended surface profile.
up surplus binder if necessary.
Depending on the size of the patch, level by hand
For wide cracks, first clean the crack and fill with
raking, a pull type drag, or paver.
fine asphalt or bituminous slurry.
Remove all aggregate larger than the feather
Large areas with fine cracks and minimal
edge so that the edges of the patch can be raked
pavement distortion will be spray sealed, slurry
and rolled to a smooth junction with the old
sealed or resurfaced with plant mix, in accordance
surface.
with other sections of the specification.
Compact larger patches with a small vibrating
roller. 8.6 MATERIALS
Depending on the size of the patch, level by hand 8.6.1 Aggregates
raking, a pull type drag, or paver. The combined particle size distribution to be in
Remove all waste materials from the road accordance with Table 8.7 – Mix Proportions
reserve. Waste stock piles are not permitted for Refer to Clause 8.19 for Tables
any duration.
8.5.5 Reconstruction Patching – Alternative COARSE AGGREGATES
Method Ensure that coarse aggregates are clean, hard,
Obtain the prior approval of the Superintendent to high strength, angular, skid resistant, durable
use this method of reconstruction patching where crushed stone of uniform quality and free from
asphalt is not locally available. laminated particles, clay and other aggregations
of fine material, soil, organic matter and any other
Excavate the distressed pavement to sound
deleterious material. Conform to the following:
material or to a depth of 300 mm.
Proportion of misshapen particles: 15 % maximum
Square up the surface shape of the patch to
at 2:1 calliper ratio.
provide a neat appearance.
Los Angeles Abrasion (LAA);
Clean the excavation of all loose material, dust
and water. − Fine grained aggregate: 30% maximum loss.
Cut back the edges of the hole to sound material. − Coarse grained aggregate: 35% maximum
Cut the sides vertically in order to provide loss.
shoulders against movement of the patch, and − Sulphate Soundness: 12% maximum loss.
square the bottom.
− Polished Aggregate Friction Value:
If sound material is not reached at 300 mm depth, 45 minimum.
stabilise the subgrade 150 mm deep with 3%

Page 70
FINE AGGREGATES 8.7.2 Definition of sampling

Ensure that fine aggregates are clean, hard, - Refer to NTMTM
sharp, washed, durable natural sand and/or - A sample is three containers of product
material manufactured from crushed stone of collected at the same time from the same
uniform quality and free from clay and other supply source.
aggregations of fine material, soil, organic matter
- One sample container is for the Contractor’s
and any other deleterious material.
analysis.
8.6.2 Mineral Filler
- Two samples containers are for the
A finely divided mineral material, hydrated lime or Department to analyse.
cement with a particle size smaller than
8.7.3 Frequency of samples
0.075 mm.
Use filler that is dry, free from lumps, clay, organic Refer to CONFORMANCE TESTING and to
material or any other deleterious material, and Conformance clauses in this section.
complies in all other respects with the 8.7.4 Additive
requirements of AS 2150.
An additive may be proposed provided that full
8.6.3 Bituminous Binder details of the type of additive are provided and the
Standard Classes of bitumen to conform to the mix design standards of the Proportioning Of
requirements of AS 2008. Mixes clauses in this section are attained.
Durability Value in accordance with AS 2341.13 – 8.8 PROPORTIONING OF MIXES FOR HOT MIX
Long-term exposure of bitumen to heat and air ASPHALT
shall be a minimum of 7 days with no maximum
8.8.1 Mix Type for Hot Mix Asphalt
value.
8.6.4 Bitumen Emulsion The Superintendent will order Rural and/or Urban
Mix Type Number with issue of CSR.
A rapid setting bitumen emulsion made with
8.8.2 Manufacture of Hot Mix Asphalt
bitumen.
Mix in a plant capable of producing asphalt that
8.6.5 Cut Back Bitumen/Prime complies with the approved design mix.
Conform to the requirements of AS 2157 and Bitumen temperature: 135ºC to 160ºC prior to
Table 7.6 - Cut Back Bitumen Properties. mixing.
Designation is by AMC class. Heat aggregates to such a temperature that when
Refer to Clause 7.22 for Table filler and binder are added, the temperature of the
mixed asphalt is between 135ºC and 170ºC.
8.6.6 Cutter 8.8.3 Mix Assessment and Approval of Hot
Cutter to be Kerosene. Mix Asphalt Types
Do not use diesel products Provide current mix design to Level 1.and Level 3
8.6.7 Precoat and Adhesion Agents as per AGPT Part 4 B Asphalt.
Precoat all aggregates to conform to the following: Conform to the minimum mix requirements as
shown in Table 8.1 - Properties of Hot Mix
− Adhesion agent (by volume): minimum 1 % Asphalt.
precoat.
− Bitumen residue (by mass): minimum 50 % Table 8.1 - Properties of Hot Mix Asphalt
precoat. Marshall
Rural Urban
− Kerosene (by mass): 50% Characteristics
− Viscosity (Dynamic) at 60ºC: 0.003 to Compactive effort
0.020 Pa. (number of blows each 50 75
8.7 SAMPLING OF BINDER end of specimen):
8.7.1 Supply of Sampling Containers Stability of mix (kN): 5 min. 10 min.
Supply all sampling containers as required for Flow (mm): 2–5 2–5
sampling purposes.
Air voids (%): 3–7 3–7
- Sample containers are to be leak proof and
having a capacity of not less than two litres. Voids in mineral
14 min. 14 min.
aggregate (%):
- Sample containers must be clean, rust free
and capable of receiving a product at high Wheel tracking 10000
5 + or - 1 5 + or - 1
temperatures. passes

Page 71
Conform to Table 8.7 – Mix Proportions, Table 8.11 TRANSPORT AND SUPPLY
8.8 – Aggregate and Mineral Filler Mix Insulate the bodies of trucks, block out corners
Proportions and Table 8.9 – Total Mix with timber, and cover the body with a fitted
Proportions of Cold Mix Asphalt. tarpaulin when transporting distance is over 20 km
Refer to Clause 8.19 for Tables or when temperatures are below 20ºC.
8.12 SPREADING AND LAYING
8.9 PROPORTIONING OF MIXES FOR COLD
MIX ASPHALT Lay the final surface layer at a uniform thickness,
and as one continuous operation.
8.9.1 Mix Type for Cold Mix Asphalt
Construct a transverse joint whenever the
The Superintendent will order the Mix Type
operation ceases.
Number with issue of a CSR.
Remove from site, prior to initial rolling, asphalt
8.9.2 Manufacture of Cold Mix Asphalt
which has cooled below the required initial rolling
Dry mix aggregate and mineral filter to provide a temperature.
homogenous blend.
Hand spread in locations where mechanical
Add bituminous binder until the specified spreading is not practical, and to correct localised
percentage is reached. depressions or irregularities.
Carry out further mixing until a minimum of 90 % Take the asphalt directly from the spreader
of the coarse aggregate particles are coated. hopper or dump asphalt onto metal sheets or
Add additional bitumen so that a satisfactory mix existing hard clean surfaces. Do not dump asphalt
can be achieved, if so directed by the directly onto the area where it is to be spread.
Superintendent. Complete the work as one continuous operation.
Refer to Table 8.8 – Aggregate and Mineral Remove from site all excess or spilt asphalt.
Filler Mix Proportions and Table 8.9 – Total Mix
8.12.1 Minimum Temperatures of Hot Mix
Proportions of Cold Mix Asphalt.
Asphalt
Refer to Clause 8.19 for Tables Conform to the minimum laying and initial rolling
temperatures.
Cease laying asphalt during heavy or continuous
Table 8.2 - Specification Limits for the Binder rain, or in wet conditions where the material will
Mix of Cold Mix Asphalt not adhere or key to the surface.
Bitumen 100 parts Laying temperature: 135ºC.
Initial rolling temperature: 105ºC.
Flux Between 5 and 15 parts, depending
8.12.2 Joints Generally
on location and climatic conditions.
Minimise the number of longitudinal and
Will be specified on the CSR.
transverse joints.
Cutter 10 parts Offset joints in multiple layer work by at least
100 mm so that joints in the surface course do not
8.10 SURFACE PREPARATION overlay joints in the previous course.
8.10.1 Existing Bitumen and Concrete Overlap the finished asphalt by 25 to 75 mm when
Surfaces spreading.
Remove all vegetation, loose and extraneous Push the overlap asphalt back immediately to
matter. form a ridge along the joint.
8.10.2 Tack Coat Roll the ridge to form a smooth joint.
Apply a fine spray of bitumen emulsion lightly and Remove excess asphalt prior to final rolling.
evenly over the whole of the area to be covered
with asphalt. Prevent the accumulation of coarse particles
along the joint by raking.
Hand spray only in areas where it is impractical to
use a spray bar. 8.12.3 Transverse Joints
Application rate: Residual Binder 0.2 to 0.6 Form by cutting the end of the spread material to
2
litres/m . a vertical face and remove loose material.
Allow the tack coat to ‘break’ before laying the Check the surface adjacent to the joint with a
asphalt. straight edge and correct any surface defects
immediately.
Clean and tack coat existing asphalt face against
which new work is to be laid. Treat the face of the joint with bitumen emulsion
tack coat prior to spreading adjacent section.

Page 72
Provide ramps of compacted asphalt (maximum 8.13.3 Intermediate Rolling

grade 5% relative to pavement grade) when joints Roll with a self-propelled pneumatic tyred roller of
are left overnight on trafficked pavements. at least 10 tonnes mass, a minimum tyre pressure
8.12.4 Longitudinal Joints of 550 kPa and a minimum total load of 1 tonne
Keep joints straight or follow the line of curvature. on each tyre. Increase the load to 2 tonnes per
tyre where practicable.
Minimise the unsupported length left overnight.
Ensure tyre pressures are uniform and maintained
Rectify broken sections of unsupported edge by
within 5% of the specified figure.
cutting a vertical face before resuming laying.
Rolling surfaces to be smooth.
Treat the face of the joint with bitumen emulsion
tack coat prior to spreading adjacent section. 8.13.4 Final Rolling
Longitudinal joints shall not be left overnight on a Roll with a steel wheeled roller as used for initial
pavement in use by traffic. rolling.
Transverse Match of Overlay to Existing 8.13.5 Joint Compaction
Pavement: Compact all joints and edges.
− Saw cut existing asphalt pavement 20 mm Roll all joints.
depth along the match line of joint. Overlap joints in adjoining runs by a minimum of
− Remove taper wedge of existing asphalt 1m.
pavement along the overlay side of match 8.13.6 Rolling Speed
joint. Steel wheeled roller: 1.5 m/sec. maximum,
− Feather the asphalt overlay down to the steady and uniform.
existing pavement to achieve a maximum Pneumatic tyred roller: 0.75 m/sec. maximum for
slope of 1 in 40 and for the full width of the the first pass. 4.5 m/sec. maximum for
pavement. subsequent passes.
− Ensure depth of overlay above existing Avoid abrupt stops and starts.
pavement in taper wedge area is not less than
8.13.7 Vibrating Plant
20 mm.
8.13 COMPACTION Table 8.3 - Vibrating Plant Specifications
8.13.1 General Property Requirement
For large patches, compact by using at least two Mass: 6 tonnes minimum.
rollers, one pneumatic tyred and one tandem steel
wheeled. Drum width: 1.5 m minimum.
Provide additional steel wheeled roller(s) for each Vibrating 2,000 – 3,000 cycles per
additional 30 tonne (or part thereof) spread in frequency: minute.
excess of 30 tonne per hour.
Amplitude range: 0.4 – 8.0 mm.
Stand compaction plant clear of new asphalt
surface. Initial passes (not less than two) to be non-
Plant or vehicles which have fuel or oil leaks are vibrating.
to be removed from site. Provide steel wheeled rollers with adjustable
Defer rolling if excessive displacement of the scrapers and keep drums moist with water.
asphalt occurs but only until the asphalt has Disengage vibrator when accelerating,
cooled sufficiently to permit rolling to continue. decelerating or standing.
Do not use chemicals or detergents in rollers; use 8.13.8 Deep Lift Rolling Pattern
water only. Sanding of the asphalt area is required Applies to asphalt placed in layers exceeding
for rolling purposes. 75 mm compacted thickness.
Remove sand before opening to traffic. Asphalt to be placed and compacted in layers not
exceeding 150 mm maximum.
8.13.2 Initial Rolling
Commence rolling not less than 300 mm clear of
Roll immediately behind the spreader using a the edge of asphalt that is laterally unsupported.
steel wheeled roller having a minimum weight of 8
tonnes and a maximum unit load on the rear drum Advance outwards towards the edge in 100 mm
equivalent to 55 kN/m width of drum. increments.
Provide steel wheeled rollers with adjustable Delay rolling within 200 mm of an unsupported
scrapers and keep the drums moist with water. edge to allow mix cooling and minimise distortion.
Prevent the mix from sticking to the drums. Complete rolling in such time that specified
densities are obtained.
Avoid ponding of water on the pavement surface.

Page 73
8.13.9 Hand Tampers − Maintain a register of all lots and lot numbers.
Compact by vibratory plates or hand tampers in − Include the location of the lot on the lot
location inaccessible to rollers. register.
Side tamp before rolling the edge of all asphalt
which is not laterally supported.
Table 8.5 - Asphalt Testing Frequencies
Finish hand tamped surfaces smoothly,
conforming to machine finished areas. Minimum
Test Method No. Test Method Test
8.14 CONFORMANCE
Frequency
8.14.1 Conformance Testing
AS/NZS 2891.3.1
The Contractor will be responsible for process Bitumen
control testing. AS/NZS 2891.3.2 1 per 50 t
content
The Superintendent will carry out all conformance AS/NZS 2891.3.3
testings through Panel Period Contracts. Mixing
The Contractor will be responsible for ordering the - Every mix
temperature
conformance tests.
Laying Every
8.14.2 Tolerances -
temperature 30 minutes
Conform to the following:
AS/NZS 2891.7.1
Surface to be smooth, dense and true to shape. Density 1 per 50 t
AS/NZS 2891.7.3
− Thickness: Not less than specified.
− Surface levels: 0 to + 10 mm maximum AS/NZS 2891.1.1
deviation from design level. AS 2891.1.2 Thickness 1 per density
− Straight edge deviation: 5 mm maximum in AS 2891.1.3
3 m. Particle size
AS/NZS 2891.3.1 1 per 50 t
− Surface roughness: IRI 2.4 maximum. distribution
AS/NZS 2891.3.2
− Skid resistance: Not less than specified in 1 per
NTTM 304.1. AS/NZS 2891.3.3 Viscosity
10,000 L
− Bitumen content: Maximum variation 0.3%
Stability of
by mass. AS/NZS 2891.5 1 per 50 t
mix
− Job mix: Within the following variation limits.
AS/NZS 2891.5 Flow 1 per 50 t
Table 8.4 - Job Mix Variation Limits
AS/NZS 2891.8 Air voids 1 per 50 t
AS Sieve (mm) % Passing (By Mass)
Voids in
4.75 or larger + or – 7 AS/NZS 2891.8 mineral 1 per 50 t
2.36 + or – 5 aggregate
1.18 to 0.30.150 + or – 4
Lots of work will be selected by the Contractor,
0.15 + or – 3 based upon:
0.075 + or – 2 − Lot will represent no more than one shift’s
production.
8.14.3 Conformance Sampling and Testing
Sample materials as directed by Superintendent − Lots will be continuous and have been
brought to completion at the same time.
8.14.4 Asphalt Testing Frequencies − Lot will be composed of homogeneous
For large patching works, conform to the testing material with no distinct changes in attribute
frequencies in Error! Reference source not values.
found.. Each lot will be subject to conformance testing.
8.14.5 Conformance of compaction (Lot Lots will be checked for level tolerance.
Testing)
Quality of the lot will be judged as conformance or
Base the conformance of compaction on lots, non-conformance of each lot including all tests
determined from cores. conducted on the lot.
− Subdivide all items of work into lots. When lots fail to satisfy the conformance criteria,
− Give each lot a lot number. payment adjustments or rejection of the lot shall
− Number the lots using a logical system. be in accordance with the Payment Adjustments
clause in Measurement and Payment.
Page 74
Should the lot under consideration be subdivided STRAIGHT RUN BINDER COATS
then class each subdivision as a lot and subject Provide Standard Class 320 bitumen as follows:
each subdivided lot to lot testing.
− Primerseal coats
Treat non-conforming lots which are subdivided
after testing as separate lots and retest each and − Seal coat for geotextile seal or re-seal
every subdivided lot. Heat to spraying temperature but do not exceed
Core sample locations will be selected by the the maximum. Avoid heating bitumen in
laboratory on a stratified random basis in quantities excess to requirements.
accordance with NTCP 103.1. Supply copies of Prevent foaming.
the completed stratified random selection with
each compaction report. POLYMER MODIFIED BINDER COATS
There shall be 6 cores per lot. Provide conforming bitumen blended with the
Refer to CONFORMANCE TESTING, required polymer as follows:
Conformance Testing Results, Conformance of
Prepare the product in a manufacturing or
Compaction for Asphalt.
blending plant that complies with the AGPT. T190
Conform to the following limits of characteristic
Value of Air Voids: − Initial seal coat: Class S10E
− Reseal coat: Class S10E
Table 8.6 - Limits of Characteristic Value of Air
Voids Provide test results from a NATA registered
testing facility - when requested, of the properties
Light Medium Heavy
of the binder modified with the nominated type
traffic traffic traffic
and quantity of polymer.
Conformance 3.0 – 9.0 3.0 – 9.0 3.0 – 8.0
Store, mix, heat and spray the polymer modified
The Conformance Of Compaction clause only binder as recommended by the polymer
applies to a specified asphalt thickness of 30 mm manufacturer.
or greater. Both coats of two coat seals shall contain
Backfill all core holes with asphalt conforming to polymer.
the specified properties for the subject mix, and
compact to the required density. 8.15.2 Spraying – Hold Point
8.14.6 Surface Roughness APPLICATION SPRAY RATES
Surface roughness testing will be carried out by Ensure current test results are supplied to the
the Superintendent at the discretion of the Superintendent before spraying begins.
Superintendent.
Spray rates to be at 15ºC adjusted in accordance
8.15 SPRAY SEALING – AREAS LESS with Clause 7.22, Table 7.9 - Bitumen
THAN 300M² Equivalent Volumes.
Comply with the SPRAY SEALING section with
For primers, primer seals and polymer modified
the following exceptions:
binders, the rate of application refers to the whole
8.15.1 Binder Coat Requirements of the mixture, including all modifiers, cutback
PRIME AND PRIMER SEALS materials, combining oils and adhesion agents.
Cut-back bitumen to be mixed on site. For enrichments and emulsion seals, the rate of
application refers to the residual bitumen.
Heat bitumen to a temperature appropriate for
achieving final spraying temperature making Determine the application spray rates using
allowance for incorporation of the unheated cutter. appropriate Austroads design methods.
Add unheated cutter to heated bitumen and Hold Point – Do not commence spraying until the
circulate until a homogeneous mixture is Superintendent is advised and gives approval to
achieved. the proposed application spray rates.
Spray immediately circulation is complete. Supply the following to the Superintendent to

enable the proposed spray rates to be approved.
Allow at least three days to elapse after priming
before applying the binder coat. Ensure primer − Average Least Dimension (ALD),
soaks in and dries off before applying binder coat. − Flakiness index (FI) of the aggregate
Provide Standard Class 320 bitumen, cut back as Ensure samples are taken from stockpiles of
follows: Prime: AMC 00 material that are to be used, generally from site
Primer Seal: AMC 6 stockpiles.

Page 75
8.15.3 Preparation for Sprayer Run – Witness 8.15.6 Application Of Aggregate – Hold Point
Point
Supply current test results of materials to be used.
Record the volume and temperature of the
Load aggregate into tip trucks using an approved
sprayer contents while it is on level ground.
aggregate loader which removes dust, dirt and
Supply Sprayer Tank dips before and after each oversize stone while applying pre-coat.
sprayer run.
Hold Point - Obtain approval from the
Witness Point - Allow visual inspection when Superintendent for use of the proposed aggregate
requested. loader before commencing aggregate loading
operations.
Determine the length of sprayer run from the
available quantity in the sprayer and the Apply aggregate to sprayed binder within:
application rate. Ensure the area to be sprayed is
- 10 minutes where the pavement temperature
not greater than the area that can be covered by
is 20ºC or greater.
aggregate in the loaded trucks.
- 5 minutes where the pavement temperature is
Start and finish each spray run on a protective between 15 and 20ºC.
strip of paper placed on the pavement. The paper
to be wide enough to ensure the sprayed material Polymer Modified Binders: Apply aggregate within
is being discharged correctly over the full width of 5 minutes irrespective of pavement temperature.
spray. Place sufficient protective paper to protect Apply aggregate to emulsion coat before the
road fixtures. emulsion breaks.
Place paper on the pavement and masking Spread the aggregate evenly and uniformly over
around areas to be sprayed or wherever the 2 3
the sprayed surface at a rate of 900/ALD m /m .
sprayer is stationary on the road pavement. Seek approval for variations to this rate.
Seal joins are only allowed where line marking is Use a mechanical spreader.
to be placed. No joins are allowed in wheel paths.
Excess overspray and spills must be removed places after the first spreading.
before sealing works proceed.
Aggregate spread in excess of the application rate
8.15.4 Sprayer Run designated in the procedure will be removed and
Attain uniform spraying speed before spraying stockpiled at full cost to the Contractor.
commences. 8.15.7 Rolling Rate
Avoid an excess or deficiency of material due to Roll the treated surface with self-propelled rubber
faulty overlap at longitudinal joints when spraying tyred rollers with a minimum tyre pressure of
a road in half-widths. 600 kPa and a minimum wheel load of 1 tonne.
Overlap to be 300 mm with an intermediate Roller speed on the first pass to be between 5 and
nozzle. 10km/h, with subsequent passes between 15 and
Do not use end nozzles on an overlap. 25 km/h.
Make allowances for “Fog Spraying” when joining Conform to the following:
to existing seals. - Entire area to receive one roller pass
Cease spraying before the level of material in the immediately after covering.
tank falls to a level which reduces the full - 75% of rolling within 1 hour of covering.
discharge of the pump. - 100% of rolling within 2 hours of covering.
Remove and dispose of all paper as per the EMP. Minimum Rolling Rate: 1 roller hour per
Clean off any sprayed material from road fixtures. 1,500 litres of binder.
8.15.5 Hand Spraying For two coat treatments when the second coat is
to be applied immediately, the total rolling on the
Plan work to minimise the requirement for the use first coat shall be double that specified.
of a hand sprayer.
Roll in daylight hours only. Sweep the surface
Any strips of pavement not adequately covered after rolling. Ensure a uniform distribution of
with sprayed material to be sprayed later with the aggregate.
hand attachment.

Page 76
Adjust drag broom to distribute surplus aggregate,

but not to dislodge embedded aggregate. Ensure
aggregate on the final surface is uniformly
distributed, and firmly held by binder.
Re-roll the surface after sweeping to ensure
uniform bedding of aggregate in binder.
8.16 TRAFFIC ON RESEALS
Co-ordinate work to minimise traffic delays.
Prohibit traffic:
- until at least 3 passes of a roller has taken
place or until sufficient rolling has taken place
to prevent damage to the applied seal,
whichever is greater; and
- from adjacent strip of roadway during
spraying.
Sweep all loose aggregate from the carriageway
at completion of rolling.
8.17 WASTE MATERIAL
Remove from the site and dispose of all waste
material in legal waste disposal facility.

Page 77
8.19 TABLES
Table 8.7 – Mix Proportions

Mix Type 1 2 3 4
Dense Graded
% Passing (Dry Mass)
AS Sieve (mm) 5 mm 10 mm 14 mm 20 mm
53.0 - - - -
37.5 - - - -
26.5 - - - 100
19.0 - - 100 95 – 100
13.2 - 100 85 – 100 75 – 90
9.5 - 90 - 100 70 – 85 60 – 80
6.7 100 70 - 90 62 – 75 50 – 70
4.75 85 - 100 58 - 76 53 – 70 40 – 60
2.36 55 - 75 40 - 58 35 – 52 25 – 43
1.18 38 - 57 27 - 44 24 – 40 18 - 35
0.60 26 - 43 17 - 35 15 – 30 14 - 27
0.30 15 - 28 11 - 24 10 – 24 9 - 21
0.15 8 - 18 7 - 16 7 - 16 6 – 15
0.075 4 - 11 4-7 4–7 3–7
Bitumen binder
5.0 - 7.0 4.5 - 6.5 4.6 - 6.5 4.0 – 6.0
(% by mass)
Compacted
10 - 25 25 - 40 35 – 55 50 – 80
thickness (mm)
Bitumen film
thickness (min 8.5 8.5 8.5 8.5
micron)
The grading curve shall be smooth and shall not vary from the outer
one third of the range between the specified limits for one sieve size
to the opposite outer one third of the range between the specified
limits for an adjacent sieve size.

Page 78
Table 8.8 – Aggregate and Mineral Filler Mix Proportions

Conform to the following mix proportions
Mix Type CM 1 CM 2 CM 3 CM 4
Dense Graded
AS Sieve (mm) 7 mm 10 mm 14 mm 20 mm
% Passing (Dry Mass)

53.0 - - - -
37.5 - - - -
26.5 - - - 100
19.0 - - 100 95 – 100
13.2 - 100 85 - 100 -
9.5 100 90 - 100 70 - 85 58 – 74
6.7 90 - 100 - - 45 – 60
4.75 70 - 90 58 - 70 46 - 65 37 – 50
2.36 45 - 60 35 - 50 28 - 45 22 – 36
1.18 - 22 - 38 15 - 30 12 – 26
0.60 15 - 30 12 - 27 10 - 23 6 – 20
0.30 10 - 20 6 - 16 5 - 17 4 – 15
0.15 4 - 14 4 - 14 3 - 11 2 – 10
0.075 3-8 2-6 2-5 1–5
Total % 100 100 100 100
The grading curve shall be smooth and shall not vary from the outer one third of the range
between the specified limits for one sieve size to the opposite outer one third of the range
between the specified limits for an adjacent sieve size.
Table 8.9 – Total Mix Proportions of Cold Mix Asphalt

Conform to the following mix proportions.
Mix Type CM 1 CM 2 CM 3 CM 4
Dense Graded
Size 7 mm 10 mm 14 mm 20 mm
Material % Of Total Mix
Aggregate and filler % 94.2 – 95.2 94.8 – 95.8 95.0 – 96.0 95.3 – 96.3
Residual binder % 4.8 - 5.8 4.2 - 5.2 4.0 - 5.0 3.7 - 4.7
Total Mix % 100 100 100 100

Page 79
CONCRETE MAINTENANCE
9. CONCRETE MAINTENANCE 9.3.5 Chemical Admixtures – Hold Point

Hold point - Do not use admixtures without
obtaining prior written approval from the
Superintendent.
Admixtures and their use must conform to
AS 1478.1.
Where two or more chemical admixtures are
proposed for incorporation into a concrete mix,
their compatibility must be certified by the
manufacturers.
Store admixtures in accordance with the
manufacturer’s recommendations.
9.3.6 Reinforcement – Hold Point
Conform to AS/NZS 4671.
Supply, cut, bend and fix steel reinforcement as
This section specifies miscellaneous minor repairs specified.
or replacement of concrete structures such as
stormwater side entry pits, wing/head walls, kerbs Secure reinforcement and bar supports to prevent
and gutters, cycle/footpaths etc. and does not displacement during construction and concrete
apply to buildings, bridges or concrete pavements. placement.
9.2 STANDARDS Hold Point - Do not place concrete until the

reinforcement has been inspected by the
Comply with the Acts, Regulations, Guidelines Superintendent.
the requirements of Authorities with jurisdiction 9.3.7 Recycled Crushed Glass (RCG)
over the works. Conform to the Standards and Clean, hard, durable RCG free from clay, dirt and
Publications quoted throughout this document organic material. Source the material from glass
unless specified otherwise. Refer to food and beverage containers, drinking glasses,
REFERENCED DOCUMENTS. and window (or flat) glass and plain ceramic. Do
not use glass from hazardous waste containers,
Refer to Waste Disposal clause in reinforced and laminated glass, light bulbs,
MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS section. fluorescent tubes and cathode ray tubes. The
9.3 MATERIALS – HOLD POINT source glass must be free of debris and
contaminants such as paper and cardboard,
Hold point - Provide manufacturer's test plastic, fabrics, residues from original contents
certificates for quality of cement, aggregate and and toxins.
reinforcement.
Use RCG conforming to Specification for
9.3.1 Cement Recycled Crushed Glass as an Engineering
Type GP or GB to AS 3972. Material Section 9 available at:
Store cement in watertight containers or shelters x.shtml
until used.
9.4 EQUIPMENT
Do not mix or store special cement with normal
Portland cement. The Contractor will provide all general and
specialised equipment, tools and materials, to
9.3.2 Fine Aggregate carry out and test the Work. The Contractor must
Clean, hard, tough, durable, uncoated grains, be fully equipped on each attendance call.
homogeneous in quality, free from clay, dirt and 9.5 CONCRETE
organic material.
9.5.1 Ready-mix Concrete
9.3.3 Coarse Aggregate
Unless otherwise specified, Production
Clean, hard, durable, crushed stone or gravel, Assessment in accordance with AS 3600 shall be
free from clay, dirt and organic material. used.
9.3.4 Water Register the project with the concrete supplier for
submittal of Production Assessment data and
Clean and free from oil, alkali, organic or other
nominate the Superintendent for receipt of this
deleterious substances.
information.

Page 80
Supply concrete with the following properties Superintendent. Work to be all inclusive and
unless specified otherwise: include but not limited to; saw cutting, excavation
and removal of broken sections, disposal of waste
Compressive strength: N25
material, formwork, reinforcement, etc.
Aggregate size: 20 mm
9.7.2 Kerbs and Gutters
Slump: 80 mm, + or - 15 mm.
Repair, reinstate or replace damaged kerb and
The Superintendent reserves the right to carry out gutter as integral units to match existing
independent sampling and testing of concrete. dimensions and grades, as per Standard Drawing
CS 1203.
9.5.2 Job-mixed Concrete
9.7.3 Cycle and Pedestrian shared Path
Use Project Assessment in accordance with
Maintenance
AS 3600.
All relevant design principles contained in
The Contractor will be responsible for sampling
and testing. AUSTROADS must be integrated in the design of
cycle ways, pathways and associated
Provide concrete with properties as specified for
ready-mix concrete. infrastructure (Austroads guide to Road Design
Part 6A: Pedestrian and Cyclist Paths). Refer to
Determine the quantities of materials to be used
by mass or by equivalent dry loose volume. Civil design drawings (if any) and conform to local
Provide and maintain gauges for measurement of Council requirements.
the materials.
Refer to PROJECT SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS
The Superintendent reserves the right to carry out
section of Request for Tender
independent sampling and testing of concrete.
9.5.3 Addition of Admixtures 9.8 FORMWORK – WITNESS POINT
Refer to clause Materials - Chemical Admixtures.
Formwork to be accordance with AS 3610.1.
Chemical admixtures may only be added Design and construct forms so that they are
subsequent to slump test compliance mortar tight, have adequate strength and
confirmation. A further slump test post admixture removable without damaging the concrete.
addition may also be required.
Formwork material to be suitable for the purpose
Where Superintendent approval has been granted
and finish specified.
for the addition of superplasticiser at the plant
prior to dispatch of concrete, a slump test of each Build forms true to line and braced in a substantial
batch must be performed and recorded by a and non-yielding manner.
NATA accredited testing laboratory prior to the
Witness Point - Do not place concrete until the
addition of the superplasticiser. The slump test
formwork has been inspected by the
report must record the time of the addition of the
Superintendent.
superplasticiser, amount of superplasticiser added
and product identification. 9.9 HANDLING AND PLACING – WITNESS
Do not add chemical admixtures unless the exact POINT – HOLD POINT
amount required is measured using a regularly Witness Point - Give the Superintendent
maintained and calibrated device of the required sufficient notice so that inspection may be made
accuracy. before and during pouring concrete.
Make allowance for the reversion time of
Hold Point - Provide verification that all
superplasticisers.
constituent materials, formwork, falsework,
Delay the addition of superplasticisers as long as reinforcement, and environmental conditions
practicable before the concrete is discharged from comply with all requirements. Do not cast any
the mixer. concrete without that verification.
Agitate concrete for at least 5 minutes following
the addition of superplasticiser before dispensing. Do not place concrete if the temperature of the
concrete exceeds 35ºC, or if the ambient air
9.6 FOUNDATIONS temperature exceeds 40ºC.
Provide a foundation compacted to 95 % relative Place and compact concrete within the times
density within 150 mm of the base of concrete. shown in Table 9.1 - Maximum concrete placing
time after adding mixing water after the addition
9.7 CONSTRUCTION
of the mixing water to the mix:
9.7.1 General
Repair, reinstate or replace concrete structures to
match existing dimensions, cross sections and
grade or as otherwise directed by the

Page 81
Table 9.1 - Maximum concrete placing time 9.11 SURFACE FINISHES

after adding mixing water Finish surfaces to a smooth and even colour.
Concrete Remove free surface water during final screeding
Maximum Time
temperature at time of unformed surfaces.
(minutes)
of placing
Round off exposed edges and corners.
25 to 28ºC 75
Protect exposed surfaces from rain until final set
28 to 32ºC 60 has occurred.
32 to 35ºC 45 Conform to Table 9.2 – Concrete finishes.
Place concrete in a continuous operation between Table 9.2 – Concrete finishes

construction joints so that the face of the concrete Type Description Application
is in a plastic state when succeeding concrete is
placed against it. Left rough to give key
Surfaces to be
S1 but not honeycombed
Do not allow concrete to free-fall from a height rendered.
or porous
greater than 1.5 m.
Place all concrete in dry weather unless otherwise S2 Wood float As specified.
approved.
Internal surfaces
Vibrate concrete to remove entrapped air, but Steel trowel without
S3 subject to foot traffic.
avoid over-vibration that may cause segregation. polish
Kerb and gutter.
For each truck of premixed concrete provide an
identification certificate on delivery listing the Wood float and
broomed finish -
information required by AS 1379 and any other Surfaces subject to
S4 broom finish - broom
particular requirements for special class concrete. vehicular traffic.
across direction of
9.10 JOINTING traffic
9.10.1 Construction Joints
Steel float followed by Surfaces subject to
Roughen and clean the face of hardened concrete S6
moist hair broom foot traffic.
before placing fresh concrete against it. Remove
soft material, foreign matter and laitance. Remove mortar fins,
Thoroughly moisten the joint surface. etc., repair minor blow
9.10.2 Expansion / Contraction Joints holes by bagging Formed surfaces
F1
where approved or exposed to view.
Joints to be 10 mm wide over full length and filled rub down with
with a bitumen impregnated fibrous filler. Carborundum stone
Provide vertical transverse expansion/contraction F2 Off forms -

joints as follows:
− Footpaths: 6 m spacing maximum. Application of RCG to
be hand spread once
− At junctions with other concrete structures application of the
− Inverts: 15 m spacing maximum. exposed mix has been
bull floated
− All other works: As shown on the drawings.
RCG to be measured
9.10.3 Tooled Joints F3 Exposed RCG 1000 grams per
Provide tooled joints as follows: square meter, or as
otherwise specified by
− Transverse vertical grooves 20 mm depth the Superintendent.
minimum. Colour and size of
− Joints at right angles to outer edge of RCG to be specified
concrete works. by Superintendent
− Footpaths: 2 m spacing maximum. 9.11.1 Curing
− Kerbs/Inverts: 3 m spacing maximum.
Protect and cure all exposed surfaces
− All other works: As shown on the immediately after the concrete has taken its initial
drawings. set.

Page 82
Maintain all surfaces, including those within 9.15 CONFORMANCE

loosened formwork, in a moist condition by:
Refer to the DRAINAGE MAINTENANCE for
− flooding; culvert structures and pits.
− continuous spraying with water; or Conform to Table 9.3 – Concrete Conformance -
− other methods approved by the Tolerances.
Superintendent. Table 9.3 – Concrete Conformance -
Prevent staining during the curing process of all Tolerances
concrete surfaces that will be visible in the AS Measured Tolerance
completed works.
+ or - 15 mm from the
Continuously maintain the protection and curing of Finished level:
specified level.
each element for the minimum time specified by
AS 3600 to provide the concrete with durability + or - 5 mm from the
Invert level:
corresponding to the specified exposure specified level.
classification. Straight edge 3 mm maximum in 3 m, or
Do not use curing compounds in lieu of moist deviation of surface: 6 mm maximum in 15 m.
curing unless approved. + or - 10 mm from the
Alignment:
9.11.2 Backfilling specified alignment.
Backfill areas around the concrete with specified Chainage at vehicle
+ or - 150 mm
material. crossing
Compact the backfilling in layers not exceeding Width of vehicle
+ or - 25 mm.
150 mm compacted thickness. crossing:
Reinstate damaged grassed areas with topsoil 9.16 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE AND
and grass seed to match existing surrounds. MATERIALS
9.12 PATCH REPAIR OF CONCRETE Concrete which is not placed, cured or finished as
STRUCTURES specified, does not have the specified strength or
Remove spalled and unsound concrete to expose other specified properties, is not sound, dense,
a sound surface. Where necessary remove durable or crack-free will be considered defective.
damaged steel reinforcement and replace as
required. Bear all cost and delays resulting from the
rejection of concrete and subsequent rectification.
Saw cut outer perimeter of the repair to a depth of
at least 15 mm in order to prevent featheredging. Remove the concrete to a point agreed with the
Scabble and wash down the surrounding sound Superintendent at which a visually and structurally
concrete surface to ensure removal of all acceptable construction joint can be made, and
contamination. the defective element rebuilt.
Pre wet the prepared concrete substrate and steel Repair defective surface finishes if approved by
reinforcement and apply a bonding agent to the Superintendent. Approval will not be given if
enhance the bond at the repair interface. the defective area is too extensive or the
Erect formwork as per FORMWORK clause and techniques proposed are not adequate to ensure
cure as per CURING clause. a visually acceptable and durable repair.
9.13 RAIN DAMAGE 9.17 MAINTENANCE CLEANING

Remove and replace rain damaged concrete. High pressure water may be used for cleaning of
concrete paths and structures.
9.14 EXISTING SERVICES – HOLD POINT
Hold Point - Obtain the Superintendent’s Clean surfaces at a pressure rating that will
approval before altering the line or level of existing provide an even, streak free cleaned surface
services. without causing damage.
Chemicals may be used to remove specific types
Place an expansion joint between concrete works
of stains or to ease cleaning and must be used in
and service.
accordance with the product SDS and
environmental requirements.
Mask or protect adjacent surfaces.

Page 83
DRAINAGE MAINTENANCE
10. DRAINAGE MAINTENANCE Ensure that all pipes and box culverts are indelibly
marked with a Standards Australia conformance
10.1 OUTLINE DESCRIPTION stamp.
This section applies to the repair or replacement Pipes and box culverts not stamped shall be
of precast concrete box culverts including inlet removed from site at the Contractor's expense.
and outlet structures and precast concrete pipe
10.4.2 Precast Reinforced Concrete Pipes
culverts not exceeding 1950 mm nominal
diameter. Use flush joint type pipes with external rubber
bands.
10.2 STANDARDS Ensure that pipes are clearly marked as to their
Comply with the Acts, Regulations, Guidelines class.
and Codes applicable to the works. Comply with 10.4.3 Precast Reinforced Concrete Box
the requirements of Authorities with jurisdiction Culverts – Hold Point - Witness Point
Use box culverts of the inverted U type suitable
for installation on a cast-in-situ concrete slab.
REFERENCED DOCUMENTS. Design and supply box culverts which have a
span not greater than 1200 mm, height not more
than 1200 mm and a fill height not more than
Refer to the Northern Territory Government 1600 mm in accordance with AS 1597.1.
Design all other box culverts in accordance with
AS 1597.2.
10.3 DEFINITIONS
Use Standard Vehicle Loadings including NT
Culvert
Standard Road Train, with addition of the
An underground pipe, box or arch constructed in HLP 400 Abnormal Vehicle Loading on all
an embankment or trench. National Highways, and HLP 320 on all other
Culvert Skew Angle routes.
The angle between a line drawn perpendicular or Provide culverts designed for exposure
radial to the road centre line and the centre line of classification in accordance with the Exposure
the culvert. Classification Table in AS 5100.5. Refer to Error!
Culvert Chainage Reference source not found..
The chainage measured along the road centre Hold Point - Provide drawings showing complete
line at its intersection with the culvert centre line. reinforcement and dimensions with tolerances and
Large Box Culverts obtain the Superintendent’s approval prior to
Precast box culverts and link slabs having spans fabricating any units. Provide manufacturer’s
greater than 1200 mm, heights greater than certification that the provided culverts comply with
1200 mm or fill heights exceeding 1600 mm. the applicable sections of AS 5100.5 and with
AS 1597. Certify that the design is reflected
Recycled Crushed Glass (RCG) accurately by the shop drawings and that the
RCG conforming to Specification for Recycled design is adequate to resist all specified loads and
Crushed Glass as an Engineering Material section the soil loads pertaining to the site.
9. available at:
Provide a table of construction axle loads versus
minimum required cover for each box culvert size.
x.shtml
Witness Point - Give the Superintendent notice
10.4 MATERIALS
prior to casting concrete.
10.4.1 Conformance
10.4.4 Corrugated Steel Pipes, Pipe Arches
Conform to requirements specified in
and Arches
CONFORMANCE TESTING.
Supply in accordance with the details specified.
The Contractor will be responsible for process
Assemble in accordance with the manufacturer's
control testing.
instructions.
The Superintendent will carry out all conformance
10.4.5 Bedding
testing nominated to be the Superintendent's
responsibility through Panel Period Contracts. A clean granular material free from sticks, stones
The Contractor will be responsible for ordering the and other deleterious material with a Plasticity
conformance tests. Index less than 6, conforming to the following
Table Material Size.

Page 84
RCG conforming to Specification for Recycled Backfill with select fill up to the specified level if
Crushed Glass as an Engineering Material the trench is excavated too deep. Any such
Section 9, and clean granular material free from backfilling will be at the Contractor's expense.
sticks, stones and other deleterious material with Witness Point - Excavate unsuitable material
a Plasticity Index less than 6, conforming to Table below specified level if directed by the
10.1 – Bedding Material Size. Superintendent.
Table 10.1 – Bedding Material Size Replace with select fill, compacted as specified.
10.5.3 Culverts in Fill under Construction
AS Sieve Percentage Passing by Dry
(mm) Mass Place and compact fill to Manufacturer’s
instructions and design specifications. Use select
19.0 100 fill. Refer to PROJECT SPECIFIC
REQUIREMENTS in the RFT. Conform to
2.36 50 – 100
compacted layer method in earthworks. conform
0.60 20 – 90 to compacted layer method EARTHWORKS.
0.30 10 – 60 Re-excavate the fill in accordance with the
Excavation clause to permit the construction of
0.15 0 – 25 the culvert.
0.075 0 – 10 10.5.4 Construction Loading on Culverts
Provide the minimum compacted thickness of
cover specified in Table 10.4 - Minimum
10.4.6 Concrete
Required Cover Thickness in Metres before
Conform to the requirements of CONCRETE allowing traffic to cross a culvert.
MAINTENANCE.
10.4.7 Mortar Refer to Clause Error! Reference source not
found. for Tables
Use one part fresh cement and three parts clean
sharp sand mixed with potable water to yield a Do not permit construction vehicles having axle
stiff but workable mixture. loads greater than 10 tonnes to cross large box
10.4.8 Select Fill culverts under any depth of fill unless specific
certification is provided by the culvert crown unit
Conform to the requirements of EARTHWORKS manufacturer that the culverts have been
AND DRAINAGE. designed to cope with those loads.
10.5 CONSTRUCTION OF CULVERTS AND 10.5.5 Bedding
STRUCTURES Place bedding 75 mm compacted thickness for
10.5.1 Setting Out – Hold Point the full width of the trench or 0.6 m greater than
Measure culvert length along the invert to the the width of the culvert for non-trench conditions.
outside face of headwalls. Compact bedding to 90 % relative compaction.
Measure pits and/or manholes to the inside face Shape the bedding to hold pipes in position during
of the wall. compaction of additional fill.
Finished surface levels for kerbside structures are Place and compact a further (haunching) layer of
measured at the top of the kerb. bedding of 150 mm compacted thickness over the
Set out the culvert and/or structure with pegs full width of the previous layer after the pipe is in
before construction. position.
Hold Point - Obtain the Superintendent's Consider increasing thickness of haunching for
approval for the setting out before construction. large pipe culverts under high fills, to upgrade
10.5.2 Excavation – Witness point maximum bedding factor given in Table 5 of
AS/NZS 3725.
Excavate in whatever material is encountered.
10.5.6 Laying Generally
Use of explosives must be in accordance with
MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS. Lay culverts commencing from the downstream
end.
Pump, bail, sheet, shore and brace as necessary.
End caps, when used, shall provide a tight
Divert water when necessary. waterproof seal.
Rectify foundations which are affected by rain or 10.5.7 Laying Pipe Culverts
surface water entering the excavation.
Face rebates or sockets upstream.
The total width of trench at and below the level of
the top of the pipe shall be the width of culvert Rest the full length of the pipe barrel on the
plus 300 mm minimum clearance each side. bedding.

Page 85
Position ‘TOP’ marking on pipes to within Backfill the remainder of the trench with standard
5 degrees of the vertical axis. fill.
Fill all joints with stiff mortar firmly rammed into Stabilise all backfill with 2 % cement by mass and
openings. Remove excess mortar from barrel of compact to 95 % relative compaction.
culvert. Apply external rubber bands. Produce a uniform mix. Complete compaction
Brace pipes of 1200 mm diameter and greater within one hour of adding mixing water.
with toms until the completion of the embankment Use compaction equipment which will not damage
and pavement. the culvert and in-situ structures.
The toms shall bear against a sill along the invert Carry out conformance testing using the
and a cap against the crown of the pipe. Provide Department’s Panel Period Contractors for
toms opposite every pipe joint. Testing.
Cast collars and blocks in one operation. Restrain Stabilise top 150 mm of backfill, for a distance of
the culvert prior to constructing the collars or 1 m adjacent to culvert headwalls and wing walls,
blocks by partially backfilling with bedding around so as to be erosion resistant.
the barrel of the culvert to one-half of the pipe
Remove surplus material from the site.
diameter.
Reinstate to subgrade level trenches cut through
10.5.8 Laying Box Culverts
pavements and other construction by backfilling
Lay precast box culverts on a cast-in-situ the trench with stabilised select fill compacted to
reinforced concrete base slab. 95% relative compaction.
Ensure concrete base slab exceeds external width Construct base/sub-base layers of the pavement
of box culverts as shown on the typical details. in accordance with PAVEMENTS AND
Butt box culverts firmly together. SHOULDERS.
Cut away lifting hooks and seal over the affected 10.5.11 Reinstate Surface.
area with an approved epoxy resin. Reinstate trenches cut outside of pavements and
Fill all joints with a stiff mortar firmly rammed into other construction by backfilling with standard fill
the openings. Remove excess mortar from the compacted to 90 % relative compaction.
barrel of the culvert and apply external joint seals,
10.6 INLET AND OUTLET STRUCTURES
Densopol HT60 or equivalent, 150 mm wide.
AND MAINTENANCE HOLES
10.5.9 Connection to Existing Systems –
Construct in accordance with the Construction Of
Witness Point
Culverts And Structures clause.
Repair all cut openings and make watertight.
Compact foundations to 95% relative compaction
Demolish existing headwalls to make way for the to a depth of 150 mm minimum.
extension of the culvert.
Replace unsuitable material as specified in the
Clean out new work and existing work affected by Excavation Clause.
the new work.
10.7 INLET AND OUTLET CHANNELS –
Witness Point – Advise superintendent within two WITNESS POINT
days when clean out is completed
Excavate the inlet and outlet of all culverts to
facilitate the flow of water.
10.5.10 Backfill – Witness Point – Hold Point Conform to the following:
Witness Point - Notify the Superintendent before − Bed width: Minimum 150 mm greater than
backfilling where holes or fissures occur in rock overall width of culvert.
trenches. − Side batters: 45 degrees maximum to
Hold Point - Do not place backfill against any horizontal.
in-situ concrete structure until the concrete has
− Bed grade: 0.5 % in the direction of flow for a
attained 80% characteristic strength and approval
minimum distance of 50 m.
has been given.
Clean out new work and existing work affected by
Place backfill in layers not exceeding 150 mm
the new work.
compacted thickness.
Ensure the maximum difference in height of Witness Point – Advise superintendent within two
backfill on each side of a culvert is 300 mm. days when clean out is completed
Backfill around the culvert for the full width of the 10.8 OPEN UNLINED DRAINS
trench, and for a minimum 300 mm above the top Excavate and dispose of all excess material as
of the culvert, or to subgrade surface if less, with specified in EARTHWORKS AND DRAINAGE.
select fill.
Trim drains to form neat levees.
Compact levees to 95% relative compaction.
Page 86
Allow natural surface runoff. Encase the length of the trench with the fabric
placed in such a way as to fully encompass the
10.9 REMOVAL OF EXISTING CULVERTS
pipe and filter.
AND DRAINAGE STRUCTURES
Overlap the fabric 300 mm over the top of the filter
Demolish and remove from the site existing
material.
culverts and drainage structures identified for
removal by the Superintendent. 10.10.4 Subsoil Drain Pipe
Dispose of waste material in accordance with the Use 100 mm diameter Class 400.
Standard Specification for Environmental Use compatible couplings and fittings.
Management and the Request for Tender (RFT). Connect solid wall pipe to the subsoil drain pipe
10.10 SUBSOIL DRAINS for the disposal of collected water.
10.10.1 Excavation 10.10.5 Laying and Backfilling – Hold Point
Impervious Material Fit the upper end of pipelines with inspection
openings and caps supported in a concrete collar.
Excavate below the top of the impervious zone to
a minimum depth equal to the outside diameter of Hold Point - Obtain Superintendent's approval of
the pipe plus 75 mm. the pipe installation before backfilling.
Place a bedding layer of 50 mm of filter material in Place filter material around the barrel of the pipe
the trench and compact with a vibrating plate or and to a height of 200 mm above the pipe.
similar. Compact with a vibrating plate compactor or
Pervious Material similar.
Excavate and backfill under the pipe with Place and compact remaining layers of the filter in
impervious material as specified. layers not exceeding 300 mm.
10.10.2 Filter Material Prevent contamination of the filter.
Shall be a hard durable stone having a Los Place and compact basecourse gravel, as
Angeles Abrasion Loss not greater than 35%. specified in PAVEMENTS AND SHOULDERS in
the top 300 mm of trench.
Conform to the grading specified by the
manufacturer of the subsoil pipe. If Place the material in two equal layers compacted
manufacturer's grading not supplied, conform to to 95 % relative compaction.
Table 10.2 – Filter material grading. Where trench excavated through pavement
compact upper layer of basecourse gravel to
Table 10.2 – Filter material grading 100% relative compaction and reinstate surface.
AS Sieve (mm) Percentage Passing Backfill above solid wall pipes as specified in
10.5.10 Backfill – Witness Point – Hold Point for
37.50 100
trench conditions.
19.00 90 – 100 10.10.6 End Walls – Witness Point
9.50 65 – 85 Construct end walls at the outlet of subsoil drains
as specified.
4.75 45 – 65
Secure 19 mm galvanised wire mesh over the
0.60 0–5 opening.
10.10.3 Geotextile Fabric Mark end walls with guide posts.
Clean out new work and existing work affected by
Refer to Geotextile Grades clause in
the new work.
PROTECTION WORKS MAINTENANCE.
Witness Point – Advise superintendent within two
Supply and lay an approved non-woven
days when clean out is completed
polypropylene or polyester geotextile fabric having
an equivalent opening size (EOS) of 120
micrometre and typical geotextile strength rating
(G) of 1350 minimum.
Cut or fold the fabric to the required shape. Patch,
repair, or replace damaged fabric.
Cover geotextiles in accordance with the
following:
− Untreated UV susceptible geotextiles:
Within 5 days of placing.
− UV treated or low susceptibility geotextiles:
Within 30 days of placing.
Page 87
10.11 CONFORMANCE
Conform to Table 10.3 – Conformance –
Drainage Maintenance.
Table 10.3 – Conformance – Drainage
Maintenance
Application Requirement/Tolerance
Invert level and grade
No ponding of water.
line:
Open unlined drains: + or - 50 mm.
Culverts or lined
+ or - 20 mm.
drains:
Plan position: + or - 200 mm.
Culverts parallel to
+ or - 50 mm.
kerbs:
Concrete structure
+ or - 5 mm.
dimension:
Concrete thickness: Not less than specified.
Subsoil drain slope: 25 mm maximum sag in
8 m.

Table 10.4 - Minimum Required Cover Thickness in Metres

Type, size and class of culvert
Corrugated
Concrete Pipes, By Pipe Class Boxes
Metal Pipes
Maximum Less than 1200 mm
Internal
Construction Less than Span, 1200 mm
1200 mm Nominal Diameter or
Vehicle Axle 1200 mm Nominal Height and
Diameter or more Span up to
Load (tonne) Diameter 1600 mm Final Fill
3600 mm
Height
Concrete Pipe Class Min. cover (m) Min. cover (m)
X(2) Y(3) Z(4) X(2) Y(3) Z(4)
9 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.6 0.1
20 0.8 0.6 0.4 0.5 0.4 0.4 1.2 0.6
35 1.3 0.8 0.6 1.3 0.4 0.4 1.5 0.9
50 1.0 0.8 - 1.0 0.4 - 1.8 1.2

Page 88
PROTECTION WORKS MAINTENANCE
11. PROTECTION WORKS MAINTENANCE
Table 11.1 – Geotextile Strength Grade

Properties
Geo Elongation Grade Tear G

textile Stren- (N) Rating
(1)
Strength gth (2)
(2)
Grade (N) (2)
>30% 500 180 900

A
<30% 800 300 1350
11.1 STANDARDS >30% 700 250 1350

Comply with the Acts, Regulations, Guidelines B
<30% 1100 400 2000
over the works. Conform to the Standards and >30% 900 350 2000
C
Publications quoted throughout this document <30% 1400 500 3000
REFERENCED DOCUMENTS. >30% 1200 450 3000
Refer to Waste Disposal clause in D
<30% 1900 700 4500
MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS section.
Specification Reference E >30% 1600 650 4500
Standard Specification for Environmental 11.4 CONFORMANCE TESTING
Management and to the RFT. Where project requirement is less than 15,000m ,
2
11.2 FOUNDATIONS sampling and testing is not required.
Excavate, fill and trim the site to the required Provide samples to independent, NATA
shape prior to commencing the protection works. accredited testing laboratory when project
2
exceeds 15,000m , to Table 11.2 – Test
Compact the top 150 mm of earthworks, on which Frequencies
protection works are to be laid to 90 % relative
compaction. Table 11.2 – Test Frequencies
11.3 GEOTEXTILE GRADES
Test Test
Unless specified elsewhere in the contract, use: Description Units Frequency
Method
non-woven, Strength Grade B.
All strength grades, where specified, based on a Tensile 1 per
kN/m AS 3706.2 2
Characteristic Values (Q), to conform to Table Strength 15,000 m
11.1 – Geotextile Strength Grade Properties.
Tear 1 per
Notes to table: N AS 3706.3 2
Strength 15,000 m
(1) % Elongation corresponding to max CBR
burst strength as per AS 3706.4. CBR Burst 1 per
N AS 3706.4 2
Generally <30% for wovens, >30% for Strength 15,000 m
non-wovens.
th Grade
(2) Property value is 80 percentile AS 1 per
characteristic value (mean strength – 0.83 Tensile N 2
2001.2.3.2 15,000 m
x standard deviation), as per relevant AS Strength
test.
1 per
Filtration properties relevant to each grade to be Flow Rate l/m2/s AS 3706.9 2
90,000 m
certified as part of Product Certification clause
requirements. 2
Samples to be 15m in size cut across full width of
the roll, not within 2m of the end of a roll, to
AS 2001.2.3.2.

Page 89
11.5 ROCK PROPERTIES that specified in the PROJECT SPECIFIC

REQUIREMENTS section of the RFT.
The rock properties specified in this clause apply
to the rock, stone, aggregate and boulders Dump into the specified area.
specified in the following clauses in this section;
Protect adjacent areas from damage due to
− Stone Pitching dumping.
− Dumped Rock The average plane of the exposed rock face to be
− Quarter Tonne Dumped Rock within 100 mm of the specified position.
− Rubble 11.8 QUARTER TONNE CLASS DUMPED
− Gabion Rock ROCK PROTECTION
− Reno Mattresses Large spalls or boulders complying with the Rock
Properties clause and having the following
REQUIREMENTS; Clean, dry, durable crushed grading.
stone of uniform quality, free from declared Table 11.3 – Rock grading
weeds and their seeds, vegetable matter and
Rock Size Minimum % Larger Than
other deleterious materials.
35 kg 90
Particles must have at least 2 crushed faces and
conform to AS 1141.25.1, AS 1141.26 and 250 kg 50
AS 1141.29. 500 kg 0
11.6 STONE PITCHING
Dump into the specified area.
11.6.1 Stone Pitching
Protect adjacent areas from damage due to
The stone to be spalls of hard durable rock dumping.
complying with the Rock Properties clause and The average plane of the exposed rock face to be
with no dimension less than 200 mm. within 100 mm of the specified position.
Hand place the stones so that they are firmly 11.9 RUBBLE
bedded in layers. Broken rock complying with the Rock Properties
The average plane of the exposed face to be clause.
within 100 mm of the specified plane and all Maximum size of rubble to be 200 mm.
exposed faces of stones to be within 50 mm of the At least 30 % by mass to have a nominal size of
average plane.
100 mm or greater.
11.6.2 Grouted Stone Pitching – Hold Point No more than 20 % by mass to pass the 2.36 mm
Place stones as specified in the Stone Pitching sieve.
Clause. Dump rubble without segregation onto the
prepared area.
Hold Point - Obtain Superintendent's approval
before grouting. Compact rubble to a tight finish.
The average plane of the exposed face to be
Grout stone pitching with cement mortar. within 100 mm of that specified.
Cement mortar to consist of one part cement to The exposed face to be within 100 mm of the
three parts of clean sand mixed with potable water average plane.
to form a workable mixture.
11.10 GABIONS
Work the mortar into the interstices of the stone 11.10.1 General
pitching to a depth of at least 100 mm from the
surface. Work from the base upwards. A flexible, hexagonal woven steel wire mesh box,
filled with packed stone conforming to the Rock
Cure the mortar for at least 48 hours. Properties clause, and securely laced with steel
Remove defective mortar and re-grout any loose wire.
stones. 11.10.2 Steel Wire Mesh
Provide 75 mm diameter weep holes penetrating Use galvanized steel wire, Grade W15Z380 to
the full thickness of the grout at the rate of one AS 2423.
every 5 square metres.
2
Zinc coating; 250 g/m Galvanization to be carried
11.7 DUMPED ROCK PROTECTION out prior to weaving of the mesh.
Large spalls or boulders complying with the Rock Minimum tensile strength of wire: 380 MPa.
Properties clause and having a least dimension of

Page 90
Mesh openings to be 80 mm x 100 mm maximum, Ensure a tightly packed, neat and uniform
hexagonal in shape with flexible joints consisting construction.
of not less than two full turns.
11.11 RENO MATTRESSES
All wire to be coated with average thickness of 11.11.1 General
0.55 mm extruded grey PVC firmly attached to the
wire. The minimum thickness of coating to be A flexible, hexagonal woven steel wire mesh box,
0.40 mm in accordance with AS 2423. filled with packed stone conforming to the Rock
Properties clause, and securely laced with steel
At the discretion of the Superintendent, the PVC wire.
wire coating may be omitted where abrasion of
wire is not likely to be of concern or where 11.11.2 Steel Wire Mesh
deleterious effects on the wire of ground water, Use galvanized steel wire, Grade W15Z380 to
soil salinity, natural weather exposure and water AS 2423.
emersion is not significant. Check PROJECT 2
SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS section of the RFT. Zinc coating; 250 g/m . Galvanization to be
carried out prior to the weaving of the mesh.
Conform to wire sizes and galvanizing weights in
Table 11.4 – Wire properties - Gabions. Minimum tensile strength of wire: 380 MPa.
Mesh openings to be 60 mm x 80 mm maximum,
Table 11.4 – Wire properties - Gabions hexagonal in shape with flexible joints consisting
of not less than two full turns.
Minimum Diameter
Wire Type All wire to be coated with average thickness of
(mm)
0.55 mm extruded grey PVC firmly attached to the
Body wire 2.7 wire. The minimum thickness of coating to be
0.40 mm in accordance with AS 2423.
Binding and lacing wire 2.2 At the discretion of the Superintendent, the PVC
wire coating may be omitted where abrasion of
Selvedge wire 3.4 wire is not likely to be of concern or where
deleterious effects on the wire of ground water,
Selvedge wire shall be woven integrally along all soil salinity, natural weather exposure and water
edges of the mesh, in accordance with the emersion is not significant. Check PROJECT
manufacturer's instructions, and such that the SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS section of the RFT.
mesh shall not unravel. Conform to the wire sizes and galvanizing weights
The steel wire mesh shall be sized so that it can shown in Table 11.5 – Wire properties – Reno
be folded into regular boxes, complete with Mattresses.
diaphragms, having dimensions specified.
Diaphragms to be at 1,000 mm spacing. Table 11.5 – Wire properties – Reno
Mattresses
11.10.3 Construction
Assemble and erect in accordance with the Minimum Diameter
Wire Type
manufacturer's instructions. (mm)
Pretension the wire framework against a firm
Body wire 2.0
anchor or adjacent units.
Retain the shape of the wire framework with Binding and lacing
spreaders. 2.2
wire
Fill with hard durable stone, complying with the
Rock Properties clause and placed in stages to Selvedge wire 2.4
achieve the tightest packing of stone.
Selvedge wire to be woven integrally along all
Maximum stone dimension: 250 mm. edges of the mesh, in accordance with the
Minimum stone dimension: 100 mm. manufacturer's instructions.
Overfill the framework by 20 mm to 50 mm to Cut to shape where necessary.
allow for subsequent movement of the stone.
Mattress Panels
Perform lacing operations using specified lacing Bottom panel: Includes both sides and both end
wire. Wire to pass round the edges being joined panels.
using alternative single and double loops through
each mesh in turn. Tightness of the mesh and
wiring is essential.
Page 91
Top panel: Shall have the same dimension as the Adjust fine sand/coarse sand proportions if
bottom, without the sides and ends, and be required to provide workable mix.
supplied separately.
Diaphragms: Extend over the full width of the
mattress from top to bottom at maximum intervals Toe-in to provide cut-off walls minimum 300 mm
of 1 m. deep and width not less than maximum thickness
of mattress.
Lay, cut and stitch mattress on prepared surface.
Assemble and erect in accordance with the
Make allowance for take up of fabric resulting
manufacturer's instructions.
from filling mattress with mortar.
Align diaphragms perpendicular to the direction of
All stitching and seams to be neat in appearance
flow unless otherwise specified.
and strength to withstand filling pressure.
Pretension the wire framework against a firm
Ensure mattress is anchored prior to mortar
anchor or adjacent units.
pumping to prevent creep during placement of
Retain the shape of the wire framework with mortar.
spreaders.
Provide openings in fabric at a maximum of one
2
Fill with hard durable stone complying with the every 50 m for placement of mortar. Opening to
Rock Properties clause in this section and placed match size of pumping hose.
in stages to achieve the tightest packing of stone.
Make good openings on completion of mortar
Maximum stone dimension: pumping.
120 mm when mattress depth 170 mm. All areas of mattress to be hard filled with mortar
150 mm when mattress depth 230 mm. with smooth surface.
200 mm when mattress depth 300 mm or greater. Do not permit any loading on the mattress until
Minimum least stone dimension 80 mm. one hour after mortar pumping has been
completed.
Overfill the framework by 20 to 50 mm to allow for
subsequent movement of the stone. Remove spilt mortar from surface of mattress by
hand only. Do not use water to wash spilt mortar.
Perform lacing operations using specified lacing
wire. Wire to pass round the edges being joined Make good any defective areas.
using alternative single and double loops through
11.13 EMBANKMENT PROTECTION -
each mesh in turn. Tightness of the mesh and
CONCRETE
wiring is essential.
Construct embankment protection from concrete
Last panel on downstream side, or at base of
reinforced with a single layer of centrally located
slope, shall be a whole unit (i.e. not cut).
SL62 mesh.
Ensure a tightly packed, neat and uniform
Overlap the mesh by 200 mm at joints.
construction.
Make construction joints in the vertical plane, at
11.12 REVETMENT MATTRESSES
2 m maximum spacing.
11.12.1 General
Continue reinforcement mesh across construction
A nylon fabric material filled with mortar with filter joints.
points for the relief of hydrostatic uplift pressure.
Where margins are required, construct the
Conform to the manufacturer's instructions. embankment protection and the margins as an
11.12.2 Materials integral unit.
Mortar mix proportions to Table 11.6 – Mortar Where there are adjacent protection works,
mix proportions. construct the toe of the embankment protection
and the protection work as an integral unit.
Drainage holes to be 75 mm diameter penetrating
Table 11.6 – Mortar mix proportions the full thickness of the protection works. Install
the drainage holes at 3 m intervals just above the
Cement toe.
Coarse
Type GP Fine Sand Water
Sand
or GB
1 1.2 2.2 450 L/m
3
(500 kg) (600 kg) (1,100 kg)

Page 92
Install additional rows of drainage holes parallel to

the first, and at 3 m intervals and spacings, where
the scope of work requires it.
The exposed surface to be within 50 mm of the
specified position.
11.14 MARGINS
Construct margins with reinforced concrete.
Conforming to the requirements of the
CONCRETE MAINTENANCE Section.
Make construction joints at 3m maximum
spacing.
Form the top 75 mm of the vertical face nearer the
pavement, and any exposed outer face, true to
line and level.
Wood float and broom finish the upper surface of
the margin. Finish flush with the top of the
pavement.
Where adjacent pavement is sealed, overlap the
bituminous seal on the margins by not less than
100 mm.
Tolerances
Width: Not less than specified.
Level: + or - 10 mm of top of adjacent pavement.

Page 93
ROAD FURNITURE MAINTENANCE
12. ROAD FURNITURE MAINTENANCE Table 12.1 - Standard Drawings for Road
Furniture Maintenance
Drawing No. Subject
Culvert Crossing Guard Rail
C(S) 0016
Footings
C(S) 1204 Cyclists’ Hold Rail
C(S) 1300 Flexible Guide Posts
C(S) 1301 Flood Gauge Posts
C(S) 1302 Log Barrier Fence
C(S) 1303 Standard Security Fence
12.1 OUTLINE DESCRIPTION C(S) 1306 Stock Fence Design and Details
This section specifies the maintenance C(S) 1310 Steel Beam Guard Rail
requirement for regular maintenance of road
Standard Cattle Grid Plan and
furniture. C(S) 1313
Sections with Approach Slab
Maintenance operations are specifically ordered
as required by the Superintendent, and includes Standard Cattle Grid Plan and
C(S) 1314
new installation (where missing), repairs to, Sections without Approach Slab
removal and replacement of, any of the following: C(S) 1315 Standard Cattle Grid Details
− Fencing
C(S) 1316 Vehicle Movement Barriers
− Guideposts
− Road Signs 12.5 EXTENT OF WORK
− Raised Retroreflective Pavement Markers 12.5.1 Scheduled Work
(RRPMs) Undertake scheduled works ordered by
− Flood Gauge Posts Superintendent.
− Cattle Grids 12.5.2 Unscheduled Work
Undertake unscheduled works when directed.
− Steel Beam Guardrail
Payment will be at scheduled rates if available, or
12.2 STANDARDS be paid at a fair and reasonable rate negotiated
Comply with the Acts, Regulations, Guidelines between the Contractor and Superintendent.
and Codes applicable to the works. Comply with Unscheduled works may include new installations
the requirements of Authorities with jurisdiction or repairs, removal, replacement of items
over the works. Conform to the Standards and identified whilst undertaking scheduled works.
Publications quoted throughout this document Be familiar with road furniture installations along
unless specified otherwise. Refer to the routes under the contract and be vigilant and
REFERENCED DOCUMENTS. attentive to any unscheduled works requirements.
12.3 DEFINITIONS Log all unscheduled work in a logbook detailing as
Traffic Control Device a minimum:
Any sign, signal, pavement marking or other − Start date, start time
installation placed or erected for the purpose of − Road name, and location measured by
regulating, warning, guiding or providing for the distance
safety of road users. It does not include temporary
− Work performed, i.e.: sign type, guidepost,
warning devices and control measures erected
etc. removed, or replaced
only for the construction period.
− Completion date, completion time
12.4 STANDARD DRAWINGS
− Provide electronic copies of before and after
The most recent issue of the following standard digital photos in jpeg format, clearly showing
drawings form part of the contract as applicable. work undertaken.
Refer to each section for lists of materials to be
carried on the service vehicle.
The Contractor will inform the Superintendent
within 24 hours where unscheduled works cannot
be carried out due to lack of particular materials.

Page 94
12.6 FENCING Erect fences as ordered, so that the line of the

12.6.1 General tops of the posts is uniform.
Clearing fence lines includes the removal of trees, Make allowance for excavation and concreting of
shrubs, vegetable matter and debris. Grub out all anchor/footings.
roots that interfere with the placement of posts. Adjust the position of posts to compensate for the
Refer to Clearing and Mulching clauses in irregularities of the ground.
Formation Width Clearing in EARTHWORKS AND Minor clearing fence lines may include the
DRAINAGE. removal of trees, shrubs, vegetable matter and
Erect fences so that the line of the tops of the debris. Grub out all roots that interfere with the
posts is uniform. placement of posts.
Adjust the position of posts to compensate for the 12.8 CYCLE HOLDING RAILS
irregularities of the ground.
Supply and erect new cycle grab rails and
Provide gates where ordered and across existing delineators as per drawing number CS 1204
access tracks or roads.
Or
12.6.2 Existing Fences
Remove damaged rail and replace with new rail
Install a post at the intersection of any new fence as per drawing.
with the existing fence and fix the wiring of both
Make allowance for excavation and concreting of
fences to that post.
anchor/footings.
Complete the necessary sections of new or
Make allowance for minor clearing of fence lines
replacement fencing before removing existing
fencing. 12.9 CULVERT CROSSING GUARD RAIL
Obtain the owner’s agreement to the proposed Supply and erect Culvert Crossing Guard Rail
fence removal and advise the owner or occupier rails and delineators as per drawing.
in writing of the date that the fence will be Make allowance for Hot Dip galvanising and
removed. masonry chemical anchorage to headwalls.
Erect gates or grids at fence openings as ordered. Make allowance for excavation and concreting of
12.6.3 Materials anchor/footings. Refer to drawing CS 0016.
Barbed wire: 1.57 mm diameter minimum, high Make allowance for minor clearing of fence lines.
tensile. Or
Plain wire: 2.50 mm diameter minimum, high Remove damaged Culvert Crossing Guard Rail
tensile. and replace with new rail as per drawing.
Wire mesh: Galvanized 3.15 mm Make allowance for excavation, removal and
diameter x 50 mm chain mesh. rehabilitation of anchor/footings.
12.6.4 Stock Fence
12.10 LOG BARRIER FENCE
Stock fencing to consist of tubular steel strainer
assemblies with star pickets and galvanized wire. Refer to Recycled Plastic Bollards clause.
Construct as specified on standard drawing Provide log barrier fencing which may either
CS 1306. consist of timber posts or recycled plastic posts
Include the crossing of gullies, watercourses and and rails complete with connections. Construct as
hollows on the ground. shown in the typical details.
12.6.5 Security Fence Timber
Security fencing to consist of tubular steel posts Important: Do not use preservative treatments that
complete with post caps, cable straining wires, contain arsenic or chromium for new works or
chainwire mesh and three barbed wires. replacements.
Construct as specified on standard drawing Use Stringybark, Woollybutt or pine timber,
CS 1303. pressure impregnated with ACQ preservative
12.6.6 Safety Fence formulation, copper oxide (CuO) and quaternary
ammonium compound (DDAC) to Category H4 of
Safety fence to consist of "HUMEARC" AS 1604.1.
type SWP HRI x 3 m panels or similar.
12.11 RECYCLED PLASTIC BOLLARDS
Erect the fence in accordance with manufacturer's
specifications. Supply round pre-moulded recycled plastic
bollards, 1.5 m length x 150 mm dia with built in
12.7 VEHICLE MOVEMENT colours and UV stabilised, resistant to termites,
BARRIERS/FENCES microorganisms and moisture.
As per Standard Drawing CS 1316. Install and ensure security of recycled plastic
Supply stock & half stock length pipe barriers. bollards as per manufacturer’s recommendations.

Page 95
Make allowance for excavation and concreting of 12.13 DELINEATORS

anchor/footings. RECTANGULAR RETROREFLECTORS
Make allowance for minor clearing of fence lines. Class 1 retroreflective material to conform to
12.12 GUIDE POSTS AS 1743.
12.12.1 Posts Size to be 100 mm x 50 mm for red delineators;
100 mm x 25 mm for white delineators.
Use Thermoplastic guide posts manufactured
from plastic alloy ASA/PC or similar. 12.13.1 Installation of Delineators
Refer to standard drawing CS 1300. Attach one red and one white delineator to each
guide post, 50 mm from the top of the post.
REQUIREMENTS
The red delineator to be attached to the convex
Posts to conform to the following:
side of curved guide posts.
Colour: Opaque white.
Attach any corner cube delineators required as
Finish: Smooth, glossy. specified.
Length: 1380 mm. Red delineators to be on the left and white
Width: 95 mm minimum, 105 mm maximum, delineators to be on the right when viewed in the
width to be constant to within 1 mm. direction of travel.
Web thickness: 3 mm minimum, 5 mm maximum. 12.13.2 Unscheduled Guide Post Materials
12.12.2 Certification of Guide Posts – Hold 20 additional guide posts will be carried on the
Point service vehicle when leaving the contractors
Hold point - Provide certification that guide posts premises to perform scheduled works, for the
conform to the following: purpose of carrying out unscheduled works.
− Where installed in normal working conditions, 12.14 WORK ZONE PRODUCTS AND
guide posts are capable of self-erecting after ACCESSORIES
10 impacts head on, from an average sedan 12.14.1 General
travelling at 60 km/h. Conform to AS 1742.3 unless otherwise specified.
− After 2,000 hours of exposure in an Atlas Items required under this section will include, but
Weatherometer the guide posts do not not limited to the following.
change colour by more than 10 points on a
Delta E colour chart. - Traffic Cones 450, 700mm high. reflective
− The guide post material has a minimum Vicat - Traffic Cones (Reflectorised) 700mm high.
softening point of 120ºC. - Plastic Barrier Boards (CL1) and Stands.
− Physical testing as specified. - Amber Flashing Lights.
− Resistant to termites. - Delineators (CL1), Red/Yellow 200mm x
50mm, White 200mm x 50mm.
12.12.3 Guide Post Characteristics – Hold
Point - Class 1 Overlays and Sheeting Material in
all colours. Colour and sizes will be as
Provide guide posts which have the following:
ordered.
− An anti-withdrawal device which will prevent Various associated items as per the schedule of
the guide post from being withdrawn without rates.
dislodgement of the compacted backfill. Anti-
withdrawal devices must be engaged on each 12.15 ROAD SIGNS – MANUFACTURE,
and every guide post prior to installation of SUPPLY AND DELIVERY
guide posts. This subsection specifies the manufacture, supply
− Legible and indelible markings similar to those and delivery of road signs.
used to mark or uPVC sewer and water pipes, 12.15.1 Materials – Hold Point
in letters no less than 5 mm high, showing NON-REFLECTIVE MATERIALS
month and year of manufacture and located
approximately 400 mm from the top of the In accordance with AS 1743.
post. Stick-on labels are not permitted. REFLECTIVE MATERIAL
− Legible and indelible marking 380 mm from Use high intensity Class 1 to AS/NZS 1906.1 for
the bottom of the guide post, to indicate depth all signs and hazard markers with the exception
for installation. Stick-on labels are not that all black legends are to be non-reflective.
permitted. BLANKS
Hold point - Provide a sample guide post from Use aluminium marine grade alloy
each batch purchased for this contract for designation 5052 - H38. Thickness 1.6 mm.
approval before installing any guide posts.

Page 96
Steel sheets may only be used for temporary 12.16 DELIVERY TIMES – NORMAL
signs. REQUIREMENTS
ANTI-GRAFFITI COATING Delivery times are measured from the time of
Hold Point - Obtain Superintendent’s approval for ordering. Requirements are;
the use of the anti-graffiti films or coating
products. Apply anti-graffiti products only to the Table 12.2 – Sign delivery times
new road signs specified by the Superintendent. Delivery
12.15.2 Manufacture Sign Type Quantity
Time
Chemically clean aluminium blanks before Regulatory
painting or bonding of reflective material. Signs Up to 20 each 1 Week
Stamp the month and year of manufacture and (‘R’-series)
the symbol DoI on the backs of all signs.
Warning Signs
12.15.3 Delivery Up to 20 each 1 Week
(‘W’-series)
Supply sign including all brackets, bolts, nuts and
bracings. Fix bracings to the signs prior to Guide Signs
Up to 10 signs 2 Weeks
delivery. (‘G’-series)
Package and handle all items to ensure delivery in Temporary
an undamaged condition. Signs Up to 10 each 1 Week
Protect signs with an approved slip sheeting and if (‘T’-series)
required by the retroreflective sheeting Associated
manufacturer be padded with microfoam sheeting Any Quantity 1 Week
Hardware
between the faces. The sheeting is to cover the
entire sign. Where delivery is not achieved within the times
listed a penalty of 15% of the value of the order
Store signs on their edge at all times and do not per week or part thereof will be applied at the
allow to become wet at any stage. Signs are discretion of the Superintendent.
deemed delivered on being received into Sign
For orders in excess of the quantities listed,
Stores at Regional Centres.
delivery time will be as agreed between the
Signs received in a damaged condition will not be Superintendent and the Contractor.
accepted. The Sign Supply Period Contractor is
12.17 ROAD SIGNS – INSTALLATION AND
responsible for unloading.
MAINTENANCE
Contact DoI Regional Office to confirm the 12.17.1 General
delivery location and make allowance. Regional
This subsection specifies the erection or
Centre Sign Stores are located at the following
replacement of road signs and posts including
locations:
supply of posts.
DARWIN 12.17.2 Posts
DoI Road Projects Depot, Yarrawonga Road, Post sizes to conform to Table 12.5 - Roadside
Palmerston, and/or Period Contractor for Signage Signs - Mounting Selection unless specified
Installation, Darwin. otherwise.
Note: make allowance for delivery to a single Posts to be medium grade galvanized pipe with
location within a 40-kilometre radius of the Darwin plain ends and constructed from a single length of
General Post Office. pipe. Cap each post with a galvanized cap.
TENNANT CREEK Do not use “Ingal” posts.
DoI Road Projects Depot, Leichhardt Street, Conform to AS 1074.
Tennant Creek.
12.17.3 Location
ALICE SPRINGS
Signs to be located clear of vegetation and be
Period Contractor for Signage Installation, Alice clearly visible under headlight illumination.
Springs.
12.17.4 Lateral Placement
EAST ARNHEM
Lateral placement to be measured to the edge of
DoI Road Projects Depot, John Flynn Drive, the sign nearest the road.
Nhulunbuy.
Lateral placement to be as follows:
Unkerbed roads: 2 to 4 m clear from the edge of
the traffic lane, and 600 mm minimum clear from
the outer edge of the road shoulder.

Page 97
Kerbed roads: 500 mm to 1000 mm from the Table 12.4 - Orientation of signs
front face of the kerb.
12.17.5 Height Face: Vertical, and turned 3 degrees to
5 degrees horizontally from
Height to be measured as the clearance to the oncoming traffic on straight sections.
lowest edge of the lowest sign in an assembly. On curves, at right angles to centre
Heights for signs to be as follows: line of road.
Table 12.3 – Sign installation heights Exception: Parking signs to be oriented
5 degrees from parallel to the kerb to
Unkerbed Roads:
face oncoming traffic.
Fingerboard (G3) and 2 m above the near
12.17.7 Remove and Replace Existing Posts
street name signs (G5): edge of the pavement.
and Signs
Other signs: 1 to 1.5 m above the Dismantle damaged posts and signs.
near edge of the Backfill the hole left by the post and its footing and
pavement. compact the fill to the same density as the
Kerbed Roads: surrounding area.
Erect replacement posts and signs in newly
Signs overhanging a 2.5 m minimum above augered holes in accordance with Installation of
footway: footway. Posts and Signs section above.
Signs not overhanging 1 to 1.5 m clearance 12.17.8 Reinstatement and Relocation of
a footway: except for those Existing Signs
specific signs on Dismantle existing post and signs carefully.
medians and islands Store in a manner to prevent damage.
given below.
Backfill the hole left by the post and its footing and
Specific signs on medians and islands: compact the fill to the same density as the
The following signs, when used on medians and surrounding area.
islands, to have a clearance 150 mm above the Erect posts and signs in newly augered holes in
kerb: accordance with Installation of Posts and Signs
− D4-1-2 Hazard Marker clause above.
− D4-2-2 Hazard Marker Refer to Table 12.5 - Roadside Signs -
Mounting Selection.
− D4-3 Hazard Marker
− R2-3 (Keep Left) (Keep Right) Refer to Clause 12.30 for Tables
− R2-5 (No U Turn) 12.17.9 General Requirements
− R2-6 (No Right Turn) (No Left Turn) Spacing between posts to be:
− R2-15 (U Turn Permitted). − 2 post signs - 0.6 times sign width.
12.17.6 Installation of Posts and Signs − 3 post signs - 0.4 times sign width.
Conform to Table 12.5 - Roadside Signs - − 4 post signs - 0.3 times sign width.
Mounting Selection. − Brace spacing to be 380 mm maximum.
Posts to be vertical. − Adopt the nearest size in the list for
Sleeves, when specified, to be 50 mm longer than intermediate sizes.
the specified ground anchor depth and extend
− Post sizes for galvanized pipe posts are for
50 mm above the finished surface level.
sign clearance of less than 2 m above the
Secure the post to the sleeve with a galvanised pavement. For sign clearances greater than
locking wedge. 2 m, increase the nominal diameter of the
Encase the post, or sleeve when used, in a pipe size by a percentage equal to the
footing of 20 MPa concrete. percentage increase in height above 2 m.
Conform to Table 12.4 - Orientation of signs. − Where signs are erected in groups treat the
overall dimensions of the group as one sign
size to determine the post requirement from
the Table 12.5 - Roadside Signs - Mounting
Selection.

Page 98
12.17.10 Unscheduled Sign Materials Hold Point - Submit for Superintendent approval
Carry additional sign materials on the service a suitably designed format for daily log books prior
vehicle for the purpose of carrying out to commencing works under the Contract.
unscheduled repair and replacement works at 12.18 REMOVAL OF GRAFFITI.
various sites.
Remove the Graffiti using the nominated graffiti
These items are additional to those required for remover in accordance with the manufacturer's
scheduled works. instructions. Rinse panel free of remover/graffiti
− 3 x 60 km/h residues with water, wipe dry and assess for clean
− 3 x 80 km/h ability/removal it shall exhibit complete removal of
the graffiti and show no discernible effect on the
− 3 x 100 km/h graffiti barrier or retro-reflective or non-reflective
− 3 x Give Way sheeting of the sign or other painted surfaces
− 3 x Stop Signs 12.19 CLEANING OF SIGNS.
− 3 x Keep Left When cleaning a sign a non-abrasive cleaner free
− 3 x D4-2-2 Hazard Signs of damaging solvents should be applied with a
sponge or soft bristle brush. Pressure sprayers
− Ample spare sign posts, caps, brackets, bolts,
may be used if not sprayed so close to the sign
nuts and bracings
that it would damage the sheeting face. Whatever
− Concrete materials including cement, sand, procedure is followed, it is best to first check with
and aggregate the product supplier and test out any chemical
12.17.11 Receipt, Storage, Inventory and cleaner on a sign in the maintenance yard before
Control of Signs use in the field.
Make provision for the receipt, storage, inventory 12.20 CLEANING OF TOURIST
and control of existing and replacement stock of INTERPRETIVE SIGNAGE
Departmental signs, fittings and other associated
Tourist Interpretive signs in various locations are
items for use in the contract works.
required to be kept clean at all times and
Provide a secure and weatherproof storage facility especially during the “tourist season.” The signs
at the Contractors premises. The facility is to be are to be cleaned in such a manner as to remove
2
approximately 150 m to accommodate an all graffiti, dirt and other deleterious material,
existing stock of signs, posts and fixtures made leaving the signs fit for purpose, clean and
available to the Contractor by the Superintendent readable.
for use in the contract works. Three large sign 12.21 ROAD ASSET INFORMATION
racks will also be provided with the signs.
The Superintendent will provide a current Road
Keep stock records up to date and regularly Information Management System (RIMS) data
advise the Superintendent of item usage. The sheet listing when the Contract is awarded and
Superintendent will supply replacement items as provide regular updates, as required, throughout
required. Such replacement items will be at no the Contract.
cost to the Contractor, however costs associated
The data sheet listing will include the following;
with receipt, storage, inventory and control will be
paid at the rate for Establishment as defined in the − Each road under the Contract
Schedule of Rates. − The respective identification number
12.17.12 Transportation − The respective Permanent Reference Points
(PRPs) and chainages.
Transport all items with care to ensure installation
in an undamaged condition. Signs are to be Work will be located by reference to the
secured, supported and braced vertically to information contained on the data sheet listings.
prevent damage due to scuffing, abrasion or load 12.22 MATERIAL SUPPLIED BY THE
shifting. Adequately brace large signs to prevent PRINCIPAL
buckling or rivet popping. Signs installed in a
damaged condition will not be accepted. On termination of the Contract, undertake a stock
inventory of all signs, posts and fixtures and
12.17.13 Daily Log – Hold Point provide the inventory to the Superintendent. All
Keep a daily log of works which at a minimum discrepancies deficient from the stock at the onset
identifies road name, chainage, work performed, of the Contract will be charged to the Contractor.
completion date, equipment down time and Give access to the Superintendent or his
unusual happenings. Submit daily log book sheets Representative in order to remove or relocate the
with each completed Contractor Service Request signs at the termination of the contract. The cost
(CSR). of removal or relocation of the signs, posts and
fittings will be borne by the Superintendent.
Page 99
12.23 FLOOD GAUGE POSTS damage members of a grid, remove and

Posts and Gauges replacement of damaged parts of a grid and
cleaning and painting of parts of a grid
Use a standard flood gauge refer to standard
drawing CS 1301. All repairs to grid steel welding will be carried out
by a certified tradesman or a person with
Use galvanized posts, single length medium
demonstrated ability to perform the works within
grade 50 mm nominal bore with plain ends and
the limits of the specification
end caps.
Carry sufficient spare bolts, nuts, plates and
Installation
tradesman equipment when carrying out routine
Erect the post vertically at the outer edge of the maintenance for repairs that were not obvious at
road shoulder or margin, on the left hand side the time of original inspection.
when viewed in the direction of travel.
12.25 STEEL BEAM GUARDRAIL
Install a concrete anchor, of 20 MPa concrete,
with a depth of 600 mm and a diameter of 12.25.1 Materials
300 mm. Repair and maintain each required section of the
Cast a suitable galvanized sleeve, 650 mm in steel beam guardrails, as shown on the Standard
length, in the anchor so that the sleeve extends Drawing and details below:
50 mm above the finished surface level. Conform to AS/NZS 3845.
Attach post to sleeve with a galvanized M10 bolt Use W-beam guardrail similar to ‘Armco Flex
25 mm from the top of the sleeve. Beam Guardrail’ (nominal 300 mm width) or
Secure gauge to post with galvanized bolts and similar formed from HA 350 steel.
nuts, and galvanized brackets as appropriate. Rails to be capable of withstanding a cold bend of
Position gauge zero to comply with lowest spot on 180º. around a diameter 2.5º times its own
floodway along the centre line. thickness without cracking.
Metal thickness to be 2.7 mm minimum.
12.24 CATTLE GRIDS
TERMINAL SECTIONS
Repair and maintain each required section of the
cattle grid or assembly as shown on the Standard Form from HA 350 steel having the same
Drawings and details below: properties and thickness as the rails.
- Grid centre line are placed on the centre line of POSTS
the road pavement. Fabricate posts and block outs from steel channel
- Grid grade and levels are to conform to the section in accordance with standard drawing.
grade and levels of the adjacent road BOLTS AND NUTS
pavement. Conform to AS 1111 and AS 1112.
- Place and compact select fill behind the Shape bolt shoulders and holes in rail elements to
abutments of the grid, up to the base of the prevent the bolts from turning.
pavement.
Length of bolts to be sufficient to extend 6 mm to
- Reinstate pavement layers with base material. 12 mm beyond the nuts.
- Reinstate surface. GALVANIZING
- Tighten all hold down bolts as specified. Hot Dip Galvanize all components after
- Paint the portion of guardrails above ground fabrication, to AS/NZS 4680.
with one coat zinc phosphate primer and two Repair defective galvanizing by painting with a
coats of white alkyd paint. zinc rich paint of similar colour.
- Fix width markers with epoxy adhesive to each INSTALLATION
guardrail.
Erect the rail in a manner that produces a smooth,
- Construct strainer post assemblies. continuous, taut rail closely conforming to the line
- Fix the stock fence to the strainer assembly. and grade of the roadway.
- Supply and install a gate in the fencing Lap rails so that the ends of rails do not face
adjacent to the grid as specified. oncoming traffic in the adjacent lane.
Refer to PROJECT SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS Attach reflective delineators to the guardrail in
section of Request for Tender. accordance with the manufacturer's specification.
12.24.1 Grid Maintenance Refer to PROJECT SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS
Refer to Standard Drawings CS 1314, CS 1315 section of Request for Tender.
and CS 1316.
This section of work for the repairs and
maintenance of grids, include the welding to

Page 100
12.25.2 Steel Beam Guardrail maintenance

Repairs and maintenance of damage section of
steel beam guardrail to include removal and
replacement of damaged parts of the rail, post
and terminal sections in a manner that produces a
smooth, continuous, taut rail closely conforming to
the line and grade of the roadway.
Attach reflective delineators to the guardrail in
accordance with the manufacturer's specification.
12.26 ADVERSE CONDITION REPORT
Submit to the Superintendent a Road Furniture
Adverse Condition Report when condition of road
furniture is adverse due to factors not covered by
this specification.
Carry out the works in accordance with ordered
Contractor Service Request (CSR) and as per
unscheduled work conditions of this specification,
however, submit this report if works are to be
interrupted due to external or unforeseen
circumstances.
12.27 LIAISON WITH THE SUPERINTENDENT
Refer all matters relating to difficulties or problems
experienced in carrying out the requirements of
the Contract to the Superintendent.
12.28 CONTRACTOR’S PERSONNEL
Provide one service vehicle with a minimum of
two personnel to undertake the works under the
contract.
The Superintendent may at times require the
services of additional vehicles and labour to
perform Unscheduled Works. Additional vehicles
and labour will be paid at the tendered rates
defined in the Schedule of Rates.
12.28.1 Personnel in Crews
Personnel undertaking contractual works as
defined in this specification will be required to
work with minimum supervision. Nominate one of
the personnel familiar with the requirements of
contract to attend all operations in each area of
work to ensure full compliance. Nominate an
individual or provide a roster of individuals that are
contactable and available at all times, 24 hrs a
day 7 days a week including Public Holidays.
Refer to Table 12.6 - Personnel in Crews.
12.28.2 Plant and Equipment
Supply a service vehicle readily available and
equipped with all the necessary tools and
equipment to perform the works.
Refer to Table 12.7 - Plant and Equipment.
Page 101
12.30 TABLES
Table 12.5 - Roadside Signs - Mounting Selection

Sign Anchor
No. and NB
Sign Size attachment
gal. pipe Bracing Depth Dia.
WXD brackets (or M8
posts (mm) (mm)
bolts) per post
300 x 300 1 x 50 2 No 600 300
300 x 450 1 x 50 2 No 600 300
450 x 450 1 x 50 2 No 600 300
450 x 300 1 x 50 2 No 600 300
450 x 600 1 x 50 2 No 600 300
450 x 750 1 x 50 2 No 600 300
450 x 900 1 x 50 2 No 600 300
600 x 450 1 x 50 2 No 600 300
600 x 600 1 x 50 2 No 600 300
600 x 750 1 x 50 2 No 600 300
600 x 900 1 x 50 3 No 600 300
600 x 1050 1 x 50 3 No 600 300
750 x 450 1 x 50 2 No 600 300
750 x 600 1 x 50 2 No 600 300
750 x 750 1 x 50 2 No 600 300
750 x 1200 1 x 50 3 No 1000 300
900 x 300 1 x 50 2 Yes 600 300
900 x 600 1 x 50 2 Yes 600 300
900 x 900 1 x 50 3 Yes 600 300
900 x 1350 1 x 50 4 Yes 1000 300
1050 x 600 1 x 50 2 Yes 1000 300
1050 x 900 1 x 50 3 Yes 1000 300
1200 x 600 2 x 50 2 Yes 600 300
1800 x 600 2 x 50 2 Yes 1000 300
1800 x 1200 2 x 80 4 Yes 1000 300
2400 x 1200 2 x 80 4 Yes 1200 450
2400 x 1800 2 x 100 5 Yes 1200 450
3000 x 600 2 x 50 2 Yes 1000 300
3000 x 1200 2 x 80 4 Yes 1200 450
3000 x 1800 2 x 100 5 Yes 1500 450
3700 x 600 2 x 80 2 Yes 1000 300
3700 x 1200 3 x 80 4 Yes 1200 450
3700 x 1800 3 x 100 5 Yes 1500 450
3700 x 2400 4 x 100 7 Yes 1500 450

Page 102
Table 12.5 - Roadside Signs - Mounting Selection

Sign Anchor
No. and NB
Sign Size attachment
gal. pipe Bracing Depth Dia.
WXD brackets (or M8
posts (mm) (mm)
bolts) per post
4300 x 600 2 x 80 2 Yes 1000 300
4300 x 1200 3 x 80 4 Yes 1200 450
4300 x 1800 3 x 100 5 Yes 1500 450
4900 x 600 3 x 80 2 Yes 1000 300
4900 x 1200 3 x 100 4 Yes 1200 450
4900 x 1800 3 x 100 5 Yes 1500 450
5500 x 600 3 x 80 2 Yes 1000 300
5500 x 1200 3 x 100 4 Yes 1200 450
5500 x 1800 4 x 100 5 Yes 1500 450
6100 x 600 3 x 80 2 Yes 1000 300
6100 x 1200 3 x 100 4 Yes 1200 450
6100 x 1800 4 x 100 5 Yes 1500 450
Table 12.6 - Personnel in Crews

At least one person shall have the following:
Qualifications: A current Accreditation Certificate in Work-zone Traffic Control, and prior
experience in traffic management.
An ability to understand and apply the requirements of AS 1742.3
Possess a current NT driver’s licence appropriate for the Contractors service
vehicle.
Experience: Relevant experience in the construction industry including safe operation of
equipment for welding, cutting, grinding, concreting, and other hand tools.
Attributes: Good oral and written communication skills, and able to liaise well with
Departmental staff.
Knowledge: Knowledge of the road network.

Page 103
Table 12.7 - Plant and Equipment

The service vehicle will provide effective and efficient service response, and will contain but not be
limited to the following items:
Communication: Hands free mobile phone.
Access to a satellite phone for remote locations would be advantageous,
however not essential.
Fittings: Post and sign racks, concrete pre-mix material bins, water tank with potable
water supply sufficient to mix concrete as required, and storage boxes for
brackets, fitting, bolts and nuts etc.
Equipment: Mechanical and hand augers, oxy-acetylene set, portable welder/generator set,
small electric breaker, ladders, wheelbarrow, lifting equipment, dumpy level and
staff.
Hand Tools: Hand tools for fencing, concreting, digging, shovelling, compacting, fixing,
screwing, dismantling, riveting, driving, breaking, and levelling.
Electric hand tools and accessories for the grinding, cutting and drilling of steel,
aluminium and wood, banding tools.
Camera: Digital camera to record evidence of damage for unscheduled works and other
occurrences.

Page 104
PAVEMENT MARKING MAINTENANCE
13. PAVEMENT MARKING MAINTENANCE 13.4 CONTRACTOR ACCREDITATION

All pavement marking work must be carried out by
13.1 OUTLINE DESCRIPTION a contractor accredited to the “Painting Contractor
This section specifies the materials, testing and Certification Program” (PCCP) in a class or
standards of workmanship for marking and re- category applicable to the work. The PCCP is
marking of pavements with road marking paint administered by the CSIRO. Information
and/or long life material. regarding the PCCP can be obtained at
http://www.apas.gov.au/pccp/
13.2 STANDARDS
Comply with the Acts, Regulations, Guidelines 13.5 CONTRACTOR’S MATERIALS AND
and Codes applicable to the works. Comply with EQUIPMENT – WITNESS POINT
the requirements of Authorities with jurisdiction Provide all general and specialised equipment,
over the works. Conform to the Standards and tools and materials to carry out and test the work.
Publications quoted throughout this document Be fully equipped on each attendance call.
REFERENCED DOCUMENTS. Equipment used shall produce markings of
uniform quality which conform to the requirements
13.3 DEFINITIONS of this specification.
CSR
Witness Point - Produce documented evidence
Contractor Service Request. A formal request to show that spraying equipment has been
issued by the Superintendent for works to be calibrated in accordance with NTTM 405.1.
undertaken.
Specifically, provide at least the following;
Longlife Materials
Longlife marking materials generally consist of − One or more self -propelled line marking units
either thermoplastic, cold applied plastic or pliant with an operating paint capacity of > 600 litres
polymer materials. These materials have lifespans and equipped with appropriate glass bead
of between 2 and 5 times that of water-borne capacity, a minimum rear wheel track of
paint. 1400 mm and a wheel base of 2800 mm with
rear operator. These machines are to be
Longitudinal Lines
equipped with data logging and application
Any line which runs parallel to the road centre monitoring equipment.
line, e.g. broken line, edge line, separation line,
barrier line. − One or more self-propelled line marking units
suited to short run urban line marking,
NTTM intersections and areas requiring greater
NT Test Methods, found in NT Materials Testing manoeuvrability. These machines shall have a
Manual. minimum GVM of 1 tonne and have a paint
Other Markings capacity of not less than 200 litres and have
appropriate glass bead capacity. These
All diagonal lines, chevron markings and
machines are to be equipped with data
messages on the pavement, including symbols,
logging and application monitoring equipment.
words, numerals, arrows and kerb markings.
PCCP − One or more hand cart line marking units
including self-propelled machines with an
Painting Contractors Certification Program operating capacity of 20 litres
Retroreflectivity − Pilot vehicles equipped with required work
A term used to indicate the reflectivity provided by zone traffic control signage for works on the
glass beads and is expressed as minicandela per road network conforming to the requirements
2
lux per square metre (mcd/lx/m ) as measured by of AS 1742. Refer to PROVISION FOR
a reflectometer approved by the Superintendent. TRAFFIC.
Traffic Control Device − Skilled labour resources to crew a minimum of
Any sign, signal, pavement marking or other one line marking unit. Crews to have gained
installation placed or erected for the purpose of accreditation from nationally recognised and
regulating, warning, guiding or providing for the DoI approved Work Zone Traffic Management
safety of road users. It does not include courses and obtained the appropriate
temporary warning devices and control measures accreditation cards with photographic
erected only for the construction period. identification issued by Motor Vehicle
Transverse Markings Registry. Crews to also be conversant with
Work Health and Safety requirements.
Any line which is at right angles to the centre line
of the road, e.g. stop line, hold line, and − Schedule of local NT suppliers intended to be
pedestrian cross walk. utilized for the supply of materials.

Page 105
13.6 PAVEMENT MARKING other approved method prior to application of the

13.6.1 General – Witness Point markings.
Pavement Markings at new works to be installed The location of all pavement markings over
within 3 days of sealing unless otherwise specified existing markings shall match the existing except
by the Superintendent. Paint application will also where directed otherwise.
be at the same rate as specified unless otherwise Setting out will be negotiated with each CSR as
directed by the Superintendent. an item for new work only. Setting out will be to a
Witness Point - Obtain approval from the level of service satisfactory to the Superintendent.
Superintendent for the type of equipment to be Set out markings so that they are straight, with
used for applying marking materials. smooth even curves where necessary. Remove
13.6.2 Road Marking Paint any marking material beyond the defined marking
leaving a neat and smooth marking on the
Australian Paint Approvals Scheme (APAS)
pavement.
Specifications: For paint types identified by an
APAS specification code, conform to the New Work: Set out line marking in accordance
specification represented by that code. with the standard drawings for line marking,
CS 1520 and CS 1521 and in accordance with
Road marking paint to conform to APAS 0041/5
AS 1742 including the setting out of arrows,
and suitable for application by spray equipment in
letters, numerals and chevrons.
accordance with Test Method
AS /NZS 1580.205.4. Paint to be suitable for Remarking: Remark along the line of the existing
asphalt, bituminous seal and concrete road line marking and to the tolerances specified for
surfaces and for use with Intermix BS 6088 glass new work.
beads. 13.6.6 Application
Retain a 'Certificate of Compliance' with the Apply paint evenly to the road surface at the
relevant Australian Standards or APAS specified film thicknesses (Tolerance + 0.04 mm)
specification in respect to the paint and glass and not more than five seconds after spraying
beads. apply Intermix beads
13.6.3 Glass Beads On all work, apply one coat of paint and glass
Use Type C glass beads conforming to beads to the road. Apply in the direction of traffic
AS/NZS 2009 with the exception of size. Conform flow where possible.
to the size distribution requirements in Table 13.1 Transverse and Other Marking Applications:
– Glass Beads Size Distribution. Apply paint evenly to the road surface to the
specified film thickness and immediately after
Table 13.1 – Glass Beads Size Distribution
apply an even application of Intermix glass beads
Sieve Size at the specified rates.
% Retained % Passing
(Microns) Protect all applications from traffic until the binder
1180 0–3 97 – 100 has hardened sufficiently to retain the glass
beads.
850 5 – 20 80 – 95 Reinstate pavement markings that are damaged
425 65 – 95 5 – 35 by traffic during paint drying time and remove all
tyre pickup marks as per Removal Of Markings
PAN 0 - 10 clause.
Markings must be free from ghosting and
13.6.4 Long Life Marking Materials raggedness on the sides and ends and parallel
with the general alignment of the carriageway.
Use a product approved and recommended by the Lines must be level, uniform and free from
manufacturer for the purpose and conforming to streaks.
the requirements of AS 4049.
Conform to Table 13.2 – Line Marking
Retain a 'Certificate of Compliance' with the Application Rates.
relevant Australian Standards in respect to the
material.
Intermix glass beads conforming to AS/NZS 2009.
13.6.5 Setting Out
Surface to be marked must be free from dirt, loose
detritus, mud and other extraneous matter, and
dry before and after painting operations.
The location of all pavement markings on new
surfaces, including reflective raised pavement
markers, shall be set out by spotting with paint or
Page 106
Table 13.2 – Line Marking Application Rates Sealing

Spray sealing is the preferred method for sprayed
Material Thickness/rate seal surfaces. Conform to SPRAY SEALING FOR
Waterborne Paint dry film MAINTENANCE.
thickness (excluding surface > 0.250 mm Paint Blackout
applied beads)
Water borne Paint Wet film Paint blackout may be considered as a temporary
thickness (excluding surface > 0.400 mm measure only as markings retain a high reflection
applied beads) and possess low skid resistance.
Surface applied glass beads Intermix glass Other Methods
(rate retained in the paint beads > 300 Other methods such as water blasting, heat lance
surface) g/m2 or paint stripping may also be considered by the
Superintendent.
13.6.7 Tolerance 13.6.9 Field Testing
The distance between the centre line of the Wet Film Thickness Comb: Check the thickness of
marking and the centre line of the set out mark is the wet film applied to the road pavement by the
to be less than 30 mm. The apparent line of the method of procedure for Operation of Wet Film
markings is to be a smooth continuous alignment Thickness Comb (NTTM 401.1)
when viewed in the direction of the line. Permitted Glass Bead Application: Check the application
tolerance for the length, width and spacing of all rate of glass beads to the surface of the marked
pavement markings: + or - 10 mm. line by the method of Field Procedure for
13.6.8 Removal of Markings – Hold Point Measurement of the Rate of Application of
Spherical Glass Beads (NTTM 402.1)
Hold Point – Obtain approval from the
Wear assessment: The degree of wear is defined
Superintendent on the method used for line
as the area of pavement marking remaining after
marking removal.
a period of time, relative to the initial area of the
Removal of pavement marking must not adversely pavement marking.
affect the integrity of the road surface. Degree of wear: At the Superintendent’s
When arrows, letters or figures are to be removed discretion, determine the degree of wear using
or temporarily blacked out, the removal pattern Image Analysis in accordance with AS 4049.1
must be in the shape of a rectangle or square to Paints and related materials – Pavement marking
minimise confusion to the motorist, particularly in materials or by using Image Analysis in
wet weather or poor lighting conditions. accordance with AS 4049.3:2005 Appendix K,
Remove all materials and debris from removal Method A, Photographic Method.
operations. Wear limits for pavement marking: 95% intact
The following methods may be considered and area after six months.
will be dependent on the type of surface, extent Remark pavement marking that does not conform
and application. to the specified limits at the Contractor’s expense
Machine Grinding including the costs of all testing.
This method may be considered for use on 13.7 COLD APPLIED THERMOPLASTIC
smaller removal jobs where surface finish is not a MATERIALS
concern. Can be used on most asphalt and
13.7.1 Standards
concrete surfaces.
AS 4049.2 Paints and related materials—
Sandblasting
Pavement marking materials - Part 2:
Sandblasting is the preferred method for marking Thermoplastic pavement marking materials—For
removal on asphalt and concrete surfaces. use with surface applied glass beads
Use a skirt or guard around the blaster to AS 4049.4 Paints and related materials—
minimise the spraying of material away from the Pavement marking materials – Part 4: High
immediate work area. performance pavement marking systems
Remove waste material before it can be AP-S0041/3 Pavement marking materials –
transported by rain, wind or traffic. This will cold applied plastic
generally require the use of a vacuum attachment
AP-S0042 Glass beads for use in pavement
operating concurrently with the blasting operation
marking paints
or alternative method approved by the
Superintendent.

Page 107
13.7.2 Materials – Witness Point 13.7.4 Setting out

Generally: A two part Poly Methyl Methacrylate For continuous thermoplastic pavement marking,
resin based pavement marking material that 50 mm drainage gaps shall be provided, at a
complies with the requirements for colour, maximum spacing of 6m +1m, to allow adequate
luminance and bead content of AS 4049.2, and drainage of the pavement surface. Nominate in
which complies with AS 4049.4, sprayed or the Contract Management Plan the method of
screeded onto the pavement, containing pre- identifying the location and spacing for these
mixed glass beads conforming to AS/NZS 2009, gaps.
with additional drop-on beads being added during
13.8 RAISED RETROREFLECTIVE
application, conforming with the following
PAVEMENT MARKERS (RRPMS)
requirements of AS 4049.2: Clause 5.1 – Colour,
Clause 5.2 - Luminance and Clause 7 - Field 13.8.1 Materials
Testing. The material shall have a maximum no- Use STIMSONITE 953 markers fixed to the road
pick-up time of 60 minutes. surface as recommended by the manufacturer of
Witness Point - Provide evidence that all the marker.
proprietary products such as epoxy or plastic Raised Retroreflective Pavement Markers to
products have demonstrated satisfactory field conform AS 1906.3. Fix to the road surface as
performance for a period of at least three years. recommended by the manufacturer.
13.7.3 Application – Witness Point Use adhesives as recommended by the
Application is to be in accordance with the manufacturer.
Manufacturer’s Specification. Use adhesives within the time recommended by
Witness Point - Provide evidence that it has been the adhesive manufacturer.
applied in accordance with the Manufacturer’s 13.8.2 Pavement Preparation
instructions. Ensure each RRPM site is free of dirt, oil, grease,
The area to be marked is to be dry and free of dirt, paint and any other material which would affect
gravel, oil and other loose or foreign material to the bond of adhesive to the pavement.
ensure the best possible adhesion of new Abrasive blast, chip, or burn pavements that
material. Remove existing paint or other material cannot be cleaned by sweeping.
which is flaking or chipped. Cleaning may be
carried out by brooming, blowing or washing. Check the moisture content of the surface
immediately before application by the
Use a tack coat or primer material for surface or polyethylene film moisture test.
other conditions requiring it in accordance with the
Manufacturer’s Specification. Do not place markers if the film moisture test
indicates the presence of moisture.
Apply by spraying, screeding, trowelling or
13.8.3 Placing Markers
extrusion methods, including application of glass
beads and anti-skid material, in a single uniform Place markers in accordance with the
layer. manufacturer's recommendations.
For longitudinal lines and transverse markings, Use marker types as follows:
apply material at a rate to achieve a minimum final − Centre line: White, two way reflectors,
thickness of 2.5 mm ± 0.5 mm for application by
− Lane line: White, one way reflectors,
screeding, trowelling or extrusion methods. Glass
beads are to be Class C (intermix 20 to 30 % by − Left edge line: Red, one way reflectors,
mass) and Class D (AS/NZS 2009). As well as the − Right edge line adjacent to medians on dual
“mixed in” glass beads additional Class D beads carriageway: Red, one way reflectors,
shall be uniformly applied to the surface of
− Chevron Areas: Yellow one way reflectors, or
thermoplastic at the rate of 0.40 kg/m2 as part of yellow two way reflectors.
the application process and before the material
has commenced to set. Face reflectors to oncoming traffic.
The marking produced shall be uniform in texture, Do not obscure the reflective faces by adhesive.
width and thickness and the surface substantially Surface finish to be smooth.
free from blisters, streaks, lumps and other Discard markers which are not positioned
defects. correctly within the time recommended by the
Remove any occurrence of overspray and gun manufacturer for use of the adhesive. Remove
dribble. adhesive from the road surface.
Do not place markers over joints in concrete
pavement.

Page 108
Where the existing seal has excess binder, or Table 13.3 – Audio Tactile Line Marking
where Gilsabind has recently been used, include Tolerances
the following for adhesion of RRPMs:
Tolerance
− Clean the road surface to expose the Aspect Dimension
(mm)
aggregate prior to installation,
− Protect the RRPMs from traffic until the Height of
8mm +2mm or -1mm
adhesive is fully set, raised rib
− Locate the RRPMs to the outside of edge Spacing of
250mm ± 10mm
lines. raised rib
13.8.4 Raised Reflective Pavement Marker Length of
Removal 50mm ± 2mm
raised rib
Where required, remove raised pavement
markers by breaking the bond between the Slope of
45 degrees ± 10 degrees
adhesive, the road surface and the base of the raised rib
raised pavement marker. As shown on
Repair all divots caused by the removal of raised Width of project
pavement markers with hot melt adhesive or raised rib drawings. ± 2mm
epoxy adhesive to the level of the surrounding (edge line). Otherwise
pavement. 100mm
13.9 AUDIO TACTILE LINE MARKING Width of
(ATLM) raised rib
80mm ± 2mm
13.9.1 Site Preparation (centre barrier
line)
Immediately prior to marking application, remove
all extraneous or loose material from areas where
the thermoplastic material is to be applied.
Prepare and prime areas as recommended by the 13.9.4 Audio tactile markings
manufacturer to ensure satisfactory adhesion of Thermoplastic used for audio tactile pavement
thermoplastic material. markings must comply with AS 4049.2 but
13.9.2 Application modified as follows:
Apply ATLM directly on to the road surface on − Softening Point: When determined in
existing painted edge lines or centre double accordance with AS/NZS 2341.18 the
barrier lines. softening point shall be not less than
Apply markings within the tolerances specified in 95°C.
Table 13.3 – Audio Tactile Line Marking − Cold Flow: When determined in
Tolerances. The height of the thermoplastic accordance with AS 4049.2:2005
raised ribs is measured from the planed surface Appendix I – Determination of flow
formed by the tops of the aggregate. resistance - the cold flow shall be no
13.9.3 Retro-reflectivity more than 5% at 40°C.
Apply glass beads in accordance with − Skid Resistance: When tested in
AS/NZS 2009 Type B immediately to the surface accordance with AS 4049.2:2005
of the molten thermoplastic material. The Appendix K – Field tests for thermoplastic
minimum rate to be retained on the thermoplastic pavement marking material – and
2
material is 200g/m . Appendix L – Field determination of skid
Marking must achieve a minimum level of resistance (wet pendulum method) - at
2
reflectivity of 350 mcd/lux/m at time of application any time up to 3,000,000 vehicle passes,
when tested in accordance with AS 4049.2:2005 the skid resistance value of beaded
Appendix K - Field tests for thermoplastic unprofiled base material must be not less
pavement marking material – and Appendix M – than 50.
Determination of retroreflectivity. − Retro-reflectivity: Mix glass beads in
accordance with AS 2009 Type C into the
thermoplastic material at a rate of not less
than 30% by mass prior to application.

Page 109
LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE
14. LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE Grass

Grass includes clumps or tufts of grass growing
on scalded areas, grass species that grow faster
than other species and includes the whole of the
plant, including leaves, seeds, stems and seed
heads.
Mulch
Material spread as a surface treatment to reduce
soil erosion, water loss, and weed invasion.
Native Plants
Plants which are natural to Australia.
14.1 OUTLINE DESCRIPTION NPK Ratio
This section specifies the maintenance The ratio of Nitrogen (N), Phosphorus (P), and
requirement for control of vegetation and litter by Potassium (K) in a fertiliser compound.
use of mechanical means and/or chemicals, and Root Ball
the maintenance requirement for irrigation The finely bound fibrous root and soil removed
systems, in an urban road verge environment. intact from the container with the plant.
14.2 STANDARDS RWA
Comply with the Acts, Regulations, Guidelines Restricted Work Area
and Codes applicable to the works. Comply with Soil Binding Agent
Material which stabilises and conditions soil and
aids moisture retention.
unless specified otherwise. Refer to Weeding
REFERENCED DOCUMENTS. The removal of unwanted plant or grass species
Comply with conditions included in any AAPA by mechanical, manual or chemical means.
clearances or approvals applying to the site of the 14.4 EXTENT OF WORK
works. Observe the restrictions imposed by any
Maintain the full extent of the road reserve for
Restricted Works Areas conditions applying to the
each road and length identified in the RFT and/or
site of the works.
in the PROJECT SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS
Refer to Work Involving Chemicals clause in section and the Schedule of Rates.
Identify and undertake the works required to
Refer to Waste Disposal clause in maintain each road within the specified service
MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS section. levels.
Refer to Vegetation Control in SLASHING AND Service levels are clearly defined outcomes
WEED CONTROL. specified for all the landscape maintenance works
Specification Reference specified herein.
Refer to the Northern Territory Government Failure to adhere to the response times for
Standard Specification for Environmental attendance and completion of work, including after
Management and to the RFT. hour call-outs, may result in the Superintendent
engaging a third party to attend to and complete
14.3 DEFINITIONS the work at the Contractor’s expense.
Certified Seed
At intersections with Local Council Roads,
Seed by record of origin, purity, and strain and maintain to the end of the curve at the truncation.
conforming in character to the parent stock.
Where there is a discernible property boundary or
Exotic Plants fence line, maintain beyond the end of the curve
Any plants not native to Australia. at the truncation to the extended property
Fine Tilth boundary line. The relevant Local Councils are
responsible for maintenance beyond that point.
The friable soil resulting from cultivation.
Refer to Figure 14.1 Extent of Work Area at
Germination Percentage
Intersections with Local Council Roads.
The proportion of pure seed germinating in a fixed
time under standard laboratory conditions.

Page 110
Make available the time and expertise of the

certified irrigation specialist at no additional cost to
the Superintendent in relation to any irrigation
related query that may arise regarding issues
associated with the contract on an “as and when
required” basis.
The certified irrigation specialist is to continually
monitor works and advise the Contractor on
appropriate irrigation requirements with a view to
best practices and will play a major part in
maintaining the irrigation systems over the period
of the contract.
14.6.3 Arborist
Figure 14.1 Extent of Work Area at Include at least one qualified arborist in the tree
Intersections with Local Council Roads pruning team.
Road verges within the road reserve may on The Arborist shall be a person with a minimum
occasion be maintained by other land holders or qualification of Certificate III in Horticulture
residents, however they are not exempt from the (Arboriculture) RTF30203, from the Amenity
specified service levels. Horticulture Training Package RTF03 or
equivalent accredited training course.
14.5 INTERSECTION SIGHT LINES
14.6.4 Supervisors
Maintain intersection sight lines to minimum sight
Employ sufficient supervisors familiar with the
distances corresponding to the relevant vehicle
requirements of the contract to attend all
speed as per Figure 14.2 Intersection Sight
operations in each area of work to ensure full
Lines and Table 14.4 - Sight Line Distances.
compliance with specified service levels.
Refer Clause 14.31 for Figure and Table Nominate an individual or provide a roster of
individuals including their contact phone numbers
14.6 CONTRACTOR’S PERSONNEL
who will be available at all times, including nights,
14.6.1 Horticulturist weekends and Public Holidays during the period
Employ or have access to a qualified Horticulturist of the Contract.
for the total period of the Contract. The 14.6.5 Personnel Handling Chemicals
Horticulturist shall have attained a minimum
Be registered for business as weed control
qualification of Certificate III in Horticulture
operators, or engage subcontractors registered for
(Floriculture) or equivalent accredited training
business as weed control operators. The
course.
Contractor and Sub-contractors must have a
The Horticulturist is to continually monitor and Ground Spraying Business Licence and operators
advise the Contractor daily on appropriate must have a Ground Spraying Applicators
horticultural requirements with a view to best Licence. Provide copies of these licences.
practices and will play a major part in maintaining
Nominate one of the personnel familiar with the
the health of all vegetation over the period of the
requirements of contract to supervise all
contract.
operations to ensure full compliance with statutory
A Horticulturist’s report is to accompany the requirements.
monthly claim for payment and is to include
Do not allow spray drift. Operators must be
mention of all observations or occurrences of note
competent in their understanding of how to
related to vegetative issues observed over the
prevent spray drift.
period.
Keep a copy of the Safety Data Sheet on site for
Make available the time and expertise of the
each type of chemical used
Horticulturist at no additional cost to the
Superintendent in relation to any plant health Handle all chemicals as specified in product SDS.
related query that may arise within the road Wear as a minimum the protective clothing as
reserve associated with the contract on an “as specified in product SDS.
and when required” basis.
Refer to the Spraying clause in SLASHING AND
14.6.2 Certified Irrigation Specialist
WEED CONTROL.
Employ or otherwise engage a certified irrigation
designer and tradesperson with appropriate 14.7 PROGRAM OF WORKS
qualifications to undertake design, installation and Submit a 12 month Landscape Maintenance
maintenance of irrigation systems. Certification to Program within 2 weeks of award of contract in
be recognised by the Irrigation Association of the first year, and 2 weeks prior to the
Australia. commencement of a subsequent 12 month period.
Page 111
Identify the type, frequency and timing for each report. Copies of daily log book sheets for
service associated with the contract. However, spray treatments shall accompany the
achieve the specified service levels regardless of monthly report.
frequency of treatment. − summary of fertilising undertaken in
The Superintendent will use the 12 month accordance with the Annual Maintenance
landscape maintenance program to measure Plan.
progress of the works. − estimate of quantity, including location, of
There may occasionally be a reduction in the area mulch held in stockpile that is the property of
of service under the contract due to new works the Principal.
being carried out within the road reserve.
− details of complaints received from members
Negotiate with the Superintendent any variation to
of the public, and actions taken.
the contract should these works result in a
changed maintenance requirement both during − information about any chemical spills and the
construction and after completion. remedial action taken.
Any reduction in the area of service under the − Details on how compliance with any AAPA
contract as a result of asset transfer to another conditions or RWAs was achieved.
owner will be varied out of the contract. − a record of details of all dead domestic
14.8 PROGRESS REPORTS animals that are disposed of under the
contract.
14.8.1 Weekly Report
Submit to the Superintendent via email no later 14.9 LIAISON WITH THE SUPERINTENDENT
than close of business each Thursday a detailed Refer all matters relating to difficulties or problems
Weekly Report advising the location and nature of experienced in carrying out the requirements of
works programmed to be carried out over the the Contract to the Superintendent.
following week. 14.10 SAFETY MATERIALS EQUIPMENT
Include information about any chemical spills and AND SIGNAGE
the remedial action taken. Carry out all work within the road reserve in
Carry out the works in accordance with the accordance with the PROVISION FOR TRAFFIC
Weekly Report, however submit a modified section and the approved traffic management
version if works are to be interrupted due to plan.
external or unforeseen circumstances. Include in the traffic management plan
Irrespective of external or unforeseen requirements specified herein.
circumstances continue to maintain the asset Supply all materials and equipment used under
within the service levels specified. the Contract.
Number each Weekly Report from 1 to 52, and Ensure the safe and proper use and maintenance
identify as a Revision if that is the case. of all tools, plant, equipment and materials.
14.8.2 Monthly Report Fit appropriate guards on cutting equipment and
Submit a Monthly Maintenance Report attached to high mounted orange coloured hazard lights on all
the monthly claim for payment. The report shall plant, equipment and vehicles being utilized under
provide the following information: the contract.
− a summary of the activities carried out during Fit all plant, equipment and vehicles with signs or
the month of the report signwriting which identifies the primary contractor
− a Horticulturist’s report mentioning all and advises users of the road reserve the primary
observations or occurrences of note related to contractor’s contact phone number.
vegetative issues observed over the period Erect chemical spraying advice signs within 200 m
− a schedule of trees, plants and shrubs that of the work zone when spraying chemicals, and
have died, are dying, or are approaching the relocate as works progresses. Spray only
end of their expected life in the road reserve between the signs.
during the month of the report. Erect signs and park plant equipment and
− a schedule of any vegetation that for any vehicles within the road reserve so that they do
reason is unstable or represents a safety not interfere with or restrict sight lines, particularly
hazard to pedestrians, cyclists, motorists or at intersections.
any other user of the road reserve. 14.11 MATERIALS
− summary of observations or occurrences of 14.11.1 Trees
note related to irrigation issues. Provide trees, shrubs and ground covers with the
− summary of spraying operations for herbicides following characteristics:
and pesticides undertaken in the period of the

Page 112
− Trunks and stems to be sturdy and well Cut grass to between 50 mm and 150 mm of
hardened. ground level at time of service.
− A well-developed vigorous root system. Cut grass from the edge of seal to the extent of
the road reserve or to the cleared tree line within
− A minimum of three months in their container.
the road reserve, including cuttings, batters, inlets
− Be sound, healthy, vigorous, and free from and outlets of culverts, protection works, and
insect pests, plant diseases, sun scalds, fresh around road furniture.
abrasions of the bark, or other disfigurements.
Cut grass to clean cut, not broken or ripped, using
14.11.2 Fertiliser equipment capable of maintaining the health and
Store fertilisers in waterproof sealed bags under appearance of the grass and ground cover.
shelter away from water and direct sunlight. Do not cut shrubs and trees with a calliper size at
Supply fertilisers conforming to Table 14.2 - base greater than 50 mm diameter, planted
Fertilisers. vegetation, or vegetation regardless of size that
has been pegged and directed by the
Refer Clause 14.31 for Table Superintendent to be retained.
14.11.3 Imported Soils Remove cut material or other detritus from the
Provide imported topsoil conforming to AS 4419 grass cutting process from gutters, cycle paths,
and the following requirements: walk tracks and road pavements as the work
proceeds. Use this material for mulching if
− Be free draining. suitable, or remove from site.
− Be red-brown or black sandy loam. Make adjustments to cutting methods and
− Contains no grass or declared weeds and frequency as required to maintain the specified
their seeds. service levels during the wet season.
− Maximum stone size of 6 mm. 14.12.3 Plant and Equipment
14.11.4 Mulch Anticipated plant requirements are push, front
Organic Mulch deck and batter mowers and slashers.
− Material free from impurity and sufficiently Suitable guards are to be in place on all
heavy to prevent dispersal by wind. machinery to prevent material being sprayed onto
the road surface and endanger vehicles, persons
− Shredded bark, wood chips, hay or similar. or property.
− Wood chips of a maximum size of 50 mm,
14.13 GRASS TRIMMING
inert, and free of resinous toxins and termites.
14.13.1 Service Levels
Inorganic Mulch
Trim grass using hand held equipment on
− Washed and screened lateritic gravel,
medians, verges and islands within the road
crushed aggregate or brick chips with particle
reserve that cannot be addressed by cutting grass
sizes in the range 6 mm minimum to 25 mm
by mowing or slashing.
maximum.
Trim grass at joints on concrete, seal and paving
14.12 GRASS CUTTING and any other hard surfaces occurring within the
14.12.1 Service Levels road reserve before it reaches 50 mm in height
Cut grass on medians, verges and islands within and/or 10 mm in diameter.
the road reserve to Table 14.1 – Grass cutting Trim grass at top of kerbing before it overhangs
service levels. the roadside edge.
Table 14.1 – Grass cutting service levels 14.13.2 Grass Trimming Operations
Trim grass in conjunction with grass cutting
Maximum service.
50 mm from the ground.
cut:
Use mechanical or manually operated hand held
As specified for the particular equipment that has no detrimental effect to the
road in the PROJECT SPECIFIC landscape or road asset.
Height not REQUIREMENTS section Or Trim grass for the purposes of aesthetics, integrity
to exceed: Refer to Table 19.1 – Grass of asset, functionality, public safety, including
Height Specification in ROAD vegetation protruding from adjoining properties
AMENITY MAINTENANCE that interferes with footpath traffic.
Trim grass at back of kerbs, around drainage
inlets and outlets, drainage lines and culverts,
14.12.2 Grass cutting operations
edges and surfaces of footpaths and cycle paths,
Collect litter as part of and prior to grass cutting access ramps, drive ways, any form of
operations. infrastructure, utility, furniture, signs, on in or
Page 113
around road medians and splitter islands, traffic 14.15 PRUNING

control devices, fence lines, barriers, trees, 14.15.1 Service Levels
concrete or paving.
Prune trees, shrubs, and other plants so that no
Trim grass on concrete, paved or bituminous part of any plant extends over paved or sealed
surfaces to ground or surface level. Use of super- surfaces up to a height of 3 m over cycle and walk
heated steam for longer term treatment is paths or 5.5 m over road pavements.
permitted here, as is herbicide in accordance with
Prune so that vegetation does not obscure sun
the Herbicide clause.
light to solar collectors.
Fit vehicular trimmer and edge machines with
Prune so that vegetation does not obscure road
arrow boards and crash attenuators (cushions) to
signs and sight lines for motorists or other road
AS 1742.3 Vehicle-mounted signs and devices
users.
sub-clause, Truck-mounted crash attenuators
sub-sub-clause. 14.15.2 Pruning Operations – Hold Point
Do not trim grass with vehicular trimmer and edge Carry out tree pruning operations in accordance
machines on the carriageways between 6 am and with AS 4373.
6 pm Monday to Friday excluding Public Holidays. Include at least one qualified arborist in each tree
pruning team.
14.14 WEEDING
Qualified Arborist: A person with a minimum
qualification of Level 3 Horticulture, specialising in
Remove unwanted plant and grass species in Arboriculture, from the National Horticulture
accordance with the Weeds Management Act. Training Package or equivalent accredited course.
Do not allow weeds to exceed the allowable grass Do not carry out tree lopping or heavy pruning
height on medians, verges and islands within the practices, except on the written recommendation
road reserve. of the qualified arborist.
Remove weeds from joints on concrete, seal and Prune plants for the purposes of addressing
paving and any other hard surfaces occurring issues related to plant health, aesthetics, integrity
within the road reserve before it reaches 50 mm in of asset, functionality or public safety.
height and/or 10 mm in diameter.
Prune plants in response to a need arising from
Remove or treat with herbicide all weeds prior to vandalism, vehicle accident, age of plant,
them seeding. unwanted growth, damage or death by fire, insect,
14.14.2 Weeding Operations fungal or other attack, and any form of weather
Weed any areas and at road pavement and kerb occurrence excluding cyclones, which are referred
junctions, within garden beds and within or around to in the Cyclone Event Damage clause.
any other structure or feature occurring within the Hold Point – Do not prune branches exceeding a
road reserve which cannot be controlled by calliper size of 75 mm at trunk which overhang the
slashing, mowing or trimming. road pavement without the approval of the
Carry out weeding for the purposes of addressing Superintendent.
issues related to aesthetics, integrity of asset, Mulch and re-use pruned matter as mulch on
functionality or public safety. previously mulched garden beds within the road
Carry out weeding by mechanical, manual or reserve. Do not apply freshly mulched material
chemical means. Refer to Treatment Of Pest And directly onto bare or grassed soils, but allow to
Weed Species section for clauses regarding the age for a minimum of 6 weeks prior to application,
latter. stored at an approved location.
Do not re-use removed weed matter as mulch Dispose of all removed pruned matter not used as
within the road reserve. mulch at a Community or Council Waste Disposal
Site. Do not leave on site overnight.
Dispose of all removed weed matter at a
Community or Council Waste Disposal Site. 14.16 REMOVAL OF VEGETATION
Dispose of declared weeds and their seeds in a 14.16.1 Service Levels
manner consistent with the requirements of the
Remove dead, fallen or dangerous plants, trees
Weeds Management Act.
and stumps from within the road reserve within 24
Do not allow weed control activities to impinge on hours of observation or notification.
the health of other desirable plant species, or
Remove vegetation as necessary for safety
result in damage to any part of the road reserve
reasons within 1 hour of observation or notice to
asset.
do so.

Page 114
14.16.2 Horticulturist Identification of Dead characteristics in the planting process. Apply

Plants according to the manufacturer’s recommended
Engage the Horticulturist to identify any plants that rates.
die within the road reserve, including all desirable Replace dead plants in irrigated areas with plants
flora regardless of species or size. of a similar size up to a 45 litre bag size.
The Horticulturist is to identify dead or sickly Exceptions are Eucalyptus, Acacia, Melaleuca,
vegetation and authorise the removal of any Calytrix, Grevillea or other savanna species.
vegetation that is dead or is approaching the end Replace these with tube stock.
of its expected life. Stake all replacement plants within non irrigated
The Horticulturist may also authorise removal of areas.
any vegetation that for any reason is unstable or Do not plant vegetation likely to exceed a mature
represents a safety hazard to pedestrians, height of 4 m below or within 4 m of power lines.
cyclists, motorists or any other user of the road 14.17.4 Planting
reserve.
Plant trees, shrubs and ground cover only when
Submit details of the Horticulturists findings and temperature is below 32 ºC.
recommendations in the Monthly Report.
Maintain the integrity of the plant root zone and
14.16.3 Vegetation Removal Operations the surrounding earth mould.
Remove trees and shrubs of all species and size Place fertiliser in the hole adjacent to, but not in
that have died or fallen, or may represent a contact with, the root zone of the plant. Use
hazard to any person within the road reserve as fertiliser in accordance with Table 14.2 -
identified by the horticulturist for whatever reason Fertilisers, with application rates in accordance
except in the case of a cyclone. with Table 14.3 – Fertilisers Application Rates.
Grind stumps and roots to a depth of not less than
150 mm below ground level or in the case of Refer Clause 14.31 for Tables
smaller species grub, pull and remove roots and 14.18 LITTER COLLECTION
stem base.
Do not elevate or reduce ground levels within the
Maintain the area so that there is no more than
immediate area because of vegetation removal.
ten items of litter within any 100 m section of the
Refer to Cyclone Event Damage clauses for the full width of the road reserve at any time, and that
removal of vegetation debris necessary as a result no litter remains within the road reserve for a
of a cyclone event. period exceeding 72 hours.
14.17 REPLACEMENT OF PLANTS 14.18.2 Litter Collection Operations
14.17.1 Service Levels Collect litter and remove from the road reserve to
Replace plants which have died within irrigated comply with the service level requirements, and
areas of the road reserve within 7 days of prior to grass cutting operations.
observation. Dispose of at a Community or Council Waste
Replace plants which have died within non- Disposal Site, or by acceptable re-cycling
irrigated areas of the road reserve with native methods.
species during the month of December each year Do not store litter for later retrieval anywhere
of the contract. within the road reserve or adjoining properties.
14.17.2 Horticulturist - Replacement of Plants Litter is defined as any loose unattached
– Hold Point inanimate item or any other object that does not
The Horticulturist is to identify all dead plants and form part of the road reserve asset occurring
note the loss in the monthly Horticulturist Report, within the road reserve, generally deposited
including all trees, shrubs and ornamental species illegally.
of flora that occur within the road reserve. Litter includes but is not limited to any forms of:
The Horticulturist is to select replacement plants − goods packaging,
which are healthy and well formed. − paper product,
Hold Point - If the same species of plant is not
− plastic product,
available the Horticulturist shall recommend a
suitable replacement species with similar − rubberised product,
characteristics that is available, and submit to the − glass product,
Superintendent for approval.
− metal / alloy product,
14.17.3 Plant Replacement Operations
− stone or masonry product or item including
Use a water retentive medium such as “Hortex spilt concrete.
Rain Saver” or similar product with equivalent or
Litter also includes but is not limited to:
better water absorption and release
Page 115
− any material excluding liquids resultant from a macropod, marsupial, amphibian, or aquatic
vehicle accident, species.
− any vegetative item, Remove and dispose of multiple or singular
− any mechanical item or part that is not related carcasses occurring anywhere within the road
to intact mechanical, electrical or service- reserve with a weight per carcass not greater than
related infrastructure occurring within the road 50 kg. Removing a carcass with a weight greater
reserve, than 50 kg will be paid at a fair and reasonable
rate negotiated between the Contractor and
− any loose, unattached inanimate item that the Superintendent.
Superintendent deems is not required, wanted
The time period for removal of carcasses will
or expected to occur within the road reserve.
commence from time of observation by the
Report to the Superintendent any occurrences of Superintendent or the Contractor, whichever is
concrete, gravel, sand or soil on any trafficable earlier. The Superintendent is under no obligation
surface. These are not litter under the terms and to advise the Contractor of this observation.
conditions of the contract and will be removed by
Quantities of carcasses resulting from a significant
other means at the Principal’s cost.
spillage or killing event that cannot reasonably be
Litter does not include illegal signage or removed within 1 hour of commencement of work
abandoned vehicles or equipment will be paid at a fair and reasonable rate
Litter resulting from a significant spill event that negotiated between the Contractor and
cannot reasonably be removed within thirty Superintendent. This payment will be for time
minutes of commencement of work will be paid at expended in excess of 1 hour.
a fair and reasonable rate negotiated between the
14.20 CONTROL OF PEST AND WEED
Contractor and Superintendent.
SPECIES
Any single item of litter with a weight greater than
50 kg will be paid at a fair and reasonable rate
negotiated between the Contractor and Treat any pest species, including weed, fungal,
Superintendent. insect and animal occurring within the road
reserve within 7 days of observation or notice.
14.19 REMOVAL OF DEAD ANIMALS
14.20.2 Operations for Control of Weeds
Keep a record of details of all dead domestic
Control declared weeds in accordance with the
animals that are disposed of under the contract,
requirements of the NT Weeds Management Act.
noting the following:
Control other weeds in accordance with this
− Animal type, specification. Control methods include mowing,
− Breed of animal, if possible, trimming, hand weeding, or by spraying herbicide
or other suitable chemicals, or by other manual
− Description of size and colour,
means.
− Registration or identification numbers,
Treat all declared weeds listed in the NT Weeds
− Special identifying features, such as brands, Management Act and all other weeds perceived to
ear tags, collars etc., represent a hazard or impediment to the public,
− Submit details to the Superintendent as part plant growth, the road reserve asset, or which
of the Monthly Report, effect the aesthetics of the area.
− Collars are to be removed and retained for 30 The chosen methods must not impinge on the
days before disposal. health of all desirable species of plants.
14.19.1 Service Levels Control weeds in the following areas as a
minimum:
Remove any carcass from within the road reserve
within two hours of observation or notice. − along road reserve boundaries,
Remove any carcass from the road pavement and − along fence lines,
shoulders within one hour of observation or − around the base of trees,
notice.
− along pipelines,
14.19.2 Carcass Removal Operations
− in mulch beds,
Remove and dispose of dead animals from within
the road reserve irrespective of reason or event − at joints contained within concrete slabs,
resulting in the demise of the animal. − at junctions of road pavement and concrete
Dead animals include native and exotic species of kerb.
vertebrate including but not limited to dogs, cats, 14.20.3 Operations for Treatment of Fungal or
kangaroos, wallabies, turtles, fish, birds, lizards, other Organic Pests
pigs and any other form of mammal, reptile, Control or eradicate any form of fungal or other
organic pest that may be, or is, affecting the
Page 116
health or integrity of any plant or any other aspect 14.20.7 Herbicide - Hold Point
of the road reserve asset, by spraying pest Hold Point - Submit a Weeds Management Plan
specific fungicides, or by manual means. for assessment and approval.
14.20.4 Operations for the Treatment of Insect Herbicide treatment of weeds in the urban
and Animal Pests environment must be controlled and proposed in
Control or eradicate insects including termites, the Weeds Management Plan for approval by the
ants, aphids, mealybug or arachnids (invertebrate) Superintendent.
and any other form of animal pests (vertebrates) Apply herbicide in accordance with manufacturer’s
that could be, or are, affecting the health or specification.
integrity of any plant or any other aspect of the
Do not use dyes in the application of herbicides.
road reserve asset, by spraying pest specific
pesticides, or by manual means. For chemical weed control in urban areas use
only Glyphosate. Use according to manufacturer’s
Relocate protected vertebrate species.
directions for use.
14.20.5 Insecticide
Do not use Glyphosate in the following areas:
Use insecticide strictly as specified in product
- At drainage lines,
SDS.
- On top of kerbs not associated with
Use only Fipronil as an insecticide for termite concrete slabs or paving,
control. - Around signage, utilities, roadside furniture,
14.20.6 Log Books culverts, irrigation systems or any other
Comply with the requirements of the Agricultural road related infrastructure,
and Veterinary Chemicals (Control of Use) Act. - Beyond 500mm from the vertical trunk at
Further to any other reporting and log book the base of any tree.
requirements under the contract, maintain daily 14.20.8 Chemicals
log books for spray treatment works undertaken. For weed control in areas outside of urban areas
The following information must be collected and submit to the Superintendent the list of chemicals
recorded: intended for use during the contract. Include
− Detailed location of work (place name and information in the Weeds Management Plan.
GPS coordinates), Use chemicals that are approved by the
− Date and time of spray application, Australian Pesticides and Veterinary Medicines
Authority (APVMA). Find all information pertaining
− Product used (generic label name, active
ingredient name and % or proportion of active to the use requirements of chemicals on the
ingredient), Authority’s web site. Only use the chemicals on
plant species listed in the product information.
− Expiry date of product and withholding period
Use herbicides, fungicides, pesticides that are
(if applicable),
biodegradable and do not contain lead arsenates
− Chemical mixture (e.g. % or litres per 100 or other substance or salts dangerous to humans
litres of water), or animals.
− Rate of application (e.g. litres per ha, or kg Handle, transport, spray, store and dispose of
per km sprayed), chemicals and their containers in accordance with
− Type of spray equipment used (e.g. hand the product SDS.
spray, vehicle mounted spray), Ensure that personal protective equipment (PPE)
− Type of transport equipment used (Mounted including protective clothing is worn by all
spray Ute, Truck, quad, by hand), personnel handling or applying chemicals. Use
PPE in accordance with the product SDS.
− Names of target pest species,
14.20.9 Spraying
− Weather conditions (e.g. rainfall, temp, wind
speed and direction), Do not spray on days where wind velocity
exceeds 15km/hr or if it poses a risk of spray drift.
− Name of applicator,
Prevent misting in breeze conditions by spraying
− Any unusual happenings on the site, at a lower pressure or adjusting spray nozzles to
− Results of application: Include date this increase droplet size.
information is added. Do not spray near schools during school hours, or
− Add additional items. during outdoor activities at the school at any time.
Submit daily log book sheets with monthly invoice Spray only when wind is blowing away from the
for payment. Retain copies as per statutory school.
requirements. Refer to Spraying in SLASHING AND WEED
Include a digital copy in MS Excel spread sheet CONTROL.
format.
Page 117
14.21 FERTILISING 14.23.2 Mulch Replenishment Operations

14.21.1 Service Levels The Horticulturist will advise the Contractor on the
Apply fertiliser to promote the development and status of organic mulch.
ongoing health of all vegetation within the road Replace or replenish mulch with material of similar
reserve in accordance with the Fertiliser Proposal characteristics to the existing mulch.
Document submitted with the tender and Replenish mulch sufficient for the purposes of
approved by the Superintendent. aesthetics, retaining moisture, insulating the soil
14.21.2 Fertilising Operations and ongoing soil improvement resultant from the
Apply fertiliser as specified in the approved decaying matter.
Fertiliser Proposal Document including: Supply mulch that is free from weeds, seeds,
− proposed method to confirm proof of each sticks, stones, insects, diseases and other
treatment, deleterious matter.
− description of proposed fertilisers, product Provide organic mulch for a 500 mm radius from
name, N:P:K Ratio, and application rate if the main stem, but ensure a gap of 50 mm is
such rate is not to be applied at retained between the main stem and the mulch.
manufacturers specifications, 14.24 DISPOSAL OF CUT MATERIALS
− description of fertiliser locations such as 14.24.1 Service Levels
grassed areas, trees, under mulch, under Remove and dispose of all non-mulched cut or
ground covers etc., waste materials daily at a Community or Council
− what is to be fertilised, Waste Disposal Site, do not leave on site
− time of fertilising as shown in the Program Of overnight.
Works, indicating week and month. 14.24.2 Disposal Operations
14.22 DRAINAGE LINES Dispose of any materials in accordance with
relevant environmental protection legislation.
Apply mulched material from cuttings suitable for
Maintain all drainage lines including inlets and
use only on previously mulched areas, not on
outlets to Side Entry Pits (SEPs) and Letterbox
bare or previously non-mulched areas. Do not use
Pits in a debris free state.
weeds as mulch.
Re-fit dislodged lids to stormwater pits within 48
hours of observation. 14.25 IRRIGATION OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE
Make safe stormwater pits with missing or broken
lids immediately upon observation or within one This section outlines the requirements for the
hour of notification. Notify the Superintendent of repair, operation and maintenance of existing
any observation. irrigation systems.
14.22.2 Re-fitting Dislodged Stormwater Pits 14.25.1 Service Levels
Re-fit dislodged SEP and Letterbox Pit lids. Maximise efficiency of landscape irrigation
Advise the Superintendent of any damaged lids systems.
which cannot simply be re-fitted. Manage and maintain irrigation systems to
14.22.3 Drainage Line Maintenance Operations maintain a functional and healthy landscape with
the minimum required amount of water for the
De-silting drainage lines, and the internal cleaning
designated purpose.
and clearing of SEPs, drainage culverts and
Letterbox Pits is not included in the contract. Do not allow irrigation water, other than that
carried by wind, to flow onto the road pavement.
Remove all litter and/or debris from open drainage
lines including inlets and outlets to SEPs and Repair broken or vandalised sprinkler or spray
Letterbox Pits to ensure free drainage. heads within 12 hours of observation or
notification by the Superintendent.
Do not force litter or debris into inlets of SEPs or
Letterbox Pits but collect and remove from site. 14.25.2 Monthly Irrigation Report
Provide an Irrigation Report attached to the
14.23 REPLENISHMENT OF MULCH
monthly claim for payment. Report all
14.23.1 Service Levels observations or occurrences of note related to
Maintain 75 mm thick consolidated layer of mulch irrigation issues over the period being claimed.
within all mulched areas including garden beds, 14.25.3 Telemetric Control (Darwin Region)
other plantings or medians within the road
The superintendent will arrange for supply and
reserve.
installation of the telemetry irrigation control base
station at the Contractors premises.

Page 118
This supply will not include basic office Witness Point - Advise the Superintendent of
requirements such as power sockets, office such action taken.
furniture etc.
14.26 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION
Irrigation systems will be periodically upgraded to
14.26.1 Duty of Care
Telemetric Control. Do not maintain newly
upgraded systems until the completion of the Refer to the Northern Territory Government
defects liability period for that upgrade contract, Standard Specification for Environmental
with the date as advised by the Superintendent. Management and to the RFT. Comply with the
following additional requirements included under
14.25.4 Irrigation Systems Maintenance
the contract and allow for any associated costs.
Operations
14.26.2 Litter
Maintain and adjust in sound and serviceable
condition all controllers, control cables, housings, Prevent any form of littering by all Contractor’s
meters, meter protection, valves, back flow personnel, including sub-contract personnel,
prevention, drippers, sprays or conduits used in during the course of the work.
the delivery of water to all plant species including Remove all debris, surplus material, waste
grass. material or any form of spoil related to works from
Engage and disengage manually controlled the site.
irrigation systems. Prevent materials from falling or being blown from
Maintain all irrigation supply and main lines in a vehicles.
water tight condition. Leave the work site clean and tidy at the
Maintain all adjustable sprinkler heads within their completion of each day’s work. Do not allow
adjustment requirements at all times. refuse of any type to remain on site overnight.
Repair or adjust daily as required to prevent over 14.26.3 Noise
watering of vegetation and grass, and to prevent Comply with the relevant sections of the Local
wastage through overflow of irrigation water onto Government Act, Waste Management and
the road surface. Pollution Control Act and the Work Health and
14.25.5 System Shutdown – Witness Point Safety (NUL) Act and Regulations with regard to
noise pollution.
NORTHERN REGIONS
Ensure all plant and equipment complies with
Shut down irrigation systems at the start of the
statutory regulations, and is designed, installed,
wet season each year for the duration of the
operated and maintained to minimise noise
wetter months. Re-activate the irrigation systems
disturbance to residents and the general public.
towards the end of the wet season.
14.26.4 Protection of Waterways
Time the start of shut down and re-activation
operations according to the weather conditions Comply with all regulatory guidelines and
apparent at the time. legislation including the Water Act.
Witness Point - Advise the Superintendent of the Ensure no materials enter any waterways,
full shut down and re-activation of irrigation including stormwater and sewerage systems.
systems. 14.26.5 Protection of Flora and Fauna
14.25.6 Irrigation Day and Night Cycle Late in Ensure best practice protection to any flora and
Dry Season – Witness Point fauna that may be affected by the works,
NORTHERN REGIONS particularly those which:
Ensure areas receive sufficient quantities of water − have particular botanical, historical or cultural
during the hotter part of the dry season, i.e. significance,
September to early October. This may be − have outstanding aesthetic or ecological
achieved by running selected systems twice a significance,
day.
− provide habitat for rare or endangered
Witness Point - Advise the Superintendent of species,
altered irrigation cycle times.
− have cultural and archaeological heritage.
14.25.7 Reset Irrigation Timers During School
Refer to Acts, Regulations And Codes Applicable
Holidays – Witness Point
To The Works And Authorities With Jurisdiction
Reset pop up irrigation systems for day light Over The Works in REFERENCED
watering the week preceding school holidays on DOCUMENTS.
road reserves that pass through high density
residential areas.
Reset back to night watering within seven days of
the new school term commencing.

Page 119
14.27 DAMAGE TO PROPERTY − Attend the site of works and identify all works
Ensure that the works proceed with all due care in required to clean up and reinstate, that which
order to avoid damage to property, utility is attributable to cyclone damage,
installations, vehicles, or the environment. − quote a fair and reasonable price for such
Without limiting the Contractor's obligations under works in negotiation with the Superintendent,
the General Conditions of Contract, promptly − quote a time line for implementation and
repair or have repaired any damage to property, completion of the works,
utility installations or environment resulting from
− Removal of tree or vegetative debris as
the implementation of the works associated with
additional works as a result of a cyclone event
the contract.
will relate to green plant growth only, since
Immediately notify the Superintendent of any such removal of dead wood is a requirement of
damage advising proposal for repairs at no cost to maintaining to specified service levels under
the Principal. the contract prior to the tropical cyclone,
Ascertain the owner's wishes as to the timing of − Increase resources as necessary to ensure a
the repairs. Engage appropriately qualified trades- rapid rectification and clean-up of site.
persons to carry out repairs to the satisfaction of
The Superintendent reserves the right to employ
the property owner and the Superintendent.
the services of additional Contractors when the
After providing seven days notice to the need to expedite these works becomes necessary
Contractor, the Superintendent reserves the right due to public health or safety concerns.
to settle any claims arising from the damage.
In the interests of safety, it is not a requirement
Settlement of damages by the Superintendent will under the contract to supply staff or resources
not relieve the Contractor of any responsibility beyond stage three of a cyclone. The requirement
under this clause. The Superintendent will deduct resumes when cyclone danger has passed and
any costs incurred in settling these claims from the cyclone alert for the area of the contract has
the Contractor’s monthly progress invoice. been cancelled.
14.28 STORM DAMAGE 14.30 OTHER REQUIREMENTS
In the event of a tropical or severe storm, (If applicable) Refer to PROJECT SPECIFIC
immediately mobilise and supply sufficient staff REQUIREMENTS section of Request for Tender.
and resources to locate and make safe storm
damage which has occurred within the site of
works. The Superintendent will assist in identifying
immediate safety concerns where and whenever
possible.
Make trafficable surfaces i.e. roads, cycle and
footpaths, safe as quickly as possible.
Clean up storm damage as part of the contract to
the specified service levels within 24 hours of the
observation of damage, and where this is not
possible, within a time line acceptable to the
Superintendent.
Give priority to roadways, cycle and footpaths to
make safely trafficable as soon as possible.
Access real time storm and weather information
on the Internet at the Weather Bureau website at
http://mirror.bom.gov.au/weather/radar/
14.29 CYCLONE EVENT DAMAGE
A cyclone event does not include severe storms.
A cyclone event will be recognised as
commencing when a cyclone has been declared
and named and is effecting any location within the
contract area. The cyclone will be recognised as
remaining current until such time as all warnings
associated with the event have been cancelled for
the area of the contract.
Immediately following the passing of a cyclone;

Page 120
14.31 TABLES
Table 14.2 - Fertilisers

Use General Plant Category Where Used Component Requirements
Planting Native Surface "TROPIGRO Native Plant Feed
Mix"
Exotic Surface "TROPIGRO Exotic Planting and
Feeding Mix" or similar
Native) Hole Granular or Tablet Slow Release
Exotic) (6 month minimum) 20:10:10 NPK
ratio
Feeding All existing plants Surface As for Planting - Surface
Grassing All seeding, both new and Surface Fast Release 15:7:7 NPK ratio
existing Trace Elements
Do not apply fertiliser to Grevillia and Banksia plant varieties.
Table 14.3 – Fertilisers Application Rates

Fertiliser Type Application Rate
Native - Planting Tube stock 10 g
- Surface 150 mm container 30 g
200 mm container 80 g
20 litre bag 300 g
Exotic - Planting Plant height: 0.5 m 100 g
- Surface 1.0 m 200 g
2.0 m 300 g
Native - Planting Ground covers and shrubs 10 cm tall 10 g
- Hole (Exotic) Ground covers and shrubs 20 cm tall 20 g
Plants to 1 m 40 g
Plants to 2 m 80 g
Plants to 3 - 4 m 120 g
Advanced trees and palms 2 m - 200 g
These rates apply to both granular compound and
equivalent tables.
Native - Feeding Ground covers:
up to 300 mm wide 30 g
300 - 600 mm wide 50 g
600 - 900 mm wide 75 g
900 - 1000 mm wide 100 g
Thereafter 100 g per metre

Page 121
Table 14.3 – Fertilisers Application Rates

Fertiliser Type Application Rate
Native - Feeding Shrubs:
up to 300 mm high/wide 50 g
300 - 600 mm high/wide 75 g
600 - 900 mm high/wide 100 g
900 - 1000 mm high/wide 150 g
Thereafter use 200 g/m of height or width
Native - Feeding Trees:
200 g/m of height
Exotic - Feeding 250 g/m of plant height
Sight line distance Sight line distance
5m
Figure 14.2 Intersection Sight Lines
Table 14.4 - Sight Line Distances

Posted Speed Limit (km/h) Sight Line Distance (m)
40 73
50 97
60 123
70 151
80 181
90 226
100 262
110 300
120 341
130 383
Sight line distances are based on Safe Intersection Sight Distance parameters defined by AGRD04A-10
Austroads Guide to Road Design, Part 4A: Unsignalised and Signalised Intersections, 2010.

Page 122
SLASHING AND WEED CONTROL
15. SLASHING AND WEED CONTROL 15.4 WEED SPREAD PREVENTION

Comply with the requirements of the Weeds
15.1 OUTLINE DESCRIPTION Management Act. Do not spread declared
This section specifies the maintenance weeds by slashing. For prevention of weed
requirement for control of vegetation and litter on spread by machinery see the Standard
road verges, batters and medians, by use of Specification for Environmental Management.
mechanical or manual means and/or chemicals, While slashing does not kill weeds, if done at the
and for the control of noxious weeds in the road right time it can be an effective measure to
reserve by use of herbicides. reduce seed production especially in infested
areas. Slashing must be planned in conjunction
15.2 STANDARDS with chemical control.
Comply with the following Acts and Regulations: To reduce flowering of grassy weeds, slash at
− Work Health and Safety (NUL) Act and end of rain season as stems are starting to
Regulations elongate prior to seed maturity.
− Weeds Management Act Slash from clean area to infested area
− Dangerous Goods Act and Regulations Clean down slasher after working in infested
area with leaf blower, compressed air or high
− Poisons and Dangerous Drugs Act and pressure water
Regulations
It is best practice to control isolated individual
− Agricultural and Veterinary Chemicals plants or clumps in otherwise clean areas with
(Control of Use) Act herbicide
Comply with the Acts, Regulations, Guidelines Most herbicides are absorbed more effectively
and Codes applicable to the works. Comply with through green leaves. Previously slashed weeds
the requirements of Authorities with jurisdiction may need time to grow green leaves before
over the works. Conform to the Standards and spraying.
unless specified otherwise. Refer to Machinery hygiene practices are detailed in the
REFERENCED DOCUMENTS. Department of Land Resource Management
Weed Spread Prevention Strategy
Refer to Protection Of Culturally And Historically http://www.lrm.nt.gov.au/weeds/manage/prevent
Significant Items in MISCELLANEOUS ion.
PROVISIONS.
Refer to Plant And Equipment clause in 15.5 REFERENCE STANDARD DRAWINGS
MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS. Refer to Standard Drawings listed in Table 15.1
Refer to Work Involving Chemicals in - Civil Standard C(S) for reference for
MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS. terminology for typical cross section profiles
and terminology used throughout this section.
Refer to LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE.
Specification Reference Table 15.1 - Civil Standard C(S) for reference
for terminology
Standard Specification for Environmental CS-2100 CS-2105
Management and to the RFT. CS-2101 CS-2106
15.3 DEFINITIONS CS-2102 CS-2107
APVMA
Australian Pesticides and Veterinary Medicines CS-2103 CS-2108
Authority. CS-2104 CS-2109
Vegetation
Refers to any grasses, shrubs or trees to be
controlled.
Weeds
Refers to undesirable vegetation in the area to
be controlled, including declared and non-
declared species.
Herbicide
A chemical formulation for control and
eradication of vegetation and weeds.

Page 123
Table 15.2 - Road classification and Trim overhead vegetation to minimum clearance
indicative road reserve widths height of 5.5 m above the carriageway.
At bridges trim vegetation to a minimum of 2 m
Reserve behind bridge rails.
Road Class
Width
Re-slash any area which is not slashed to the
National Highway 200m specified height above the ground.
Arterial - Urban 80m Remove stones, grass or other debris from the
sealed pavement following slashing operations.
Arterial - Rural 150m 15.6.2 Plant
Sub-arterial/Distributor - Urban Provide sufficient plant to achieve the minimum
22m
Industrial specified rate of progress, using the following
plant configurations to complete all slashing
Sub-arterial/Distributor - Urban
(See Note) operations simultaneously:
Residential
− Tractors and Slashers,
Sub-arterial/Distributor - Rural
100m − Tractor and Batter / Reach Mower,
Industrial
− Hand held equipment including chainsaws
Rural Secondary Road 100m and brushcutters.
Pastoral 3 100m Suitable guards are to be in place on all
machinery to prevent material being “sprayed”
Collector - Urban Industrial 20m onto the road surface and endanger vehicles,
Collector - Urban Residential (See Note) persons or property.
15.6.3 Opening Slash
Collector - Rural Industrial 40m
Slash both sides of roadway from edge of seal
Collector - Rural 40m for 3.6 m or as specified Project Specific
Requirements, i.e. nominal two cut width.
Local - Urban Industrial 20m
Slash other areas as directed.
Local - Urban Residential (See Note) Provide sufficient plant, labour and resources in
Local - Rural Industrial 30m order for two separate crews to each complete
15 km per day, both sides of the road.
Local - Rural 30m 15.6.4 Full Slash
Pastoral 1 and 2 100m DARWIN, EAST ARNHEM AND KATHERINE
Do not take dimensions as being correct for all REGIONS
road types and classifications. Normally undertake between November and
Note: Road reserve for this and any other roads March depending on the severity of the wet
not in this list refer to the relevant local authority. season.
Excerpt from; Department of Transport Policy, Slash both sides of roadway from the edge of
Performance And Design Standards For pavement, sealed or unsealed, to the cleared
Northern Territory Government Roads, April tree line including cuttings, tops of batters at
2015 Version 1.0. cuttings, fill batters, inlets and outlets of culverts,
protection works, and around road furniture.
15.6 SLASHING At intersections slash triangular areas joining
15.6.1 Slashing Operations points of sight distance lines given in Figure
Slash all grass and vegetation including shrubs 14.2 Intersection Sight Lines and Table 14.4 -
and trees with a butt size up to 100 mm Sight Line Distances.
diameter. Slash other areas as directed.
Trim vegetation to a height of 100 mm or less Provide sufficient plant, labour and resources in
above the ground. order for two separate crews to each complete
Collect litter prior to slashing. 20 km per day, both sides of the road.
Slash steep batters or areas inaccessible to ALICE SPRINGS AND TENNANT CREEK
conventional slashers with hydraulically REGIONS:
operated boom mounted slashing equipment. Slash both sides of roadway from the edge of
Trim growth that cannot be slashed with tractor pavement to the outer edge of formation
mounted slashers with hand held equipment. including cuttings, fill batters, inlets and outlets
Include around road furniture, culvert headwalls, of culverts, protection works, and around road
bridges, grids, floodways, drains and drainage furniture.
structures.
Page 124
Slash other areas as directed. 15.7 BUSHFIRE PREVENTION

Provide sufficient plant, labour and resources in 15.7.1 Requirement
order for two separate crews to each complete Advise Bushfires NT for the region and adjacent
15 km per day, both sides of the road. property owners of slashing program prior to
15.6.5 Slash Table Drain Offlets commencement of slashing in the area.
Specification Reference Adhere to bushfire prevention requirements
Refer to the Northern Territory Government during slashing operations when there is a fire
Standard Specification for Environmental warning rating of moderate or higher.
Management and to the RFT. 15.7.2 Plant
Slash each side of invert of trapezoidal shaped
Provide plant and equipment for fire-fighting.
table drain offlet for 1.8 m width, i.e. total width
The following are minimum requirements:
of cut 3.6 m, nominally two cuts.
Slash each side and invert base of trapezoidal − 1 x 500 litre water tank with an attached
shaped table drain, i.e. total width of cut 5.4 m, pump,
nominally three cuts. − 2 x 9 litre air expelled water fire
Table drain offlets are generally at intervals not extinguishers, or 1 x 20 litre knapsack spray,
exceeding 150 m and have a minimum length of as appropriate to the slashing equipment
50 m. being used.
15.6.6 Slash Firebreaks − Carry the equipment in a 4 wheel drive back
Slash firebreaks within the road reserve for up utility travelling behind the tractor slasher
3.6 m width, i.e. nominal two cut width, or 7.2 m, operations at all times. Maintain two-way
i.e. nominal four cut width or as specified or radio communication between the utility and
directed otherwise. the tractor slasher.
15.6.7 Slash and Rake Firebreaks 15.7.3 Conditions Preventing Slashing
Slash firebreaks within the road reserve. Avoid roadside slashing when it is dry and
Rake slashed material and windrow to one side. windy, or when the bushfire warning is extremely
15.6.8 Litter Collection and Disposal high.
Include litter collection and disposal as a part of Cease slashing operations if weather conditions
slashing operations. Undertake collection of litter indicate an extreme fire danger. If such a day is
on area to be slashed prior to slashing. predicted, then start early and cease operations
Litter collection and disposal may also be when the conditions reach a point that would
ordered separately, and shall include full road indicate that if a fire started then it would be
reserve width. difficult to contain.
Collect litter including but not limited to: 15.7.4 Response Procedures to Fire Starting
− Tyres & tubes, Cease slashing operations immediately a
− Drink or food packages, slasher starts a fire, and assist with combating
− Rocks larger than 100mm, the fire. To achieve this, the crew must be
− Fallen trees, branches or timber, working in close proximity to each other at all
− Ant beds, times and be in radio contact.
− Any other materials or rubbish which is Contain any fire which occurs due to slashing
100 mm or more higher than natural operations immediately to avoid the fire
surface. spreading. If the crews are unable to contain
Litter collection does not include abandoned and extinguish the fire, immediately notify the
vehicles or car bodies, or dead animals. Advise adjacent station/property owners/managers and
the Superintendent of the location of such items Bushfires NT, Department of Land Resource
and they shall be collected and disposed of Management.
separately. Remain and provide assistance to the property
Dispose of all litter legally, at Community or owners/managers until the fire is contained, or
Council Waste Disposal Site. until the owners/managers or Bushfires NT
15.6.9 Replacement of Damaged Roadside Officers no longer require your assistance.
Furniture and Structures Do not recommence slashing until the fire is
Repair or replace guide posts, signs, culverts or contained and all crew are back on site with all
any roadside furniture or structure damaged by equipment fully operational again, i.e. water
slashing operations at no cost to the Principal. tanks refilled, pump motors refuelled, etc. Do not
undertake roadside slashing without the support
The Principal reserves the right to affect repairs backup.
by any means and recover the costs from the
contractor.

Page 125
15.7.5 Contractor Responsibility Use chemicals that are approved by the

Accept responsibility for any damages, loss of APVMA. Obtain copies of SDS pertaining to the
pasture or stock that is a result of a fire started use requirements of chemicals listed on the
by slashing operations. manufacturers’ labels. The APVMA web site
http://services.apvma.gov.au has information
Exercise care in areas where the possibility of
about SDS.
ignition is high. An example is rocky outcrops
where it may be necessary to raise the blades Use herbicides that are biodegradable and do
marginally higher to avoid sparks. not contain lead arsenates or other substance or
salts dangerous to humans or animals.
15.7.6 Fire Fighter Training – Hold Point
Use spreading agents if and as recommended
At least one member of each slashing crew is to
on the labels.
hold a current qualification of Fire Fighter 1 NT.
Training in this course is available from Obtain a permit from Parks Australia North for
Bushfires NT, DLRM, phone 8922 0844. the use of any chemicals within Kakadu and
Uluru – Kata Tjuta National Parks and up to
Hold Point – Provide evidence of qualifications
30 km from their boundaries, and from Parks
before commencing slashing operations.
and Wildlife Commission of the Northern
15.8 VEGETATION CONTROL Territory for the use of any chemicals within NT
15.8.1 Vegetation Control Operations National Parks and Reserves and up to 30 km
from their boundaries.
Control or eradicate vegetation around road
structures and furniture to ensure they are Witness Point - Provide copies of the permits.
visible to motorists and to prevent damage by 15.8.4 Personnel Handling of Chemicals
fire, by spraying herbicides and/or other suitable Be registered for business as weed control
chemicals. operators, or engage subcontractors registered
15.8.2 Log Books for business as weed control operators.
Maintain daily log books for works undertaken Personnel carrying out spraying operations must
under the contract. Include the following have undertaken and passed a National Farm
information: Chemical User Training Program.
− Description, i.e. category of work for Do not allow spray drift. Operators must be
measurement and payment, competent in their understanding of how to
− Start/finish spray locations by PRP chainage prevent spray drift.
and as GPS position, Keep a copy of the Safety Data Sheet on site for
− Time of spray application, each type of chemical used
− Product used, Handle all chemicals as specified in product
− Chemical mixture (e.g. kg or litres per 100 SDS.
litres of water),
Wear as a minimum the protective clothing as
− Rate of application (e.g. kg per hectare, or specified in product SDS.
Kg per kilometres sprayed),
− Type of spray equipment used (e.g. hand 15.8.5 Spraying
spray, vehicle mounted spray). Handle, transport, spray, store and dispose of
− Type of transport equipment used (Mounted chemicals and their containers in accordance
spray Ute, Truck, quad, by hand), with the manufacturer’s specifications and/or
− Target weeds, directions as written on the labels which appear
− Weather conditions (e.g. rainfall, on the APVMA web site, to avoid environmental
temperature, wind velocity and direction), and health risks.
− Name of applicator, Do not spray on days of wind velocity greater
− Any unusual happenings on the site, than 15 km/h mean value and gusts do not
− Results of application: Include date this exceed 19 km/h because of risk of spray drift
information is added. causing a hazard on adjoining properties.
Submit daily log book sheets with invoice for Do not cause spray drift. Prevent misting in
payment. breeze conditions by spraying at a lower
pressure or adjusting spray nozzles to increase
Include a digital copy in MS Excel spread sheet
droplet particles, or other suitable means.
format.
Do not spray near schools during school hours
15.8.3 Chemicals – Witness Point
or during outdoor activities at the school at any
Witness Point - Submit to the Superintendent time. Spray only when wind is blowing away
the list of herbicides and other chemicals from the school.
intended for use during the contract, details of
Do not spray during rain or when vegetation is
vegetation controlled by the herbicide, and
saturated.
duration of control per treatment.
Page 126
15.8.6 Spray Equipment Spray area between the edge of the seal and a
Use equipment calibrated to measure volume line 1 m behind any guard rail and extending
sprayed. 10 m beyond the guard rail at both ends.
15.8.7 Around Guide Posts 15.8.10 At Flood-ways and Culverts
Spray a minimum triangular area around guide Spray incorporated rock protection works.
posts having as its base the sealed edge of the Slash area within 1 m of the structure and
road. The length of the base to be a minimum protection works.
8 m centred on the guide post. The apex of the 15.8.11 Rest Areas and Truck-bays
triangle to be 1 m beside the guide post on an
Spray areas within 1 m of any part of furniture or
imaginary line perpendicular to the road
structure.
centreline and through the guide post.
Slash all other areas within the perimeter.
15.8.12 Aerodromes
In accordance with the relevant requirements
referred to in AERODROME MAINTENANCE,
spray areas as follows:
Fencelines
1 m either side of fence around aerodrome.
Signal Area
Total signal area including 1 m outside of signal
area perimeter.
Gable Boundary Markers
An area 8 m by 3 m centred on, and oriented the
same way, as the marker.
Figure 15.1 Guide Posts Spray Area Cones, Runway Flares or Lights
An area of 2 m around the structure.
15.8.8 Around Sign Posts
Buildings or Other Structures
Spray a minimum triangular area around sign
posts having as its base the sealed edge of the An area 1 m wide around the edge.
road. The length of the base to be a minimum 15.9 WEED CONTROL
5m long and positioned to extend 4 m into the 15.9.1 Operation
direction of the oncoming traffic and 1 m past
the line of the sign post. The apex of the triangle Treat all weeds listed as Declared Weeds under
to be 1 m beside the sign post on an imaginary the NT Weeds Management Act, and other
line perpendicular to the road centreline and nominated weeds and vegetation in the road
through the sign post. reserve, by spraying herbicides and/or other
suitable chemicals.
Refer to vegetation control clauses for
specification requirements for Log Books,
Chemicals, Personnel Handling Chemicals and
Spraying.
There is a legal obligation to control all declared
weeds under the Weeds Management Act (see
http://www.lrm.nt.gov.au/weeds/find for list). For
Class A declared weeds it is necessary to
eradicate them; for Class B it is necessary to
prevent them from growing and spreading.
15.9.2 Treatment Program – Hold Point
Prepare a Weed Management Plan within 4
weeks of commencement of the contract
(outlined in the Standard Specification for
Environmental Management).
Figure 15.2 Sign Posts Spray Area The Weed Management Plan must be signed off
by both the Superintendent and Contractor and
15.8.9 At Bridges and Guard Rails must refer directly to the Response Schedule
Spray area within 1 m of any part of the and the Request for Tender and this
structure. specification.

Page 127
Hold Point - Submit a Weeds Management For each declared weed species controlled, log
Plan for assessment and approval. book records of chemical use should be kept.
A Weed Management Plan is to set practical Refer to 15.8.2 Log Books and 14.20.6 Log
objectives for each road identified in the Books.
Response Schedule and/or the RFT and be Chemical control should be planned in co-
based on detailed maps of declared weeds ordination with slashing and burning
present, the scope of their infestations and the requirements.
likelihood of seeds being spread (e.g. proximity Provide an alternative suitable herbicide if during
to turn off areas). For example, in a road section the course of the contract a chemical is
with isolated individuals the objective might be withdrawn from the APVMA approved list.
that all plants are chemically controlled, whereas
15.9.4 Effectiveness of Control and Spread
in a core infestation slashing alone may be
Prevention
adequate to prevent weed spread and satisfy
obligations under the Weeds Management Act. Effectiveness of control and spread prevention is
assessed by:
Objectives need to be measurable so that
effectiveness of control measures and spread a) Permanent Monitoring Sites; these are
prevention can be assessed. Objectives should established by the Superintendent (or his
be discussed with the Superintendent in agent) in strategic locations known to
conjunction with DLRM. contain weeds (point data) and those
Address seasonal restrictions to weed known to be free of weeds (transects) at
reproductive cycles to prevent weed seeding. the commencement of the contract.
DARWIN, EAST ARNHEM AND KATHERINE These will:
REGIONS - identify changes in weed infestations
Time the operations to follow the first storms of annually and over the entire period of the
the wet season and/or before seeds are contract
produced by the target plants. - allow for verification against log books
Timing of seed production is variable depending - evaluate efficacy of the treatment (slashing
on rainfall, however some wood species (eg. and chemical control)
Neem) flower and produce seed in the dry
- help inform weed control priorities for the
season.
next season (in conjunction with post-
ALICE SPRINGS AND TENNANT CREEK season review)
REGION
- include areas of known high density weed
Rain can fall in both winter and summer in arid infestation and also areas known to be free
Australia. Operations should be timed about 3 from weeds at the commencement of the
weeks after a 25 mm rainfall event for broad leaf contract period.
or grassy weeds. Woody weeds can be
- Provide incentive for the contractor as a
controlled all year round but the herbicide works
result of improved control over the duration
better after rain.
of the contract.
15.9.3 Herbicide Selection - Hold Point
b) Overall visual assessment of road verge for
Hold Point - Provide a list of herbicides and monitoring according to submission of the
chemicals intended for use during the contract to log books.
the Superintendent as part of the Weed
c) Specific monitoring for gamba grass control
Management Plan.
and spread management may be
Control declared weeds in the road reserve by conducted in strategic areas.
spraying herbicides and additives as prescribed
15.9.5 Determination for Key Performance
such as diesel or wetting agents (surfactants).
Indicators
Different herbicides have different modes of
action, which needs to be considered in Evaluation of the monitoring points will occur at
selecting suitable herbicides and their the conclusion of the treatment period (wet
application (e.g. foliar vs. basal bark). Some season) annually. Assessment will be consistent
disrupt the weed’s metabolic processes killing with the WMB data collection requirements
the plants, whereas others are residual in the (http://www.lrm.nt.gov.au/weeds/mapping), and
soil and interfere with germinating seeds. See will allow determination of a Key Performance
the Department of Land Resource Management Indicator (KPI) based on criteria listed below.
Weed Management Handbook The KPI is linked to final payment schedule.
(http://www.lrm.nt.gov.au/__data/assets/pdf_file/
0020/125606/Weed-Management-Handbook-
2013_web.pdf) for appropriate herbicides and
application methods for most declared weeds.
Page 128
The KPI is calculated as the percentage of sites

where values of 1, or 100% alive adult seeding
gamba grass were recorded, indicating that
weeds were not managed.
Refer to 15.11 KPI Example, Table 15.3 - KPI
Criteria and KPI Value Codes and Table 15.4
– SAMPLE – Field data log - Assessment of
sites by KPIs.
15.9.6 Induction for Declared Weed
Management
The contactor and personel shall attend a ½ day
induction course prior to the commencement of
the Contract to confirm;
- Correct weed identification and any new
species declarations
- Appropriate herbicides for specific weed
situations, and old/new formulations
- Appropriate methods of application, and
application techniques
- Understanding of required data
collection and logbook guidelines
15.9.7 Post Season Review
The contactor and/or his agent shall attend an
annual post season review to conduct desk-top
analysis of weed data and associated road
maps.and to conduct site visits if necessary.
The primary purpose of the annual post-control
review is to determine if contractor has
maintained road reserve as per the contract and
met objectives in the Weed Management Plan.
The focus of the review will be a dialogue
between the Superintendent and the contractor
to plan for better control in the following year.
Inspections will be undertaken jointly between
the Superintendent (or his agent) and the
contractor (or his nominated subcontractor) not
longer than 4 weeks after the end of annual
control operations.
At the conclusion of the post-season review
meeting, final payment as a percentage of the
scheduled rate will be determined.
REQUIREMENTS section of Request for
Tender.

Page 129
15.11 KPI EXAMPLE

Table 15.3 - KPI Criteria and KPI Value Codes
Point data codes Transect data codes
Gamba Age & Status Codes
(KPI value) (KPI value)
1 = No evidence of effective 1 = weed present and not Age
treatment controlled >1yr Perennial plants
2 = treated (slashed or 2 = weed present and <1yr Germinated that
sprayed) but not adequately evidence of effective season
effective control Status
3 = effective treatment (>90% 3 = no weed present AS Alive and seeding
total brown-out) or slashed (post-feathering) + % alive
such that plants dead and did DS Dead but seeded + %
not produce seed dead but seeded
D Dead + % dead
Table 15.4 – SAMPLE – Field data log - Assessment of sites by KPIs

Name of assessor -
Date of assessment -
Site Type
Site Road Name or Monitoring KPI
(Point or Gamba Age & Status
No. Description Site ID value
Transect)
Total number of sites assessed: #
Total number of sites where value = 1 # sites (# points, # transects)
Average KPI% across ALL sites (average of all #%

KPIs, divided by total number of sites assessed,
expressed as a percentage)

Page 130
TRAFFIC SIGNALS AND INTELLIGENT TRANSPORT SYSTEMS MAINTENANCE
16. TRAFFIC SIGNALS AND INTELLIGENT Other equipment which integrates to the TSC
TRANSPORT SYSTEMS such as Emergency Services ‘hurry call’
MAINTENANCE equipment, or other equipment which uses the
controller for information, power supply, or
16.1 DESCRIPTION OF THE WORKS communications shall also be included.
A general outline of the work to be carried out 16.1.1 Fault Maintenance
under the Contract comprises:
Fault Maintenance is the response to
Provide a twenty four hours a day, seven days a unscheduled maintenance. Fault Maintenance
week service to safely and efficiently meet the can be identified by either the Contractor,
requirements of this Request for Tender within Superintendent’s Representative, Traffic Section
specified timeframes for all ITS & related staff, or DoI On-Call staff, but attendance on site
equipment within the area stipulated in the and works must be authorised by the before
RFT/RFQ, associated with inspection, servicing, mentioned DoI staff (except where the fault is of
repairs and maintenance for: a nature that poses a significant risk to the
public or the worker), and occur within specified
- Traffic Signal Controller (TSC) assets &
response times provided in Table 16.12 -
associated hardware;
Response Times (Refer to clause 16.32).
- Advanced Warning Signs (AWS or Wig
Fault Maintenance includes the following faults
Wags);
for example: accidents, traffic signals flashing
- Variable Speed Limit Signs (VSLS); amber and other controller related faults,
blacked out, non-operational, communications
- Closed Circuit Television (CCTV); outages, aspects out of alignment, pedestrian
- Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) hardware related faults, and all ITS related
systems; faults.
- Other Intelligent Transport Systems 16.1.2 Routine Maintenance
(ITS); and, Routine Maintenance is carried out to a
- Associated communication equipment specified level and within a broad timeframe.
relating to the above items. Work is scheduled by the Contractor but must
be completed within an allocated time as shown
The contractor is required to ensure that all in Table 16.12 - Response Times. Routine
infrastructure as listed above and their maintenance is generally follow up work to Fault
components remain in good condition and Maintenance i.e. reinstate pedestal and
operate as designed. hardware, replace detectors, replace faulty
The majority of the equipment to be maintained signal component, replace UPS batteries or
includes, but is not limited to traffic signal testing, CCTV repairs, cleaning or inspections.
controllers, detectors, detector loops, signal 16.1.3 Specific Maintenance
hardware (including conduits, cables, footings,
conduit junction pits, detector pits, signal posts, Specific Maintenance consists primarily of an
supports, wiring assemblies, lanterns, audit of an individual traffic signal site, inclusive
pedestrian buttons and traffic signal / pedestrian of all ITS related to that traffic signal asset. A
lanterns). AWS, VSLS, CCTV, UPS and other report is generated by the contractor identifying
ITS equipment including all IT and the condition and performance of the traffic
communication equipment, and equipment signals and related ITS, if applicable. The
linking each asset to the Sydney Coordinated report, inclusive of any recommended repairs
Adaptive Traffic System (SCATS) regional identified from the audit are scheduled by the
computer. Contractor and submitted to the
Superintendent’s Representative in a program
The minimum requirements for the maintenance of works within 5 working days of the audit being
of traffic signals are specified as three work completed as a basis for approval. Any
types, these are; recommended repairs considered as urgent at
- Fault Maintenance the time of the audit being undertaken, the
contractor shall contact the Superintendent’s
- Routine Maintenance Representative immediately for further direction
- Specific Maintenance regarding works to be undertaken. Nominated
repairs such as pole top replacements are
Other equipment which integrates into the traffic undertaken in conjunction with the Audit.
signal controller shall be included within this
contract such as the Red Light Camera
equipment which is housed within the TSC.

Page 131
16.2 STANDARDS
Conform to the following Standards and Publications unless specified otherwise:
AS/NZS 1163 Cold-formed structural steel hollow sections
AS 1231 Aluminium and aluminium alloys - Anodic oxidation coatings
AS/NZS 1477 PVC pipes and fittings for pressure applications
AS/NZS 1554 Structural steel welding - Welding of steel structures
AS/NZS 1594 Hot-rolled steel flat products
AS 1742.3 Manual of uniform traffic control devices - Traffic control for
works on roads
AS 1743 Road signs - Specifications
AS/NZS 2053 Conduits and fittings for electrical installations
AS 2144 Traffic Signal Lanterns
AS/NZS 2276 Cables for traffic signal installations
AS 2339 Traffic signal posts and attachments
AS 2353 Pedestrian push-button assemblies
AS 2700 Colour standards for general purposes
AS 2703 Vehicle loop detector sensors
AS 2979 Traffic signal mast arms
AS/NZS 3000 Electrical Installations
AS/NZS 3100 Approval and Test Specification –
General Requirements for Electrical Equipment
AS/NZS 3108 Approval and test specification - Particular requirements for isolating
transformers and safety isolating transformers
AS/NZS 3191 Electric flexible cords
AS/NZS 3678 Structural steel - Hot-rolled plates, floorplates and slabs
AS/NZS 3679.1 Structural steel - Hot-rolled bars and sections
AS/NZS 4680 Hot-dip galvanized (zinc) coatings on fabricated ferrous articles
AS/NZS 5000.1 Electric cables - Polymetric insulated - For working voltages up
to and including 0.6/1 (1.2) kV
16.3 CROSS REFERENCES

Page 132
16.4 DEFINITIONS
In this contract, unless otherwise specified, the following words and expressions will have the following
meanings;
Table 16.1 – Definitions – Traffic Signals and ITS Maintenance
Advanced Warning Large yellow and black signs approximately 150m advanced of some
Signs (AWS): signalised intersections displaying alternating flashing yellow lights when the
approaching signal group is in either yellow or red. Also known as “Wig
wags”.
After Hours: Any hours not between 0700hrs and 1700hrs Monday to Friday and all
weekends and public holidays.
Audio Tactile Driver: An electronic device to activate the transducer within the associated push
button assembly mounted on a traffic signal post.
Auxiliary Cabinet: An approved housing for ITS components which is often fitted to the top of a
controller cabinet. It may house Red Light Camera (RLC) equipment, CCTV
equipment, and other ITS equipment and related components including
routers, UPS, modems, fibre optic connections etc.
Business Hours: Between 0700hrs and 1700hrs Monday to Friday.
Closed Circuit CCTV is the use of video cameras to transmit a signal to a specific place, on
Television (CCTV): a set of monitors. The cameras may be fixed, or PTZ (pan, tilt, zoom) and
capable of being remotely controlled. The CCTV for use in this contract may
monitor traffic flow / congestion, incidents, or to observe events or works.
Control Relay: An electro-mechanical or solid state assembly within a controller cabinet for
the purpose of switching signal lamps.
Controller: A complete electronic mechanism for controlling the operation of traffic

signals and other ITS.
Controller Cabinet: An approved housing for a controller, control relays, auxiliary equipment,
terminal blocks, sockets, flasher units, wiring, and other ITS components etc.
which may or may not include vehicle detectors and linking equipment.
CSR: Contractor Service Request/Report
Day: Calendar business day unless otherwise stated.
Deficiency: The visible or measurable evidence of failure or other undesirable condition

that is at or exceeding its intervention level or that is likely to become a
Hazard (as reasonably determined by the contractor or Superintendent’s
Rep) before the next scheduled or required inspection.
The deficiency may affect the safety, serviceability, structural capacity or
appearance of the asset.
Detector Loop: An in-pavement wiring configuration (including lead-in wires) to detect or

count vehicle movements, or both.
Detector Sensor: An electronic device, which may be post or controller mounted, used to count,
classify, or detect vehicles or pedestrians, or both.
Fault: Any malfunction of equipment to be rectified within specified response time.

Page 133
Fault Maintenance: The repair and/or replacement of equipment damaged or defective through
any cause and shall require:
(a) A 24 hour, 7 days/week fault attendance service for the purpose of

inspection, identification and repair of reported site malfunctions, with a fully
equipped service vehicle and experienced technicians.
(b) An adequate back-up service to enable permanent repairs and

rectification of all site deficiencies.
(c) A fully equipped workshop facility for the purpose of testing and
repairing equipment removed from the maintenance site.
Footing and Post / A concrete base, including all conduit bends, ragbolt assemblies and
Pedestal: reinforcement cages, and a post used primarily for the support of traffic signal
lantern/s (including mast arms and joint use poles). Footings and posts
maintained by other authorities are not included in this definition.
Intelligent Intelligent Transportation Systems (ITS) can be defined as the application of

Transportation Systems advanced information and communications technology to surface
(ITS): transportation in order to achieve enhanced safety and mobility while
reducing the environmental impact of transportation. ITS in the NT may
include CCTV, Red Light Cameras, UPS, VSLS, Radar or video detection,
VMS (mobile or fixed). It may include vehicle to roadside, vehicle to vehicle,
or vehicle to infrastructure technology.
Minor Repairs: The regular adjustment and minor servicing required to keep traffic signals in
good, serviceable operating condition.
Pedestrian Detector: A push button device used to actuate the pedestrian walk phases which may
or may not include audio-tactile devices and 'Wait' indicators.
RFT/RFQ Request for Tender / Request for Quotation. Provisions in this specification
applicable to one are equally applicable to the other.
Routine Maintenance: Repairs identified during fault maintenance or otherwise directed by the
Superintendent’s Representative or Traffic Section staff. Work to be
completed within a specified timeframe.
Sydney Coordinated SCATS® is an adaptive urban traffic management system that synchronises
Adaptive Traffic traffic signals to optimise traffic flow across a whole city, region or corridor.
Management System It’s highly configurable, dynamically responding to the demands of the
(SCATS): network in real time. SCATS is used throughout the NT to control the traffic
signals.
Shall Is indicative of a mandatory requirement unless the context clearly indicates

otherwise.
Supports: All structural components, brackets, post top assemblies, clamps, straps and
parts thereof, used to support traffic signal equipment.
Specific Maintenance: Scheduled inspection of all asset based on-site equipment compiled in report
form to identify condition and performance of traffic signal hardware and
related ITS. Recommended repairs scheduled in program as provided by
contractor and agreed to by Superintendents Representative.

Page 134
TCD Traffic Control Diagram – TCDs are part of TMP
TMP: Traffic Management Plan – includes TCDs
Traffic Signal Aspect A single optical system (circular, arrow or symbolic) on a single face capable
of been illuminated at a given time. 2 or more aspects in a common mount
and operation are called a Lantern (see Traffic signal lantern)
TSC Traffic Signal Controller
Traffic Signal Lantern: A vehicular traffic control signal, pedestrian control signal, flashing signal or
internally illuminated sign including all housings, visors, doors, lamp holders,
reflectors, gaskets, target boards, lenses, wiring and cables and other related
items. The lantern may consist of Incandescent, Halogen, or Light Emitting
Diode (LED) lamps to illuminate the traffic signal display.
Uninterruptable Power An uninterruptible power supply, or battery backup, is an electrical apparatus

Supply (UPS): that provides emergency power to a load when the input power source,
typically mains power, fails. The UPS continues to power the traffic signals
and ITS until mains power can be restored. Also may be termed as ICUPS
(Internal Controller UPS), or ECUPS (External Controller UPS).
Variable Message Signs A VMS, is an electronic traffic sign often used on roadways to give travellers
(VMS): information about events related to the road reserve. They warn motorists of
road conditions, traffic management, accidents or incidents and may warn of
traffic congestion. They may direct vehicles to take alternative routes, limit
travel speed, warn of duration and location of the incidents or just inform of
the traffic conditions.
Variable Speed Limit A VSLS is an electronic sign that can display alternate speed/s by time of day
Signs (VSLS): remotely either automatically, or manually, for reasons such as school zones,
busy areas, areas of high pedestrian numbers etc, where the lower speed
limit is not warranted permanently.
Wig wags See Advanced Warning Signs

Page 135
16.5 SITE OF WORKS 16.6 RESTRICTED WORKING HOURS

There are various sites for these works. Refer to The work to be performed under the Contract
the RFT. The sites will include all traffic shall be subject to execution within certain
signalised intersections, pedestrian crossings restricted working hours and the Contractor
AWS, CCTV, UPS, VSLS, and ITS applications shall therefore accept that some Routine
within the areas stipulated in the RFT. Maintenance works may not be able to be
carried out within normal work hours due to the
All traffic signals in the stipulated areas are
high risk nature of some environments, for
included in this contract. Maintenance for any
example; where traffic volumes are too high to
newly constructed assets will be included within
allow works to be undertaken in accordance
the maintenance list once a handover has been
with PROVISION FOR TRAFFIC or Australian
undertaken with the constructing contractor and
Standards for traffic management. Therefore
the Project Manager for the governing agency
these works shall be rescheduled to a time
and accepted by DoI Traffic Section.
when risk can be better managed i.e. after hours
All Closed Circuit Television (CCTV) cameras or on weekends at the scheduled rates.
under the control of Department of Infrastructure
For the purpose of this contract working hours
(DoI) are included in this contract. Other
are:
selected NTG CCTV assets or future council
CCTV may also be included. - Business Hours: Within 0700 –
1700 hours,
The following points identify locations of these
intersections and are shown in: - After Hours: Outside the
Table 16.7 - NT Government Owned Traffic above hours, weekends and Public
Signals – Darwin Region, Holidays.
Table 16.8 – Darwin City Council Owned
See also PROVISION FOR TRAFFIC.
Traffic Signals,
Table 16.9 – Palmerston City Council Owned See also the clause titled ‘Working Hours’ in the
Traffic Signals, Conditions of Contract.
Table 16.10 – NT Government Owned Traffic
Signals – Alice Springs and See also the clause titled ‘Routine Maintenance’
Table 16.11 – Alice Springs Council Owned for further clarification.
Traffic Signals 16.7 ACCESS TO SITE
(Refer clause 16.30):
- Department of Infrastructure Prior to entering the site of the Works, the
managed traffic signal assets, and Contractor shall contact the officer-in-charge of
all other ITS assets; the site to explain the nature of the work to be
- City of Darwin Council owned traffic carried out and for permission to enter to carry
signal assets & out the Works.
- City of Palmerston Council owned In the event of either, being unable to contact
traffic signal assets & the officer-in-charge, or being refused
- Alice Springs Town Council owned permission to enter the premises the Contractor
traffic signal assets. shall notify the Superintendent’s Representative.
Where work is required to be carried out in Work shall not proceed in such areas until
easements or on land adjacent to the site for the further advised by the Superintendent’s
purpose of connecting services or joining up of Representative.
roads etc. ensure that the appropriate licences
and approvals are obtained for work in those Note: This clause applies where the contractor
particular areas. is required to access a site to undertake traffic
signal, or ITS maintenance, that at the time, is
Permits – City or Town Council permits are under contractual possession of a third party i.e.
required to be obtained to undertake works for other contractor.
all non-fault maintenance activities. As per
Council direction, fees will be waived for all
works within Darwin and Palmerston Council
jurisdictions for works directly relating to traffic
signal or ITS maintenance purposes executed
under this contract. Approved permits shall be
forwarded on to the Traffic Section prior to
proceeding with the works.

Page 136
16.8 SCHEDULE OF DRAWINGS disputed invoices, and for other operational

INCLUDED IN CONTRACT purposes. If the nominated Contractor
Representative is on leave, prior notice shall be
The following drawings shall form part of the
given of the staff member who will be available
Contract:
for these duties in the Contractor
nd
Representative’s absence. Alternately, a 2 in
Table 16.2 – Schedule of Drawings Included charge may be appointed to make the same
in Contract decisions and provide the same services with
equivalent authority.
DRAWING AMEND TITLE
NO. NO. 16.10 CONTRACTOR'S ESTABLISHMENT
The Contractor shall provide and maintain an
C(S) 1500 Signal Details – established office workshop facility. The facility
4
Ducting shall include the following:
C(S) 1501 Signal Details – Pole a) An approved workshop with equipment

3 and capabilities sufficient to carry out work as
Foundation
requested under the Contract.
C(S) 1502 Signal Details – Mast b) An approved office space with sufficient
2
Arm Foundation personnel necessary to take, record or pass on
any emergency message that may be received,
C(S) 1503 Signal Details – provide day to day information with regard to
3 Controller prices availability and delivery. Be sufficiently
Foundation qualified to process and forward invoices for
work carried out.
C(S) 1504 Signal Details – c) An approved storage facility that is
3 Communication secure and provides a weatherproof location for
Isolation Pillar the storage of DoI owned assets or hardware
that are stored by the contractor under the
C(S) 1505 Signal Details – requirements of this contract.
2 Lantern Mounting
Details 16.11 CONTRACTOR'S EQUIPMENT AND
MATERIALS
C(S) 1506 Signal Details – The Contractor shall provide all general and
1 Pedestrian Push specialised equipment, tools and materials to
Button carry out and test the Work (except for
equipment, tools and materials supplied by the
C(S) 1507 Signal Details – Principal). It shall be the responsibility of the
5
Detector Installation Contractor to be fully equipped on each
attendance call.
C(S) 1557 Traffic Signal
16.12 CO-ORDINATION OF WORK
2 Advanced Warning
Sign The Contractor shall confer with any
sub-contractors and persons engaged on
16.9 AVAILABILITY OF CONTRACTOR separate orders in connection with the Works
and with the Superintendent’s Representative,
The Contractor shall provide twenty-four hours a Traffic Section or DoI On-Call staff for the
day, seven days a week telephone contact and purpose of co-ordination and execution for the
availability of labour to deploy to the Works various phases of the Works. The Contractor
should the Superintendent’s Representative, shall be responsible for arranging that each
Traffic Section or DoI On-Call staff so direct. shall attend upon and assist the other trades.
The Principal shall have first call on the services
of the Contractor. The Contractor shall ascertain from the
sub-contractor and persons engaged on
The contractor shall ensure that there is always separate contracts the extent of all chasing,
an appropriately delegated ‘Contractor cutting and forming of all openings, holes,
Representative’ available to provide quotes, grooves and the like.
information on quotes, to make operational
decisions and provide technical advice, The Contractor shall ascertain the routes of all
escalation of works, to be available to resolve services and the position of all pits, conduits and

Page 137
the like in connection with the installation of

Table 16.3 – Items supplied by Principal –
plant and services and arrange for the
Darwin
construction of work accordingly. The breaking
and cutting of complete work must be avoided
wherever possible. ITEM QUANTITY
16.13 MATERIAL AND SOFTWARE TO BE ‘Traffic Signals Under Repair’

SUPPLIED BY THE PRINCIPAL - DARWIN 8
Signs
The following material and software will be
16.13.1 Collection of Hardware – Hold Point
supplied free by the Principal to the Contractor
for use only in execution of the Works: Hold Point - Within 7 days of award of the
Contract, the Contractor shall collect such
Table 16.3 – Items supplied by Principal – materials and take delivery of the materials at
Darwin the DoI Yarrawonga shed / storage yard.
Before taking delivery of any material, the
ITEM QUANTITY Contractor shall check that is in a satisfactory
condition and in the quantity described. No
CONTROLLERS claim will be admitted for replacement of
material alleged to be found defective or
PSC MK3 Cabinet & Test deficient in quantity after delivery.
1
Controller (with lamp load bank)
The quantities stated are not necessarily
Keyboard Display Units (KDU) 8 adequate for the execution of the Works and
supply of any additional quantities shall be
arranged by the Contractor and at his own
Eclipse Cabinet & Test
1 expense.
Controller (with lamp load bank)
The maintenance and serviceability of all
Eclipse Hand Held Terminal equipment provided by DoI and used for testing
7
(HHT) by the contractor, such as the KDUs, HHTs, test
controller cabinets and associated load banks
PSC Manuals and Eclipse are the responsibility of the contractor to
1 arrange and shall be at the contractor’s
Manuals
expense. The equipment shall always be in a
CCTV Cleaning Pole 1 serviceable condition.
On completion of the contract, the contractor
SOFTWARE / SCATS / USER MANUALS shall deliver the Principal supplied material back
to the Traffic Section storage yard in serviceable
Scats Access Program 1 condition.
SCATS Log 1 16.14 MATERIAL TO BE SUPPLIED BY THE

PRINCIPAL – ALICE SPRINGS
Loop Detector Analyser 1 The following material will be supplied free by
the Principal to the Contractor for use only in
Tyco Log Viewer 1 execution of the Works:
EUpdate 1 Table 16.4 – Items Supplied by Principal –

Alice Springs
ATSUI 1
MATERIALS QUANTITY
Microconnect LCM Management
1
Tool CONTROLLER:
UPS Manuals 1 Keyboard Display Units (KDU) 3
SIGNAGE
‘Changed Traffic Conditions PSC MK3 Cabinet Test

4 1
Ahead’ Signs Controller

Page 138
Table 16.4 – Items Supplied by Principal – Table 16.4 – Items Supplied by Principal –
Alice Springs Alice Springs
MATERIALS QUANTITY MATERIALS QUANTITY
Mother Board 1 Eclipse Hand Held Terminal

3
(HHT)
PSC Processor Plus card 1
Eclipse Manuals (electronic
1
PSC Power Supply card 1 copy)
PSC Power Interface card 1 Eclipse Motherboard LM40-16-

2
16 complete with cards
PSC PD212 Detector card 1
Eclipse Motherboard LM40-08-
3
PSC PD216 Detector card 1 16 complete with cards
PSC Lamp Control Board cards Eclipse CPM 1a card 2

3
(low power)
Eclipse LDM 416 card 2
Memory Test Program (from
1 Eclipse LCM 8 card 4
old L0101)
Eclipse PSM card 1
PSC Motherboard complete Eclipse Flasher Unit 2

with: PSC Processor Plus
Card, PSC Power Supply Card, Eclipse Mains Filter Unit 2
PSC Power Interface Card, 2 x 1
PSC PD216 Detector cards, 3 x Eclipse Assembly Site ID 1
PSC Lamp Control Board
cards. PSTN Micro Connect Linking
Control Modules for SCATS 1
PSC Motherboard 1 communication
PSC Processor Plus card 2 SCATS
PSC Power Supply card 3 Scats Access Program 1
PSC Power Interface card 1 SCATS Log 1
PSC PD212 Detector cards 1 On award of the Contract, the Contractor shall
submit a written request for such materials, and
PSC PD216 Detector cards 1 on receiving the Superintendent's written
authority, he shall take delivery of the materials
PSC Lamp Control Board cards at the Traffic Section storage location wherever
6 it may be in Alice Springs (Currently second
(low power)
floor of Greenwell Building)
PSC Flasher Units 1 Before taking delivery of any material, the
Contractor shall check that is in a satisfactory
PSC Manuals 2 condition and in the quantity described. No
claim will be admitted for replacement of
material alleged to be found defective or
deficient in quantity after delivery.
Eclipse Controller EC1-69-16 3
The quantities stated are not necessarily
adequate for the execution of the Works and
Eclipse Controller EC1-69-08 1
supply of any additional quantities shall be

Page 139
arranged by the Contractor and at his own timeframes following commencement of the
expense. contract, however is not an exhaustive list.
16.14.1 Documents / items to be Submitted Documents shall be updated and provided to
for this contract after award the Superintendent’s Representative as soon as
possible of any contents within the documents
Table 16.5 – Documents / Items Contractor to changing.
Provide
16.15 PROCEDURES, CALLS AND
ITEM TIMEFRAME PAYMENTS
16.15.1 General
Project Control Plan 14 Days This section specifies the requirements for
attending the work and the procedures for
Document / Hardware reporting and payment of work carried out.
14 Days
Control
NOTE: The DoI Traffic Section are investigating
Contact numbers - during the feasibility of implementing a maintenance
24 Hours management system for traffic signals and ITS
and after hours
in the NT. It is anticipated that this system be
capable of creating and forwarding works order
Site Log Template 7 Days
directions, and allow responses for all
maintenance tasks, tracking work orders and
Traffic Management Plan &
14 Days invoices, recording works completion times, and
TCDs
providing full reports. It may also be able to
attach photos to work orders, control stock and
Test Controllers Installed 14 Days location.
Test Traffic Signal Loop If this system is implemented during the term of
14 Days this contract, the contractor will be required to
Installed
adopt the use of the system for the purpose of
Contractors Nominated PIN this contract. Licenses, software and equipment
7 Days (mobile devices) will be provided by the
Numbers
Department if required.
Contractor’s Personnel 16.15.2 Abbreviations and Definitions
7 Days
Accreditations / Qualifications
The following abbreviations and definitions are
Company Workplace Health used in this specification section:
14 Days
& Safety Plan - SCHEDULED WORK – Work for which
a specific rate item is provided in the
Schedule of Rates.
- UNSCHEDULED WORK – Work for
Table 16.6 – Documents / Items DoI to
which no specific rate item is provided
Provide
in the Schedule of Rates.
ITEM TIMEFRAME - CSR – Contractor Service
Report/Request.
Material to be supplied to Upon Request - ITPC – Instruction to Period Contractor
Contractor (within 7 days)
- WO – Works Order.
Callout Request Form 24 Hours - RCTI – Recipient Created Tax Invoice
Contact numbers - during 16.15.3 Direction to work

24 Hours
and after hours A direction to work may be issued in the
following forms:
Excel Spreadsheet Quote
7 days - Telephone call or facsimile.
Sheet
A CSR will subsequently be issued by the
Note: The items listed above are required to be Superintendent.
provided or undertaken within the nominated
- Instruction to Period Contractor. (ITPC)

Page 140
A CSR will subsequently be issued by the 16.15.4 Advance Direction

Superintendent.
Notwithstanding the provisions of the Direction
- Contractors Service Request/Report To Work clause the Contractor will receive an
(CSR) advance direction to carry out any required
Scheduled Work up to a maximum of the
Issued in its own right or subsequent to a
monthly pro rata frequency of the respective
telephone call or facsimile, an ITPC or an urgent
Schedule of Rate Items.
call out.
Any advance direction issued may be revoked
- Service Order
at the sole discretion of the Superintendent.
Issued in respect to a quotation for specific
16.15.5 Authority to Undertake Work
works not included in the Schedule of Rates.
The Contractor will not undertake any work
- Urgent call out work outside of normal
unless specifically directed to do so by the
working hours.
Superintendent’s Representative, Traffic Section
- Urgent call out work outside of normal or DoI On-Call staff, with the exception of:
working hours may be communicated to
- Hazardous situations. If there is obvious
the Contractor by the Department’s
works required due to a hazardous
answering service contractor or the
situation that could endanger a worker or
Superintendent’s Representative, Traffic
member of the public, the contractor shall
Section or DoI On-Call staff.
attempt to contact the Superintendent’s
In the event of an urgent call out outside of Representative for permission to proceed
normal working hours the Contractor shall on with the work. If the Superintendent’s
the first working day thereafter, complete a “Call Representative or other Traffic Section
Out Request Form” and email the same to staff are not available, the contractor may
Traffic Section as a prerequisite to the issue of a proceed with the works if the works is of a
CSR or email work order. nature that poses a risk to the public or
workers.
If the Superintendent’s Representative, Traffic
Section or DoI On-Call staff considers any In the above situations the contractor shall notify
particular work requirement is urgent he shall so the Superintendent’s Representative as soon as
advise the Contractor and shall cause the CSR practicable during or after the works, and
subsequently issued to be stamped “URGENT”. provide supporting evidence (photographic or
other) of the works that occurred.
The Contractor shall visit the office of the
Superintendent as required to collect any hard 16.15.6 Instruction To Period Contractor -
copy directions to work. CSR
For traffic signal maintenance works, an One copy of an ITPC or CSR will be issued to
automatically generated CSR is issued monthly the Contractor. The document will describe in
to the contractor for each traffic signal asset. brief detail, the location and a brief description
Traffic Section staff send email work orders to of the work required.
the contractor as a direction to work to initiate
When the works required by the CSR have been
maintenance works to be completed at required
completed the Contractor shall insert, in the
assets. The contractor then compiles the email
appropriate place on the CSR, brief work
work orders and evidence, and then invoices the
descriptions, item numbers, quantities, rates,
DoI monthly for each CSR. Where works have
extensions, additions, the total value and any
not been undertaken at any particular asset for
other information required by the
that month, the contractor will enter the words
Superintendent to approve payment.
‘nil charges’ on the relevant CSR and return with
the other monthly invoices for that CSR to be The CSR shall have the completion date of the
cancelled. works entered thereon and be signed off by the
Contractor.
For works where there is a recovery of costs
initiated by DoI i.e. where a traffic signal has 16.15.7 Time Limit for Attendance
been knocked over by a motorist, a separate
The works must be attended within the time
CSR will be forwarded to the contractor to
limits specified in Table 16.12 - Response
undertake the works in relation to the
Times.
reinstatement of that asset.
Any inability to undertake the works during the
Specific maintenance and other works may be
allowable time limit shall be coordinated with the
initiated on a separate CSR.

Page 141
Superintendent’s Representative or Traffic (10am) the following work day with details of the
Section staff, prior to the time or date due for works that were undertaken, the fault/s that
completion with sufficient time to arrange a were fixed, scheduled and unscheduled items
suitable alternative. used, and any works outstanding or other non-
urgent maintenance observed while on site. Any
16.15.8 Variation Approval
work order written responses required due to
Any variation from the extent of work ordered urgent reasons on the day that works occurred
must be approved by the prior to the varied work will be marked as such on the work order, and
being carried out. shall be received by 1000 hrs that day or earlier,
as otherwise directed.
Where an item of work is ordered pursuant to a
Schedule of Rates item for Scheduled Work and Works will be checked against the time limit for
the Contractor considers the item to be outside repairs of the fault and SCATS Log.
the scope of the Schedule of Rates item the
16.15.10 DAILY LOG BOOKS –
Contractor shall obtain the approval of the
APPROVAL – Witness Point
Superintendent prior to carrying out the varied
works unless the works is of a nature that poses Maintain daily log books for works undertaken
a risk to the public or workers. under the contract.
The Contractor shall in the case of any Witness Point - Approval - Submit to the
authorised variation insert on the CSR the Superintendent’s Representative for approval, a
approving officer’s name and the date of such suitably designed format for an individual Site
approval. Log template prior to commencing works under
the Contract – to be provided within 7 days of
16.15.9 COMMUNICATIONS
award of contract.
Provide field and after hours communication
A Site Log job sheet shall be filled in for each
with the Department by mobile telephones
attendance regardless of the type of works
connected either to a cell net system or a
being undertaken, and shall have all details
satellite system.
completed including if a field is n/a.
Provide the Department with a list of current
Include in each individual site job sheet the
contact numbers (including mobile phones) for
following fields as a minimum:
all staff involved in the delivery and works within
this contract, including the single after hours - The site asset number and location, i.e.
contact number within 24 hours of award of the road name / intersection,
contract.
- Date and time of each attendance -
Ensure that the telephones are switched on arrival, returns, and departure from site,
every day between the hours of 0700 and 1700
- Confirmation that attendance was as per
or at any other time when work is being carried
contract time limit for attendance –
out under the Contract.
Yes/No,
Ensure that the after hours phone is manned at
- Names of personnel who attended site,
all times, twenty-four hours a day, seven days a
week. - Details of other site attendees (Police,
Power & Water, Worksafe, Sub-
The use of answering machines or message
Contractors etc),
banks as the primary form of communication is
not appropriate and should only be used if the - Name of DoI officer that ordered the
phone is engaged (in use) or if the user is works (business hours and after hours),
unable to get to the phone in time to answer it.
The contractor shall ensure that if a call is not - The type of work and details of the works
answered for any reason, a return phone call undertaken, including controller faults and
will be made within ten minutes from the original codes, test readings and results,
missed call. - Scheduled and non-scheduled items, and
Replace faulty telephones within 3 working days the quantities used or completed,
of the occurrence of the fault, and advise the - Stock used (whether or not the item used
Superintendent’s Representative in writing of was from DoI stock or provided as new
any temporary arrangements. from the contractor),
All email work orders that are sent to the - Details of significant changes in the
contractor with instruction to undertake works, operational state of the traffic signals
shall be replied to (reply to all) by 1000 hrs such as disconnection of communications

Page 142
or power to the site, Flashing Amber, for payment unless the contractor has entered
Blackout or similar. Shall include an agreement with the Principal to receive
approximate time of the change to Recipient Created Tax Invoices (RCTI).
operation,
Where the Contractor has a written agreement
- Evidence of works, including date and with the Principal to receive Recipient Created
time stamped photographic images of any Tax Invoices the Department, after receiving a
damaged / replaced items, additional or completed CSR, will create a tax invoice on the
outstanding works. Contractors behalf and issue it in parallel with
the contract payment.
- Equipment or works down time,
The Contractor will still be responsible for
- Work Health & Safety incidents, near
collecting the GST and remitting it to the Tax
misses, or any unusual happenings, and
Office.
any other requirements specified in the
relevant Technical Section, 16.16 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
- Any outstanding maintenance Refer to MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
requirements or faults observed onsite
16.16.1 Payment Generally
but not corrected at the time of
attendance, or adverse traffic signal Payment for Scheduled Work will be made at
operational observations. the tendered rate.
So that the Superintendent’s Representative 16.16.2 Rates Generally
and Traffic Section staff can record the job as
completed, all email work orders that are sent to The rates tendered are deemed to represent the
the contractor with instruction to undertake full value of the work inclusive of plant, labour,
works, shall be replied to (reply to all) by Close messing, clearances, transportation, fuel, oil,
of Business the following work day with details maintenance, tools, material procurement and
of the works that were undertaken, the fault/s delivery, all incidentals to complete the work,
that were fixed, scheduled and unscheduled attendance, supervision and for overheads and
items used, and any works outstanding or other profit.
non-urgent maintenance observed while on site. Where a Schedule of Rate item for Scheduled
Works will be checked against the time limit for Works is defined as “Labour Only” the rate
repairs of the fault. tendered shall be inclusive of all of the above
Submit daily log book sheets with each relating to the labour component.
completed CSR with the monthly or separate 16.17 CLAIMS UNDER THE INDIGENOUS
invoices. EMPLOYMENT PROVISIONAL SUM
16.15.11 Payments Generally Claims under the Indigenous Employment
On completion of all work described on the Provisional Sum are to be submitted to the
CSR, endorse the CSR as required and return Principal within 14 days of the end of each
to the Superintendent no later than 14 days after calendar month and must be accompanied by
completion of work. an Indigenous Employment Report as required
by the Conditions of Contract.
When the Superintendent is satisfied the work
has been completed in a satisfactory manner, 16.18 REVIEW MEETINGS
and that the charges are in accordance with the The nominated appropriately delegated
Schedule of Rates, payment will be certified. Contractor Representative shall be available to
All orders for work not invoiced within 14 days of attend fortnightly meetings at locations to be
completion may be subject to valuation by the directed by the Superintendent’s Representative
Superintendent and paid accordingly. and at recurring times that are convenient to
both the contractor and the Superintendent’s
Fully detailed particulars, evidence of cost and Representative.
acceptable reasons as to why the work was not
invoiced within the 14 day period may be The meetings will be held for the following
required as prerequisites to payment. purposes:
16.15.12 Tax Invoices - For the contractor to update the

Superintendent’s Representative of the
A GST compliant tax invoice which includes the progress of ongoing and pre-programmed
order number of the work must be attached to works,
the CSR when forwarding to the Superintendent

Page 143
- For the Superintendent’s Representative reinstatement which is of a non-urgent nature as

to provide the contractor with future described by DoI Traffic Section, and other non-
planned works, prioritise works and urgent requirements.
provide feedback,
Urgent Quote. An urgent quote shall be
- For the Superintendent’s Representative provided within 24 hours of the request for quote
and the contractor to confirm previous being issued. An urgent quote would include
works have been completed adequately, traffic signal and ITS works, repairs or
discuss and resolve disputed invoices, reinstatement which is of an urgent nature or
non-conformances and general contractor any other urgent requirements as described by
co-ordination, DoI Traffic Section.
- Discuss integration and / or impact of Also refer to clause ‘Availability of Contractor’.
other traffic signal works or contracts on
16.20 FAULT MAINTENANCE
traffic signals not included within this
maintenance contract but impacting on Provide a fault attendance service by
traffic signals under NTG control appropriately qualified technicians on twenty-
(including other Traffic Section contracts, four hours per day, seven days per week basis
DoI projects and external clients including for all traffic signal or ITS failures arising from
councils), any cause. Typical causes of traffic signal faults
include:
- Current Work Health & Safety concerns
by the contractor, Traffic Section, - Signal controller or hardware malfunction
Worksafe or any other stakeholder, and; including power outages,
- Any other relevant issues or queries that - Communications outage or malfunction,
relate to, or impact upon this maintenance
contract. - Accident, vandalism or environmental
damage. E.g. lightning, moisture, UV
16.19 QUOTING FOR UNSCHEDULED exposure, to any traffic signals or ITS
WORKS hardware.
The Contractor Representative is required to - Any other issue resulting in a signal
utilise the Quoting Form which will be supplied controller, or other ITS equipment, to not
to the successful contractor within 7 days of the operate as it is normally intended.
contract being awarded. The Quoting Form is in
16.20.1 Service Vehicle/s, Equipment and
an Excel Spreadsheet format. The Quoting
Materials
Form is required to be completed by the
contractor for all unscheduled materials, The vehicle/s used for all works under this
negotiated rate items and to advise the contract shall at all times be equipped with
Superintendent’s Representative of what sufficient materials to make a site safe, perform
quantities are required for works such as full fault maintenance activities, and be fully
pole replacements as a result of an accident, or equipped for all after hours call out duties on
other routine maintenance activities. Quotes site.
may be required for supply only items, labour
items, or both. As an absolute minimum the traffic equipped
vehicle shall at all times, be equipped with:
Completed quote forms should be emailed to
the DoI Traffic Section so a CSR or email work - Manuals, either electronic or hard copy,
order can be raised if the quote is accepted. The for:
email shall be accompanied by a description of - Each type of Traffic Signal
what the quote includes, excludes, a breakdown Controller (TSC) in use within
of the negotiated rate items (including personnel the region of this contract,
and materials), expected duration of works, and
the date proposed to commence. - Uninterruptible Power Supply
(UPS) units currently in use
Quotes requested verbally or in writing by the within the region of this
Department shall be provided in detail with all of contract,
the required information within the following time
limits: - Microconnect communication
equipment,
Standard Quote. A standard quote shall be
provided within 5 business days of the request - Variable Speed Limit Sign
for quote being issued. A standard quote would (VSLS) equipment,
include traffic signal and ITS works, repairs or
Page 144
- Manuals for any other exhaust stacks, ladders, roof racks or are
equipment worked on within the covered in dust.
scope of this contract.
16.20.2 Fault Maintenance Procedures
- Necessary fault finding tools, electrical
Fault Maintenance is unscheduled maintenance
testing equipment including
identified by the Contractor, the
- a multi-meter (Low impedance Superintendent’s Representative, DoI Traffic, or
solenoid meter, test lamp, DoI On-Call staff. Work must be carried out
“Wiggy” or similar meters within a specified time. Refer to Table 16.12 -
capable of testing and Response Times in clause 16.32 Response
displaying 240V over period of Times.
0.5 sec (flashing amber output
Attendance on site is to be communicated to
cycle)) and
and / or approved by the Superintendent’s
- a KDU (Keyboard Display Unit), Representative, DoI Traffic, or DoI On-Call staff
(except where the fault is of a nature that poses
- a HHT (Hand Held Terminal)
a significant risk to the public or the worker). On
and
receiving confirmation of a fault, the Contractor
- ladder/s appropriate for shall dispatch appropriately qualified
accessing a standard traffic technician/s as required to attend the site within
signal pole safely, the times specified. Upon initial attendance, the
Contractor will identify the fault, ascertain the
- Telecommunications / PSTN testing
cause and rectify the fault as soon as practical.
equipment including but not limited to a The cost of the authorised repairs will be paid in
butt phone, surge protection equipment, accordance with the Contractors tendered
data cable / cat 5 cable tester, and a
schedule of routine maintenance rates.
spare microconnect unit,
Where full repairs cannot be implemented
- A generator, fully fuelled, and serviceable,
immediately, the Contractor shall ensure that
which is suitable for an immediate the site is made safe and report to the
connection to a TSC or UPS as required, Superintendent’s Representative any further
- A gatic / pit lid lifter, other common tools works required prior to departure from site. In
including screwdrivers, pliers, side the event that a site cannot be left with all
cutters, crimping tools etc. lanterns functioning (for example where a
pedestal has been destroyed) the Contractor
- Basic replacement and repair hardware shall seek advice from the Superintendent’s
such as vehicle and pedestrian cowls, Representative as to an acceptable temporary
lenses, replacement lamps, pedestrian arrangement.
buttons, fuses, transformers, spare TSC
modules and cards, and a green yellow For all attendances, prior to leaving the site the
and red roundels and arrows in both Contractor shall ensure that the traffic signals
200mm and 300mm. are intact, all functions and displays are as per
normal operation, there are communications
- The minimum traffic management established from the TSC to SCATS, and that all
signage and TMP to carry out fault pits and the controller door are safely secured.
maintenance tasks in accordance with
AS 1742.3 and PROVISION FOR The Superintendent’s Representative or Traffic
TRAFFIC, Section staff member’s specific authorisation is
required for all situations where rectification
- Flashing beacons or other vehicle works will require:
mounted warning devices on the highest
point of the cabin roof or superstructure of - A site being left in an operational mode
all plant and equipment and in other than its normal operational mode,
accordance with AS/NZS 1742.3 where
- Additional scheduled items varied to the
these are being used within the road
original CSR or email work order,
reserve. Fit beacons with a minimum of
75 watt globes. Do not use strobe lights. - Any additional equipment other than that
Ensure that the lights are operational specified.
whenever the plant or equipment is
Upon satisfactory completion of repair works the
working within 9 metres of the road
Contractor will advise the Superintendent’s
reserve and ensure that the light is visible
Representative or Traffic Section staff member
from all approaches and not obscured by

Page 145
of the site status and action taken prior to Maintain a 24 hour / seven (7) days a week
departing the site. service to attend works covered by this contract.
So that the Superintendent’s Representative Respond only to service calls or call outs
and Traffic Section staff can record the job as initiated or confirmed by the Superintendent’s
completed, all email work orders that are sent to Representative, DoI Traffic, or DoI On-Call staff.
the contractor with instruction to undertake
Confirmation of service calls and call outs will be
works, shall be replied to [email protected]
issued to the Contractor by CSR (Contractor
and all other nominated recipients by 1000hrs
Service Report) or Traffic Section email work
(10am) the following work day with details of the
order as soon as practicable following the work
works that were undertaken, the fault/s that
requested by Superintendent’s Representative,
were fixed, scheduled and unscheduled items
or DoI Traffic.
used, and any works outstanding or other non-
urgent maintenance observed while on site. Maximum response times have been applied to
Works will be checked against the time limit for various faults or maintenance activities based
repairs of the fault and SCATS Log. on their urgency and risk. Considerations such
as danger to the public, impact to the road
Submit daily log book sheets with each
network operation due to a traffic signal or ITS
completed CSR with the monthly or separate
fault, realistic achievability, and other influences
invoices.
have been used to determine these response
Initial attendance to any reported faults shall be times. Other variables such as time of day, or
performed in accordance with the prescribed critical site/s affected may result in the
attendance time criteria on a twenty-four (24) maximum response times being reduced at the
hour 7 day basis. The Contractor shall apply the discretion of the Superintendent’s
following priorities for actioning all site faults: Representative, or DoI Traffic Section staff.
1. Make the site safe Failure to meet the maximum response times
listed in Table 16.12 - Response Times may
2. Return the traffic signals to operational
expose the contractor to external liabilities. If the
state
contractor fails to attend a site fully equipped to
3. Establish communications to all rectify a fault within the given time limit for
equipment attendance, and this failure is considered to
have caused or contributed to an accident or
4. Return any ITS to operational state
injury, investigating authorities may consider
5. Optimise the operation and complete further action regarding any negligence proven.
remedial works
Any inability for the contractor to complete the
The Contractor shall ensure that all fault works in accordance with the required maximum
attendance work is performed with the response time or other nominated time, shall be
deliberate intention of minimising inconvenience coordinated as soon as possible with the
to road users including pedestrians and cyclists, Superintendent’s Rep or Traffic Section staff, to
while ensuring the safety of the workers and the agree to a suitable alternative time or time
public. extension to complete the works, and shall be
followed up in writing.
In accordance with the ‘Provision for Traffic’
clause in the standard specification, remedial 16.20.4 Temporary Repairs
works shall be performed so as not to interfere
Where it is not practical to immediately repair
with traffic flows during the periods of 07.00
traffic signal equipment on site, the Contractor
hours to 09.00 hours and from 15.30 hours to
shall without delay provide a temporary
17.30 hours Monday to Friday, excluding public
arrangement as agreed to in consultation with
holidays. This exclusion period may be over-
the Superintendent and will maintain the asset
ridden by the Superintendent’s Representative,
including temporary repairs until permanent
Traffic Section staff or the DoI On-Call Officer in
repairs are authorised and implemented.
relation to emergency or critical works which
require immediate attendance in the interest of In order to allow the installation to operate until
public safety. permanent repairs can be undertaken, the
Contractor may be required, when deemed
16.20.3 Response Times
necessary by the Superintendent’s
Respond to all service calls during normal Representative, or DoI, to modify the site, or
business hours, and call outs after business install or relocate equipment to temporary
hours as per Table 16.12 - Response Times. locations.

Page 146
Where there is provision for switching the controller or UPS, Traffic Section staff shall be
signals from normal to flashing operation, the consulted and provide approval prior to the
Contractor may do so while effecting repairs on connection or disconnection of the generator. If
the controller however the Contractor is advised the connection is required to occur in the case
that flashing operation is an emergency action of urgent works, or a fault has occurred
only and will not be considered as a temporary unintentionally during maintenance activities,
repair. Also refer to ‘switching of traffic signal DoI Traffic Section shall be informed as soon as
conditions’. practically possible after the connection. If the
reason for the generator connection is a power
16.20.5 Switching State of Traffic Signal
outage, it may be requested that the contractor
Conditions or Communications
liaise with the power provider to ascertain when
Where it is necessary to change the state of the power is restored.
traffic signal operation or the status of controller
Any third party requests for generator
communications, DoI Darwin Traffic Section
connection to traffic signals or UPS through the
shall be consulted and provide approval prior to
maintenance contractor shall be forwarded to
changing the state of the signals. If its required
Traffic Section for consideration and approvals.
to occur in the case of urgent works, or it has
Full details including proposed date and timings,
occurred unintentionally during maintenance
the reason for the request, the contact person
activities, DoI Traffic Section shall be informed
and business name of the third party shall be
as soon as practically possible of this need or
provided.
event.
16.21 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE
Change of State is defined as:
Routine maintenance repairs are identified by
- Traffic Signals on to off or flashing
either the Superintendent’s Representative,
amber,
Traffic Section staff or the Contractor.
- Traffic Signals off to on or flashing Attendance on site is to be communicated to
amber, and approved by the Superintendent’s
Representative or Traffic Section staff. Routine
- Traffic Signals flashing amber to off or
Maintenance repairs are to be completed within
on, or;
a specified timeframe - Refer Table 16.12 -
- Turning communications on or off. Response Times.
When signals are in flashing yellow mode or Routine maintenance includes follow up works
switched off during maintenance activities, such as replacing full detector loops, cables and
ensure the attending works vehicle is parked in pole tops, conduit junction and detector pit
a prominent position with its high intensity replacements, traffic signal pole and accident
flashing yellow hazard warning lights operating. repairs, scheduled controller changeovers, and
scheduled inspections and works.
Ensure that the location of the works vehicle
does not interfere with sight lines for motorists at Some Routine Maintenance activities may need
intersections, and also pedestrian access is to to be rescheduled due to the high risk nature of
be considered. the environment (identified by the Contractors
written and documented Risk Assessment) so
Works shall be scheduled so as to minimise as to reduce risk to the Contractors personnel
disruption to motorists/pedestrians where the and so as not to affect the traffic flows in the
planned switching states of traffic signals is area. Some examples of situations such as this
considered. would be lamp changes or aspect repairs on
16.20.6 Temporary Shut Down to UPS, CCTV, narrow medians or high speed / high risk areas,
or Other ITS or the recutting of traffic signal loops in dense
trafficked areas.
Where it is necessary to shut down a UPS,
CCTV, or other ITS, or if this equipment is The contractor shall endeavour to coordinate all
unintentionally shut down, DoI Traffic Section routine maintenance tasks at one asset, at the
shall be informed as soon as practically possible same time within the time limits for attendance if
prior to this need or as soon as possible after possible, to reduce the impact on the road
the event. network, and reduce traffic management costs.
If this is not possible due to time limit for
16.20.7 Connection / Disconnection of a attendance, seek approval for an extension from
Generator the Superintendent’s Representative who may
Where there is any requirement for the extend the time limit for attendance subject to
connection of a generator to any traffic signal the type of routine maintenance required.

Page 147
These works identified as high risk shall be must be forwarded to the Superintendent’s
rescheduled to a time when risk can be better Representative or Traffic section staff as soon
managed i.e. after hours or on weekends at no as a time line has been determined.
additional cost to the Principal, unless specific
16.22 SPECIFIC MAINTENANCE – TRAFFIC
direction to work outside of work hours has been
SIGNALS & ITS – HOLD POINT AND
given by Traffic Section staff for other reasons,
WITNESS POINT
otherwise whereby works could have been
undertaken during normal work hours within the Specific maintenance includes the inspection
relevant standards and Provision for Traffic and testing of all on-site equipment to identify its
section. Where direction to work outside of physical condition, operational performance and
normal working hours has been made by Traffic configuration of hardware. Included in the audit
Section, additional charges shall be by is all components of the traffic signals and any
negotiated rate or hourly rate, as applicable associated ITS situated at the traffic signal
according to the type of works undertaken, and intersection, or attached to the traffic signal
with consideration of the labour component of controller. Details of the inspection are to be
the item of works involved if it were completed recorded in report form.
during normal work hours.
The following functions are to be undertaken
When a Routine Maintenance activity is during specific maintenance of traffic signals:
considered ‘High Risk’ by the contractor, the
Superintendent’s Representative or Traffic - Site / asset audit
Section staff shall be informed as soon as - minor repairs
possible in writing so that the Superintendent’s
Representative can make an allowance for the - Corresponding report & photos
contractor’s time to complete the works (Table Site audit reports have been categorised to suit
16.12 - Response Times) to a more the expected work required to be undertaken for
appropriate time to alleviate the high risk. each type of audit. Contractors shall appoint
Traffic volumes may be available for the appropriate amount of resources in order to be
contractor to assist to ascertain a more suitable able to complete the audit in one shift. The
time to undertake the works. categorised Site Audits are:
This maintenance will be programmed in - Site Audit & Report – Vehicle Signalised
accordance with identified performance levels of Intersection.
the traffic signal equipment covered in this - Site Audit & Report – Pedestrian
contract. Signalised Intersection.
16.21.1 Time Lines for Follow up Works - UPS Maintenance and Report
This requirement of the contract refers to works NT Government traffic signals are to be
previously authorised by the Superintendent’s inspected on an ‘as required’ basis as directed
Representative and performed after initial by the Superintendent’s Representative. It is
reinstatement or repair works have been desired that up to eight traffic signalised
implemented and the site made safe or other intersections are audited each year and all UPS
maintenance tasks identified while on site. To in accordance with their maintenance schedule.
support the follow up works, a photo may be The Superintendent’s Representative reserves
required to provide evidence and also to assist the right to include additional sites or assets, or
with the description of the maintenance works or exclude sites at any time if deemed necessary.
follow up works identified.
City of Darwin Council, City of Palmerston
Upon receipt of the Superintendent’s Council and Town of Alice Springs Council
Representative or Traffic section staff approval traffic signals may be included in the specific
to proceed with additional works the Contractor maintenance program as required and directed
shall initiate the required works and ensure by the Superintendent’s Representative.
completion within the timelines identified in
clause 16.32 Response Times, Table 16.12 - Witness Point - Audit Supervision. Following
Response Times. Traffic Section’s direction to undertake a specific
maintenance audit, the contractor shall
Advise the Superintendent’s Representative or coordinate with Traffic Section to arrange a
Traffic section staff of any items temporarily suitable time to undertake the audit to allow
repaired within the prescribed times and provide supervision of the works to be scheduled if
the Superintendent’s Representative or Traffic required by the superintendent’s
section staff with an estimate of the time Representative.
required to complete the works. This information
Page 148
Notify the Superintendent’s Representative of Where any fault, damage or deficiency is

any variation to the program at least 5 working detected during the site audit and cannot be
days prior to any scheduled audit, the immediately rectified by the Contractor, or
commencement of any altered programmed where items not required to be carried out
work, or original work program. during specific maintenance as a minor repair,
the details must be included on the site audit
Hold Point - Audit Report Review. Within 5
report and site drawing. The Superintendent’s
days following the physical completion of a
Representative shall be provided the completed
specific maintenance audit, the contractor’s
report and corresponding site drawing within 5
representative shall arrange a time with a Traffic
working days of completion of the physical audit,
Section staff member to review the quality and
inclusive of any quotes for follow up works.
content of the completed report prior to formal
submission, and review any recommended If the Superintendent’s Representative issues a
follow up works that may be required on site. direction to work covering authorisation, the
The meeting may include a site visit and time in works arising from such reports will be
the office. considered routine maintenance and itemised
as per the schedule of rates.
Any changes required to the document shall be
undertaken and submitted with the required 16.22.2 Minor Repairs – Traffic Signals & ITS
timeframe.
Minor repairs are to be carried out in conjunction
16.22.1 Site Audit – Traffic Signals & ITS with the site audit, and shall be approved by the
DoI representative if on site.
Inspect, audit and report on each traffic
signalised intersection site as directed by the Refer to clause 16.33.1 Figures and Tables
Superintendent’s Representative. The
Figure 16.3 - Sample Template Traffic Signal
contractor should be prepared to undertake
and ITS Audit Report Template.
approximately eight (8) site audits annually.
All service vehicles engaged in specific
A site audit consists of completing all items
maintenance must carry, in addition to standard
listed in Figures and Tables
service equipment, a quantity of materials
Figure 16.3 - Sample Template Traffic Signal sufficient to undertake minor repairs suited to
and ITS Audit Report Template, and marking the particular site being audited, including but
up all details undertaken on the audit, not limited to:
outstanding works, and discrepancies between
- Replacement Lamps / LED arrays,
the site drawing and the site on a copy of the
- Transformers
most current site drawing. Each item in the
- Replacement Lenses,
checklist must be considered a specific
- Cowls for Vehicle Lanterns,
maintenance function and all cleaning,
- Pedestrian Cowls,
adjustment, repair or replacement of such items
- Pedestrian Buttons,
shall be completed within seven (7) days of the
- Complete Pole Top Assemblies,
CSR being issued. If issues are considered
- Controller module and cards,
complicated, by both parties, the completion
- Spare fuses,
date can be negotiated.
- Spare flasher unit,
The contractor shall identify what traffic - Cleaning equipment.
management is required to undertake the audit
Due to traffic management being implemented
completely. The traffic management scheduled
for all audits and the site usually being shut
items shall be nominated prior to the works
down, priorities for minor repairs shall be pole
commencing; the Superintendent’s
top assembly replacements, followed by other
Representative will subsequently issue a CSR
tasks as directed by the DoI site supervisor.
for the audit and traffic management items.
16.22.3 Site Audit Report – Traffic Signals &
Details of minor repairs carried out during
ITS
specific maintenance must be recorded in the
site audit report. Refer to clause Figures and Throughout the term of the Contract, keep and
Tables maintain accurate records of all replacements,
alterations and repairs made to any equipment
within the requirements of the Contract. Keep all
and ITS Audit Report Template. The template
completed audit reports and make them
shall be modified by the contractor to suit each
available to the Superintendent’s
site requirements.
Representative when requested.

Page 149
Provide the Superintendent’s Representative housing and connection/s to the traffic signal
with a Site Audit Report and corresponding controller. Details of the inspection shall be
marked up site drawing, no later than 5 working recorded in the provided manufacturers report
days following an audit being completed. Refer form Refer to Figure 16.4 – Sample Template
to Figure 16.3 - Sample Template Traffic UPS Maintenance and Battery Condition
Signal and ITS Audit Report Template. Report.
A site audit report will detail all minor repairs The following shall be provided upon completion
and routine maintenance carried out at that site. of each UPS maintenance inspection interval,
It will also include specific maintenance required for each UPS (by close of business the following
at the site as follow up works. The purpose of work day):
this report is to build a record of maintenance
- Site where UPS maintenance was
carried out at the site.
undertaken,
16.23 SPECIFIC MAINTENANCE –
- Copy of completed UPS Maintenance
UNINTERRUPTABLE POWER SUPPLY
and Battery Condition Report (see
(UPS) SYSTEMS
Figure 16.4) (photocopy, or clear and
Specific maintenance for UPS systems includes legible photograph), in electronic format,
the inspection and testing of all on-site
- Any additional information, photos, or
equipment to identify its physical condition,
follow up works.
operational performance and configuration of
hardware. Notify the Superintendent’s Representative of
any variation to the program at least 5 working
The UPS Maintenance and Battery Condition
days prior to any scheduled maintenance
Report are completed at regular intervals for all
inspection, the commencement of any altered
UPS installed in the NTG road Network and any
programmed work, or original work program.
future council jurisdiction installations. The
intervals required, and brief description of tasks 16.24 TRAFFIC SIGNAL & OTHER ITS
undertaken is: SPECIFIED EQUIPMENT
- At Installation. Requires items 1, 2, 4, The Department of Infrastructure specifies that
5 & 6 below to be undertaken and the contractor shall use equipment provided by
recorded. the following suppliers:
- Quarterly. Requires items 1 & 2 - Aldridge Traffic Systems – for all asset
below to be undertaken and recorded. furniture equipment,
- TYCO Traffic and Transportation – for
- Half Yearly. Requires items 2, 3 & 4
all traffic controller equipment (unless
below to be undertaken and recorded.
otherwise specified),
- Annually. Requires items 2, 3, 4, - Aldridge Traffic Controllers (ATC) – for
5, & 6 below to be undertaken and all UPS installations, parts and
recorded. components.
- Microconnect Linking Control Modules
Inspections and tests required to be carried out
(LCM) for TSC communication
as a part of the UPS Maintenance and Battery
equipment,
Condition Report are:
- Indigovision CCTV cameras and
1) 15 minute discharge test. associated equipment and
communications equipment.
2) Check battery terminal condition.
Note 1: DoI Traffic Section is currently preparing
3) 2 hour discharge test (to be undertaken
for testing of ATC traffic signal controllers and
by Traffic Section).
may be incorporated in the above specified
4) Apply battery terminal grease over equipment. If accepted for use in the NT
terminals to prevent corrosion. Government road reserve, the contractor will be
required to utilise and maintain this equipment.
5) Re-torque battery terminals connections
to 12.4 N.m (110 inch/pounds). Note 2: The Superintendent’s Representative
reserves the right to add or remove use of
6) Test internal resistance disconnect - specified suppliers or equipment within the
<2Ω. traffic signals and ITS maintenance contract
Included in the UPS Maintenance and Battery subject to testing, type approval (local or
Condition Report shall be a general inspection interstate), or for other reasons at the
of all components of the UPS including the Superintendent’s Representative’s discretion.

Page 150
Whilst the Department of Infrastructure requires accept the completed condition as acceptable
that all equipment used in this contract shall be for ongoing maintenance purposes.
provided by the nominated suppliers, the
The Traffic Signals Maintenance Contractor will
Department will consider alternate suppliers as
be invited to assist Traffic Section staff to attend
proposed by prospective tenderers and / or
the maintenance handover with the Project
maintenance contractor. The proposed
Contractor, and DoI or City Council Project
supplier’s equipment shall be provided to the
Manager.
Department of Infrastructure for inspection and
testing, any type approvals shall be provided, The Traffic Signal Maintenance Contractor will
and evidence that it meets the relevant be given the opportunity to identify any concerns
standards. of their own, and to familiarise themselves with
the asset, and / or modified asset. No payment
On completion of the Department of
will be made for the attendance of the
Infrastructure inspections, testing and
Contractor Representative to inspect the site at
assessments of the equipment, the
the handover inspection to DoI.
Superintendent’s Representative may give
approval for the contractor to use the nominated Ultimate acceptance of the site or asset for
supplier/s equipment throughout the contract maintenance purposes under this contract shall
subject to any conditions that may be applied. be the Superintendent.
Conditions may include the contractor to
16.27 SUPPLY & MANAGEMENT OF
maintain minimum stock levels at their cost, and
MATERIALS & EQUIPMENT
provide full warranty details and conditions.
16.27.1 Materials
16.25 MAINTENANCE AT LOCATION
UNDER POSSESSION OF OTHER Materials to be supplied by the Contractor will
CONTRACTORS be paid at the tendered amount, wholly inclusive
of mark up and/or freight charges.
Where there is traffic signal or ITS maintenance
required at an asset which is under the 16.27.2 Non Specified Materials /
possession of another contractor, DoI staff will Unscheduled Items
coordinate the maintenance between the project Non specified materials, or unscheduled items
contractor and the maintenance contractor are materials or items which may be required on
regarding timings, access and site contact. one or more occasions over the contract period
When the traffic signal maintenance contractor but which the Superintendent’s Representative
arrives on site they shall liaise with the site has been unable to predict the requirement for,
project contractor prior to proceeding with the or quantity of.
work.
Any use of non-specified materials, or
If there is a fault that occurs on the site of an unscheduled items shall be approved by the
asset which is under the possession of another Superintendent’s Representative or Traffic
contractor, whether directly related to the works Section staff member prior to use of any item.
that the project contractor are undertaking or
not, and the Superintendent’s Representative, Non specified materials, or unscheduled items
Traffic Section staff, or the DoI On-Call staff will be new materials or items, hired equipment
direct the traffic signal maintenance contractor which is not included in another labour item, or
to site, the maintenance contractor shall attend sub-contractor services supplied for use in the
and carry out works as directed in the interest of performance of this contract and be priced at
public safety by returning the site to operational invoiced cost to contractor inclusive of freight
condition as soon as possible. DoI staff shall and 10% mark up. Invoices from the supplier or
undertake the coordination role for urgent sub-contractor showing cost of the material or
maintenance between the project contractor and service and all freight charges shall be attached
the maintenance contractor regarding timings, to the CSR, before payment will be processed.
access and site contact. In the case of a single invoice and multiple
assets or CSR’s, the invoice shall be copied and
16.26 MAINTENANCE HANDOVER & marked as a ‘copy’ and the proportion of the
INSPECTIONS item/s highlighted and allocated to the specific
Traffic signals and ITS owned by DoI and CSR.
Councils that are newly constructed, rebuilt or
modified, and have not been done so within this
traffic signals and ITS maintenance contract, are
required to be handed over to Traffic Section in
order to identify any defects or faults, and / or

Page 151
16.27.3 Minimum Stock to be Held by Traffic 16.27.4 Repairs to Electrical Components

Signal Maintenance Contractor
Traffic signal circuit boards that become faulty
The Contractor is to obtain and maintain the or require upgrade shall be forwarded to a
following quantities of stock as a minimum and Superintendent approved service agent for
is to store it at the location approved by the repair. Items shall be clearly marked with
Superintendent. The stock listed below shall be ‘unserviceable’ and details of the specific fault or
recorded on the Stock Database (see ‘Stock upgrade required and the asset number from
Control’). which the component came from and the date
removed. The labelling of the circuit boards shall
The stock to be held is;
be done immediately when removed from site to
- 5 traffic signal poles complete with base ensure it is not mixed with serviceable
plates, equipment.
- 10 complete pole top assemblies, The site / asset number of the controller that the
component was removed from, shall be
- 4 complete units of 3 x 200mm LED
identified for each component repair claimed.
Aspects including target boards &
cowls, The cost of the repair shall be charged at
invoiced cost to contractor inclusive of freight
- 4 complete units of 3 x 200mm LED
and 10% mark up. Invoices from the repair
Turn Arrow Aspects including target
agent showing cost and details of the material /
boards & cowls,
repairs and all freight charges shall be attached
- 4 complete units of 3 x 300mm LED to the CSR before payment will be processed. In
Aspects including target boards & the case of a single invoice and multiple CSR’s,
cowls, the invoice shall be copied and marked as a
‘copy’ and the proportion of the item/s
- 4 complete units of 3 x 300mm LED highlighted and allocated to the specific CSR.
Turn Arrow Aspects including target
boards & cowls, Repaired circuit boards returned in full working
order from the authorised service agent shall be
- 6 LED pedestrian aspects & cowls returned to the stock of specified materials and
complete, tracking of the item shall be maintained within
- 5 sets of LED arrays (5 x 300mm & 5 x the stock list.
200mm)*, Generally, equipment will require forwarding
- 3 sets LED Turn Arrow arrays (3 x interstate for component repairs. The Contractor
300mm & 3 x 200mm)*, will be required to isolate faulty boards by use of
the Test Controller provided and will forward on
- 8 pedestrian buttons complete, advice of any failure identified to the repairing
- 6 audio tactile units, including audio agent.
tactile cards and housing, If a component is assessed by the contractor or
- 5 full brackets and 5 half brackets for approved repair agent as unrepairable, the
mounting aspects, Superintendent’s Representative shall be
contacted and approval be obtained to purchase
- 500m Detector Feeder Cable, a replacement component and/or deletion of the
- 500m Multicore Traffic Signal Cable, component from the stock control database. Any
item confirmed unrepairable and approved by
*One set consisting of 1 green, 1 yellow and 1 the Superintendent’s Representative, shall be
red. disposed of following the item being completely
Upon completion of the contract, and if a destroyed.
different contractor has been awarded the 16.27.5 Stock & Equipment Control &
contract, the minimum stock to be held by the Disposal (Stock List)
contractor may be purchased by the Principal
from the contractor. Items may be purchased off The Contractor shall maintain a database list of
the contractor in accordance with the all DoI owned items, and also stock that the
‘Negotiated Rate’ clause, providing that the contractor has available for use under the
item/s or materials are of relevant use to the maintenance contract. The Stock Database will
Department and a reasonable price is offered in be recorded on monthly tabs on an Excel
consideration to their age and condition. Spreadsheet, which will be available to the
contractor on award of the contract (See Figure
16.5 for template current Stock List for the

Page 152
Darwin Region).The Stock List may have line - Date Received / Sent (i.e. to Traffic
items added or removed as required. Section shed, or to nominated
repairers),
The Stock List shall include as a minimum:
- Current location (eg: in stock, out for
- Items that have been recovered from
repair)
accidents, or removal of other
equipment that is to be held in stock for - Any hardware that has been removed
use or re-use under this contract, and from site in a damaged or inoperable
marked as ‘second hand’, state, or that has been approved or
directed by Traffic Section to be
- All DoI owned traffic signal controller
disposed of shall be recorded with detail
cards,
of reasons for disposal
- Items that have been purchased by
The Contractor shall use the DoI owned stock
Traffic DoI (whether through the
listed in this stock control list in the first instance
maintenance contractor or otherwise)
unless directed otherwise by the
but stored by the contractor such as any
Superintendent’s Representative. Any DoI stock
controllers, UPS, auxiliary cabinets,
used shall also be reported on site logs / job
cable, aspects, comms pillars,
sheets and submitted with any CSR invoices.
Microconnect units, signage etc.
16.27.6 Stock List Quarterly Audit
- Principal owned items handed over to
the contractor as a condition of this A Stock List audit will be undertaken on a
contract as stated in ‘Material & quarterly basis at the contractor’s nominated
Software to be Supplied by the establishment. The contractor’s nominated
Principal’, and; Contractor Representative shall ensure that they
are available to attend and coordinate each
- All available contractors stock for use
audit, and will identify in the workshop all items
within the contract, including the items
for inspection that are listed on the most current
required as a condition of contract in
stock list.
‘Minimum Stock to be Held by Traffic
Signal Maintenance Contractor’. 16.27.7 Salvaged Items – Witness Point
- Any hardware that has been removed All items or parts thereof that are re-usable shall
from site in a damaged or inoperable be salvaged for re-use within the traffic signal
state, or that has been approved or maintenance contract, other NTG contract, or as
directed by Traffic Section to be otherwise directed by the Superintendent’s
disposed of shall be recorded with detail Representative or other Traffic Section staff
of reasons for disposal. member. Items to be salvaged may be obtained
due to any upgrade works, damage to hardware
The Stock List shall be maintained and kept up
and equipment, or any other maintenance
to date at all times, and shall be available to
activity.
Traffic Section staff electronically and
completely updated within 5 business days of Within the appropriate scheduled item rates,
request. The contractor shall supply the make allowance for salvage and testing of the
Superintendent’s Representative with an equipment and entry into the stock database.
updated electronic copy of the list in conjunction
Witness Point - Following an incident where
with the monthly CSR’s and will have all
traffic signal equipment or ITS such as a signal
previous month’s details on other tabs within the
pole and hardware, signal controller or CCTV
spreadsheet. The list shall contain, but not be
camera has been severely damaged, provide
limited to:
adequate notice to allow for Superintendent’s
- Type of Item, listed as individual Representative to arrange inspection of the
components, both new or second hand, equipment prior to dismantling. If this is not
possible due to the urgent nature of the
- Scheduled item number (if applicable),
situation, take photos of the equipment in its
- Quantity of the item held, existing location, then relocate back to the
contractor’s storage yard without causing further
- Serial No of Item (if applicable).
damage, for inspection.
- Date removed from site, and the asset
and location of origin,
- Status / Serviceability of Item, and the
date tested,

Page 153
16.27.8 Test Controller – Witness Point continuous day time observation (0700hrs to
1700hrs).
As per clause ‘Material and Software to be
supplied by the Principal’, The Superintendent The Contractor will assign an individual
will provide the Contractor with 2 test controllers Personal Identification Number (PIN) that is
for the purpose of testing control modules and between numbers 20 and 40, to each Traffic
other equipment. It is entirely the Contractors Signal Technician. These assigned numbers
responsibility to ensure that these devices are shall then to be provided to the Superintendent’s
maintained in a functional and serviceable Representative within 7 days of the contract
condition suitable for their purpose at all times. being awarded.
The devices shall be available for use in
At each site visit, regardless of the type of fault
conjunction with this contract twenty four (24)
or reason for attendance, the technician shall
hours per day.
log in and then at the completion of the job shall
Witness Point. Test Controllers to be displayed log out. This shall be undertaken at every
in working operation to the Superintendent’s controller where the facility allows. For
Representative within 14 days of the contract controllers where there is no log in / log out
being awarded. function such as an Eclipse type controller, the
contractor shall open and close the door of the
Both traffic signal controllers require a suitable
controller at arrival and departure of site, so the
load bank for testing purposes. The load banks
opening of the door switch registers attendance
shall be provided by the contractor and may be
on SCATS.
purchased by DoI off the contractor at the
completion of the contract at a negotiated rate if The Superintendent’s Representative and
the contractor wishes for this to occur. Traffic section staff will use the Pin Numbers 1-
19 to assist with Identification of personnel
The Test Controllers will not be used for any
working on site.
purpose other than that identified in this
document. All fault logs shall be cleared by the contractor
following the full completion of works (rather
16.27.9 Test Traffic Signal Loop – Witness
than after initial attendance or if fault is ongoing)
Point
with the exception of when the site is not
Witness Point. The Contractor shall provide communicating with SCATS. In this instance the
and install a testing loop at the approved contractor is to leave the controller log as it is.
workshop within 14 days of this contract being
awarded, for the purpose of testing detector
cards. The test loop shall be installed in
accordance with the most current relevant
standard drawing for detector installation and
connected to the test controller and be used for
testing the operation of controller detector cards
(it is recommended that a switching device be
installed to aid in testing detector channels). It is
entirely the Contractors responsibility to ensure
that this device is maintained in a functional and
serviceable condition suitable for its purpose at
all times. The device shall be available for use in
conjunction with this contract twenty four (24)
hours per day.
16.28 TECHNICAL DIRECTIONS
16.28.1 SCATS Access
The Superintendent’s Representative will
provide the Contractor with a copy of the
SCATS Access and SCATS Log programs to
monitor this system for lamp failures to repair
and to advise the Superintendent’s
Representative of other faults that may require
attention if so directed.
This aspect of the contract will require
permanently connected internet connection for

Page 154
Fault / Item Identification Procedures Eg. For a lamp fault on Signal Group 3 red lamp
on pole 6 the ID would read SG3, red, pole 6, or
To assist with the identification of asset furniture
SG3 R 6
and lamp faults the contractor will use in their
reporting, verbal or written, 1 of 2 methods Method 2
along with the display colours of Red, Yellow,
Here the pole numbers are not shown on the
Green (or R, Y, G).
DoI plan or no plan is available for viewing (ie
Method 1 fault viewed in passing) Use the notation, Right,
Left, Centre, Primary, Tertiary, Secondary to
Use the pole identification as used on newly
identify the position of the furniture.
released DoI plans.
eg. Signal Group 1 red left secondary or
SG 3 R L/S
Figure 16.1 Item Identification Procedures for Fault Reporting
16.28.2 Lamp Fault Monitoring and Repairs public holidays, the time where the time limit for
repairs commences shall be 0900hrs (9am) the
The Contractor will acknowledge Lamp Faults
following work day.
through the SCATS Access Alarm Management
System and will service all non-functional lamps All faults (including lamp faults) noted by means
at its own volition, within the relevant time for other than identification by SCATS shall require
attendance and at the rates tendered. Lamp an authority to proceed from the
faults noted on SCATS will be actioned as per Superintendent’s Representative or Traffic
time lines identified in Table 16.12 - Response section staff and any such incidence will be
Times at the rates tendered. noted in the site report.
All lamp fault times for attendance are The contractor shall advise the Superintendent’s
measured against the time that the lamp fault Representative or Traffic section staff of
has appeared on SCATS, however where the recurring lamp faults and recommended
fault has occurred after hours, weekends or remedial action with details of the recurring fault.

Page 155
A recurring lamp fault is considered one that - Detector loop only (both loops
occurs more frequently than others on that site separately).
and / or would be considered as the fault
Detector cables must be disconnected from
occurring once every 2 to 3 weeks.
controller terminal strip before measurements
NOTE: Where a lamp fault is shown on SCATS are taken.
lamp faults but turns out to be a ‘false positive’
Advise the Superintendent’s Representative or
lamp fault on site (shown on SCATS but not
Traffic Section staff of test findings associated
faulty in the field), the contractor shall only
with Detector Loops verbally prior to leaving site
attend to repair the fault twice and reset the
and ensure these are written on the site job
wattages. The contractor shall advise the
sheet to be provided to DoI.
Superintendent’s Representative or Traffic
Section staff of the false positive fault and Installation of additional or replacement Detector
suggest remedial measures. The contractor will Loops will be performed as indicated in the
not be paid for attending site to repair a lamp standard drawing at the rates tendered.
fault which is a false positive beyond the second
occurrence. Ensure that Pre-fabricated detector loops are
installed where practical, or otherwise instructed
All other Faults observed are to be reported to by the Superintendent’s Representative or
Traffic Section for authority to proceed with Traffic Section staff for all resealing works of
appropriate remedial action. asphalt. Coordinate with the pavement
contractor in order for the pre-fabricated loops to
16.28.3 Pole Top Connections
be installed and to ensure loops are placed in
When performing works associated with pole the correct sequence.
top installation or repairs, identify:
Newly installed detector loops shall have their
- Pole tops with an open link, creating an resistance and insulation resistance measured
open link in the ring main. and recorded prior to sealing in the road.
Pole tops with an open link in the ring main shall 16.28.5 Traffic Signal Cabling
have the top half of their pole top cover painted
Multicore Connecting Cable
BLACK, or a ring (minimum 100mm) painted
around the pole top cover in BLACK. Cable used shall be 51 core multicore as per
AS/NZS 2276.1 and shall have a polyamide
- Pole tops with a junction box or join in
jacket termite sheath installed.
an associated pit, creating a join in the
ring main. Terminate the cabling of signal lanterns and
multicore cable in each associated terminal
The pole tops with a junction in an associated
assembly.
pit shall have the bottom half of the pole top
cover painted WHITE, or a ring (minimum Loop Detector Feeder Cables
100 mm) painted around the pole top cover in
WHITE. Cable used shall be as per AS/NZS 2276.2 and
shall have a polyamide jacket termite sheath
16.28.4 Detector Loops and Feeder Cables installed.
When performing works associated with Install and connect feeder cables from detector
suspected failure or partial failure or intermittent loops to detector sensors units located in the
problems associated with detector loops and controller housing.
associated feeder cables the following
procedures will be implemented: Feeder cables to be indelibly marked with the
loop detector number at each end.
- Perform normal electrical tests
(Continuity, Insulation, and Inductance Loop Cable for Vehicle Detectors
will be required). Cable used shall be as per AS/NZS 2276.3
Provide to the Superintendent’s Representative Cable will be V90 HT, 30/0.25.
or Traffic Section staff separate insulation
resistance / resistance and Inductance Detectors Cut Into Pavement: Supply and install
measurements of: the cable for the loop in a saw cut in the
pavement surface.
- Detector loop and feeder cable,
Clean the saw cut of debris and sharp edges
- Loop feeder cable only (disconnected before installing the cable.
from detector loop),

Page 156
Twist loop feeder cable one turn every 200 mm of asphalt cover over the prepared pavement
between each loop and junction in the detector surface.
pit.
Clean the surface of loose debris and position
Backfill around the loop cables with emulsion the pre-fabricated loop in the correct location,
filler. Use Pabkote Emulsion No. 3, Scotech or ensuring that the tail of the loop is appropriately
similar. placed and protected.
House cables in conduits where they pass Hand place and compact asphalt over the pre-
under kerbs. fabricated loop to ensure the asphalt paving
machine does not pick the loop up as it passes
Fully test loop following installation, and test
over.
operation on SCATS.
Fully test loop following installation, and test
Detectors Pre-fabricated: Supply and install the
operation on SCATS.
pre-fabricated detector loop allowing for 50mm
16.28.6 Workzone Safety
Figure 16.2 – Work Zone Safety – Ladder Exclusion Zone
16.28.7 Contractor’s Personnel provided above, including

comprehensive details of:
The contractor shall ensure that they utilise
qualified trades persons only for - Traffic Signal Controller maintenance
technical/electrical works. Australian/New and fault finding experience, and /or
Zealand Wiring Rules apply. official training,
Submit with the tender a list detailing the - Communications equipment fault finding
following for all nominated staff intended for use experience and official training which
within the requirements of this contract: may include PSTN phone lines, 3G / 4G
equipment, data cable testing, modems,
1. Names of all personnel intended for use
routers and surge protection devices,
in the carrying out of works required
under the Contract, (mobile phone - Uninterruptible Power Supply
numbers also to be submitted as soon maintenance and fault finding
as the contract is awarded). experience, and / or official training,
2. Detailed work experience and electrical - Any other ITS experience, or other
qualifications of all personnel as relevant training that may be of use in

Page 157
the traffic signal, communications, or submitted within 2 weeks of the contract being
information technology fields, awarded.
3. Workplace Health and Safety The company WH&S action plan that is traffic
experience, accreditation and signal specific shall be finalised and provided to
qualifications including the National the Superintendent’s Representative within 1
Occupational Health and Safety week following initial submission. The WH&S
Construction Induction card for plan is additional to the Traffic Management
construction training, Plan (TMP) however these documents should
reference each other. It shall include, but is not
4. Northern Territory accredited Work
limited to the following traffic signal and ITS
Zone Traffic Management Qualifications
maintenance tasks:
required to undertake any traffic
management duties on an NTG road - Fault Maintenance activities,
reserve.
- Routine Maintenance activities,
5. Northern Territory accredited
- Specific Maintenance activities,
Construction White Card ‘Work Safely in
the Construction Industry’, required to - Traffic Accident Situations,
undertake any construction works /
duties in the NT. - Working in the road reserve safety
procedures,
Expiration, Withdrawal or Cancellation of
Qualification or Accreditations - The contractor - Working at heights and appropriate
shall keep the Superintendent’s Representative ladder usage and procedures,
advised in writing, at least 48 hours in advance - Electrical activities and procedures,
of any expiry, or as soon as practical following
any cancellation of any qualification or - Heavy Lifting activities and;
accreditation. - Any other relevant activity for the
Additionally Nominated Contractor’s personnel - execution of works in this contract which
Any additions of personnel to be utilised for the may also include power tools usage,
purpose of works within this contract shall be chemical handling procedures, and heat
requested in writing to the Superintendent’s and exhaustion management.
Representative for consideration, at least 48 Worksafe may be consulted in order to create
hours prior to use, and may be accepted for use an action plan that is acceptable for use. The
in the contract at the Superintendent’s plan shall contain references to specific
Representative’s discretion. legislation and standards where appropriate.
The Superintendent’s Representative reserves 16.29 TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT PLAN
the right to remove or suspend any person listed
on the nominated staff list at any time, based on Refer to PROVISION FOR TRAFFIC.
any expiration of accreditation, non- 16.29.1 Submission of Traffic Management
conformance or poor work practice, poor WZTM Plans/ Diagrams
practices, actual or perceived lack of experience
in relation to the technical requirements of this Within 2 weeks of the commencement of the
specification, or other reason as determined by contract the contractor shall provide the
the Superintendent’s Representative. Superintendent’s Representative with a
comprehensive Traffic Management Plan (TMP)
Any information not available at the time of and full risk assessment to be used as a
tender submission shall be provided to template throughout this contract for all traffic
Superintendent’s Representative within 7 days signals and ITS maintenance works.
of the contract commencing.
The TMP and risk assessment shall be used as
Traffic Control at Work Sites shall only be a template document which shall be
performed by accredited Traffic Controller/s. continuously updated throughout the contract.
Training associated with this requirement of Where site specific issues or concerns have
contract is available through Registered Training been identified to apply to a particular worksite
Providers at the Contractors expense. or location, the TMP should be supplemented
16.28.8 Workplace Health and Safety (WH&S) with additional or expanded information which
Action Plan shall be provided with the site Specific TCD/s
and risk assessment, referencing the TMP in
A complete company WH&S action plan and order to address those specific issues or
accompanying policies and procedures shall be concerns.

Page 158
The TMP original submission shall as a Include the details of the TMP Designer’s name,
minimum include the following generic Traffic accreditation number and date of expiry of
Control Diagrams (TCD’s); accreditation on the TMP. Produce the plan by
electronic means and submit electronically to
Type A (Speed Reduction) Traffic
the Superintendent’s Representative.
Management setups for implementation
including: 16.29.2 Implementation of Traffic
Management - Hold Point
- speed reductions for an approach on a
divided and undivided road, allowing for Hold Point - Do not proceed with
various speed zones and reductions, implementation of traffic management, or the
and various clearances to the work site. commencement any works within the relevant
road reserve without the TCD and TMP
Type B (Lane Closures) Traffic Management
amendments (if necessary) being endorsed by
setups for implementation including:
Traffic Section staff or Road Operations staff,
- Lane closure for a left hand and right and any associated Temporary Speed Limit
hand through lane, allowing for various Authorisations (TSLA) being signed by the
speed zones and reductions, delegated person in DoI. In addition to this; if
works are on a Council road, do not proceed
- A right hand through lane in accordance
without the relevant permits being issued, and a
with the above, allowing access for a
copy provided to Traffic Section staff.
right hand turn pocket,
- Management of any side roads affected
by the lane closure/s.
Type D (Short Term Mobile Works) Traffic
Management setup for various implementation
including:
- Kerbside works
- Median works
- Right Turn Pocket works
Provide site specific Traffic Control Diagrams
(TCDs) per activity as required and/or as
specified.
Where a generic TCD is selected for use, an
appropriate risk assessment shall be
undertaken by staff prior to arrival at site to
ensure that the generic TCD is suitable for that
specific location. If the site does not allow for the
generic TCD to be utilised, subject to
consideration by qualified staff at DoI, a
separate TCD and associated risk assessment
shall be undertaken in order to complete the
works.
Where a traffic management situation is not
covered by a generic TCD within the TMP,
submit the specific TCD and risk assessment to
the Superintendent’s Representative or Traffic
Section staff at least 2 working days prior to
undertaking the required works.
For Urgent Works, advise of the generic TCD or
submit the specific TCD within the required
timeframes in accordance with Table 16.12 -
Response Times.
The Traffic Management Plan (TMP) is required
to be designed by a Northern Territory
accredited Traffic Management Plan Designer.

Page 159
16.30 TRAFFIC SIGNAL & ITS LOCATIONS & OWNERSHIP - DARWIN

16.30.1 NT GOVERNMENT (DEPARTMENT OF INFRASTRUCTURE)
Note 1: The below list is an indication of traffic signal and ITS assets as at October 2015, and is subject
to change.
Note 2: Red Light Speed Cameras (RLSC) have been noted as ITS onsite so that the Maintenance
Contractor is aware of the equipment within the controller and / or auxiliary cabinet. Some ITS equipment
utilised for RLSCs are also used for other ITS (such as routers, fibre media converter, UPS etc.) and will
be worked on within the contract.
Table 16.7 - NT Government Owned Traffic Signals – Darwin Region
No. of Main No. of No. of

Intersection Aspect Pedestrian Pedestrian
Location ITS on site
Number Lamps Aspect Push
Lamps Buttons
L0002 Stuart Hwy / Daly St / McMinn St 58 4 2 CCTV
L0003 Stuart Hwy / Westralia St 45 20 10 RLSC
L0004 Stuart Hwy / Parap Rd 45 8 3 -
Stuart Hwy / Ross Smith / Woolner CCTV / UPS /

L0005 93 16 8
Rd RLSC x 2
L0006 Stuart Hwy / Bagot Rd / Snell St 70 14 5 -
L0007 Stuart Hwy / Hook Rd 42 - - -
L0008 Stuart Hwy / Amy Johnson Ave 89 - - -
Stuart Hwy / Berrimah Rd / Vanderlin CCTV / UPS /

L0009 78 8 4
Dve RLSC x 2
L0010 Tiger Brennan Dve / Woolner Rd 77 16 6 -
RLSC x 2
L0011 Bagot Rd / McMillians Rd 54 8 4
CCTV
L0012 Bagot Rd / Trower Rd / Nightcliff Dve 48 12 5 -
L0013 Trower Pelican Xing (Francis St) 24 8 4 -
L0014 Trower Rd / Lakeside Dve 45 12 5 -
L0015 Trower Rd / Parer Dve 45 12 5 -
L0016 Trower Rd / Dripstone Rd 54 12 7 -
L0017 Trower Rd / Vanderlin Dve 73 32 13 CCTV
L0018 McMillans Rd / Rothdale Rd 70 24 11 -
L0019 McMillans Rd / Lee Point Rd 66 24 11 CCTV / RLSC
L0020 McMillans Rd / K.O.A Ped Xing 24 16 4 -

Page 160

Lamps Buttons
L0021 McMillans Rd / Amy Johnson Ave 60 8 4 -
L0022 Vanderlin Ped Xing (Hibiscus) 24 8 6 -
L0023 Bagot Rd / Fitzgerald St 51 12 6 -
L0024 McMillans Rd / Matthews Rd 87 32 15 -
L0025 Tiger Brennan Dve / Dinah Beach 67 12 7 -
L0026 Tiger Brennan / Bennett / McMinn St 60 12 7 CCTV
L0029 Bagot Rd / Totem Rd 57 - - Lane Lights
L0033 Stuart Hwy / Amaroo St 42 8 3 -
L0034 Vanderlin Dve / Leanyer Dve 45 8 3 UPS
L0035 Casuarina Bus Exchange / Bradshaw 42 16 8 -
L0036 Trower Rd / Rapid Ck Rd 66 16 8 RLSC
Tiger Brennan Dve / Amy Johnson

L0037 54 - - CCTV / UPS
Av
L0038 Tiger Brennan Dve / Berrimah Rd 32 - - -
L0039 Berrimah Rd / Wishart Rd 54 - - -
L0040 Vanderlin / Leanyer Waterpark Ent 45 12 6 -
L0056 Tiger Brennan Dve / Gonzales St 66 8 4 Lane Lights
L2002 Stuart Hwy / Tulagi Rd 33 - - UPS
L2003 Stuart Hwy / Temple Tce 48 - - CCTV / UPS
L2004 Stuart Hwy / McMillans Rd 39 - - -
L2005 Roystonea Ave / University Ave 57 - - -
L2006 Roystonea Ave / Temple Tce 79 20 9 -
Stuart Hwy / Howard Springs Rd / CCTV / UPS /

L2008 84 - -
Lambrick Ave RLSC x 2
L2009 University Avenue Ped Xing 18 8 4 -
L2010 Stuart Hwy / Henning Rd 80 12 6 CCTV / RLSC x 2

Page 161

Lamps Buttons
L2011 Stuart Hwy / Arnhem Hwy 36 - - UPS
L2012 Elrundie Ped Xing 24 4 2 -
L2013 Temple Tce / Maluka Ave 72 32 14 -
L2014 Stuart Hwy / Deviney Rd 86 8 4 CCTV / RLSC
L2015 Chung Wah Ped Xing 6 4 2 -
L2016 Wishart Rd / Kirkland Rd 23 - - CCTV
L2017 Tiger Brennan Dve / Tivendale Rd 32 - - -
L2018 Roystonea Ave / Yarrawonga Rd 19 12 6 -
L2019 Chung Wah Tce / University Ave 17 20 9 -
Radar detection
L2020 Stuart Hwy / Jenkins Rd TBA TBA TBA
RLSC x 2
L2021 Roystonea Ave / Lambrick Ave 51 16 6 -
L2024 Temple Tce Ped Crossing 24 8 4 -
L2026 Lambrick Ave / Farrar Bld / Zuccoli 74 24 13 -
L0013 VSL Rapid Ck Variable Speed Limit Signs - - - VSLS x 2
Arnhem Hwy Variable Speed Limit

L2010 VSL - - - VSLS x 2
Signs

Page 162
16.30.2 DARWIN CITY COUNCIL
Table 16.8 – Darwin City Council Owned Traffic Signals
No. of No. of No. of

Intersection Main Pedestrian Pedestrian
Number Aspect Aspect Push
Lamps Lamps Buttons
L0027 Cavenagh St / Bennett St 36 16 8 -
L0030 Mitchell St / Daly St 51 24 10 -
L0031 Daly St / Cavenagh St 53 28 10 -
L0032 Cavenagh St / Knuckey St 36 24 8 -
L0041 Trower Rd / Casuarina Car Park 42 24 6 -
L0042 Trower Ped Xing (Casuarina) 24 8 4 -
L0043 Trower Rd / Bradshaw Tce 39 24 6 -
L0044 Mitchell St / Knuckey St 36 24 8 -
L0046 Gilruth Rd / Gardens Rd 51 8 6 -
Gilruth Ave / East Point Rd /

L0047 79 16 10 -
Goyder Rd
L0048 East Point Rd Ped Xing (Parap) 18 4 2 -
Dick ward Dve Ped Xing (near Tang

L0049 18 4 2 -
St)
L0050 Ross Smith Ave / Dick Ward Dve 42 16 4 -
L0051 Lee Point Rd / Parer Dve 51 8 3 -
L0052 Knuckey St / Smith St 29 20 6 -
L0053 Lee Point Rd / VRD Drive 45 8 4 -
L0054 Lee Point Rd / Tambling Tce 60 8 4 -

Page 163
16.30.3 PALMERSTON CITY COUNCIL
Table 16.9 – Palmerston City Council Owned Traffic Signals

Intersection Main Pedestrian Pedestrian
Number Aspect Aspect Push
Lamps Lamps Buttons
L2007 Temple Terrace Ped Xing 18 8 4 -
L2025 Chung Wah Tce / The Boulevard 57 12 6 -

Page 164
16.31 TRAFFIC SIGNAL LOCATIONS AND OWNERSHIP – ALICE SPRINGS

NT GOVERNMENT
(MANAGED BY DEPARTMENT OF INFRASTRUCTURE – ROAD PROJECTS)
Table 16.10 – NT Government Owned Traffic Signals – Alice Springs

Intersection Main Pedestrian Pedestrian Type of
Location
Number Aspect Aspect Push Site Audit
Lamps Lamps Buttons
L0105 Stuart / Wills 45 16 8 Vehicle
L0107 Stuart / Parsons 60 20 12 Vehicle
L0101 Stuart / Larapinta 84 24 14 Vehicle
L0106 Telegraph - Pedestrian Crossing 24 8 4 Pedestrian
L0110 Telegraph - Warning Wig Wags 12 0 0 Fire Truck
L0102 Stott / Bath 48 16 8 Vehicle
L0103 Stott / Hartley 36 16 8 Vehicle
L0104 Stott / Todd 48 16 8 Vehicle
L0111 Larapinta - Pedestrian Crossing 24 8 4 Pedestrian
ALICE SPRINGS TOWN COUNCIL

(MANAGED BY DEPARTMENT OF INFRASTRUCTURE – ROAD PROJECTS)
Table 16.11 – Alice Springs Council Owned Traffic Signals

Intersection Main Pedestrian Pedestria Type of Site
Location
Number Aspect Aspect n Push Audit
Lamps Lamps Buttons
L0108 Wills / Leichhardt 48 14 6 Vehicle
Where work is required to be carried out in easements or on land adjacent to the site for the purpose of
connecting services or joining up of roads etc. Ensure that the appropriate licences and approvals are
obtained for work in those particular areas.

Page 165
16.32 RESPONSE TIMES

Table 16.12 - Response Times
MAINTENANCE OR ACTIVITY ALARM TIME FOR BRIEF REQUIREMENTS
TYPE ATTENDANCE – refer to Maintenance Section & Measurement & Payment for further details
/ RESPONSE
Legend for SCATS related alarms: NC/DZ/ST: SCATS Communications fault related
BO: Black Out FY: Flashing Yellow PB: Pedestrian Button Detector Alarm
DA: Detector Alarm LF: Lamp Fault WD: Watchdog
NOTE: All response times listed are inclusive of after hours, weekends and public holidays – all response times apply
NOTE: Maintenance & timeframes identified as ‘urgent’ is entirely at the discretion of the Superintendent’s Rep, DoI Traffic Section, or On Call staff. Maintenance identified as
‘urgent’ may be based on high risk consideration (danger to the public or workers), maintenance required prior to peak hours, or other urgent requirements.
Fault Maintenance
Controller, UPS or Hardware Malfunction FY / BO 1 Hour The provision of time for the contractor’s technician to be onsite, appropriately
/ WD equipped to rectify a controller, UPS or hardware malfunction. This may include
internal faults, minor accidents, vandalism, storm damage, cable faults, or
exposed cables.
Accident Attendance FY / BO 1 Hour The provision of time for the contractor’s 2 technicians to be onsite, appropriately
/ WD equipped for an accident attendance which may include the controller, traffic
signals pedestals, or any other ITS.
Other Urgent Fault, Malfunction or - 1 Hour The provision of time for the contractor’s technician to be onsite, appropriately
Maintenance as Directed equipped to attend to an urgent issue relating to traffic signals or ITS, as directed
by DoI Traffic or DoI On-Call staff.
Supply & Install Generator to Traffic BO 1 Hour The provision of time for the contractor’s technician to be onsite, appropriately
Signal Controller or UPS equipped to connect a generator unit to a traffic signal controller or UPS, as
directed by DoI Traffic or DoI On-Call staff. Where a generator connection can be
scheduled, as much notice as possible will be provided.
Site Inspection / Routine Maintenance - 2 Hours The provision of time for the contractor’s technician to be onsite to undertake a
Inspection visual inspection of an asset or its operation, provide a photo & respond.
ITS Fault Attendance - 2 Days The provision of time for the contractor’s technician to be onsite, appropriately
equipped to test & repair all components of faulty ITS equipment.

Page 166

/ RESPONSE
Routine Maintenance
Lamp Fault - Critical LF 2 Hours The provision of time for the contractor’s technician to be onsite to replace or reset
a traffic signal aspect array or lamp which is considered urgent by Traffic Section,
(Replacement or Reset) (from 09:00hrs if
or is a right turn arrow, or if the lamp fault is the second one for that signal group.
occurring a/hrs)
Lamp Fault – Standard LF 3 Days The provision of time for the contractor’s technician to be onsite to replace or reset
a traffic signal aspect array or lamp which has been identified by the contractor on
(Replacement or Reset)
SCATS or by Traffic Section.
Lamp Fault – High Mast LF 7 Days The provision of time for the contractor’s technician to be onsite to replace or reset
a highmast traffic signal aspect array or lamp which has been identified by the
(Replacement or Reset) (or as
contractor on SCATS or by Traffic Section. This maintenance may be negotiated
negotiated)
by the contractor or Traffic Section to combine works, or if urgent.
Traffic Signal Aspect – Damaged or - 1 Hour The provision of time for the contractor’s technician to be onsite, appropriately
Conflicting Display (Aspect out of equipped to rectify a traffic signal aspect out of alignment or damaged.
Alignment)
Traffic Signal Pedestal Reinstallation - 7 Days The provision of time for the contractor to arrange & complete the reinstallation of
a complete traffic signal pedestal, cabling, & associated hardware identified as of
standard urgency by Traffic Section.
Traffic Signal Pedestal Reinstallation – - 2 Days The provision of time for the contractor to arrange & complete the reinstallation of
Urgent a complete traffic signal pedestal, cabling, & associated hardware identified as
urgent by Traffic Section.

Page 167

/ RESPONSE
Detector Fault DA 2 Hours The provision of time for the contractor’s technician to be onsite, appropriately
equipped to test & repair all components of a faulty traffic signal vehicle detector.
Detector Recut / Installation DA 7 Days The provision of time for the contractor’s technicians to be onsite, appropriately
equipped to arrange & install or recut a traffic signal vehicle detector.
Pedestrian Push Button Repair or DA / PB 2 Hours The provision of time for the contractor’s technician to be onsite, appropriately
Replacement (including audio) equipped to test, repair or replace all components of a faulty traffic signal
pedestrian push button, including all audio tactile components.
Communications – Test & Restore Traffic NC / ST TSC - 2 Hours The provision of time for the contractor’s technician to be onsite, appropriately
Signals or ITS / DZ equipped to test, repair or replace all components of faulty communication
ITS – 24 Hours
equipment for traffic signals or ITS equipment.
Specific Maintenance
Site Audit – Vehicle Signalised - 7 Days The required time for a physical audit to be fully arranged, completed & recorded.
Intersection
Site Audit – Pedestrian Signalised - 7 Days The required time for a physical audit to be fully arranged, completed & recorded.
Crossing
Site Audit Completed Report - 7 Days The required time for the final audit report, drawing/s & quotes to be submitted &
accepted by DoI Traffic Section.
UPS Maintenance & Report - 7 Days The required time for the physical inspection & testing to be completed, & the
corresponding report to be completed & submitted to DoI Traffic Section.

Page 168

/ RESPONSE
Miscellaneous / Administrative Timeframes
Provide Lifting Equipment - 24 Hours The provision of time for the contractor’s technicians to be onsite, appropriately
(or as equipped with suitable hydraulic lifting equipment to access highmasts, CCTV or
negotiated) as otherwise required by Traffic Section.
Provide Detailed Quote – Standard - 5 Days The provision of time for the Contractor’s Representative to provide a
comprehensive quote inclusive of all labour & materials, following a verbal or
written request for traffic signal or ITS works or repairs of a standard nature.
Provide Detailed Quote - Urgent - 24 Hours The provision of time for the Contractor’s Representative to provide a
comprehensive quote inclusive of all labour & materials, following a verbal or
written request for traffic signal or ITS works or repairs of an urgent nature.
Work Order Responses - 10:00hrs - next Provision of time for all Work Order Responses, due fully completed with details of
business day the works undertaken and other particulars as specified.
Salvaged Item Inspection - Next business Provision of time for the contractor to have damaged items ready for inspection, to
day - AM agree on salvaged / unrepairable items.
Provide Site Specific TCD/s including - 5 Days Provision of time to supply Traffic Control Diagram/s & associated risk
Risk Management Plan - Standard management plan in order to undertake works within the road reserve, including
the preparation of any permits or authorisations that may be required in order to
carry out the works.
Provide Site Specific TCD/s including - 24 Hours Provision of time to supply Traffic Control Diagram/s & associated risk
Risk Management Plan - Urgent management plan in order to undertake works within the road reserve, including
the preparation of any permits or authorisations that may be required in order to
carry out the works of an urgent nature – i.e. Traffic Signal Pedestal Reinstallation
– Urgent

Page 169
16.33 SPECIFIC MAINTENANCE – TRAFFIC

SIGNALS AND ITS AUDIT
16.33.1 Site Audit – Report Template
Refer to clause Figures and Tables
and ITS Audit Report Template.
The Traffic Signals and ITS Audit Template is a
required to be comprehensively completed. The
current condition of all items shall be described,
with any remedial works required to be listed in
red.
Diagrams or drawings of the site shall also be
submitted with the report, along with
photographs to support descriptions of condition
of hardware – contact Traffic Section for the
most current drawings.
The reports provided shall be typed, with
accompanying site drawing provided in a neat,
clear format, within 5 working days from
completion of the audit.
16.34 SPECIFIC MAINTENANCE –
UNINTERRUPTABLE POWER SUPPLY
(UPS) SYSTEMS
16.34.1 UPS Maintenance and Battery
Condition – Report Sheet
Refer to Figure 16.4 – Sample Template UPS
Maintenance and Battery Condition Report
The UPS Maintenance and Condition report
sheet shall be completed for each scheduled
UPS maintenance inspection, and left in the
door of the UPS housing. A photo of the
completed report shall be forwarded to Traffic
Section following each specific maintenance
activity for recording.
A copy should already be in each UPS unit for
completion, however contact Traffic Section if
there are any issues relating to this report
document.
16.35 STOCK LIST & QUANTITIES
16.35.1 Stock List - Example of Excel
Spreadsheet with Current Quantities
Refer to Figure 16.5 – Sample Stock List –
Darwin – As at August 2015.
The Stock List is a current snapshot prior to
advertising of this tender, of the items of stock
owned by DoI and the Contractor. The stock list
will require updating upon award of this contract.
Cells highlighted in Green, indicate that the item
has been added to the stock list for the month.
Cells highlighted in Red, indicate that the item
has been utilised from the stock list within that
month.

Page 170
16.36 Figures and Tables

Figure 16.3 - Sample Template Traffic Signal and ITS Audit Report Template

Page 171

Page 172
Figure 16.4 – Sample Template UPS Maintenance and Battery Condition Report

Page 173

Page 174
Figure 16.5 – Sample Stock List – Darwin – As at August 2015

Available as Excel Spreadsheet to Contractor.

Page 175
STREET SWEEPING
17. STREET SWEEPING Median Breaks

Trafficable gaps in a road centre median which
17.1 OUTLINE DESCRIPTION allow vehicles to gain access to the opposite side
This section specifies the sweeping of sealed, of the road. Median breaks are not located at
concrete and paved surfaces of roads, car parks, intersections.
kerbs, traffic islands, cycleways and footpaths. Cycleways/Footpaths
17.2 STANDARDS Sealed or concreted carriageways provided for
Comply with the following Acts and Regulations: the shared use of pedestrians and/or cyclists, but
− Workplace Health Act and Regulations exclude motorised vehicles.
− Traffic Act and Regulations 17.4 FREQUENCY OF WORKS
− Control of Roads Act The frequency of sweeping is determined by the
− Environmental Offences and Penalties Act number of cycles to be performed during the
− Environment Protection and Biodiversity period of the contract, i.e.: 12 cycles per year
Conservation Act equates to monthly sweeping, 26 cycles per year
Comply with the Acts, Regulations, Guidelines equates to fortnightly sweeping, 52 cycles per
and Codes applicable to the works. Comply with year equates to weekly sweeping.
Nominated major intersections, median breaks,
kerbed sections of roads, cycleways and
footpaths will be swept at the frequency
nominated in the Response Schedules.
Refer to Plant And Equipment clause in Other areas will be called up for sweeping at the
MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS section. discretion of the Superintendent.
Refer to Work Involving Chemicals clause in 17.5 SCHEDULED SWEEPING PROGRAM
Submit to the Superintendent at least 7 days in
17.3 DEFINITIONS advance of the works, the scheduled sweeping
Road program for the following calendar month. The
Sealed carriageways utilised by motor vehicles, program is to include the scheduled sweeping of
which consist of one or more traffic lanes in each all roadways, intersections, median breaks,
direction, and may be edged by a concrete kerb. cycleways and footpaths.
Kerb 17.6 REQUIREMENTS
Concrete edging to a sealed carriageway, which 17.6.1 General
may include a concrete gutter. Kerbs are Ensure that all loose or foreign material such as
generally associated with verges, medians, stone, sand, gravel, and vegetative waste
roundabouts or splitter islands. deposited against kerbs and on roadways
Verges cycleways and footpaths is picked up by the
Areas of the road reserve between the sweeping plant and removed at the time of
carriageway and the property boundary. service.
Cycleways and footpaths are constructed on the Where objects such as palm fronds or any other
road verges. Verges may or may not be kerbed. form of obstruction with a weight of less than 40
Medians kg is encountered and found to be obstructing
progress of the street sweeping machine, relocate
Areas between divided portions of the
the object out of the path of the machine in order
carriageway, bounded by traffic lanes carrying
to permit works to proceed. Any such material
traffic in opposite directions. Medians may or may
may be deposited a safe distance back from kerb
not be kerbed.
for later retrieval by others.
Roundabouts
17.6.2 Contractor to Inform themselves
Circular centre islands at an intersection, usually
The Contractor shall be deemed to have to have
having a kerbed perimeter.
examined all sites as nominated in the Response
Splitter Islands Schedule, and satisfied themselves as to the
Kerbed islands in varying shapes and sizes used correctness of all areas of the individual roads and
to control the route vehicles take at intersections cycle/footpaths under the Contract irrespective of
and other locations. lengths and widths.
Intersections 17.6.3 Manual sweeping
Junction points of at least two roads, and may The hand sweeping of surfaces of medians and
include roundabouts, splitter islands and medians. splitter islands may be required on occasion, and

Page 176
STREET SWEEPING
this will be undertaken by the Contractor on a 17.6.7 Sweeping of Kerbs, Roads and Car
tendered hourly rate. Traffic management Parks
associated with the hand sweeping work will be Sweeping of kerbed areas of nominated roads
supplied by Contractor. includes all kerbs associated with medians and
17.6.4 Sweeping of Intersections verges and must be undertaken in the direction of
the normal traffic flow.
The sweeping of intersections includes the
sweeping of all road surfaces and all kerbs Sweeping of other roads and car parks will be as
associated with medians, splitter islands and directed by the Superintendent. Sweeping of car
roundabouts. Sweeping includes all turning, parks includes all car park surfaces and
stopping, crossing, and acceleration or associated kerbs.
deceleration areas including line marked areas Cleaning and sweeping of road surfaces
across the whole of the road pavement within the associated with spillages of concrete, oil, paint
area of the intersection. and other liquids will be required on occasion as
directed by the Superintendent.
Sweeping must be undertaken in the direction of
the normal traffic flow. 17.7 ROAD SWEEPING EQUIPMENT
The Contractor will possess sufficient plant to
An intersection will commence from the diversion
ensure continuity of service and conformance with
point of any associated slip lane, or from the start
contract requirements. This will include the
of any painted chevron associated with line provision for continuity of service when machinery
marking for diverging traffic, whichever is the most
is unavailable through service or mechanical
distant from the intersection. Where no slip lanes
breakdown.
or painted chevrons exist, works will commence at
a point fifty metres from the centre point of the The following characteristics are required as a
intersecting roads. minimum on road sweeping equipment:
− “suction” or “regenerated air” type.
The manual sweeping of surfaces of medians and
splitter islands may be required on occasion, and − dual cab controls, enabling the sweeper to be
this will be undertaken by the Contractor on a operated from either the right or left side.
tendered hourly rate. Traffic management − fitted with dual gutter brushes and suction
associated with the hand sweeping work is to be nozzles, enabling sweeping to be carried out
supplied by the Contractor. on either side of the carriageway while
17.6.5 Sweeping of Median Breaks maintaining the direction of traffic flow.
−
3
minimum useable hopper capacity of 5.0 m .
The sweeping of median breaks includes the
sweeping of all road surfaces and all associated − fitted with noise and dust suppression
kerbs. Sweeping will include all turning, stopping, features in accordance with manufacturers
crossing, and acceleration or deceleration areas and regulatory requirements.
including line marked areas across the whole of − fitted with a suction litter hose for the removal
the road pavement within the area of the median of lightweight litter.
break. − fitted with street washers for the cleaning of
Sweeping must be undertaken in the direction of road surfaces. The machine must be capable
the normal traffic flow. of injecting detergent into the street washer
facility. Refer to 17.9 Detergent.
A median break will commence from the diversion
− fitted with a high pressure hand washer, with
point of any associated slip lane, or from the start
reel hose and lance for remote cleaning. The
of any painted chevron associated with line
machine must be capable of injecting
marking for diverging traffic, whichever is the most
detergent into the hand washer facility. Refer
distant from the median break. Where no slip
to 17.9 Detergent.
lanes or painted chevrons exist, works will
commence at a point twenty metres from the − minimum water tank capacity of 1200 litres.
centre point of the median break. − fitted with a dual rotating beacon positioned
17.6.6 Sweeping of Cycleways and Footpaths on the cabin of the vehicle, and two single
yellow rotating beacons positioned at the rear
The sweeping of cycleways and footpaths of the vehicle. Refer to 17.12.1 Vehicle-
includes the sweeping of all associated surfaces. Mounted Warning Device.
Loose or foreign material deposited as a result of
− fitted with an illuminated flashing arrow sign,
heavy rain or flooding is also to be removed.
or an approved flashing bar light. Refer to
17.12.2 Illuminated Flashing Arrow Sign.
− fitted with audio-visual reversing equipment.

Page 177
STREET SWEEPING
− maintained in good order and condition machinery or out of vehicles during the
throughout the Contract. performance of the Contract.
17.8 CYCLEWAY AND FOOTPATH 17.12 TRAFFIC CONTROL
SWEEPING EQUIPMENT Provide traffic control associated with the works in
The following characteristics are required as a accordance with AS 1742.3.
minimum on cyclepath and footpath sweeping The following requirements are intended to
equipment: supplement or clarify the requirements of
− “suction” or “regenerated air” type. AS 1742.3.
− minimum hopper capacity of 375 litres. 17.12.1 Vehicle-Mounted Warning Device
− capable of removal of all material up to half a Fit road sweeping equipment with one amber
kilo (500 g) in weight. rotating dual beacon (Britax Aerobar 420-00 or
− fitted with noise and dust suppression similar) mounted over the cabin and fitted with
features in accordance with manufacturers minimum 55 watt globes. The beacon is to be
and regulatory requirements. visible from the front and both sides. Fit cycleway
− fitted with a vehicle-mounted warning device. and footpath sweeping equipment with a single
Refer to 178 Vehicle-Mounted Warning beacon device visible from all directions.
Device. For road sweeping equipment, additionally
− fitted with audio-visual reversing equipment. provide two single rotating beacons, mounted one
− maintained in good order and condition on each side at the upper rear of the vehicle, and
throughout the Contract. visible to traffic approaching from the rear.
17.9 DETERGENT – HOLD POINT Ensure that all lights are operational and
maintained in a clean state whenever the plant or
Detergent utilised for either street washing or
equipment is working on roadways, cycleways or
remote high pressure washing with the lance is to
footpaths.
be supplied by the Contractor.
17.12.2 Illuminated Flashing Arrow Sign
Detergent is to meet the following requirements:
− heavy duty general purpose Road sweeping equipment will be fitted with either
cleaner/degreaser concentrate an illuminated flashing arrow sign, or an approved
− diluted in accordance with manufacturer’s flashing bar light mounted horizontally and
recommendation centrally on the upper portion of the rear of the
− water soluble and biodegradable equipment.
The flashing pattern required for an illuminated
− low foam, quick break product
flashing arrow sign while sweeping roadside kerbs
− be non-toxic,
is for the central bar only to be flashed.
− not contain; caustic material, phosphate
builders or glycol ether solvents 17.12.3 Very Short-Term and Low Impact
− temperature stable to a minimum temperature Works
of 42 ºC. Scheduled work will be undertaken as “Work
Hold Point - Provide product information details Taking 5 Minutes Maximum”. As there will not be
and SDS to Superintendent for approval of the any workers on foot associated with the
detergent intended for use in the performance of undertaking of these Contract works, a lookout
the Contract prior to the commencement of the person will not be required.
works.
Works undertaken under the Contract will not be
17.10 DISPOSAL OF RECOVERED WASTE considered as “Mobile Works”.
All recovered waste associated with the sweeping 17.12.4 Urgent Works Request
operation will be disposed of at an appropriate
An Urgent Works Request may be made by the
waste management facility. Waste is not to be
Superintendent for reasons of safety, and may be
abandoned on site, deposited on adjoining
the result of a motor vehicle accident, material or
properties, or hidden on areas of vacant land. debris spillage, or other incident. Such requests
17.11 PERSONNEL are to be attended to on site within one hour of the
Ensure that all works are identified and request.
undertaken in conformance with the requirements In such circumstances, the Superintendent will
of the Contract. make alternative arrangements for the
Adequately train machinery operators in the management of traffic.
correct operation of all equipment used in the 17.13 OTHER REQUIREMENTS
performance of the contract. All operators will hold
current licences as required under law.
All supervisors and operators will wear reflective
fluorescent safety vests whenever working off
Page 178
AERODROME MAINTENANCE
18. AERODROME MAINTENANCE continual compliance with the requirements of the

MOS Part 139 Section 10.
18.1 OUTLINE DESCRIPTION Maintain the aerodrome in a condition that
This section specifies the general maintenance of complies with the requirements of the Civil
sealed and unsealed, aerodromes and/or Aviation Regulations (CAR) and all CASA
aerodrome landing area (ALA), ancillary works to Directives.
comply with the requirements of the Civil Aviation 18.5 UNFORSEEN MAINTENANCE
Safety Authority (CASA).
Unforseen maintenance works includes all works
More information on site rules available at other than routine maintenance works required to
Specification Service webpage (link to CASA and the aerodrome to maintain it in a condition that
link to manuals): complies with the CAR.
http://www.nt.gov.au/infrastructure/techspecs/rule
Contractor to advise Superintendent of any
s/index.shtml
deficiencies.
18.2 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS
18.6 SLASHING
Slash the grassed areas to maintain grass and
Refer to the Northern Territory Government other vegetation below the following maximum
Standard Specification for Environmental heights;
Management and to the RFT. − 15 mm on the runway, taxiways and apron
For ALA, carry out inspections and maintenance − 150 mm in all other areas within the
works in accordance with the Civil Aviation aerodrome fence line
advisory publication CAAP 92 – 1 (1), Civil
Aviation Orders, Part 82, Section 82.3, Issue 3, − 150 mm around the outside perimeter of the
Appendix 3, where applicable and all CASA fence line
Directives. − As part of the slashing operation remove any
For registered aerodromes, carry out inspections litter, rubbish or debris from these areas.
and maintenance works in accordance with the 18.7 WEED CONTROL
CASA publication Manual of Standards (MOS)
For weed control by the chemical spraying
Part 139.
method refer to the Aerodromes sub-clause in the
Precedence; Where conflict arises between this Vegetation Control clause in SLASHING AND
specification and CASA requirements, the CASA WEED CONTROL.
requirements prevail.
18.8 CUTTING OF RE-GROWTH
18.3 STANDARDS
Cut the re-growth on the approaches and side
Comply with the Acts, Regulations, Guidelines transitions to maintain the longitudinal and
and Codes applicable to the works. Comply with traverse clearway and slope requirements, as
the requirements of Authorities with jurisdiction detailed in the Guidelines for ALA of the CASA.
Remove the cut re-growth from the site to an
approved location.
REFERENCED DOCUMENTS. 18.9 DRAGGING OF AERODROME
Refer to Plant And Equipment clause in Drag the aerodrome with a sufficiently heavy
MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS. metal beam to fill minor depressions, cracks and
Refer to Work Involving Chemicals clause in wheel ruts and to spread any build up of loose
MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS. material.
Refer to Site Rules: Civil Aviation Safety Authority Break up and dispose of ant hills and backfill, if
(CASA) Manual of Standards (MOS) Part 139 necessary with suitable material. Compact
Chapter 12.1.7 ‘Aerodrome works’ for registered backfilled areas where ant hills were removed.
aerodromes Maintain the surfaces to limit cracks to the
For unregistered Aeroplane Landing Areas (ALA) following dimensions;
adapt CASA MOS Part 139 Chapter 10.10 Runways, taxiways and aprons; 40 mm.
‘Aerodrome Works Safety’ as a guideline. Runway strips adjacent to the runway; 70 mm
18.4 MAINTENANCE WORKS 18.10 ROLLING OF RUNWAYS
Carry out the maintenance works to include all UNSEALED RUNWAYS
works to meet the specified performance criteria.
Roll gravel runways and taxiways when there is
This includes inspection, monitoring and reporting moisture in the pavement, but not saturated, to
on the condition of the aerodrome to ensure its incorporate loose material and to compact the
surface.
Page 179
Roll with a rubber multi tyred roller with a SAFETY EQUIPMENT

minimum mass of 15 tonnes and a minimum of 3 Maintain flares in working order to the number
passes at approximately 10 km/h. required by CASA.
SEALED RUNWAYS Ensure that the following safety equipment is
Roll bitumen sealed runways and taxiways to available, is stored safely and is repaired, painted
invigorate the bitumen and rebind loose or replaced as necessary;
aggregate. − un-serviceability cross
Carry out the rolling work during dry weather and − orange safety cones
at the hottest part of the day.
− displaced threshold markers
Roll with a rubber multi tyred roller with a
minimum mass of 15 tonnes and a minimum of 3 − red and white un serviceability cones
passes at approximately 10 km/h. AERODROME LIGHTING
18.11 MAINTENANCE GRADE – RUNWAY Inspect and maintain the runway lighting including
the supply and installation of batteries and globes
Grade the full width of the runway surface to
as required.
remove corrugations and fill in ruts, holes and
depressions. REPLACEMENT FURNITURE
Win and recover material from the edge of the The supply of replacement safety equipment and
runway. furniture as necessary will be provided by the
Principal.
Spread the trimmed and windrow material evenly
across the full width of the runway to fill 18.14.1 Aerodrome Products
depressions and to obtain the required cross General
section. Comply with Civil Aviation Safety Authority
18.12 GRAVEL SHEETING (CASA) legislations and regulations unless
otherwise specified.
Where gravel sheeting is required refer to the
Gravel Sheeting clauses of MAINTENANCE Items required under this section will include:
GRADING AND GRAVEL SHEETING. − Gable Boundary Markers
18.13 FENCE AND GATE MAINTENANCE − Cone Markers
Maintain aerodrome fences and gates to ensure − Unserviceability Marker Cones
the fence provides a continuous and taut barrier − Windsocks
that prohibits the entry of livestock and similarly
sized feral animals to the same level as when − Threshold Lights (battery operated)
originally constructed. − Battery Powered Solar Charged Photo Cell
When replacing fencing components conform to (LED) Lights
the standards of materials and workmanship on Colour and sizes will be as ordered.
the appropriate standard fencing drawings. Gable Boundary Markers
18.14 AERODROME FURNITURE Manufactured of fibreglass, with provision for
WINDSOCK securing to the ground with steel pegs.
Repair or replace the windsock when it is not Size: Length 3000mm, Width 1000mm, Height
working effectively or when it has reduced visibility 500mm.
such that it is not clearly visible to all aerodrome Colour: White.
users. Cone Markers
Maintain the windsock and signal areas in a Manufactured either of rubber or lightweight
blackened state to provide sufficient contrast that frangible materials such as fibreglass, with
the windsock signals would be visible to all provision for securing to the ground with steel
aerodrome users. pegs.
Maintain white markers to clearly define the Size: Either:
boundaries of these areas.
− Base diameter 750mm, Height 500mm, or
MARKER CONES
− Base diameter 500mm, Height 260mm.
Eradicate grass around marker cones such that
no grass or vegetation reduces the visibility of the − Colour: White or yellow, as ordered:
complete cone or marker. − White for 750x500, or
− White or yellow for 500x260.

Page 180
Unserviceability Marker Cones

Manufactured either of rubber or lightweight
frangible materials such as fibreglass, with
provision for securing to the ground with steel
pegs.
Size: Base diameter 750mm, Height 500mm.
Colour: White, with a midway horizontal red band
230mm high.
Windsocks
Manufactured using unlaminated poly fabric
complete with a 19mm rod support around the
900mm opening together with eyelets for
attachment.
Size: Length 3650mm, Diameter: 900mm
tapering evenly to 230mm.
Threshold Lights
Manufactured using high-impact plastic.
− Battery Powered Solar Charged Photo
Cell (LED) Lights
Lens Colour: Either red blue green or half and
half, as ordered.
Battery Powered Solar Charged Photo Cell Lights
must meet the requirements of the CASA.

Page 181
ROAD AND MARINE AMENITY MAINTENANCE
19. ROAD AND MARINE AMENITY 19.4 DEFINITIONS

MAINTENANCE Routine Maintenance
Ongoing maintenance carried out in accordance
19.1 ROAD AND MARINE AMENITIES with the program of works to achieve the service
The road and marine amenities referred to in this levels required.
section include rest areas, tourist features, boat Periodic Maintenance
ramp amenity areas, roadside stopping places, Items of maintenance to be carried out at a
information bays and car, boat and truck parking particular time in accordance with the program of
bays. General descriptions of these areas are works.
provided in the Definitions clause of AS 1742.6.
Specific Maintenance
Marine amenity specific requirements appear at
Items of maintenance to be carried out as and
the end of this work section.
when required and ordered with the issue of a
19.2 OUTLINE DESCRIPTION works order by the Superintendent.
This section specifies the maintenance Vegetation
requirements for routine, periodic and specific Refers to any plant growth, grasses, shrubs and
maintenance of road and marine amenity areas trees in the area to be treated.
identified in the PROJECT SPECIFIC
Weeds
REQUIREMENTS section of the RFT.
Refers to undesirable vegetation in the area to be
The maintenance operations in this section are
treated.
performance based to specified service levels.
Herbicide
Some operations are specifically ordered as
required by the Superintendent. A chemical formulation for control and eradication
of vegetation and weeds.
Maintenance operations generally include:
− Rubbish removal 19.5 REFERENCE STANDARD DRAWING
− Maintenance of toilets, shelters and furniture Refer to PROJECT SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS
section of the RFT for locality map and list of
− Grass cutting, trimming, weeding Road Amenity areas included in the contract.
− Supplying water and maintaining irrigation
19.6 PROGRAM OF WORKS
systems
Submit a 12 month Maintenance Program for
− Maintenance of water tanks and water quality
routine and periodic maintenance of all Road and
− Maintenance of barbecues and provision of Marine Amenity areas within 2 weeks of award of
firewood contract in the first year, and 2 weeks prior to the
− Roadside rubbish collection commencement of a subsequent 12 month period.
− Removal of dead animals and abandoned Identify the type, frequency and timing for each
vehicles. service associated with the contract, however,
achieve the specified service levels regardless of
19.3 STANDARDS frequency of treatment.
Comply with the Acts, Regulations, Guidelines The Superintendent will measure the progress of
and Codes applicable to the works. Comply with the work against the Contractor’s submitted
the requirements of Authorities with jurisdiction Maintenance Program.
Publications quoted throughout this document 19.7 EXTENT OF WORK
unless specified otherwise. Refer to Maintain the full extent of all Road and Marine
REFERENCED DOCUMENTS. Amenity areas identified in the PROJECT
Refer to Plant and Equipment clause in SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS section of the RFT.
MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS. Identify and undertake the works required to
Refer to Work Involving Chemicals clause in maintain all amenity areas to comply with the
MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS. specified service levels, which are clearly defined
outcomes specified for all the maintenance works
Refer to Waste Disposal clause in
specified herein.
MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS.
Undertake specific scheduled works issued by the
Superintendent.
Refer to the Northern Territory Government Undertake specific unscheduled works requested
Standard Specification for Environmental by the Superintendent, to be paid at a fair and
Management and to the RFT. reasonable rate negotiated between the
Contractor and Superintendent.
Replacement items of a major nature and not
covered under routine or periodic maintenance

Page 182
will be paid for at the invoiced price plus the − glass products,
Contractor’s scheduled mark-up percentage. − metal / alloy products,
Comply with the specified response times for
− stone or masonry products or items including
attendance and completion of work to be carried
concrete chunks,
out for safety or other reasons, including
afterhours call-outs. The Superintendent will − any material excluding liquids resultant from a
engage a third party to attend to and complete the vehicle accident,
work at the Contractor’s expense if specified − any vegetative item,
response times are not met. − any mechanical item or part that is not related
19.8 INFORMATION SIGN to intact mechanical, electrical or service-
Erect an information sign at each rest area with related infrastructure occurring within the
details of the: amenity areas,
− Name and telephone number of Period − any loose, unattached inanimate item that the
Contractor for Maintenance of Road and Superintendent deems is not required, wanted
Marine Amenity Areas. or expected to occur within the amenity areas.
Erect the sign to be clearly visible and securely Witness Point - Normal rubbish collection does
attached to the shelter shed, and where there is not include illegal signage or abandoned vehicles
no shelter shed, at a location approved by the or equipment, however, report these items to the
Superintendent. Superintendent.
Ensure that the information on the sign is kept Witness Point - Report to the Superintendent any
current for the duration of the contract. occurrences of concrete spills, gravel, sand or soil
on any trafficable surface. These materials are not
Fabricate the sign from 0.6 mm off white pre- rubbish under the terms and conditions of the
painted sheet steel, size 600 mm x 400 mm, with contract and may be removed by others. If not
50 mm high Helvetica medium black lettering. removed by others, remove upon issue of
Fix to the metal framework of the shelter with direction to work from the Superintendent at a fair
4 mm pop rivets at 200 mm centres. and reasonable negotiated rate.
19.9 RUBBISH COLLECTION Remove rubbish resulting from a significant spill
19.9.1 Service Levels for Rubbish Collection event that cannot reasonably be removed within
Maintain Road and Marine Amenity areas; one hour of commencement of work at a fair and
reasonable negotiated rate for time expended in
− Clear the site of all rubbish that is visible from excess of one hour.
the site and ensure that,
Remove any single item of rubbish with a weight
− There are no more than ten items of rubbish greater than 50 kg at a fair and reasonable rate
within the site or visible from within the site at negotiated with the Superintendent.
any time.
19.9.3 Roadside Rubbish Collection
19.9.2 Rubbish Collection Operations -
Roadside rubbish collection is a specific
Witness Point
maintenance item and is only to be carried out
Collect rubbish and remove from Road and after a works order is issued by the
Marine Amenity areas to comply with the service Superintendent.
level requirements, and prior to grass cutting
Collect all rubbish and remove from the roadside
operations.
verge, within 10 km of towns, communities,
Dispose of all rubbish at a Community or Council commercial areas, and roadhouses.
Waste Disposal Site and pay all dump fees where
Collect rubbish and remove from the roadside
applicable.
between the outside of the outer batters on each
Do not store rubbish for later retrieval anywhere side of the road formation, and in fill areas 4 m
within the amenity areas. from the toe of the batter, only upon issue of a
Rubbish is defined as any loose unattached direction to work from the Superintendent.
inanimate item or any other object that does not
19.10 RUBBISH REMOVAL
form part of the Road Amenity areas.
19.10.1 Service Levels for Rubbish Removal
Rubbish includes, but is not limited to:
and Bin Placement and Replacement
− food scraps Maintain amenity areas so that;
− goods packaging, − bins do not overflow and have a build-up of
− paper products, rubbish on the ground around the base of the
− plastic products, bin,
− rubberized products, including tyres and − bins are not unpleasant for users to deposit
batteries. rubbish into, due to decomposing rubbish.

Page 183
19.10.2 Rubbish Removal Operations 19.10.6 Illegal Rubbish Collection – Witness
Empty bins and remove rubbish from the amenity Point
areas to comply with the service level Normal rubbish collection does not include illegal
requirements. dumping of household refuse, signage or
Install new plastic rubbish bin liners in all rubbish abandoned vehicles or equipment; however,
bins when rubbish is removed. Fold the plastic report these items to the Superintendent.
bin liners over the lip of the bins and secure with Witness Point - Report to the Superintendent any
packaging tape. occurrences of illegal rubbish dumping, vegetation
Respond to any direction given by the dumping, concrete spills, gravel, sand or soil on
Superintendent to empty bins and/or remove any trafficable surface. These materials are not
rubbish within 48 hours. rubbish under the terms and conditions of the
contract and may be removed by others. If not
Dispose of rubbish at a community or council
removed by others, remove upon issue of
waste disposal site and pay all fees and charges.
direction to work from the Superintendent, to be
Do not store rubbish for later retrieval anywhere paid for at unit rates nominated in scheduled
within the amenity areas. rates, or at negotiated rate.
Modify the frequency of rubbish removal as
19.11 CLEANING OF ROAD AND MARINE
necessary to allow for seasonal variances.
AMENITY AREA FURNITURE
19.10.3 Deodorising Rubbish Bins – Witness
19.11.1 Service Levels for Cleaning of Road
Point
and Marine Amenity Area Furniture
After emptying rubbish bins wash out as
Maintain tables and seating at rest areas so that
necessary and place deodorising granules in the
they are clean, free of rubbish and suitable to use
bottom of the bins to comply with the service level
at all times.
requirements.
19.11.2 Cleaning of Road and Marine Amenity
Witness Point - Use Nilodew granules as
Area Furniture Operations
manufactured by Nilodor Inc. or equivalent as
approved by the Superintendent. Clean tables and seating at rest areas to comply
with the service level requirements.
Spread approximately 30 grams of the deodorant
granules across the bottom of each rubbish bin. Respond to any direction given by the
Superintendent to clean tables and seating within
19.10.4 Bin Placement and Replacement
48 hours.
Operations
Remove rubbish from the surface of tables and
Provide rubbish bins, replace or repair missing,
seating, scrub clean with a scrubbing brush, water
damaged or rusted rubbish bins, at amenity areas
and detergent, rinse off with water.
to comply with the service level requirements.
Leave in a clean hygienic condition and suitable
Provide suitable metal or plastic 200 litre capacity
for use.
rubbish bins, painted off white. These become the
property of the Principal once on site. Modify the frequency of cleaning tables and
seating as necessary to allow for seasonal
Provide sufficient drain holes to prevent bins
variances.
holding water.
Provide new plastic bin liners in all rubbish bins. 19.12 CLEANING OF AMENITY AREA TOILET
BLOCKS
Modify the number of bins as necessary to allow
for seasonal variances. 19.12.1 Service Levels for Cleaning of Amenity
Area Toilet Blocks
19.10.5 Rubbish Bin Lids
Maintain toilet blocks at amenity areas so that;
At the commencement of the contract ensure that
all rubbish bins have lids to prevent animals and − they are clean, free of rubbish and suitable to
birds removing the contents. use at all times.
Where necessary fabricate new lids from 25 mm x − the 500 litre water tanks are not less than
25 mm welded mesh with a wire diameter of 30 % full at all times.
3.15 mm (Smorgon WG311) and welded to a − the jumbo toilet rolls have sufficient paper to
10 mm diameter rod frame hinged to a mild steel last to the next service by the Contractor.
frame on the top of the bin, fabricated from 50 mm
− the liquid soap dispensers are filled at each
x 3 mm mild steel flat.
service by the Contractor with liquid soap as
Refer to Standard Drawing RU3A (B95-2284). recommended by the dispenser manufacturer.
Ensure that lids are maintained at all times. If a − the solar powered exhaust fans, where fitted,
bin loses its lid replace it within 7 days. are in working order.

Page 184
19.12.2 Cleaning of Amenity Area Toilet Block 19.13.4 Collection Well Type Toilet Systems
Operations Treat the collection wells with a deodorising
Clean the toilet block at amenity areas where organic based chemical at weekly intervals.
installed to comply with the service level Only use chemicals recommended by the toilet
requirements. manufacturer and in accordance with the
Respond to any direction given by the application instructions.
Superintendent to clean the toilet block within 48 19.13.5 Emptying Collection Wells
hours.
When the collection well is at a maximum of 75 %
Keep all surfaces free from dirt, grime and capacity arrange for the well to be pumped out
cobwebs. and the system restarted with seed water in
Mop the floors with a disinfecting agent and accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
disinfect all handled surfaces, i.e. hand rails, door For liquid waste removal only use operators that
knobs taps, etc. are accredited in waste management and
Take care when cleaning the toilet bowl not to approved to dispose of waste at a Power Water
allow disinfectant to be added to the storage sewerage treatment site.
chamber. Ensure that all health requirements are met when
Ensure that the toilet roll holders and soap pumping out collection wells and transporting
dispensers are clean and work efficiently. waste.
Leave in condition that is suitable for use. 19.14 GRAFFITI
Modify the frequency of cleaning toilet block as 19.14.1 Graffiti Removal
necessary to allow for seasonal variances.
Clean off or paint over any graffiti at road and
19.13 MAINTENANCE OF ROAD AND marine amenity sites so that;
MARINE AMENITY AREA TOILETS − the contained area of graffiti on signs,
19.13.1 Toilet Systems furniture or other surfaces does exceed 10 %
The particular toilet system at a road amenity area of the total readily visible surface area for the
is identified in the PROJECT SPECIFIC particular item.
REQUIREMENTS section of the RFT. − offensive graffiti is removed as soon as it is
19.13.2 Composter Type Systems observed and before leaving the particular
Inspect the composting chamber at monthly site.
intervals and rake over the compost using the Clean graffiti off signs with an approved graffiti
special compost rake. cleaning agent.
After raking, cover the compost with a layer of Respond to any direction given by the
wood shavings to the manufacturer’s Superintendent to remove graffiti within 48 hours.
specifications. 19.15 GRASS CUTTING
Ensure that the drain is free flowing and 19.15.1 Service Levels for Grass Cutting
unobstructed.
Maintain verges within the established confines of
Advise the Superintendent when the composting road amenity areas so that;
chamber is to the level requiring the compost to
be removed and the chamber to be re-started. − Grass maximum cut from the ground is as per
Table 19.1 – Grass Height Specification.
19.13.3 Clean Out of Toilet Compost systems
− Grass height for more than 10% of any one
When instructed by the Superintendent, clean out
area at any time does not exceed the heights
and re-start the toilet compost chambers as
in the table below.
follows;
− Grassed verges are neat and tidy.
Clean out the compost chamber and dispose of
the compost by burying at a community or council
waste disposal site and pay all fees and charges.
Cover the floor of the compost chamber with wood
shavings and treat with chemical composting
bacteria in accordance with the manufacturer’s
instructions.
Spray the area lightly with a water mist.
Ensure that the drain is free flowing and
unobstructed.

Page 185
Table 19.1 – Grass Height Specification from the site and dispose of at a community or
Amenity Maximum Grass council waste disposal site and pay all fees and
grass cut height charges.
does not Modify cutting methods and frequency as
exceed necessary to allow for seasonal variances.
Special Areas as 100 mm 200 mm Immediately replace and/or repair furniture
nominated in the Project damaged by grass cutting operations.
Specific Req.
19.15.3 Grass Cutting Plant and Equipment
Rest Areas within 100 mm 200 mm
townships
Anticipated plant requirements are ride on
mowers or push motor mowers.
Rest Areas on National 100 mm 200 mm Use suitable guards on all machinery to prevent
Highways
material being sprayed onto the road surface and
Rest Areas on other 100 mm 300 mm endangering vehicles, persons or property.
roads within 10 km of a Keep 2 x 9 kg water fire extinguishers on site to
township
extinguish fires that may be started by mowing
Rest Areas - Other 100 mm 300 mm operations.
Truck Parking Bays 100 mm 200 mm 19.16 GRASS TRIMMING
within townships 19.16.1 Service Levels for Grass Trimming
Truck Parking Bays – 100 mm 300 mm Maintain verges within the established confines of
Other roads within 10 road and marine amenity areas to service levels
km of township for grass cutting using trimmers where they
Truck Parking Bays – 100 mm 300 mm cannot be addressed by grass cutting operations.
Others Maintain joints on concrete, seal and paving and
Aerodromes 100 mm 200 mm any other hard surfaces occurring within the road
amenity areas so that;
Irrigated verges within 50 mm 200 mm
townships
− Grass does not reach 50 mm in height and/or
100 mm in diameter.
Non-irrigated verges 100 mm 200 mm 19.16.2 Grass Trimming Operations
within townships
Trim grass at road and marine amenity areas to
Parks 50 mm 200 mm comply with the service level requirements, in
conjunction with grass cutting service.
19.15.2 Grass Cutting Operations
Respond to any direction given by the
Cut grass at road and marine amenity areas to
Superintendent for grass trimming within 7 days.
comply with the service level requirements.
Trim grass for the purposes of aesthetics, integrity
of asset, functionality, public safety, including
Superintendent for grass cutting within 7 days.
vegetation protruding from adjoining properties.
Collect rubbish prior to grass cutting operations.
Trim grass at back of kerbs, around drainage
Definition: grass includes clumps or tufts of grass inlets and outlets, drainage lines and culverts,
growing on scalded areas, grass species that edges and surfaces of footpaths and cycle paths,
grow at faster rates than other species, and access ramps, drive ways, any form of
includes the whole of the plant including leaves, infrastructure, utility, furniture, signs, on in or
seed stems and seed heads. around verges, traffic control devices, fence lines,
Cut grass from the edge of pavement and seal to barriers, trees, concrete or paving.
the extent of the rest areas, truck parking bays Trim grass on concrete, paved or bituminous
and boat ramp areas or to the cleared tree line. surfaces to ground or surface level. Use of super-
Cut grass to clean cut, not broken or ripped, using heated steam for longer term treatment is
equipment capable of maintaining the health and permitted here, as is herbicide in accordance with
appearance of the grass and ground cover. the Herbicide clause.
Cut grass around established trees and shrubs, 19.16.3 Grass Trimming Plant and Equipment
and around road furniture. Use mechanical or manually operated hand held
Do not cut shrubs and trees with a calliper size at equipment that has no detrimental effect to the
base greater than 50 mm diameter, planted landscape or road asset.
vegetation, or vegetation regardless of size that Fit suitable guards on all machinery to prevent
has been pegged and directed by the material being sprayed onto the road surface and
Superintendent to be retained. endangering vehicles, persons or property.
Remove cut material or other detritus matter from
the grass cutting, trimming or weeding processes

Page 186
19.17 WEEDING Minimise the use of herbicide.
19.17.1 Service Levels for Weeding Apply herbicide at killing strength and not to retard
Maintain verges within the established confines of growth.
road amenity areas to service levels for grass Do not use dyes in the application of herbicides.
cutting and trimming, but where they cannot be 19.17.5 Chemical Spraying
addressed by grass cutting or trimming
Handle, transport, spray, store and dispose of
operations.
chemicals and their containers as specified in
Remove unwanted plant and grass species. product SDS.
19.17.2 Weeding Operations Do not spray on days of wind velocity greater than
Weed any areas and at road pavement and kerb 15 km/h mean value and gusts exceeding 19 km/h
junctions, within garden beds and within or around because of the risk of spray drift causing a hazard
any other structure or feature occurring within the on adjoining properties.
road amenity areas which cannot be controlled by Do not cause or allow spray drift. Prevent misting
grass cutting or trimming, to comply with the in breeze conditions by spraying at a lower
service level requirements. pressure or adjusting spray nozzles to increase
Respond to any direction given by the droplet particles size, or other suitable means.
Superintendent for weeding within 7 days. Do not spray near schools during school hours or
Carry out weeding for the purposes of addressing during outdoor activities at the school at any time.
issues related to aesthetics, integrity of asset, Spray only when wind is blowing away from the
functionality or public safety. school.
Dispose of all removed weed matter at a Do not spray during rain or when vegetation is
community or council waste disposal site and pay saturated.
all fees and charges. 19.17.6 Personnel Handling of Chemicals
Do not allow weeding treatment to impinge on the Be registered for business as weed control
health of other desirable species, or result in operators, or engage subcontractors registered for
damage to any part of the road amenity area business as weed control operators.
asset.
Personnel carrying out spraying operations must
Carry out weeding by mechanical, manual or have undertaken and passed a National Farm
chemical means. Chemical User Training Program.
Remove or treat with herbicide all weeds prior to Do not allow spray drift. Operators must be
them seeding. competent in their understanding of how to
19.17.3 Chemicals – Witness Point prevent spray drift.
Witness Point - Submit to the Superintendent the Keep a copy of the Safety Data Sheet on site for
list of chemicals intended for use during the each type of chemical used
contract, if herbicide is intended for use, details of Handle all chemicals as specified in product SDS.
pest species controlled by the chemicals, and life
Wear as a minimum the protective clothing as
expectancy of control.
specified in product SDS.
Use chemicals that are approved by the APVMA.
Find all information pertaining to the use 19.18 IRRIGATION SYSTEMS
requirements of chemicals on the Authority’s web 19.18.1 Top Up Systems
site http://services.apvma.gov.au/. Where irrigation water storage systems are
Use herbicides that are biodegradable and do not installed, top up the system with water at each
contain lead arsenates or other substance or salts visit to the particular site.
dangerous to humans or animals. Check the system for correct operation and
Use spreading agents if and as recommended on maintain as required.
the labels.
19.19 AMENITY TREES
19.17.4 Herbicide
19.19.1 Replacement Trees
Glyphosate is the only herbicide permitted for use
for weed control. Use according to manufacturer’s Replace any amenity trees in the particular road
directions for use. amenity site that have died or have been badly
damaged.
Do not use herbicide for the treatment of weeds at
the following areas: Replace with healthy trees of the same species
and of a minimum height of 2 m.
− at drainage lines
Dispose of dead trees and waste at a community
− beyond 500 mm of road amenity area or or council waste disposal site and pay all fees and
roadside furniture charges.
− beyond 500 mm from the vertical trunk at the
base of any tree.
Page 187
19.20 WATER TANKS AND WATER chlorinated water containing 40 ppm of free
MAINTENANCE chlorine.
19.20.1 Service Levels for Water Tank and − In some cases the contamination may need to
Water Maintenance be removed by scrubbing the internal
Maintain water tanks and water in water tanks at surfaces. Ensure worker safety by complying
road and marine amenity areas so that; with Work Health and Safety (NUL) Act and
Regulations and with Codes of Practice
− tanks are never less than 30% capacity,
applicable to work in confined spaces and
− water in tanks is at all times uncontaminated with AS 2865. Finally flush the tank out as per
and potable, the preceding paragraph.
− taps cannot be left on, are well maintained − Refill the tank with fresh potable water and
and are simple to use. add chlorine to the correct level and test.
19.20.2 Water Tank and Water Maintenance 19.20.5 Prevent Cross Contamination
Operations
Protect the potable water supply from cross
Maintain water tanks and water in water tanks at contamination from equipment used in the
road amenity areas to comply with the service maintenance of the toilet systems or other areas.
level requirements.
Do not use tanks, pumps, hoses or other
Respond to any direction given by the equipment associated with the maintenance of
Superintendent for water tank and water toilet systems in the servicing of potable water
maintenance within 48 hours. tanks.
Refill water tanks with potable water from a town 19.21 MAINTENANCE OF BARBECUES
water supply.
19.21.1 Service Levels for maintenance of
Monitor quality of water in tanks as follows: Barbecues
− Supply and maintain chlorine level testing Maintain the barbecues at road and marine
equipment. amenity areas so that they are clean and suitable
− Test free chlorine levels after filing of tank with for use at all times.
a Hach 46700-00 or equivalent Digital Respond to any direction given by the
Chlorimeter. Superintendent for barbecue maintenance within
− Ensure chlorine levels are within 1 to 1.25 72 hours.
ppm (or mg/L) prior to leaving rest area. 19.21.2 Disposal of Ash
− Record free chlorine levels on report form Remove the ash and burnt wood fragments from
Road Amenity Adverse Condition Report, and the barbecues and dispose of at a community or
submit with monthly CSR / tax invoice. council waste disposal site and pay all dump fees
Empty, clean out, disinfect and refill water tanks and charges.
when water becomes contaminated in accordance The removed ash may be used as mulch on
with the Water Tank De-Contamination clause. garden beds provided it is not visually distracting.
Replace taps that are damaged or missing.
19.22 PROVISION OF FIREWOOD
Repair leaks in water tanks as required.
19.22.1 Firewood Bins
Modify frequency of service as necessary to allow
Provide firewood bins at each roadside and
for seasonal variances in use.
marine amenity site where barbeques are
19.20.3 Water Tank Inspection provided.
Inspect the water tank at each visit for damage or Use upturned concrete culverts at least 1.2 m
vandalism. wide, 2.4 m long and 0.9 m deep. Place the
Fit locks to tank lids and keep locked at all times. firewood bins a minimum of 4 m from the
If the tank lid has been forced open or the tank is barbeques and bed them solidly to prevent
damaged to allow the importation of foreign rocking.
material the water contained in the tank is 19.22.2 Service Levels for Provision of
deemed to be contaminated. Firewood
19.20.4 Water Tank De-contamination Provide firewood at road and marine amenity
Where a water tank is deemed to be areas so that;
contaminated, carry out the following procedure; − firewood log diameter does not exceed 150
− Drain the tank, mm,
− Repair the damage, if applicable, by a suitable − firewood should be of reasonable burning
method to ensure the integrity of the tank, quality suitable for use in public barbecues
3
and with a minimum density of 1000 kg/m ,
− Thoroughly clean the insides of the tank using
a high pressure water jet and super Do not provide any treated timber as firewood.

Page 188
Fill the firewood bins at the following frequencies; Ensure that the manufacturer’s tinting is suitable
Table 19.2 - Firewood Bin Refilling for external use.
Frequencies Use paint from the same manufacturer to ensure
Location Frequency consistency of finish, particularly when touching
Special areas as up existing paintwork.
Stockpiles never fall
nominated in the Project 19.23.2 Initial Painting
below 200 kg
Specific Req. Repaint all existing furniture at road amenity areas
Rest Areas on National at commencement of the contract.
Once a week
Highways Paint new rubbish bins prior to placing on site.
Other areas Once a week 19.23.3 Touch Up Painting
Carry out touch up painting on all existing furniture
19.22.3 Provision of Firewood Operations
at road amenity areas once every 12 months.
Provide adequate stockpiles of firewood at road
19.23.4 Service Levels for Subsequent
and marine amenity areas where there are
Painting
barbecues to comply with the service level
requirements. Maintain the appearance on all existing furniture
at road amenity areas so that graffiti is removed or
Store the firewood in the firewood bins.
painted over and other blemishes are painted over
Respond to any direction given by the to leave the furniture in pristine condition and
Superintendent for provision of firewood within 72 suitable for use.
hours.
19.23.5 Painting Existing Furniture
Modify frequency of service as necessary to allow
Carry out painting on existing furniture at road
for seasonal variances in use.
amenity areas to comply with the service level
19.23 PAINTING OF FURNITURE AND requirements.
EQUIPMENT Respond to any direction given by the
Carry out all painting in accordance with Superintendent for painting existing furniture
AS/NZS 2311. within 14 days.
Prepare new surfaces for painting in accordance Paint the following items of existing furniture:
with Section 3 of AS/NZS 2311. Water Tank: External walls of tanks only.
For repainting of existing surfaces conform to Tank protection rails.
Sections 7 and 8 of AS/NZS 2311. This includes
Table and
cleaning down with sugar soap, treatment of
mould growth, rubbing back existing painted Seating: Tops of seating and tables and
surfaces with abrasive paper and patching and associated edges only.
priming of damaged surfaces. Shelter Shed: All exposed surfaces except the
Refer to PROTECTIVE COATINGS for marine upper surface of the roof.
locations and steel protection. Rubbish Bins: External surfaces.
19.23.1 Paint Materials Modify frequency of service as necessary to allow
Use only 100% acrylic low-gloss paint complying for seasonal variances in use.
with the APAS specification 0280/3 19.23.6 Painting new furniture and equipment
Use only premium paints from approved When installing replacement furniture or
manufacturers which include the following; equipment initially paint the new surfaces in
− Dulux Weathershield accordance with the Painting Existing Furniture
clause. For new work apply a minimum of 2 coats
− Taubmans Sunproof / Endure of paint.
− Wattyl Solagard.
19.24 REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT OF
The colours for painting of furniture and ROAD AND MARINE AMENITY AREA
equipment are standard colours from the AS 2700 FURNITURE
colour range and are as follows;
19.24.1 Service Levels for Repair and
− Water tanks, tables and seating, shelter shed; Replacement of Road and Marine
− Northern Region – Darwin to Dunmarra. G 11 Amenity Area Furniture
Bottle Green. Similar to Mid Brunswick Green Maintain barbecues, tables and seating at road
on Manufacturer’s colour charts. amenity areas so that they are in good condition
− Southern Region – Dunmarra to the South and suitable for use at all times.
Australian border. G 54 Mist Green. Similar to
Mist Green on Manufacturer’s colour charts.
− Rubbish bins, water tank protection rails - Y
35 off White.
Page 189
19.24.2 Repair and Replacement of Road And There are 2 categories of animal carcasses;
Marine Amenity Area Furniture Carcass weight greater than 50 kg. These include:
Operations
Larger animals including but not limited to cattle,
Repair or replace barbecues, tables and seating buffalo, camels, horses and donkeys.
at road and marine amenity areas to comply with
Carcass weight not greater than 50 kg. These
the service level requirements.
include:
All other native and exotic species, including but
Superintendent to repair or replace damaged or
not limited to dogs, cats, kangaroos, wallabies,
missing barbecues, tables and seating within 14
birds, lizards and pigs.
days.
Remove any carcass that is attracting
Repair barbecues, tables and seating where
scavengers, no matter how small the remains of
necessary, including repainting if required, to a
the carcass may be.
standard of suitable functionality, appearance and
safety. Obtain the advice of the Superintendent on The time period for removal of carcasses will
the extent of repairs. commence from time of notification by the
Superintendent or observation by the Contractor,
Provide replacement barbecues, tables and
whichever is earlier.
seating of equivalent standard to existing. Obtain
Superintendent’s approval of suitable replacement Quantities of carcasses resulting from a significant
prior to purchase. These items become the spillage or killing event that cannot reasonably be
property of the Principal, once installed on site. removed within 2 hours of commencement of
work will be paid at a fair and reasonable rate
Remove and dispose of existing barbecues,
negotiated between the Contractor and
tables and seating damaged beyond reasonable
Superintendent. This payment will be for time
repair to a community or council waste disposal
expended in excess of 2 hours.
site.
Secure barbecues, barbecue plates, tables and 19.26 REMOVAL OF ABANDONED
seating to deter theft. VEHICLES
Modify frequency of service as necessary to allow 19.26.1 Service Levels for Vehicle Removal –
for seasonal variances. Witness Point
Witness Point - Report any vehicle suspected of
19.25 REMOVAL OF DEAD ANIMALS
being abandoned to the Superintendent within 24
19.25.1 Service Levels for Carcass Removal hours of observation.
Remove any carcass as per the following table; When instructed by the Superintendent remove
Table 19.3 - Carcass Removal Service Levels any vehicle that has been abandoned in
Response time from compliance with NT Traffic Regulations Part 5 -
Area observation or Abandoned Vehicles.
notification 19.26.2 Vehicle Removal Operations
Within 50 km of the Remove abandoned vehicle only upon issue of a
1 hour
contract base direction to work from the Superintendent.
Within 150 km of the Remove and transport vehicle to a community or
2 hours council waste disposal site and pay all fees and
contract base
charges.
All other areas 24 hours
19.27 ADVERSE CONDITION REPORT
Ensure that vehicles, while working on the
Submit to the Superintendent a Road Amenity
roadway, comply with the Rotating Beacons On
Adverse Condition Report when condition of rest
Plant clause in the PROVISION FOR TRAFFIC
areas, truck parking bays and boat ramp areas is
section.
adverse due to factors not covered by this
19.25.2 Carcass Removal Operations specification.
Remove multiple or singular carcasses of dead Carry out the works in accordance with the
animals from within the road reserve irrespective program or issued CSRs, however, submit a
of reason or event resulting in the demise of the modified version of the work program if works are
animal. to be interrupted due to external or unforeseen
Dispose of animal carcasses located within 10 km circumstances.
of towns, communities, commercial areas and Irrespective of external or unforeseen
roadhouses by taking to a dedicated council or circumstances continue to maintain the assets
community “dead on arrival” pit and pay all fees within the service levels specified.
and charges. In other areas move the carcass to
the outside of the outer batter and out of
motorists’ vision.

Page 190
19.28 LIAISON WITH THE SUPERINTENDENT This operation is to be undertaken on a receding
Refer all matters relating to difficulties or problems tide for boat ramps, the contractor to program
experienced in carrying out the requirements of works for the most effective tide, in order to
the Contract to the Superintendent. maximise the extent of the cleaning of the ramps’
lengths. Ensure that ramps are available to users
19.29 CONTRACTOR’S PERSONNEL at all times. If necessary, the Contractor may have
19.29.1 Supervisors to demobilise from the ramp to enable users to
Employ sufficient supervisors familiar with the launch or retrieve boats.
requirements of contract to attend all operations in High-pressure water blasting operations are not to
each area of work to ensure full compliance with pose a danger to or any inconvenience to the
specified service levels. public and nor damage their vehicles or boats or
Nominate an individual or provide a roster of trailers.
individuals including their contact phone numbers 19.30.2 Cleaning and maintenance for Jetty,
who will be available at all times, including nights, Pontoon, Fishing Platforms and
weekends and Public Holidays during the Filleting Tables
Contract. Service levels for Jetty, Pontoon, Fishing
19.29.2 Personnel in Crews Platforms and Filleting Tables Maintenance
Provide appropriate crew size and numbers for Maintain the Jetty, pontoon structure, platforms
the operations to achieve the specified service and tables so that they are clean, free of all
levels. undesirable substances, algae and hazardous
Provide adequate training in the correct operation surfaces that compromise user safety.
of all powered equipment, hand tools, trimming Maintenance for Jetty, Pontoon, Fishing
techniques, use of chemicals, and first aid. Platforms and Filleting Tables:
Where applicable ensure that staff holds current Maintain the Jetty, pontoon structure, platforms
licences as required under law. and tables so that it is clean, free of all
All personnel, supervisors, staff and operators on undesirable substances, algae and hazardous
or off the machines are required to wear reflective surfaces.
safety vests to day or night in compliance with Use high-pressure water blasting methods using a
Work Health and Safety (N.U.L) Act and nozzle pressure sufficient to remove all fish
Regulations when working within the road carcases, offal, blood stains, scales and or any
reserve. undesirable substances that may produce an
19.29.3 Personnel Working in Water Tanks offending sight or odours on the jetty and pontoon
deck, its railings, the jetty shelter and surrounds.
Be suitably trained for working in confined spaces
in compliance with AS 2865 and WHS (N.U.L) Areas which still produce obnoxious odours
Act. Comply with NT WorkSafe Code of Practice following water blasting and or scraping, are to be
Confined Spaces. further treated by the use of an approved
environmentally friendly disinfectant to neutralise
19.30 MARINE AMENTIES MAINTENANCE the possibility for flies, maggots to breed, and to
19.30.1 Cleaning and maintenance of Boat reduce obnoxious odours.
Ramps Use high-pressure water blasting methods and a
Service levels for maintenance cleaning of nozzle pressure sufficient to remove all marine
Boat Ramp growth, algae and slippery surfaces that become
Boat ramp clear of algae growth and debris that a hazard to the public use.
compromises user safety. No loose rocks or Care is to be taken to avoid causing any damage
hazards at base of ramp to concrete, steel coating, and other surfaces
Maintenance Cleaning of Boat Ramp during high-pressure water blasting operations.
Maintain the boat ramp concrete deck and Program works for the most effective time frames
surrounds, so that they are clean and free from in order to maximise the extent of the high-
algae, sand/mud build up and any other detritus pressure water blasting operation. Ensure that the
materials. Use high-pressure water blasting amenities are available to public use at all times. If
methods and a nozzle pressure sufficient to necessary, cease the works to enable the
remove all marine growth, algae and slippery immediate use of the amenity by the public at any
surfaces that become a hazard to the public use time.
of boat ramps. 19.30.3 Maintenance for Marine Growth/
Maintain the surface at the base of the boat ramp Shellfish Encrustations on Structures
to enable the launching of boats at low tide. Service levels for Marine Growth/ Shellfish
Reposition loose rocks or hazard, to enable and Encrustations on Structures Maintenance
assist with a smooth path for boats and trailers Maintain the jetty structure piles landing decks,
into or out of the water. walkways, and the associated steel grating

Page 191
railings and posts so that they are clean, free of
hazardous surfaces, and suitable to use at all
times.
Maintenance for Marine Growth/ Shellfish
Encrustations on Structures:
Remove, or make smooth, all sharp edges of
shellfish encrustations from the structure. Use a
small tomahawk and a hammer or other approved
tools to scrape and knock the shellfish
encrustations off without damage to the
underlying protective coatings. Run a curved
sharpened blade over all cleaned areas to remove
any remaining shellfish encrustations.
Remove or smooth all sharp edges of shellfish
encrustations projecting above the top surface of
the landing deck grating.
Where ever shellfish encrustation is threatening to
fill the gaps between any grating bars by more
than 30%, carefully rod through the gap with an
approved object to open up the gap and knock off
the growth. It is important to maintain the
openings in the decking so that wave action is
free to move through the openings. If this is not
done then the decking will act like a solid plank.
The force of the waves can then exert pressure
and dislodge the decking units which are only
fixed by clips to the structure.
Otherwise use high-pressure water blasting
methods and a nozzle pressure sufficient to
remove all marine growth, algae and slippery
surfaces that are hazardous to the public users.
Touch-up any paint damaged during the cleaning
process with an approved protective coating. Take
particular care to not damage the paint coating of
grating since “touch-up” painting of the grid is not
feasible.
Clean any damaged protective coating back to
bare metal or clean sound paint work.
Feather edges and lightly abrade areas of existing
paintwork that are to be touched up.
Prime the area to be painted as soon as possible
after surface preparation and prior to any
deterioration or submergence of the surface.
Use Wattyl Sigma EP Universal Primer and Wattyl
Sigmacover TCP Coating Glassflak or other
approved system that is impact resistant,
extremely tolerant of surface moisture, is high
build, and will reliably adhere to the existing paint
system.
Mix, handle and apply the paint strictly in
accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
Refer to PROTECTIVE COATINGS.

Page 192
PROTECTIVE COATINGS
20. PROTECTIVE COATINGS AS 1940 The Storage and Handling of

Flammable and Combustible Liquids.
20.1 CODES, STANDARDS AND AS/NZS 2311 Guide to the Painting of Building.
LEGISLATION AS 2865 Confined Space.
All materials and work shall comply with the latest ASTM D5064 Standard Practice for Conducting
issue of the relevant codes and standards. Some a Patch Test to Assess Coating Compatibility.
standards and codes are listed in the
Work Health and Safety (NUL) Act.
REFERENCED DOCUMENTS sections.
Work Health and Safety (NUL) Regulations.
When conflict arises between the requirements in
the manufacturer’s data sheets or Code of Practice, Abrasive Blasting, Safe Work
recommendations and the specification, the Australia.
highest standard shall be adopted as directed by Code of Practice, Managing the Risk of Falls at
the Superintendent. Workplaces, NT WorkSafe.
Standards 20.2 PROTECTIVE COATING
AS 1580 Paints and related materials SPECIFICATIONS - SYSTEMS AND
Methods of test. APPROVED PRODUCTS – HOLD POINT
AS/NZS 1580.108.1 Determination of dry film Refer to Clause 20.17 TABLES - PROTECTIVE
thickness on metallic substrates - Non- destructive COATING SPECIFICATIONS - SYSTEMS AND
methods. APPROVED PRODUCTS.
AS 1627 Metal finishing — Preparation and Protective coating
pretreatment of surfaces. (Code of Practice for Hold Point - Surface Preparation: To AS 1627.
Preparation and Pretreatment of Metal Surfaces Remove loose millscale, rust, oil, grease, dirt,
prior to Protective Coating). globules of weld metal, weld slag and other
AS 1627.1 Removal of oil, grease and foreign matter.
related contamination.
Priming: Apply the primer coat to the structural
AS 1627.2 Power tool cleaning. steel before delivery to the site and protect from
AS 1627.4 Abrasive blast cleaning of steel. damage during handling and transport.
AS 1627.9 Pictorial surface preparation Hold Point - Complete and submit Site testing of
standards for painting steel surfaces. protective coatings: To AS 3894.10 and AS
AS 1678 Emergency Procedures Guide – 3894.11 and AS 3894.12
Transport.
AS 1678.3A1 Group Text EPGs for Class 3 section of Request for Tender document.
substances – Flammable Liquids.
Single pack zinc phosphate
AS 1940 The Storage and Handling of
Flammable and Combustible. Thoroughly wire brush steelwork to AS 1627.2
and prime with one coat of single pack zinc
Liquids.
phosphate to APAS specification 0162/1 with a
AS/NZS 2312 Guide to the Protection of dry film thickness of 40 microns.
Structural Steel against atmospheric corrosion by
the use of protective coatings. Epoxy zinc phosphate
AS/NZS 2312.1 Paint coatings. Blast clean to the recommendations of AS 1627.4
to grade Sa of AS 1627.9 and prime with one coat
AS 2700 Colours for General Purpose.
of epoxy zinc phosphate to APAS specification
AS 3894 Site Testing of Protective 2971with a dry film thickness of 45 microns.
Coatings.
Inorganic zinc silicate
AS 3894.3 Determination of dry film
thickness. Blast clean to recommendations of AS 1627.4 to
grade Sa of AS 1627.9 and prime with one coat of
AS 3894.5 Determination of surface profile.
inorganic zinc silicate to APAS specification 2908
AS 3894.10 Inspection Report – Daily surface with a dry film thickness of 75 microns.
and ambient conditions.
Site work: After erection, repair any damage to the
AS 3894.11 Equipment Report.
shop coating and apply the coating, if any, omitted
AS 3894.12 Inspection Report – Coating. at site connections.
AS 3894.13 Inspection Report – Daily blast
Time delay: Prime the steel surface as soon as
and paint.
possible after surface preparation and prior to any
AS 3894.14 Inspection Report – Daily painting deterioration of the surface. If the surface is
AS/NZS ISO 9000 Quality management contaminated or rust bloomed, repeat the surface
systems - Fundamentals and vocabulary. preparation before applying the primer.

Page 193
PROTECTIVE COATINGS
20.3 CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES SDS Safety Data Sheets – formerly known as
Provide all protective coating materials, abrasives, Material Safety Data Sheets
labour, supervision, equipment and materials SWMS Safe Work Method Statement
required to complete all work as specified. TDS Total Dissolved Solids
Submit:
20.4 SAFETY
- written details of plant and equipment to be
Comply with Work Health and Safety (NUL) Act,
used for the work,
Regulations, Codes of Practice, Policies and
- written details of experience in similar
Procedures applicable to the works at all times
projects,
during the execution of the works.
- ITPs (Inspection & Test Plans) detailing all
procedures and test plans to be undertaken Abrasive blasting and protective coatings
to complete the project. application must include safety precautions
- Details of Environmental Policy. Contractor necessitated by the presence of air-hydrocarbon
must present details of procedures to mixtures or other flammable materials.
protect the environment. Thinners, Solvents And Coating Material
- Details of warranties outlining the Safety
responsibilities of the Coating Manufacturer All thinners, solvents, primers and coating
and the Contractors period of warranty. materials shall be regarded as hazardous
20.3.1 Pre Job Meeting materials and their use and storage shall comply
Attend a pre job meeting with the Superintendent with AS 1940, the coating manufacturer’s
and the coating applicator, to review this recommendations and Dangerous Goods
specification and the coating contractors ITPs. Regulations. All caution notices on the product
Any variation proposed shall be discussed at this containers and material labels shall be strictly
meeting. No variation shall be allowed unless observed.
agreed at this meeting and formally signed off. The SDS for all chemicals, including paints and
20.3.2 Standard Of Workmanship solvents, used and stored on site must be
registered with the site manager prior to the
Follow the protective coating manufacturer’s
product arriving on site.
instructions pertaining to mixing, application,
drying time etc. Produce a satisfactory end result A copy of the SDS and the applicable Emergency
acceptable to the superintendent. Procedure Guide (EPG) as per AS 1678 must
accompany all chemicals during transport.
Compliance with the protective coating
manufacturer’s instructions shall not absolve the Keep SDS for all paints as reference.
Contractor of responsibility to rectify unacceptable 20.5 TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT
work. Perform all work in a safe and workmanlike
manner. Comply with the Traffic Management
requirements in PROVISION FOR TRAFFIC.
All phases of the work shall be available for
observation by a representative of the coatings Obtain a Permit to Work in a Road Reserve and
manufacturer as well as by the Superintendent or comply with any conditions imposed in the Permit.
their appointed Inspector. Provide a Traffic Management Plan that caters for
Use personnel experienced in their particular field vehicular traffic. Include provisions in the Traffic
to carry out all work on surface preparation, Management Plan for pedestrians, cyclists and
protective coatings application and inspection. water transport if pedestrians, cyclists or water
craft might be affected by the works.
The Superintendent may require the Contractor to
produce proof of the tradesmen’s qualifications. 20.6 BARRIERS
20.3.3 Abbreviations Install barriers and warning signs for fire hazards,
ACA Australasian Corrosion Association dust, abrasive blasting operations, dangerous
fumes and the like, during blasting and coating
DFT Dry Film Thickness activities.
EPA Environment Protection Authority Protect adjacent areas and equipment from
EPG Emergency Procedure Guide to AS 1678 abrasive blasting grit, water, and detritus and
ICorr Institute of Corrosion, UK overspray by the erection of screens, hoardings,
or drop sheets.
ITPs Inspection Test Plans
Remove all materials used to mask areas
JSA Job Safety Analysis
requiring protection during blasting and painting
NACE National Association of Corrosion operations upon completion.
Engineers, USA
20.7 EQUIPMENT
NCR Non-Conformance Report
Use equipment including, but not necessarily
ppm Parts per million
limited to, ladders, scaffold, compressors and
QA Quality Assurance
Page 194
PROTECTIVE COATINGS
electrical and pneumatic equipment conforming to Plan and execute all works so as to minimize the
the requirements in force by the appropriate possibility of pollution of the Site and adjoining
statutory Acts, regulations and by-laws. Maintain areas from chemicals, dangerous goods and
and use this equipment in strict accordance with potential contaminants such as dust from abrasive
any safety regulations or requirements pertaining blasting.
to them. 20.9.1 Preparation Of Surfaces Prior To Blast
Do not use ladders as work platforms. Cleaning
All equipment including dust collectors, air Permanent welds shall be smooth and shall
compressors, lifting devices etc. shall conform to merge evenly with joining surfaces.
the relevant Standards for safety and All edges, including drilled or punched holes shall
performance. be de-burred and rounded where practical to a
Use air supply hoses and couplings of the anti- minimum of 2mm radius.
static type which are safety wired. 20.9.2 Abrasive Blasting – Hold Point
Note: Compliance to site safety instructions will be Abrasives shall conform to AS 1627.4 and shall
in addition to regulatory requirements. be free from oil, grease, and moisture. The
20.7.1 Personal Air Supply abrasive shall contain no more than 50 ppm
Where personal breathing equipment is used, the soluble salts (TDS) and free from greater than
operator’s hood or headgear shall be ventilated by 100 ppm lead.
clean, cool, oil free air served through a regulator Do not use silica sand and other potentially silica
filter. Air supply must be of respiratory quality. containing materials. Do not use zinc or copper
20.7.2 Equipment – Witness Point slag.
Use compressors used for blasting, cleaning and Abrasive shall be capable of providing the
spray painting which have oil and moisture specified profile.
separators with properly maintained filters in the Do not carry out abrasive blasting if:
airlines. Perform oil carry-over tests prior to the - The relative humidity is above 85%.
start of blasting and coating application and on a - The metal temperature is less than 3ºC
weekly basis thereafter. Record the results. above the dew point.
Witness Point – Give notice so that this test may Blow down blasted surfaces with clean, dry
be witnessed by the Superintendent or their compressed air, or vacuum, or wipe free of dust
nominated representative. and spent abrasive media, before any coatings
20.8 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS are applied.
Comply with coating manufacturers’ Hold Point - At the completion of the final blast
specifications, particularly with reference to and prior to coating application, the surface profile
ambient environmental conditions, such as of each item shall be measured according to
temperature, relative humidity and substrate Method A, Profile Replicating Tape, of AS 3894.5.
temperature, prevailing at the location where Provide documentary confirmation that the
surface preparation and coating system surface is suitable for the application of the
application is to take place. specified coatings. This shall be identified as a
Hold Point in the contractor’s ITP.
Provide copies of Environmental Test Reports to
AS 3894, Parts 10, 11, and 12. 20.9.3 Spot And Whip Abrasive Blasting
In addition provide Reports to AS 3894 Parts 13 Use spot blasting of localised corrosion or coating
and 14 for structural steel. breakdown to provide a profile suitable for the
coating system being applied during maintenance
Consider the movements of the tide or work to be
coating activities.
conducted on components located in tidal waters.
Feather the perimeter of the spot blasted area
20.9 SURFACE PREPARATION over a 50mm width from where the original
Remove all substrate surface defects including coating system is sound.
weld spatter, slag, burrs, fins, sharp edges and Whip blast the generally sound coating surface
corrosion product. after spot blasting to provide an adequate key for
Remove all surface contaminants such as oil, the coating system being applied.
grease and dirt in accordance with AS 1627.1 Where whip blasting is not possible, gloss on
using a suitable solvent, oil emulsifier, alkaline sound coating may be removed by power tool or
degreaser or other approved product. hand sanding.
Assess compatibility and substrate and inter-coat 20.9.4 Alternate Surface Preparation – Hold
adhesion between the original and new coating Point
systems during maintenance activities by coating
Hold Point - Do not use forms of surface
a test patch and assessing compatibility and
preparation other than abrasive blasting, such as
adhesion by ASTM D5064.
bristle blaster, needle guns, power tool cleaning

Page 195
PROTECTIVE COATINGS
and hand tool cleaning, without written permission Refer to Contractor Records in Inspection And
from the Superintendent. Alternate methods of Testing.
surface preparation must be included in the 20.10.2 Coating – Witness Point – Hold Point
Contractor’s ITP.
Witness Point – Provide copies of specifications
20.9.5 Water Washing and Jetting for application of protective coatings from the
Low pressure water washing manufacturers of the products used. Provide
Low pressure water washing operates at copies of manufacturers’ product technical data
pressures up to 35 MPa (up to 5000 psi). sheets for all products used.
Used to remove loose millscale, rust, paint Have all coating materials delivered to the factory,
chalking and soluble salts. workshop or site in the manufacturers’ original
containers with the labels intact and seals
High pressure water washing
unbroken.
For effective high pressure water washing 35 MPa
All materials which have been stored for longer
to 70 MPa (5000 to 10,000 psi).
than the specified shelf life or exposed to
Used to remove light to moderate rust scale, conditions outside the permissible storage
concrete splashes, severe marine fouling and conditions shall be discarded and replaced.
loose coatings.
Stored, mix, thin, apply and use all paints strictly
High pressure water jetting in accordance with the coating manufacturers’
High pressure water jetting operates at 70 MPa to recommendations.
210 MPa (10 000 to 30 000 psi). Hold Point - Provide coating manufacturers’
Used to remove some rust, intact paints and written approval for use before using any other
contaminants. additives (eg promoters, accelerators etc).
Ultra high pressure water jetting Do not mix or use coating materials which have
Ultra high pressure water jetting, equipment livered, gelled or otherwise deteriorated.
needs to operate above 210 MPa (30 000 psi). Do not exceed the pot life of catalysed materials
Used to remove rust and coatings and to prepare corresponding to the working temperature. When
steel to a cleanliness level close to near white the pot life limit is reached, the spray pot shall be
metal. emptied, remaining material discarded, the
equipment cleaned, material line shall be emptied
Alternate methods
and flushed out with nominated solvent/cleaner,
Alternate methods of surface preparation must be and new material mixed and catalysed.
included in the Contractor’s ITP.
20.10.3 Thinners
Final rinse
Use only thinners and dilutents from the same
To avoid flash rusting final rinse should employ manufacturer as the specified coating for that
the use of demineralised water. coating. Use these only at the rate recommended
20.10 APPLICATION OF PROTECTIVE by the coating manufacturer for the specific
COATINGS application.
20.10.1 Atmospheric Conditions 20.10.4 Stripe Coating
The atmospheric conditions which prevail during Stripe coat all metal with edges (100mm either
the application of coatings shall be such that the side of the weld or edge), where practical, prior to
surface being coated is completely free of applying the remainder of the protective coating.
moisture. Apply the stripe coating by brush or spray. Use
Do not apply coatings if: the specified coating materials. Ensure the correct
DFT for each coat is achieved.
- The ambient temperature is below 5ºC,
unless otherwise permitted by the 20.10.5 Multiple Coats
material supplier’s data sheet or Where multiple coats of paint of the same type are
- The relative humidity is above 85% or specified, each successive coat of paint shall
- The metal temperature is less than 3ºC show, where possible, a distinguishable difference
above the dew point or in colour to the one over which it is applied.
- The ambient temperature is above 35ºC, Comply with coating manufacturer's
unless otherwise permitted by the recommended recoating times for the ambient
material supplier’s data sheet or conditions and temperatures prevailing at the time
- Any combination of the above. of coating. If this cannot be achieved and the
Record the ambient conditions both before and at recoat period is exceeded submit a Non
the completion of each day's coating and at three Conformance Report and Corrective Action
hourly intervals during coating. Submit this Report.
information with other daily records specified.

Page 196
PROTECTIVE COATINGS
20.10.6 Alternate Coating – Hold Point equivalent, or holding approval from the Paint
Hold Point - Do not use coating materials other Contractors' Certification Program (Class 4).
than specified, without written permission from the 20.12 ITP, JSA AND SWMS – HOLD POINT
Superintendent. Alternate coating materials must
Hold Point – Provide ITPs, JSAs, a SWMS and
be included in the Contractor’s ITP.
other quality control procedures and documents to
20.10.7 Coating Defects – Hold Point – Witness be used during protective coating systems
Point application. These must be approved prior to
Adhesion of coatings shall be sound throughout. commencement of work.
All coatings shall be free of sagging, pinholes, dry
20.13 CONTRACTOR RECORDS – WITNESS
overspray and other defects.
POINT – HOLD POINT
Hold Point – Provide details of repairs required
Maintain written records of the work so that
and procedures and processes proposed for
complete traceability of all work and materials
making the repairs to the Superintendent prior to
provided under this Specification is maintained.
making any repairs. Any requirements for the
Use the relevant sections of AS 3894.10,
repair of protective coatings shall be identified as
AS 3894.11 & AS 3894.12 QA report forms as a
a Hold Point in the contractor's ITP.
basis of this record keeping format for all
Marking of defective areas shall be made using a protective coating work under this contract. Use
marker compatible with the coating over which it is AS 3894.13 and AS 3894.14, in addition to the
applied. Crayons and paint pens shall not be preceding Australian Standards, for structural
used. steel work coated under this contract.
Witness Point - This compatibility between Witness Point - Maintain these reports on a daily
marker and coating is to be confirmed by the basis. Submit them to the Superintendent when
coating manufacturer. Provide written evidence of requested, or, if not specifically requested, at least
this compatibility if requested by the weekly.
Superintendent.
Hold Point - Provide copies of all NCRs (Non
Sand, or whip blast, and recoat surfaces Conformance Reports) immediately they are
contaminated by embedded dust to the specified completed or received. The NCRs must detail the
DFT using the full system selected. If the defects non-conformance and be accompanied by a
cannot be rectified through the above means, then Corrective Action Report (CAR) which is to detail
the Contractor is required to submit a Non the action proposed to be undertaken to rectify the
Conformance Report and a Corrective Action non-conformance.
Report.
20.13.1 Film Thickness – Hold Point – Witness
20.10.8 Transit And Erection Damage And Point
Field Weld Margins
The film thickness is the minimum average dry
Spot abrasive blast all coating damaged during film thickness, with an exception criteria as
transit and erection, including field weld margins, defined in AS 3894.3, including primer coats
such that it is thoroughly cleaned. Restore the specified in the painting system.
area according to the coating manufacturer's
Hold Point - Final acceptance of each increment
recommendations with a material compatible with,
of work will not be made until the dry film
and providing at least the same performance as,
thickness meets or exceeds the specified
the parent coating.
thickness. Regardless of the number of coats
20.10.9 Surfaces Not To Be Coated specified, additional coats shall be applied as may
Do not blast or coat the following surfaces and be necessary to achieve the specified thickness,
materials unless specifically directed by the at the contractor's expense.
Superintendent: Witness Point - Provide and operate wet film and
- Stainless Steel dry film thickness gauges of approved types to
- Other surfaces nominated by the ensure the correct thickness of each coat and the
Superintendent. full system is achieved. Provide details of the
20.10.10 Inspection And Testing gauges proposed for use.
All work performed may be subject to inspection Use an electronic thickness gauge to determine
by the Superintendent or a nominated the total dry film thickness on metallic substrates.
representative. Calibrate the gauges in accordance with
Ensure all necessary inspections are carried out. AS 3894.3 (dry film thickness) or
AS/NZS 1580.108.1 (wet film thickness).
20.11 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND
20.13.2 Inspector – Hold Point
TRACEABILITY
Appoint an inspector of coatings, qualified or
The Superintendent will give preference to
certified under ACA, NACE, or ICorr, for
Protective Coating System manufacturers and
inspection and testing of substrate preparation
applicators certified to ISO 9000 Series or

Page 197
PROTECTIVE COATINGS
and protective coating systems applied under this
contract.
Hold Point – Provide the name and qualifications
of the inspector prior to commencement of work.
All work may be subject to inspection by the
Superintendent. This shall not relieve the
Contractor of his own Quality Assurance/Quality
Control responsibilities.
20.14 HANDLING OF FINISH COATED ITEMS
Handle with care all metalwork that has been
coated to preserve the coating in the best
practicable condition.
Do not handle coated metalwork until the coating
has dried hard.
Use web slings or slings covered with a rubber
hose or similar soft material for the handling of
finish coated items.
Protect finish coated items with soft material such
as cloth, carpet or rubber sheeting on areas of
contact (eg. wooden supports and holding down
chains or slings) during transport and storage.
Repair and make good any damage to finish
coated items.
Items with any damage caused by insufficient
care are to have the entire coating removed and
be recoated in accordance with this specification
at the Contractor’s expense.
20.15 PROTECTIVE COATING
SPECIFICATIONS - SYSTEMS AND
APPROVED PRODUCTS
Refer to: 20.17 TABLES - PROTECTIVE
COATING SPECIFICATIONS - SYSTEMS AND
APPROVED PRODUCTS
ARID REGIONS: Areas south of, and
Corrosivity Category including, Tennant Creek.
C2 Low (NTCZ01)
INLAND REGIONS: Areas north of Tennant
Corrosivity Category Creek and south of, and
C3 Medium including, Katherine and
areas more than 50 km from
the coast or tidal estuaries.
(NTCZ02)
COASTAL / Areas north of Katherine and
TROPICAL: areas up to 50 km from the
Corrosivity Category coast or tidal estuaries.
C5-M Very High and T (NTCZ03 & NTCZ04)
(Inland Tropical)
section of RFT
NOTES
Coating systems are to be compatible with level of
surface preparation available or proposed.
Refer to NT CLIMATE ZONES TABLE.
section of Request for Tender document.

Page 198
PROTECTIVE COATINGS
20.17 TABLES - PROTECTIVE COATING SPECIFICATIONS - SYSTEMS AND APPROVED PRODUCTS
Table 20.1 - Corrosivity Categories of Areas of the NT

ARID REGIONS: Corrosivity
Areas south of, and including, Tennant Creek. (NTCZ01)
Category C2 Low
Areas north of Tennant Creek and south of, and including,
INLAND REGIONS: Corrosivity
Katherine and areas more than 50 km
Category C3 Medium
from the coast or tidal estuaries. (NTCZ02)
COASTAL / TROPICAL:
Areas north of Katherine and areas up to 50 km from the coast or
Corrosivity Category C5-M Very
tidal estuaries. (NTCZ03 & NTCZ04)
High and T (Inland Tropical)
Table 20.2 - Protective Coating Specification # PS1

General
Coating Specification for Steel – Arid Regions Corrosivity Category C2 Low
Areas
Coating system for Steel where Abrasive Blasting cannot be undertaken.
Typical Exposure: Atmospheric exposure for arid regions including areas of Alice Springs, Tennant Creek
and all central Australian locations. Areas south of, and including, Tennant Creek. (NTCZ01)
Surface Preparation
Surfaces to be clean, free of oil and grease and all contaminants and salts. All loose and flaking coating
to be removed. All edges to be feathered back to a sound tightly adhered surface. All corrosion to be
removed by power or hand tool cleaning to AS 1627.2 and AS 1627.9 Class St 3 standard.
Protective Coating System as per AS 2312
DFT
st Int’l PPG
1 Coat in Dulux Jotun Hempel Wattyl
Paints Industries
µm
Hempadur
100- Interplus Durebild Jotamastic Amerlock Epinamel
Epoxy Mastic Quattro
150 1180 STE 90 400 DTM 985
17634
nd
Optional 2
Coat
Finish Coat Interthane Weathermax Hardtop Hempathane Poly
75 Amershield
Polyurethane 990 HBR Flexi HS 55610 U750
Total DFT in 175-
µm 225
Notes:
Apply all coatings in strict accordance with the manufacturers’ technical data sheets.
Provide coatings manufacturers’ recommendations prior to commencing work.
The coating systems in these tables form part of, and should be read in conjunction with, the other
clauses in this work section.
STANDARD SPECIFICATION – ROAD MAINTENANCE

DOI REFERENCE TEXT – July 2015
Page 199
PROTECTIVE COATINGS

General
Coating Specification for Steel – Arid Regions Corrosivity Category C2 Low
Areas
Coating system for Steel where Abrasive Blasting can be undertaken.
Typical Exposure: Atmospheric exposure for arid regions including areas of Alice Springs, Tennant Creek
and all central Australian locations. Areas south of, and including, Tennant Creek. (NTCZ01)
Surface Preparation
Surfaces to be clean, free of oil and grease and all contaminants and salts
Abrasive blast to AS 1627.4 & AS 1627.9 Sa 2½ , near white metal with angular surface profile 40 – 75
microns.
DFT
st Int’l PPG
Paints Industries
µm
Zinc Rich Zincanode Barrier Sigmazinc Hempadur Galvit

75 Interzinc 52
Epoxy Primer 402 Plus 471 Zinc 17360 EP100
nd
2 Coat
75 Amershield
Total DFT in
150
µm
Notes:

Page 200
PROTECTIVE COATINGS
General
Coating Specification for Steel – Inland Regions Corrosivity Category C3 Medium
Areas
Typical Exposure: Atmospheric exposure for inland regions including Katherine and other inland regions.
Areas north of Tennant Creek and south of, and including, Katherine and areas more than 50 km from
the coast or tidal estuaries. (NTCZ02)
Surface Preparation
DFT
st Int’l PPG
Paints Industries
µm
Hempadur
75- Interplus Durebild Jotamastic Amerlock Epinamel
Epoxy Mastic Quattro
100 356 STE 90 400 DTS 680
17364
nd
2 Coat
Hempadur
Intermediate 75- Interplus Durebild Jotamastic Amerlock Epinamel
Quattro
Epoxy Mastic 100 356 STE 90 400 DTS 680
17364
Optional
Top Coat
Finish Coat Interthane Weathermax Hardtop Hempathane Poly U
75 Amershield
Polyurethane 990 HBR Flexi HS 55610 750
Total DFT in 225-
µm 275
Notes:

Page 201
PROTECTIVE COATINGS

General
Coating Specification for Steel – Inland Regions Corrosivity Category C3 Medium
Areas
Typical Exposure: Atmospheric exposure for inland regions including Katherine and other inland regions.
Areas north of Tennant Creek and south of, and including, Katherine and areas more than 50 km from
the coast or tidal estuaries. (NTCZ02)
Surface Preparation
Surfaces to be clean, free of oil and grease and all contaminants and salts. Abrasive blast to AS 1627.4
& AS 1627.9 Sa 2½ , near white metal with angular surface profile 40 – 75 microns.
DFT
st Int’l PPG
Paints Industries
µm
PRIMER
50- Interzinc Zincanode Barrier Sigmazinc Hempadur Epinamel
Zinc Rich
75 52 402 Plus 471 Zinc 17360 PR360ZPS
Epoxy
nd
2 Coat
Intermediate Hempadur
100- Interplus Duremax Jotacote Amerlock Epinamel
High Build Quattro
150 1180 GPE Universal 400 DTM 985
Epoxy 17364
Optional
Top Coat
Finish Coat Interthane Weathermax Hardtop Hempathane
75 Amershield Poly U750
Polyurethane 990 HBR Flexi HS 55610
Total DFT in 225-
µm 300
Notes:

Page 202
PROTECTIVE COATINGS
General
Coating Specification for Steel – Coastal Regions Corrosivity Category C5M Very High and T (Inland
Tropical)
Areas
Typical Exposure: Atmospheric exposure for coastal regions including Darwin and other coastal
establishments. Areas north of Katherine and areas up to 50 km from the coast or tidal estuaries.
(NTCZ03 & NTCZ04)
Surface Preparation
DFT
st Int’l PPG
Paints Industries
µm
Epinamel
Epoxy Mastic 125- Interplus Durebild Jotacote Amerlock Hempadur
DTM 985
MIO 150 356 STE MIO 605 MIO 400 MIO Mastic 45881
MIO
nd
2 Coat
Intermediate Hempadur
100- Interplus Duremax Jotacote Amerlock Epinamel
High Build Quattro
150 1180 GPE Universal 400 DTM 985
Epoxy 17364
Optional
Top Coat
75 Amershield
Total DFT in 325-
µm 375
Notes:

Page 203
PROTECTIVE COATINGS
General
Coating Specification for Steel – Coastal Regions Corrosivity Category C5M Very High and T (Inland
Tropical)
Areas
Typical Exposure: Atmospheric exposure for coastal regions including Darwin and other coastal
establishments. Areas north of Katherine and areas up to 50 km from the coast or tidal estuaries.
(NTCZ03 & NTCZ04)
Surface Preparation
Surfaces to be clean, free of oil and grease and all contaminants and salts. Abrasive blast to AS 1627.4
& AS 1627.9 Sa 2½ , near white metal with angular surface profile 40 – 75 microns.
DFT
st Int’l PPG
Paints Industries
µm
PRIMER
50- Interzinc Zincanode Barrier Sigmazinc Hempadur Galvit
Zinc Rich
75 52 402 Plus 471 Zinc 17360 EP100
Epoxy
nd
2 Coat
Intermediate Penguard Hempadur Epinamel
150- Interplus Duremax Amerlock
High Build Express Mastic DTM 985
200 1180 GPE MIO 400 MIO
MIO Epoxy MIO 45881 MIO
Optional
Top Coat
Finish Coat Interthane Weathermax Hardtop Hempathane Poly U
75 Amershield
Polyurethane 990 HBR Flexi HS 55610 750
Total DFT in 275-
µm 350
Notes:

Page 204
PROTECTIVE COATINGS

General
Existing Hot Dipped Galvanised Steel Subject to Severe - Atmospheric Exposure – New and Maintenance
Areas
Coating system for galvanized steel.
Surface Preparation
Surfaces to be clean, free of oil and grease, salts and all other contaminants.
Abrasive Sweep (brush) blast to AS 1627.4 Appendix ‘D’ to achieve an angular surface profile using garnet to
25-40 microns. Rust affected areas to be spot blasted to AS 1627.4 & AS 1627.9 Sa 2½ with an angular surface
profile of 40-75 microns.

st DFT in Int’l PPG
1 Coat Dulux Jotun Hempel Wattyl
µm Paints Industries
Primer
Pengard
Zinc Intergard Durepon Sigmacover Hempadur Epinamel
50 - 75 Special
Phosphate 251 P14 280LT 15590 PR 250
Grey
Epoxy Primer
nd
2 Coat
Finish Coat Sigmashield Hempadur
High Build Interzone Durebild Jotamastic 825 LT Multi- Epinamel
300 - 350
Epoxy 505GF STE GF 87 GF (Amerlock 2K Strength DTM 985
Glass Flake) 45540
Total DFT
350 - 475
In µm
Allowance should be made for the galvanizing approximately 85 microns.
Notes:
The coating systems in these tables form part of, and should be read in conjunction with, the other clauses in
this work section.

Page 205
PROTECTIVE COATINGS

General
Repair specification for wharf structures, steel piling, ship loading facilities, oil spill clean up equipment and
plant piping operating at <40°C.
Areas
Marine environment : onshore and offshore
Surface Preparation
Abrasive blast clean to remove all previous coatings and corrosion products. Bevel all edges.
Surface shall be high pressure water blasted at a minimum pressure of 3,000 psi then tested to ensure free
from soluble salts (see Clause 6).
Abrasive blast clean to AS 1627.4 Class 2½ Surface profile 30-60µm

Protective Coating – PS8.1 Steel with light to minimal pitting
DFT in Int’l
1st Coat Dulux Jotun PPG Hempel Wattyl
µ Paints
Durebild Hempadur
High build Interzone Marathon Sigmashield Epinamel
200-250 STE Glass Quattro
epoxy 954 500 880 DTM 985
Flake 17634
2nd Coat
Durebild Hempadur
epoxy 954 500 880 DTM 985
Flake 17634
Total DFT 400-500

Protective Coating – PS8.2 Heavily pitted steel
DFT in Int’l
µ Paints
Durebild Hempadur
epoxy 954 500 880 DTM 985
Flake 17634
2nd Coat
Durebild Hempadur
High build 450- Interzone Marathon Sigmashield Epinamel
STE Glass Quattro
epoxy 5000 954 500 880 DTM 985
Flake 17634
900-
Total DFT
1000
Notes:
The coating systems in these tables form part of, and should be read in conjunction with, the other clauses
in this work section.

Page 206
PROTECTIVE COATINGS

General
Ultra high build epoxy for coating new piles, and other surfaces in underwater or splash zone environment.
Areas
Underwater & splash zone
Surface Preparation
Abrasive blast clean to remove all corrosion products and/or previous coatings. Bevel all edges.
Surface shall be high pressure water blasted at a minimum pressure of 3,000 psi then tested to ensure free
from soluble salts (see Clause 6).
Abrasive blast clean to AS 1627.4 Class 2½ 75-100µm (angular profile)

DFT in Int’l
µ Paints
Primer
Epinamel
Holding Interline Luxepoxy Sigmacover Hempadur
30-50 N/A PR 250
Primer (if 982 66 280LT 15590
(thinned)
required)
nd
2 Coat
Hempadur
Ultra High Epinamel
Interzone Luxepoxy Jotacote Sigmashield Multi Strength
Build 1000-1500 UHB
485 UHB UHB 880 45540 (2 coats
Epoxy 1000
of 500 um)
1030 -
Total DFT
1550
Notes:
The coating systems in these tables form part of, and should be read in conjunction with, the other clauses in
this work section.

Page 207
PROTECTIVE COATINGS

General
Repair coating for cylindrical piling using petrolatum tape system, for use in very exposed sites and harsh
environments.
Areas
Very exposed sites and harsh environments.
Surface Preparation
Remove all loose rust, original coating, marine growth etc, by scraping, chipping, water blast cleaning or
ship’s hull scrubber.
Close examination, after preparation, to ensure thoroughly clean surface without growth, sharp or
protruding edges.
System
Primer Denso Seashield Primer (or equal approved)
Tape Denso Seashield Tape (or equal approved)
Overlap of 55%
Outer Cover Denso Seashield 2000 FD Outer Cover (or equal approved)
Fixed with 316 stainless bolts
Note: Inspection points as per Denso Seashield published instructions.
Notes:
The coating systems in these tables form part of, and should be read in conjunction with, the other clauses
in this work section.

Page 208
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
21. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 21.1.6 Progressive Rehabilitation of New

Material Extraction Areas
The following Measurement and Payment clauses Not measured separately. Include the cost of
refer to the specification sections of the same progressively rehabilitating new Material
name, however, the clause numbers do not match Extraction Areas in the cost of gravel supply etc.
the section numbers of the same title. 21.2 Negotiated Rate
21.1 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS Where a type of works is described but does not
Environmental Management appear in the schedule of rates or is not defined in
the specification and not included in the Schedule
Generally
of Rates items, a rate shall be negotiated to cover
Not measured separately. the works required.
Include the cost of environmental management in The item of works may then be included in the
the rates for the applicable items. contract Schedule of Rates at the
21.1.1 Environmental Management Plan Superintendents discretion.
Measured as an item. 21.3 PROVISION FOR TRAFFIC
21.1.2 Cleaning of Vehicles and Plant 21.3.1 Traffic Management Plan
Measured by number cleaned. Measured as an item. Includes Traffic Control
Vehicles and plant items are priced separately. Diagrams.
21.1.3 Establishment Provision For Traffic
Mobilisation:
Not measured separately. Included in rates for
Not measured separately included in rates for applicable items.
applicable items.
Specific Traffic Control Diagrams
Measured per kilometre, one way, 40 km from the
regional post office to the furthest location of the Measured by number.
initial work order, along the shortest practical
Payment will be made progressively in proportion
route for the applicable work crew.
to the value of work carried out.
Mobilisation will not be paid for work within 40 km
of the regional post office Or determined by Variable message boards
regional requirements. Measured as an item.
When side roads are included in the work order,
21.3.2 Provision for Traffic – Rural Areas
mobilisation will be paid for the one way distance
from the beginning of the side road to the Not measured as a separate item for work in rural
furthermost point of the work. areas. Allow for in other items.
Where subsequent work orders are issued, the 21.3.3 Provision for Traffic – Urban Areas
distance is calculated from the furthest location of To be at a negotiated rate per work site, or as
the original work site to the furthest location of the nominated in the Schedule of Rates
new work site along the shortest practical route. 21.3.4 Gravelling of Side Tracks for Detours
Kilometre measurement will be consistent with Measured in square metres for the specified
DoI Permanent Reference Points (PRP’s), Or gravel thickness and width.
determined by regional requirements,
Make allowance for supply, delivery, and
(If applicable) Refer to Project Specific compaction of material.
Requirements section of Request for Tender.
21.4 TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT
Include in the rates, the cost of escort as required.
Refer to Figure 20.1 Mobilisation Diagrams at Complex Traffic Management items are inclusive of
Clause 20.22. minor traffic management requirements for the
Demobilisation: entire site of works.
Not measured separately. Include all costs The following item/s shall be submitted to
associated with demobilisation in with the costs of Superintendent for approval prior to use;
mobilisation. 21.4.1 Site Specific Traffic Management Plan
21.1.4 Officer and Vehicle and Traffic Control Diagrams
Officer and vehicle to be paid for on hourly rate Measured by number.
inclusive of vehicle and reports.
21.1.5 Rehabilitation of Existing Material Payment will include the labour, equipment and
Extraction Areas materials required to compile and submit a site
specific Traffic Management Plan and associated
Measured by hectare rehabilitated.

Page 209
TCDs, in accordance with the Provision for Traffic, Allow for material sourced and imported from a
to the Superintendent. location up to a distance of 15 km from the site.
Payment for excess haulage shall be at the rate
Note; the Template TMP’s and Generic and TCD’s
for Select Fill Excess Haulage.
required under the Provision for Traffic Clause
2.5.1 are not to be classed as chargeable items. 21.5.15 Stop Berms
Measured by number.
21.5 EARTHWORKS AND DRAINAGE
A stop berm has approximate volume of 15
21.5.1 Formation Width Clearing
compacted cubic metres.
Measured by kilometre for 1 side of the road.
Allow for material sourced and imported from a
21.5.2 Mulching location up to a distance of 15 km from the site.
Measured by kilometre for 1 side of the road. Payment for excess haulage shall be at the rate
21.5.3 Earthworks in Cut – General Material for Select Fill Excess Haulage.
Measured in in-situ cubic metres. 21.5.16 Catch Drains
21.5.4 Earthworks in Cut - Rock Measured in linear metres.
Measured in in-situ cubic metres. 21.5.17 Repair Existing Formation Width
Payment only for works directed by the Measured in linear metres.
Superintendent. 21.5.18 Trim and Compact Unpaved Areas
Payment for excavation only and payment for Measured in square metres.
filling is at the rate for Select Fill. 21.5.19 Surface Formation
21.5.5 Earthworks in Cut – Unsuitable Measured in linear metres.
Material and/or Weathered Rock
21.6 CONFORMANCE TESTING
Measured in in-situ cubic metres.
The Superintendent will pay for all conformance
Payment only for works directed by the
testing directly to the Panel Period Contractor
Superintendent.
selected to perform the conformance tests
Payment for excavation only, and payment for required under the contract and nominated as the
filling is at the rate for Select Fill. Superintendent’s responsibility.
21.5.6 Earthworks in Fill – Scour and If any tests fail to meet specification, all retesting
Washout Repair costs will be a negative variation to the contract.
Measured in compacted cubic metres. When testing has been ordered and the site is not
21.5.7 Earthworks in Fill – General Filling ready for testing at the time specified by the
Measured in compacted cubic metres. Contractor, the Contractor will bear the cost of
time and travel incurred by the Panel Period
21.5.8 Select Fill
Contractor and the Superintendent, where
Measured in compacted cubic metres for material applicable.
sourced and imported from a location up to a
21.6.1 Process Testing
distance of 15 km from the site.
The Contractor is responsible for the ordering up
21.5.9 Select Fill Excess Haulage
and payment for all process tests carried out.
Measured in loose cubic metres per kilometre
This is not measured separately.
over and above importing distance of 15 km.
Include the cost of process testing under the
1 compacted cubic metre measured in place is
relevant items in the Schedule of Rates.
nominated as equal to 1.5 loose cubic metre.
21.5.10 Removal of Excess Material 21.7 GRADING AND GRAVEL SHEETING
Measured in in-situ cubic metres. Generally; include all costs within the rates,
including the supply of materials, where
21.5.11 Preparation and Maintenance of Sub-
applicable.
grade Surface
21.7.1 Gravel Resheeting
Measured in square metres.
Measured in square metres for 150 mm
21.5.12 Table Drains
compacted thickness of gravel material in
Measured by kilometre for 1 side of road. pavement and shoulder, where material is
21.5.13 Table Drain Offlets sourced and imported from a location up to a
Measured by number. distance of 15 km from the site.
21.5.14 Table Drain Blocks This item applies to lot section sizes greater than
2
600 m .
Measured by number.
A table drain block has approximate volume of 20
compacted cubic metres.
Page 210
Include in the rate, the pavement or shoulder Include in the rate, the reinstatement of table
materials outside the carriageway width not drains and table drain blocks.
included in measurement. 21.7.11 Full Maintenance Grade - Unsealed
21.7.2 Stockpile Gravel Material Pavements
Measured in cubic metres in the stockpile. Measured in kilometres.
Include in the rate, the locating, pushing up, Include in the rate, the reinstatement of table
stockpiling and trimming to a uniform shape. drains, offlet drains and table drain blocks.
21.7.3 Gravel Resheeting from Stockpile 21.7.12 Grade and Roll - Unsealed Pavements
Measured in square metres for 150 mm Measured in kilometres.
compacted thickness of gravel material in Include in the rate, the reinstatement of table drain
pavement and shoulder, where material is blocks.
imported from an existing gravel material stockpile
21.7.13 Grade Water and Roll - Unsealed
up to a distance of 15 km from the site.
Pavements
This item applies to lot section sizes greater than
2 Measured in kilometres.
600 m .
Include in the rate, the reinstatement of table
Include in the rate, the pavement or shoulder
drains and table drain blocks.
materials outside the carriageway width not
included in measurement. 21.7.14 Rip and Re-compaction - Unsealed
Pavements
21.7.4 Gravel Repairs to Wash outs and Blow
outs Measured in kilometres.
Measured in square metres for 150 mm Include in the rate, the reinstatement of table
compacted thickness of gravel material in drains, offlet drains and table drain blocks.
pavement and shoulder, where material is 21.7.15 Reformation and Re-compaction -
sourced and imported from a location up to a Unsealed Pavements
distance of 15 km from the site. Measured in square metres for nominated top up
This item applies to lot section sizes less than compacted thickness of gravel material of 50 mm
2
600 m . or 100 mm.
21.7.5 Gravel Repairs to Wash outs and Blow Include in the rate, the reinstatement of table
outs from Stockpile drains, offlet drains and table drain blocks.
Measured in square metres for 150 mm 21.7.16 Drainage Maintenance Grade – Sealed
compacted thickness of gravel material in Road Shoulder Maintenance
pavement and shoulder, where material is Measured in kilometres for 1 side of road.
imported from an existing gravel material stockpile
up to a distance of 15 km from the site. Include in the rate, the reinstatement of table
drains, offlet drains and table drain blocks.
This item applies to lot section sizes less than
600m .
2 21.7.17 Grade and Roll – Sealed Road
Shoulder Maintenance
21.7.6 Gravel Excess Haulage
Measured in kilometres for 1 side of road.
Measured in loose cubic metres per kilometre
21.7.18 Grade Water and Roll – Sealed Road
over and above importing distance of 15 km.
Shoulder Maintenance
1 compacted cubic metre measured in place is
nominated as equal to 1.5 loose cubic metre. Measured in kilometres for 1 side of road.
21.7.7 Opening Grade - Unsealed Pavements Include in the rate, the reinstatement of table drain
blocks.
Measured in kilometres.
21.7.19 Rip And Re-compaction – Sealed Road
21.7.8 Maintenance Grade - Carriageway - Shoulder Maintenance
Unsealed Pavements
Measured in kilometres for 1 side of road.
Measured in kilometres.
Include in the rate, the reinstatement of table
21.7.9 Maintenance Grade – Between Inverts - drains, offlet drains and table drain blocks.
Unsealed Pavements
21.7.20 Reformation and Re-compaction -
Measured in kilometres. Sealed Pavements
Include in the rate, the reinstatement of table drain Measured in square metres for nominated top up
blocks. compacted thickness of gravel material of 50 mm
21.7.10 Maintenance Grade – Between Batters or 100 mm.
- Unsealed Pavements Include in the rate, the reinstatement of table
Measured in kilometres. drains, offlet drains and table drain blocks.

Page 211
21.7.21 Protection of Road Furniture 21.10.2 Primer Seal

Not measured separately. Measured in square metres for the size
Include in the rates of other items for the removal, nominated.
protection, storage, replacement of any road Allow for preparation, precoat, binder and
furniture damaged during the work, and the aggregate and all activities to achieve the final
reinstatement of all removed road furniture items sealed surface.
within the work zone. 21.10.3 Reseal work
21.8 STABILISATION MAINTENANCE Measured in square metres for the size nominated
21.8.1 Supply and Spread Stabilising Agent and binder type nominated.
For in-situ methods. Allow for preparation, precoat, binder and
aggregate and all activities to achieve the final
Measured in tonnes.
sealed surface.
Determined by multiplying the application rate of
Make allowance for existing texture.
cement and lime indicated in the procedure by the
area to be treated. 21.10.4 Geofabric
21.8.2 Supply Top-up Materials Measured in square metres of completed area.
Measured in square metres for nominated top up Make allowance for supply and placement.
compacted thickness layer material of 50 mm in
subgrade, pavement and shoulder, where material Make allowance for overlapping at joins.
is sourced and imported from a location up to a AREAS GREATER THAN 300m
2
distance of 15 km from the site.

21.10.5 Preparation of Pavement
21.8.3 Mixing, Compacting, Trimming and
Curing Stabilised Layer Measured in square metres of the prepared area.
Measured in square metres for 150 mm 21.10.6 Prime Coat, Enrichment Coat,
compacted thickness for each specified layer: Emulsion Coat, Primer Seal and Seal
21.8.4 Mixing, Compacting and Trimming Coats
Pulverised Wet Mix Layer Measured in litres at 15 ºC. Adjust volumes using
Measured in square metres for 150 mm Table 7.9 - Bitumen Equivalent Volumes.
compacted thickness for each specified layer.
21.9 BITUMINOUS SURFACE
MAINTENANCE Payment calculated for each spray run. Quantity
21.9.1 Pothole Patching, Edge Patching and sprayed is determined by dipping the sprayer tank
Regulation Patching for each spray run.
Measured in tonnes placed for the type specified. Allow for the temperature of the mixture in
Regulation patching will be measured as determining the actual application rate.
evidenced by weigh bridge dockets. The designated volume is determined from the
21.9.2 Reconstruction Patching area sprayed and the rate of application indicated
Measured in square metres for the thickness in the procedure for such area at 15 ºC.
specified and asphalt type specified. Multipliers for reducing the volume of hot bitumen
to the equivalent volume at 15 ºC are contained in
21.9.3 Crack Sealing Table 7.9 - Bitumen Equivalent Volumes.
Measured in litres for the sealant specified.
For primers, enrichment coats, primer seals,
Include all preparation, application, and blinding polymer modified binder or emulsion seals the
materials. rate of application refers to the whole of the
21.9.4 Profiling Work mixture.
Measured in square metres for depth specified. Allow for adhesion agent in the rate for polymer
Includes profiling and material disposal. modified binder.
21.10 SPRAY SEALING FOR MAINTENANCE Adjustment to payment for the sprayed volume
2
AREAS LESS THAN 300m when the spray application rates equal or exceed
21.10.1 General 0.8 L/m2:
Measured in square metres for specified − Application 90% to 95% of the designated
aggregate size volume:
Allow for surface preparation, precoat, binder, − Payment for the sprayed volume less one-half
aggregate and all activities to achieve the final the difference between the sprayed volume
sealed surface. and 95% of the designated volume.

Page 212
(Example: Application = 92% of designated Make allowance for supply and placement.
volume. Pay for (92% - 0.5 x (95% - 92%)) = Make allowance for overlapping at joins.
90.5% of designated volume.)
21.11 CONCRETE MAINTENANCE
− Application 95% to 105% of the designated
21.11.1 General
volume:
− Payment for the sprayed volume. Make allowance for saw cutting, excavation,
bedding, reinforcement, installation of expansion
− Application 105% to 115% of the designated joints and backfilling in the following items.
volume:
21.11.2 Cycle/Footpaths
− Payment for 105% of the designated volume.
− Application less than 90% or more than 115% Measured in square metres. Dependent on the
of the designated volume will be rejected. number of square meters ordered. Allow for a
Rectify by methods approved by the minimum 100 mm depth of concrete and the
Superintendent, at the Contractor’s expense. requirements of reinforcement. Nominate and
determined in the PSRs.
− Adjustment to payment for the sprayed
volume when spray application rates below 21.11.3 Vehicle Crossings and Access Strips
2
0.8 L/m :
Measured in square metres.
−
2
Application plus 0.05 L/m and minus
2
0.05 L/m of the designated spray rate: 21.11.4 Kerbs and Gutters
− Payment for the sprayed volume. Measured in linear metres for each type
−
2
Application more or less than 0.05 L/m of the Drainage structures or crossings are excluded
designated spray rate will be rejected. Rectify from the measured lengths.
by methods approved by the Superintendent,
at the Contractor’s expense. 21.11.5 Side Entry/Letter Box Pit Lids
Payment will be made for the designated volume Measured in square metres.
upon satisfactory reseal of the rejected area at no 21.11.6 Side Entry Pit Lintels
extra expense to the Principal.
Measured by the number of bays to be repaired.
Adjustment to payment for seal coat items (binder,
additive, precoat, aggregate) is in accordance with 21.11.7 Wing/Head Walls, Aprons and Cut Off
Table 21.1 Payment Adjustments. Walls
Measured in square metres
21.11.8 Miscellaneous Concrete Works
21.10.7 Additives Including but not limited to: Vehicle Accesses,
Measured in litres at 15 ºC. Pram Crossings, Wheel Chair Accesses and
Traffic Island Median Infill. Measured in square
Polymer additives in polymer modified binders not metres. (For tender purposes, make allowance for
measured separately. 100 mm thick concrete.)
Make allowance in the rates for seal coats. 21.12 DRAINAGE MAINTENANCE
21.10.8 Precoat Applied to Aggregate 21.12.1 Excavation in Trenching
Measured in litres. Measured in in-situ cubic metres for the specified
range of depths to invert.
Make allowance for adhesion agent. The length of the trench shall be measured
21.10.9 Stockpile Sites between the outside face of headwalls or between
the centre of pits.
Make allowance for in the relevant rates for
The width of the trench shall be the outside width
sealing aggregate.
of the culvert plus 300 mm on each side.
21.10.10 Sealing Aggregate The depth of the trench is the average of the
SUPPLY AND DELIVERY depths to invert measured at the structure at each
end of the section.
Measured in cubic metres in the stockpile; or in
The depth to invert is the lesser of the depth
loaded vehicles at the work site.
below natural surface and the depth below
SUPPLY AND APPLICATION finished surface level. In the case of kerbside
structures, the finished surface level is measured
Measured in square metres of finished aggregate
at the top of kerb.
work for each size of aggregate.
Measured in square metres of completed area.

Page 213
Make allowance for shoring, bedding, inlet and 21.13 PROTECTION WORKS MAINTENANCE
outlet structures and irregularities in the natural 21.13.1 Geotextile Fabric
surface where applicable.
Measured in square metres of completed area.
21.12.2 Embankment Protection - Concrete
Measured in square metres of the face area. Make allowance for supply and placement.
Make allowance for weep holes. Make allowance for laps and folds.
21.12.3 Margins 21.13.2 Stone Pitching
Measured in linear metres.
Measured in square metres of the face area.
Make allowance for reinforcement.
21.12.4 Supply, Load, Transport, Bed, Lay and 21.13.3 Grouted Stone Pitching
Backfill Culverts Measured in square metres of the face area.
Measured in linear metres along the invert of the Make allowance for weep holes.
culvert as the distance between the outside face 21.13.4 Dumped Rock Protection
of headwalls or other structures for the type and Measured in cubic metres.
size scheduled.
21.13.5 Rubble
Multiple barrel culverts are measured as the
single distance between the outside face of Measured in cubic metres.
headwalls or other structures. 21.13.6 Gabions
Excavation is measured separately. Measured in cubic metres.
21.12.5 Excavate, Supply, Load, Transport, Includes the excavation, steel wire mesh box and
Bed, Lay and Backfill Culverts the stone filling.
Measured in linear metres along the invert of the 21.13.7 Reno Mattresses
culvert between the outside face of Measured in square metres.
headwalls/inside face of pits or other structures for Includes the excavation, steel wire mesh box and
the type and size scheduled. the stone filling.
Multiple barrel culverts are measured as the 21.13.8 Revetment Mattresses
single distance between the outside face of
headwalls or other structures. 21.14 MEASURED IN SQUARE
Make allowance for RC floor slabs for precast box METRES.ROAD FURNITURE
culverts. MAINTENANCE
21.12.6 Concrete Headwalls, Maintenance 21.14.1 Fencing
Holes and Other Structures Measured in linear metres for each type of
Measured in cubic metres of concrete for repairs. fencing.
Measured by number for replacements. Make allowance for gates which are not measured
separately.
21.12.7 Collar Joints, Bandage Joints, Anchor
Blocks and End Caps Make allowance for clearing of fence lines which
is not measured separately.
Measured by number.
21.14.2 Guide Posts
Make allowance for splay ends.
Measured by number.
21.12.8 Inlet and Outlet Channels
Make allowance for delineators.
21.14.3 Road Signs, Manufacture, Supply and
Not measured separately for culvert waterways Delivery
less than 2 square metres in cross-sectional area
and channels less than 50 metres long. Measured by number of each sign type or
classification.
21.12.9 Open Unlined Drains
Freight: to be paid on receipt of invoice
21.14.4 Road Signs: Remove existing signs.
21.12.10 Subsoil Drains Install new sign on existing post
Measured in linear metres. Measured by number of each sign type or
Make allowance for blocks, headwalls, filter classification within the sign surface area range.
material, geotextiles, and connection to existing 2 2 2 2
drainage system. (≤ 2m ; 2m → 6m2; 6m → 12m )
21.12.11 Demolish and Remove Existing
Drainage Structures
Measured as an item.
Make allowance for backfilling
Page 214
21.14.5 Road Signs and post: remove existing 21.14.15 Supply Install Cycle Holding
sign posts. Supply, deliver and install Rail
new road signs and posts. Measured by number.
Measured by number of each sign type or 21.14.16 Remove Cycle Holding Rail
classification
Measured by number.
21.14.6 Road Signs: Relocate existing signs
21.14.17 Supply and Install Culvert
and posts
Crossing Guard Rail
Measured by number of each sign type or
Measured by number of stock or half stock
classification, and/or each post type
sections including delineators.
21.14.7 Road Signs, Supply and Install new
21.14.18 Remove Culvert Crossing
Posts and remove and re-install
Guard Rail
existing sign
Measured by number of each sign type or
sections including delineators.
classification
Make allowance for new brackets, bolts, nuts and 21.15 PAVEMENT MARKING
bracings for each sign, and new caps for each 21.15.1 Setting Out
post.
Rate to be negotiated on a site-specific basis for
21.14.8 Flood Gauge Posts, supply deliver and new work.
install
Measured by number. Make allowance for all plant and materials
irrespective of the type repair.
Make allowance for gauge.
21.14.9 Cattle Grids 21.15.2 Pavement Marking
Payment will be made at the tendered rates as Lengths of line being painted are based on the
defined in the Schedule of Rates as nominated for total length for the work item. For example,
the type of repair and maintenance to cattle grids. 2,500 m of broken line will paid as a single rate
Grid Maintenance Service Crew travel measured item ‘Broken Line (BL) 1,000 – 5,000 m’.
by kilometres for rural regions only. The following are measured in linear metres for
Make allowance for all plant and materials type of painted line, inclusive of unpainted gaps:
irrespective of the type of repair. − Continuity line - (single broken).
21.14.10 Removal of Graffiti
− Continuity line special (single broken).
Measured by hours inclusive of the solvents and
procedure required to remove the graffiti. − Unbroken lane line - (single continuous).
21.14.11 Steel Beam Guardrail − Broken lane line or separation line - (single).
Supply, remove and replace guardrail measured − Barrier lines both directions - (double
in linear metres. continuous longitudinal lines).
− Barrier lines one direction - (double
Supply, remove and replace posts measured by
longitudinal lines broken on one side,
number.
continuous on the other).
Supply, remove and replace terminals, end posts
− Edge line - (single continuous).
and cable, measured by number.
Make allowance for delineators, nuts, bolts and − Single Yellow Line - (yellow single
continuous).
fittings in all works.
Steel Beam Guardrail Maintenance Service Crew − Outline (around medians)
travel measured by kilometres for rural regions − Stop Lines (single continuous)
only. − Hold Lines (single continuous)
21.14.12 Supply Install Guide Posts − Turn Lines (single broken)
Measured by number. − Signalized Pedestrian Crossings (single
21.14.13 Supply and Install 150 mm broken)
Round Recycled Plastic Bollard
− Car / Bus / Truck Parking Bays
Measured by number irrespective of colour. The following are measured by number:
21.14.14 Supply and Install Vehicle
− Arrow Heads (single, double, triple, merge)
Movement Barrier
− Numbers and Letters
sections. − Disabled Symbols

Page 215
Chevrons and Speed Humps are measured by 21.17.6 Slash Firebreaks

square meter (painted area only) Measured in kilometres for nominated width.
Make allowance for the supply and application of 21.17.7 Slash and Rake Firebreaks
specified glass beads with all markings.
Slash and rake firebreaks measured in square
21.15.3 Raised Retroreflective Pavement metres.
Markers
21.17.8 Litter Collection & Disposal
Measured by number.
Not measured separately when included in
Raised Retroreflective Pavement Markers will be slashing items.
supplied by the contractor and paid at cost plus
Measured in kilometres including full width of road
mark up.
reserve both sides of road for each specified road.
Payment for installation will be by number.
21.17.9 Replacement of Damaged Roadside
The scheduled rate for the Installation of Raised Furniture and Structures
Retroreflective Pavement Markers in Urban Areas
Not measured separately, include in slashing
is inclusive of traffic control.
items.
21.15.4 Removal of Linemarking
21.17.10 Bushfire prevention
Measured by square metre of actual painted area.
Not measured separately, include in slashing
21.16 LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE items.
The following landscape maintenance operations 21.17.11 Vegetation Control around
are measured in kilometres for all areas between Guideposts, Signs, and at Bridges,
road reserve boundaries for each specified road Guardrails, Flood-ways, Culverts
for 12 months to specified service levels. Spraying measured in kilometres including both
21.16.1 Grass Cutting sides of road for each specified road.
21.16.2 Grass Trimming 21.17.12 Vegetation Control at Rest
21.16.3 Weeding Areas and Truck-bays.
21.16.4 Pruning Slashing measured in square metres.
21.16.5 Removal of Vegetation Spraying measured in square metres.
21.16.6 Replacement of Plants 21.17.13 Vegetation Control at
Aerodromes
21.16.7 Litter Collection
Slashing measured in square metres.
21.16.8 Removal of Dead Animals
Spraying measured in square metres.
21.16.9 Treatment of Pest Species
21.17.14 Weed Control
21.16.10 Fertilising
Measured in kilometres including both sides of
21.16.11 Clearing of Drainage Lines
road for each specified road for 12 months
21.16.12 Replenishment of Mulch treatment.
21.16.13 Disposal of Cut Materials Progress payments will be paid for each treatment
21.16.14 Irrigation Systems Maintenance of the weed control program as a direct proportion
of 90% of the scheduled rate.
21.17 SLASHING AND WEED CONTROL
Final payment will be paid for effective eradication
21.17.1 Opening Slash
of noxious weeds as a scaled proportion of the
Slashing measured in kilometres including both remaining 10% of the scheduled rate, based on:
sides of road for each specified road.
Final payment as a
21.17.2 Full Slash Effective Eradication
percentage of
Slashing measured in kilometres including both Percentage Value:
scheduled rate:
sides of road for each specified road.
81-100% 30%
Include for additional slashing on curves and at
intersections to provide specified sight distance. 51-80% 15%
21.17.3 Cleaning of Plant and Equipment
21.18 TRAFFIC SIGNAL & ITS
Measured by item of unit (tractor and slasher) MAINTENANCE
21.17.4 Slash Specific Areas The following Measurement and Payment clauses
Slashing of areas other than road reserves refer to the specification sections of the same
measured in square metres. name, however, the clause numbers do not match
21.17.5 Slash Table Drain Offlets the section numbers of the same title.
Measured by number.

Page 216
21.18.1 Payment Generally Minor Non Complex traffic management setups

Payment for Scheduled Work will be made at the would be generally acceptable for lamp changing,
tendered rate. pedestrian button replacements, and other Routine
Maintenance Repairs, as appropriately addressed
21.18.2 Rates Generally
in the contractors risk assessment.
The rates tendered are deemed to represent the
Complex Traffic Management
full value of the work inclusive of plant, labour,
messing, clearances, permits, transportation, fuel, Complex Traffic Management is defined as
oil, maintenance, tools, material procurement and consisting of any works requiring traffic
delivery, all incidentals to complete the work, management that is considered complex due to
attendance in accordance with Appendix B high risk or high speed environments. Complex
‘Response Times’, supervision, and for overheads situational requirements such as speed reductions,
and profit. All works shall be in accordance with lane closures and manual controlling of traffic with
any standard drawings if applicable. If no standard WZ2 qualified personnel (control traffic with a stop /
drawing is appropriate for the works required, seek slow bat) are considered complex. These complex
direction form the Superintendent’s Representative situations have been itemised and will be charged
prior to completing any works. per approach as scheduled items.
Where a Schedule of Rate item for Scheduled If any item for which a quantity of work is listed in
Works is defined as “Labour Only” the rate the Schedule of Rates has not been priced by you,
tendered shall be inclusive of all of the above it shall be understood that due allowance has been
relating to the labour component. made in the prices of other items for the cost of the
activity which has not been priced.
Payment will be made for all activities associated
with completing the work detailed in this 21.18.3 Fault Maintenance
Specification in accordance with the following Pay Payment will be for labour, plant, equipment and
Items. A lump sum price for any of these items will minor non-complex traffic management required
not be accepted. to attend and rectify the fault in accordance with
Payment for the various pay items for all work Appendix B “Response Times”. Payment for
carried out under this Specification shall include the materials required to repair the fault will be
costs for the following: itemised and paid separately at the tendered rate
for Routine Maintenance or the Supply of
- Installation and maintenance of ‘minor
Materials.
traffic management’ setups (see below),
21.18.4 Fault Attendance – Business Hours
- Submission of generic Traffic Management
Plan & associated TCD’s & risk Measured by number.
assessments, Payment will generally be a one off fee for each
- Photographs provided digitally of any traffic signal or ITS fault occurring between 0700hrs
works completed, such as damaged and and 1700hrs Monday to Friday exclusive of public
replaced items (before and after) to justify holidays.
any completed works, or to assist with any The ‘Fault Attendance – Business Hours’ requires
additional works identified or outstanding, the contractor to attend site with a traffic
- Salvage of any usable parts and testing for maintenance equipped vehicle within the
reuse in this contract, nominated response time (Refer Appendix B),
undertaking the works as directed or identifying the
- Maintaining the DoI stock database so that
fault, and returning traffic signals, and / or UPS,
it is always current, and;
CCTV and / or other ITS equipment to normal
- Travel from contractor’s base to the asset operating condition.
requiring works to be undertaken as
‘Fault Attendance – Business Hours’ will be
instructed, and return to base.
payable once only for each time the Contractor
Minor (Non Complex) Traffic Management leaves and returns to base, however if the same
Minor Traffic Management is defined as consisting fault occurs at the same location within twenty four
of all warning signs, work signs and traffic (24) hours* following the initial fault i.e. a controller
management devices required to carry out work fault, or if faults have been added to the system
within the road reserve on all approaches to the through works undertaken i.e. installing a controller
work site, including safe management of pedestrian module with a fault, the contractor shall attend at
movements and in accordance with AS1742.3 and their own expense as soon as possible within the
the 2014 / 15 Standard Specification for Road nominated time limit for repair. A separate fault
Maintenance titled “Provision for Traffic”. Advising attendance shall be paid if work can be proven to
pedestrians of works, hazards, or giving directions be unrelated to the previous work undertaken,
around the works is considered minor traffic based on detailed records of work undertaken on
management and will not be paid separately. the site job sheet and recorded fault log codes.

Page 217
Payment for this item includes checking, testing Payment for this item includes checking, testing
and cleaning of equipment being worked on and cleaning of equipment being worked on
including communications, router, test and replace including communications, router, test and replace
surge diverters, modem, uninterruptable power surge diverters, modem, uninterruptable power
supply (UPS), wireless receivers and encoder, and supply (UPS), wireless receivers and encoder, and
reporting and documenting the fault/s. reporting and documenting the fault/s.
Cost of materials supply is not included. Refer to Cost of materials supply is not included. Refer to
‘Supply of Materials’ items, or Unspecified ‘Supply of Materials’ items, or Unspecified
Materials items. Materials items.
Cost of installation of scheduled items is not Cost of installation of scheduled items is not
included. Refer to ‘Labour’ items. included. Refer to ‘Labour’ items.
Note: If a Fault Attendance has exceeded two (2) Note: If a Fault Attendance has exceeded two (2)
hours and has become complex with the fault hours and has become complex with the fault
being a suspected cable fault in the field, the being a suspected cable fault in the field, the
‘Hourly Rate – Business Hours’ may be requested ‘Hourly Rate – After Hours’ may be requested for
for use for additional staff member/s to attend to use for additional staff member/s to attend to
check pole tops and pits to assist rectify the fault. check pole tops and pits to assist rectify the fault.
Subject to approval by Superintendent’s Subject to approval by Superintendent’s
Representative, Traffic Section staff member or Representative, Traffic Section staff member or
DoI On-Call Officer. DoI On-Call Officer.
*Does not override warranty or defects. *Does not override warranty or defects.
21.18.5 Fault Attendance - After Hours 21.18.6 Accident Attendance – Business Hours
Measured by number. Measured by number.
Payment will generally be a one off fee for each Payment will be a one off fee for traffic signal faults
traffic signal or ITS fault occurring not between that has resulted from severe damage to traffic
0700hrs and 1700hrs Monday to Friday exclusive signals, CCTV, and / or UPS, and / or other ITS
of weekends and public holidays. equipment by a vehicle accident or similar,
The ‘Fault Attendance – After Hours’ requires the occurring during business hours 0700hrs to
contractor to attend site with a traffic maintenance 1700hrs Monday to Friday. The ‘Accident
equipped vehicle within the nominated response Attendance’ item requires a minimum of two of the
time (Refer Appendix B), undertaking the works as contractor’s appropriately qualified staff to attend
directed or identifying the fault, and returning traffic site with a traffic maintenance equipped vehicle to
signals, and / or UPS, and / or other ITS equipment allow them to make the site safe, photograph, and
to normal operating condition. remove all damaged items from site, and return the
site to fully operational conditions.
‘Fault Attendance – After Hours’ will be payable
once only for each time the Contractor leaves and The ‘Accident Attendance – Business Hours’ item
returns to base, however if the same fault occurs at will be payable once only for each site requiring an
the same location within twenty four (24) hours* accident attendance, however if there is a fault at
following the initial fault i.e. a controller fault, or if the same location within four (4) hours following the
faults have been added to the system through accident attendance, the contractor shall attend at
works undertaken i.e. installing a controller module their own expense within the nominated time limit
with a fault, the contractor shall attend at their own for repair.
expense within the nominated time limit for repair. If the ‘Accident Attendance – Business Hours’ type
A separate Fault Attendance – After Hours shall be callout is initiated during business hours but
paid if work can be proven to be unrelated to the extends beyond, the ‘Accident Attendance - After
previous work undertaken. Hours’ type fee shall not be paid unless the callout
If the Contractor is required to attend an additional extends beyond two hours after business hours -
site after being called to the first site, and has not the ‘Accident Attendance - After Hours’ type fee will
returned to base, or is required to return to a be paid in lieu of the business hours type in this
previously worked on site, only one ‘Fault instance.
Attendance – After Hours’ will be paid. If the work is Maintenance resulting from an accident is not to be
at an additional site a ‘Fault Attendance – Business included in the monthly CSR’s. A separate CSR
Hours’ will be paid. shall be raised by the Superintendent’s
If the callout is initiated during business hours but Representative or Traffic Section staff for works
extends beyond normal working hours, the ‘Fault resulting from an accident. The CSR will include all
Attendance – After Hours’ shall not be paid unless fault attendances, after hour’s fees and associated
the callout extends beyond two hours after labour, plant and materials required to carry out the
business hours. work.

Page 218
Cost of materials supply is not included. Refer to without delay. A Fault Attendance or other
‘Supply of Materials’ items. applicable item/s will then be paid in lieu of the
Cost of installation of scheduled items is not Site Inspection / Routine Maintenance Inspection
included. Refer to ‘Labour’ items. item.
21.18.7 Accident Attendance – After Hours Labour item only.
Measured by number. ROUTINE MAINTENANCE (LABOUR ITEMS)
Payment will be a one off fee for traffic signal faults Payment will be for all labour, plant, equipment,
that has resulted from severe damage to traffic and minor non-complex traffic management items
signals, CCTV and / or UPS, and / or other ITS required to carry out the work in accordance with
equipment by a vehicle accident or similar, Table 16.12 - Response Times in Clause 16.32.
occurring not between 0700hrs and 1700hrs Material will be paid separately if included in the
Monday to Friday exclusive of weekends and Schedule of Rates for Supply of Material.
public holidays. The ‘Accident Attendance – After
21.18.9 Lamp Replacement / Reset
Hours’ requires a minimum of two of the
contractor’s appropriately qualified staff to attend Measured by number.
site with a traffic maintenance equipped vehicle to Payment will include the establishment of plant,
allow them to make the site safe, photograph, and labour, equipment and sundries, required to
remove all damaged items from site, and return the change a traffic signal lamp regardless of its type
site to fully operational conditions.. i.e. incandescent, halogen or LED. If the lamp is
The ‘Accident Attendance – After Hours’ will be situated on the mast of a highmast, ‘Supply Lifting
payable once only for each site requiring an Equipment’ item shall be used.
accident attendance, however if there is a fault at If it is found a transformer is required to be
the same location within four (4) hours following the replaced, a ‘Fault Attendance – Business Hours’
accident attendance, the contractor shall attend at shall be paid in lieu of the lamp replacement.
their own expense within the nominated time limit Cost of lamp is not included. Refer to Supply of
for repair. Materials items.
Maintenance resulting from an accident is not to be 21.18.10 Install Traffic Signal Lantern
included in the monthly CSR’s. A separate CSR
shall be raised by the Superintendent’s Measured by number.
Representative or Traffic Section staff for works Payment will include the establishment of plant,
resulting from an accident. The CSR will include all labour, equipment and sundries required to install,
fault attendances, after hour’s fees and associated relocate or change a traffic signal vehicle lantern
labour, plant and materials required to carry out the (200mm or 300mm), for all single/ vertical aspect
work. configurations.
Cost of materials supply is not included. Refer to Items included in installing the lantern are attaching
‘Supply of Materials’ items. target boards, louvres, cowls, cable and
Cost of installation of scheduled items is not accessories to connect the aspect and test.
included. Refer to ‘Labour’ items. If the lantern required to be installed or replaced is
21.18.8 Site Inspection / Routine Maintenance situated on the mast of a highmast, ‘Supply Lifting
Inspection Equipment’ item shall be used.
Measured by number. Cost of aspect, target board, brackets, louvres,
cowls etc. are not included. Refer to Supply of
Note: This item is intended to require less Materials items.
involvement by the contractor than a Fault
21.18.11 Install Double Traffic Signal
Attendance as the only requirement is to visually
Lantern
check an asset, photograph and report to Traffic
Section. The reason may be to confirm a fault Measured by number.
reported by a member of the public, or to provide Payment will include the establishment of plant,
other visual confirmation required. labour, equipment and sundries required to install,
Payment will include the establishment of plant relocate or change a double traffic signal vehicle
and labour to visually inspect a site or asset and lantern (200mm or 300mm), for all double aspect
identify any Routine Maintenance required to be configurations.
scheduled for another time, or to visually provide Items included in installing the aspect are attaching
other advice. A photograph may be required to be target boards, louvres, cowls, cable and
forwarded. accessories to connect the lantern and test.
If the technician attends site on a Site Inspection, If the lantern required to be installed or replaced is
however deems the fault to be of an urgent situated on the mast of a highmast, ‘Supply Lifting
nature, Traffic Section is to be notified Equipment’ item shall be used.
immediately to permit works to be carried out

Page 219
Cost of aspect, target board, brackets, louvres, base of the pole. The pedestal shall be straight &
cowls etc. are not included. Refer to Supply of level.
Materials items. Cost of pedestal is not included. Refer to Supply of
21.18.12 Install Pedestrian Lantern Materials items.
Measured by number. If required Multi Core cable will be available from
Payment will include the establishment of plant, the Superintendent unless directed otherwise.
labour and equipment and sundries required to 21.18.16 Install Traffic Signal Base Plate
install, relocate or change a pedestrian lantern and Measured by number.
test.
Payment will include the establishment of plant,
Items included in installing the aspect are attaching labour, equipment and sundries required to install
cowls, cable and accessories to connect the or change a base plate on a traffic signal footing.
lantern.
Cost of the base plate is not included. Refer to
Cost of pedestrian aspect, cowls, brackets etc. are Supply of Materials items.
not included. Refer to Supply of Materials items.
21.18.17 Install Traffic Signal Pedestal
21.18.13 Install / Replace Pole Top Footing
Assembly
Measured by number.
Measured by number.
Payment will include the establishment of plant, labour and equipment required to install or replace
labour and equipment and sundries required to a traffic signal footing in accordance with the
install or change a complete pole top assembly standard drawing, inclusive of all items and
including brackets, mounting points, cover and sundries to excavate material and damaged
connector rack, and the removal and reinstatement footing, backfill and compact, in situ concrete,
of traffic signal aspects as required. Items shall in formwork, bedding, grouting, reinstatement of
include cable connections . Payment will also surfaces and disposal of material.
include the painting of the pole top in the
Cost of footing rag bolt assembly is not included.
appropriate colour when that pole top being worked
Refer to Supply of Materials items.
on has been identified as having a junction or open
link. If the footing is in a new position and the
connecting conduit junction pit is more than 5
If only the connector rack requires replacing (with
meters from the footing location or crosses a
Traffic Section staff approval), it will be paid as a
sealed surface i.e. concrete, or a rock base, the
rewire pole top item.
contractor shall provide quote for negotiated rate in
Cost of pole top is not included. Refer to Supply of addition to this item to allow for the additional
Materials items. works.
21.18.14 Rewire Pole Top Assembly 21.18.18 Repair Traffic Signal Footing
Payment will include the establishment of plant, Payment will include the establishment of plant,
labour and equipment required to completely rewire labour and equipment required to repair a traffic
a pole top assembly. The item shall include signal footing where only the thread on the existing
disconnecting, re-terminating each active core, footing has been damaged. Payment is inclusive of
reconnecting and relabelling cable at the pole top all items and sundries to excavate any materials,
assembly and additional cable connections if cut off damaged threaded rods, drill holes for new
required. Payment will also include the painting of threaded rods, install with chemset or similar, in
the pole top in the appropriate colour when that situ concrete, formwork, bedding, grouting,
pole top being worked on has been identified as reinstatement of surfaces and disposal of material.
having a junction or open link.
21.18.19 Detector Test and Repair
Partial rewire will not be paid under this item.
Measured by number.
If the connector rack requires replacing (with Traffic
Section staff approval), it will be paid as a rewire
labour, equipment and sundries required to test
pole top item, however the connector rack will be
and repair a faulty traffic signal detector, including
paid for under the negotiated rate item.
to reduce the detector to a half loop where
21.18.15 Install Traffic Signal Pedestal instructed to by Traffic Section. Payment will also
Measured by number. include the technician providing the readings
Payment will include the establishment of plant, verbally to Traffic Section from site, then written on
labour and equipment required to install or change the job sheet and response.
a traffic signal pedestal, connect cables, fixing the
pedestal to functional footings, and mortaring the

Page 220
21.18.20 Install Detector (Saw cut) 21.18.24 Audio Tactile Test and Repair /
Measured by number. Replace
Payment will include the establishment of plant, Measured by number.
labour, material and equipment required to install a Payment will include the establishment of plant,
vehicle detector in accordance with the Standard labour, sundries and equipment required to test
Drawing, connect to the controller, testing, and and repair, and / or replace, a faulty or damaged
provide readings. audio tactile unit, including speaker.
If required detector feeder cable will be available If the audio tactile component or speaker is
from the Superintendent’s Representative unless deemed unrepairable by the contractor when sent
directed otherwise. to test and repair, and a new audio tactile
21.18.21 Install Detector (Pre-fabricated) component is required to be installed, this item will
only be paid once for replacement of the item.
Measured by number.
Items shall include disconnecting, reconnecting
Payment will include the establishment of plant, cables and testing the operation. Cost of audio
labour, material and equipment required to install a tactile unit, components or speaker is not included.
pre-fabricated vehicle detector, connect to the Refer to Supply of Materials items.
controller, testing, and provide readings. Liaise with
21.18.25 Test and Restore
sealing or asphalt contractors to coordinate the
Communications / SCATS
works program accordingly.
Communications
If required detector feeder cable will be available
Measured by number.
from the Superintendent’s Representative unless
directed otherwise. Payment will include the establishment of plant,
labour, sundries and equipment required to test
21.18.22 Install Detector Pit
and repair communication links to SCATS or other
Measured by number. ITS equipment.
Payment will include the establishment of plant, Cost of hardware material is not included.
labour, materials, sundries and equipment required Superintendent’s Representative to advise of
to install a detector pit. The pit shall have 75mm of authorised suppliers.
20mm aggregate installed underneath the pit to
21.18.26 Supply and Connection of
allow for drainage, separated by a membrane to
Generator
stop ingress of material into the pit. The pit shall
have a tooled concrete surround supporting the pit, Measured by hours (Rounded up and payable in
minimum of 100mm wide x 100mm deep. 30 minute blocks).
NOTE: The current standard drawing does not Payment will include the establishment of plant,
reflect this requirement and is soon to be updated. labour, sundries and equipment required to
Different types of pits may be considered subject connect, secure and maintain the operation of a
to Superintendent’s Representative’s approval for 15amp / 240 volt generator to a traffic signal
use. controller box, or UPS to power and maintain the
operation of traffic signalised sites and associated
Cost of detector pit is not included. Refer to Supply
ITS as specified by the Superintendent’s
of Materials items.
Representative or Traffic Section staff. Payment
21.18.23 Pedestrian Button Test and includes attendance for disconnection at
Repair / Replace completion of use, and the first tank of fuel.
Measured by number. Generators shall be tested on a site to prove
Payment will include the establishment of plant, suitability for use.
labour, sundries and equipment required to test Subsequent tanks of fuel will be paid as per
and repair, and / or replace, a faulty or damaged ‘Unscheduled Items’.
pedestrian button.
21.18.27 Install Multi Core Cable –
If the pedestrian button is deemed unrepairable by including and below 21 cores
the contractor when sent to test and repair, and a
Measured by Lineal Meter.
new pedestrian button is required to be installed,
this item will only be paid once for replacement. Payment will include the establishment of plant,
Items shall include disconnecting, reconnecting labour, sundries and equipment required to install
cables and testing the operation. multi core cable (including and below 16 core) and
other cable such as data cable (fibre / cat 5/6) into
Cost of Audio tactile driver card and pedestrian
an existing conduit/s, pits, and posts, and to
push button in not included. Refer to Supply of
remove any existing damaged cable from conduit if
Materials items.
necessary.
Note. Any fibre termination is not included within
this rate.

Page 221
21.18.28 Install Multi Core Cable – controller including all the electrical components
including and below 51 cores within.
Measured by Lineal Meter. Payment includes installation of the equipment
Payment will include the establishment of plant, required within the cabinet, including connection
labour, sundries and equipment required to install and establishment of communications with all
multi core cable (between 21 and 51 cores) into an items, tidy installation of all cables and equipment
existing conduit/s, pits, and posts, and to remove including to racks where possible, and use of
any existing damaged cable from conduit if appropriate length data cables.
necessary. Note: A standard drawing was not finalised at the
Multi Core cable (51 core) may be available from time of advertising this contract. A standard
the Superintendent and will be utilised unless drawing may be provided during the contract term.
directed otherwise. 21.18.32 Provide Lifting Equipment
21.18.29 Install Detector Feeder Cable Measured per day.
Measured by Lineal Meter of conduit that the Payment will include the establishment of plant,
cable is drawn through. labour, safety devices and equipment required to
Payment will include the establishment of plant, provide and operate lifting equipment in order to
labour, sundries and equipment required to install carry out other works.
Detector Feeder cable into an existing conduit/s The ‘Provide Lifting Equipment’ item will be used to
and to remove existing damaged cable from provide access for highmast aspect installations,
conduit if necessary. realignments, and lamp replacements, also CCTV
Detector Feeder cable will be available from the maintenance and installation, or any other
Superintendent unless directed otherwise. requirements for lifting equipment as directed by
Traffic Section.
The Lineal Meter rate for ‘Install Detector Feeder
Cables’ is not to be measured as per Lm of cable Payment will include all lifting equipment required
installed in the ground as this cable is often to reach a high mast or CCTV pole.
installed as multiple layers in the one conduit. The Cost of Traffic Management is not included. Refer
rate shall be measured as per Lineal Meter of to ‘Traffic Management’ items.
conduit drawn through for this cable to be installed. Cost of traffic signal/CCTV hardware is not
21.18.30 Replace or Upgrade Traffic included. Refer to Supply of Materials items.
Signal Controller, or Integrated UPS & Cost of installation of hardware not included –
Controller refer to Routine Maintenance items.
Measured by number. 21.18.33 Pest Eradication
Payment will include the establishment of plant, Measured by number.
labour and equipment required to collect from the Payment will include eradication of ants,
storage yard, install or upgrade a traffic signal cockroaches, spiders and other insects from the
controller, inclusive of all items and sundries, asset for a period of at least 3 months. If the pest
reinstatement of surfaces and disposal of material if returns to the same location within 3 months, a
previous controller had been damaged. This item further treatment will be required at the
includes some modification of existing footing/plinth contractor’s expense.
in relation to new tie-down rods to secure the Payment includes the treatment of a controller
controller to the existing footing regardless of the and associated communications pillar. If the pest
controller type. issue is in a pit, payment includes that pit and
Any modifications regarding significant concrete nearest two pits.
works required, new or replacement plinth, or Payment does not include termites, this will be a
extension of plinth, shall be undertaken under a negotiated rate if needed.
negotiated rate.
21.18.34 Hourly Rate – Business Hours
The cost of the Traffic Signal Controller unit is not
Measured by hours (Rounded up and payable in
included. Traffic Signal Controller unit will be
30 minute blocks).
available from the Superintendent unless directed
otherwise. Minimum payment of one hour applies.
21.18.31 Install Auxiliary Cabinet Payment will include labour for an appropriately
qualified technician to be available during
Measured by number. business hours, for the services required by DoI
Payment will include the establishment of plant, where other scheduled items are not separately
labour, all sundries, cables (power / Cat 5 data / addressed. Use of this item may be utilised where
fibre) and equipment required to prepare, install a Fault Attendance has exceeded two hours and
and connect an auxiliary cabinet to a traffic signal has become complex, or where the services of a
technician are required for a known or unknown
Page 222
duration such as post cyclone refuelling of execution of the works or ordering of the items,
generators, or other duties as directed by Traffic unless deemed an emergency by
Section. Superintendent’s Representative, Traffic Section
This item shall only be approved for use with prior staff, or DoI On-Call Officer and agreed to
approval from the Superintendent’s verbally. In an emergency instance the item shall
Representative, Traffic Section staff member, or be followed up in writing no later than the next
DoI On-Call Officer. If all of these DoI personnel working day thereafter.
are unavailable, leave voice messages and This item is not to be priced in the Response
proceed with works, however make contact as Schedule – a Provisional Sum has been allowed
soon as possible thereafter. for in the Schedule of Rates.
This item is reliant on the contractor providing SPECIFIC MAINTENANCE
evidence of attendance and duration on site via
logon / logoff, door event or communication with 21.18.37 Site Audit and Report- Vehicle
Traffic Section / DoI On-Call Officer at Signalised Intersection & ITS
commencement and completion for Measured by number.
substantiation. Be advised that lack of evidence Vehicle sites are defined in clauses 16.30 and
may result in item not been authorised. 16.31.
Labour and tools item only. Payment will include the establishment of plant,
21.18.35 Hourly Rate – After Hours labour and equipment, and collection of lighting
Measured by hours (Rounded up and payable in plant if required, to audit and submit a
30 minute blocks). corresponding report to the Superintendent’s
Representative for a vehicle site in accordance with
Minimum payment of three hours applies.
the site audit template shown in Figure 16.3 -
Payment will include labour for an appropriately Sample Template Traffic Signal and ITS Audit
qualified technician to be available after hours, for Report Template. The Site Audit will also include
the services required by DoI where other carrying out minor repairs such as replacing lamps
scheduled items are not separately addressed. or arrays, damaged or missing cowls, and all other
Use of this item may be utilised where a Fault similar activities that can be undertaken within
Attendance has exceeded two hours and has activities associated with the audit. Any pole top
become complex, or where the services of a assemblies identified at or prior to the audit shall be
technician are required for a known or unknown replaced as a priority while traffic management is
duration such as post cyclone refuelling of on site.
generators, or other duties as directed by Traffic
This item shall also include written quotes for any
Section.
works identified from the audit or other
This item shall only be approved for use with prior recommended maintenance.
approval from the Superintendent’s
The report shall also include fully detailed diagrams
Representative, Traffic Section staff member, or
or drawings of the intersection.
DoI On-Call Officer. If all of these DoI personnel
are unavailable, leave voice messages and The report shall be submitted to Traffic Section
proceed with works, however make contact as within 5 working days of the audit being completed.
soon as possible thereafter. Cost of hardware material is not included. See
This item is reliant on the contractor providing Unspecified Materials items.
evidence of attendance and duration on site via Cost of traffic management is not included. See
logon / logoff, door event or communication with traffic management items.
Traffic Section / DoI On-Call Officer at 21.18.38 Site Audit and Report –
commencement and completion for Pedestrian Signalised Intersection &
substantiation. Be advised that lack of evidence ITS
may result in item not been authorised.
Measured by number.
Labour and tools item only.
Pedestrian sites are defined in clauses 16.30 and
21.18.36 Negotiated Rate 16.31.
Measured by number. Payment will include the establishment of plant,
To be determined as negotiated between the labour and equipment, and collection of lighting
Superintendent’s Representative or Traffic Section plant if required, to audit and submit a
staff and the Contractor for labour, equipment and corresponding report to the Superintendent’s
services are requested to be provided by the Representative for a pedestrian site in accordance
contractor. All Negotiated Rate items are to be with the site audit template shown in Figure 16.3 -
submitted and itemised on the Quote Sheet. Sample Template Traffic Signal and ITS Audit
All Negotiated Rate items shall be agreed upon Report Template. The Site Audit will also include
based on the Quote provided in writing prior to the carrying out minor repairs such as replacing burnt

Page 223
out lenses or lamps, damaged or missing, cowls, 21.18.42 Non Specified / Unscheduled
visors and louvers and all other similar activities Materials or Items
that can be undertaken within activities associated Measured by number.
with the audit. Any pole top assemblies identified at
Payment will include 10% mark up and freight.
or prior to the audit shall be replaced as a priority
Invoices from supplier and freight handlers must
while traffic management is on site.
accompany CSR for payment authorisation.
This item shall also include written quotes for any
This item is not to be priced in the Response
works identified from the audit or other
Schedule – a Provisional Sum has been allowed
recommended maintenance.
for in the Schedule of Rates.
The report shall also include fully detailed diagrams
21.18.43 Supply LED Traffic Signal
or drawings of the intersection.
Lantern or Aspect – Various sizes
The report shall be submitted to Traffic Section
Measured by number. Lantern sizes are priced
within 5 working days of the audit being completed.
separately in schedule of rates.
Cost of hardware material is not included. See
Payment will include the supply of a new LED
Unspecified Materials items.
traffic signal aspect or lanterns (regardless of
Cost of traffic management is not included. See size), complete with all cowls, louvres, target
traffic management items. board, LED arrays, transformers, brackets and
21.18.39 UPS Maintenance & Condition fittings required to form a complete lantern.
Report Payment includes manufacturer’s warranty, and
Measured by number handling.
Payment for the Specific maintenance for UPS Cost of installation not included – refer to Routine
systems includes the establishment of plant, labour Maintenance.
sundries and equipment including terminal grease, 21.18.44 LED Array – Various Sizes and
inspection and testing of all on-site equipment to Colours
identify its physical condition, operational
Measured by number. LED array sizes, colours,
performance and configuration of hardware in
roundels and arrows priced separately in the
accordance with the scheduled tasks in Figure
schedule of rates.
16.4 – Sample Template UPS Maintenance and
Battery Condition Report. Payment will include the supply of a new traffic
signal LED array required for an existing LED
The required two hour discharge test will be
aspect.
undertaken remotely by Traffic Section.
Payment includes manufacturer’s warranty, and
The report shall be submitted to Traffic Section
handling.
within 5 working days of the audit being completed.
Cost of installation not included – refer to Routine
SUPPLY OF MATERIALS Maintenance.
21.18.40 Specified Materials 21.18.45 Supply LED Pedestrian Lantern
Payment will be wholly inclusive of all mark up Payment will include the supply of a new LED
and freight charges. pedestrian lantern, complete with all cowls, LED
All materials will be sourced from suppliers arrays, transformers, brackets and fittings
approved by the Superintendent. required to form a complete pedestrian lantern.
Refer to Response Schedule for list of specified Payment includes manufacturer’s warranty, and
materials. handling.
21.18.41 Traffic Signal Component Cost of installation not included – refer to Routine
Repairs Maintenance.
Measured by number. 21.18.46 Supply Target Board – Various
sizes
Payment will include 10% mark up and freight.
Invoices from supplier / repairer and freight Measured by number. Target Board sizes priced
handlers shall accompany CSR for payment separately in schedule of rates.
authorisation. Payment will include the supply of a new traffic
This item is not to be priced in the Response signal target board as a complete item for the
Schedule – a Provisional Sum has been allowed corresponding size required for the aspect to be
for in the Schedule of Rates. fitted, including any blank panels required for 4 or
5 way aspect configurations.
Maintenance.

Page 224
21.18.47 Miscellaneous Traffic Signal 21.18.52 Brackets – Full and Half

Aspect Items Measured by number.
Measured by number. Various sizes, types of Payment will include the supply of new full or half
items listed below all priced separately in the brackets complete with all fittings required to
schedule of rates. install an aspect on a traffic signal pedestal.
Cowls - Payment will include the supply of new Cost of installation not included – refer to Routine
open or closed cowls of various sizes, complete Maintenance.
with all fittings required to install on a traffic signal
21.18.53 Standard Traffic Signal
aspect.
Pedestal
Aspect Doors - Payment will include the supply of
Measured by number.
new aspect doors, for traffic signal aspects and for
pedestrian aspects, complete with all fittings Payment will include the supply of a new hot
required to install on a traffic signal aspect. dipped galvanised traffic signal pedestal in one
continuous length without joints, threaded suitably
Aspect Seals – Payment will include the supply of
for connection to the base plate, for use to mount
new aspect seals, for traffic signal aspects and for
traffic signal hardware.
pedestrian aspects, complete to install within a
traffic signal aspect. Cost of installation not included – refer to Routine
Maintenance.
Cost of installation of above not included – refer to
Routine Maintenance. 21.18.54 Traffic Signal Pedestal Base
Plate
21.18.48 Lamps – Various Types
Measured by number.
Measured by number. Lamp types priced
separately in schedule of rates. Payment will include the supply of a new hot
dipped galvanised traffic signal pedestal base
Payment will include the supply of new traffic
plate, threaded suitably for connection to mount
signal aspect lamps for older style Halogen and
traffic signal pedestal.
Incandescent lamps.
Maintenance.
Maintenance.
21.18.55 Traffic Signal Pedestal Footing
21.18.49 Supply LED Transformer
Measured by number.
Measured by number.
Payment will include the supply of a new traffic
Payment will include the supply of a new traffic
signal pedestal footing for use to mount traffic
signal transformer required for an LED array /
signal pedestal base plate.
Halogen, regardless of the type or size required
for 200mm or 300mm green, yellow or red. Cost of installation not included – refer to Routine
Maintenance.
Maintenance. 21.18.56 Pedestrian Push Button
21.18.50 Supply 50 Way Finial Pole Top Measured by number.
Complete Payment will include the supply of a new
Measured by number. pedestrian push button complete with button,
housing, audio tactile speaker and fixings.
Payment will include the supply of a new 50 way
finial pole top assembly complete. Cost of installation not included – refer to Routine
Maintenance.
Maintenance. 21.18.57 Audio Tactile Speaker
21.18.51 Supply Pole Top Cover Measured by number.
Measured by number. Payment will include the supply of a new audio
tactile speaker and wiring required for installation,
Payment will include the supply of a new pole top
for use within a pedestrian push button.
cover only and will also include the painting of the
pole top in the appropriate colour if that pole top Cost of installation not included – refer to Routine
being worked on has been identified as having a Maintenance.
junction or open link. 21.18.58 Audio Tactile Driver Card
Cost of installation not included – refer to Routine Measured by number.
Maintenance. Payment will include the supply of a new audio
tactile driver card to be fitted within the housing
unit, for use with pedestrian push button.
Maintenance.

Page 225
21.18.59 Detector Pit (Polycrete Type) Cost of installation not included.

Measured by number. 21.18.64 Sea Wasp
Payment will include the supply of a new traffic Measured by number.
signal detector pit complete, of Polycrete Payment includes the supply of a sea wasp surge
construction similar to pit ACO Type 33 diverter and sundries required for use within a
(L 340 mm x W 340 mm x D 440 mm). Two drain traffic signal communications pillar.
holes to be installed in the base of the pit.
Cost of installation not included.
Payment includes supply of pit and class B
21.18.65 Prefabricated Communication
galvanised steel lid with a chain connection to the
Box
pit.
Measured by number.
NOTE: The current standard drawing does not
reflect this requirement and is soon to be updated. Payment includes the supply of a traffic signal
Different types of pits may be considered subject communications pillar cover (communications
to Superintendent’s Representative’s approval for box), constructed of aluminium, powder-coated in
use. a bright orange colour similar to others previously
installed. Four ‘hex’ bolts shall be supplied to fit
the cover to the footing when installed, and
Maintenance.
remove any previously installed ‘D’ bolts.
21.18.60 Handheld Terminal (HHT)
Payment includes supply of communications box
Measured by number. to suit various types of footings currently installed.
Payment will include the supply of a new traffic Cost of installation not included.
signal Hand Held Terminal (HHT), inclusive of
21.18.66 Supply Underground Junction
freight.
Box
21.18.61 Telephone Line Surge Diverter
Measured by number.
Measured by number.
Payment includes the supply of a permanently
Payment includes the supply of Surge Protection installed junction box to join multi core cable
equipment for traffic signal communications lines. within a conduit junction pit. The junction box shall
Protection equipment should be the same as that be entirely waterproof.
supplied by Microconnect for use with their
Connector should be isolation tag type like in pole
equipment, Novaris #MPP-RJ12-001.
tops and should be numbered / identified as per
21.18.62 Krone Rack pole top.
Measured by number. Payment includes the Payment includes all sundries required for use in
supply of a Krone Rack for installation within a installation.
traffic signal communications pillar for traffic signal
Cost of installation not included - Payment does
communications lines.
not include painting the associated pole top
Cost of installation not included – refer to Routine nearest to the pit when installed, however when
Maintenance. installed the bottom half of the pole top shall be
21.18.63 Fuses painted white.
Measured by number. 21.18.67 Supply Auxiliary Cabinet
Payment includes the supply of 5mm x 20mm Measured by number.
fuses required for use within a traffic signal Payment includes the supply of an auxiliary
controller. cabinet (top hat) to suit the nominated controller/s
Fuse types nominated for supply include all listed within this specification. The auxiliary
amperages for 5mm x 20mm fuses including: cabinet shall be constructed with the same
- 5mm by 20mm Quick acting 5 A fuse materials as the traffic signal controller and be
- 5mm by 20mm medium acting 6.3 A fuse painted the same colour. It shall be ventilated,
- 5mm by 20mm medium acting 1 A fuse waterproof and keyed in accordance with the
- 5mm by 20mm medium fast acting 1 A Superintendent’s nominated key type, with 2 keys
fuse provided.
- 5mm by 20mm medium fast acting 0.5 A Payment will include a small suitable exhaust fan
fuse (IP rated to suit the environment) pre-installed, a
- 5mm by 20mm medium slow blow 3.15 A sub-switchboard, and computer equipment
fuse racking to neatly store and secure items such as
Different sized fuses, Circuit Breakers and routers.
Miniature Circuit Breakers (MCBs) if required shall Cost of installation not included.
be paid utilising the unscheduled items / materials
item.

Page 226
21.18.68 TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT required but is not to be used in accordance with

Complex Traffic Management Traffic Management Type B for that approach.
Complex Traffic Management is defined as 21.18.70 Traffic Management Type B
consisting of any works requiring traffic (Lane Closure/s)
management that is considered complex due to Measured per approach.
high risk or high speed environments. Complex Payment will include the establishment of all plant,
situational requirements such as speed reductions, equipment, signage and labour to install
lane closures and manual controlling of traffic with appropriate traffic management for lane closures
WZ2 qualified personnel (control traffic with a stop / and to maintain the setup with accredited staff and
slow bat) are considered complex. These complex modify the existing traffic management setup for
situations have been itemised and will be charged as long as required for a period of one working
per approach. day.
Complex Traffic Management items are inclusive of This item will be paid per approach that lane
Minor Non Complex traffic management closure/s are required to complete the works and
requirements for the entire site of works, including are inclusive of any requirement of a closure
all pedestrian management. change to an adjacent lane. This item shall
All Traffic Management Plans (TMPs) and Traffic include other minor traffic management
Control Diagrams (TCDs) submitted for use in this requirements for the site including safe pedestrian
contract (specific or generic) shall be reused within management.
this contract for the same or similar works where This item may be paid in accordance with Traffic
possible, or as advised by the Superintendent’s Management Type C for the period that type C is
Representative. required but is not to be used in accordance with
Payment for all traffic management items includes Traffic Management Type A for that approach.
the submission of a Temporary Speed Limit 21.18.71 Traffic Management Type C
Authorisation (TSLA) along with the TCD to be (Traffic Controller/s)
utilised, and any permits required for the works.
Measured by hours (Rounded up and payable in
Daily Diaries from the traffic management company
30 minute blocks).
shall also be provided following the works, for any
traffic management items utilised. Payment will include the establishment of all plant,
equipment and labour to install appropriate traffic
NOTE: SCATS can be utilised to assist with
management for manual traffic control and to
controlling traffic in some instances where it may
maintain the setup with accredited staff and
otherwise not be possible due to speed or volume.
modify the existing traffic management setup for
For example, requesting Traffic Section staff to
as long as required.
dwell an approach in order to hold another
approach for a short duration to enable a This item will be paid per lane of traffic under
technician to access a pit or an aspect safely. The control / per hour that WZ2 qualified controllers
contractor shall consider this as an option to assist are required for the contractor to complete the
with works. works and shall include other minor traffic
management requirements for the site including
The following item/s shall be submitted to
safe pedestrian management.
Superintendent’s Representative or Traffic Section
staff for approval prior to use: This item may be used in accordance with Traffic
Management Type A or B for the period required.
21.18.69 Traffic Management Type A
(Speed Reduction - Non Lane Closure) 21.18.72 Traffic Management Type D
(Frequently Changing Work Area)
Measured per approach.
Measured by number / per site.
Payment will include the establishment of all plant,
equipment, signage and labour to install Payment will include the establishment of all plant,
appropriate traffic management for speed equipment and labour to install appropriate traffic
reductions and to maintain the setup with management for a frequently changing work area
accredited staff and modify the existing traffic and maintain the setup with accredited staff and
management setup for as long as required for a modify the existing traffic management setup,
period of one working day. regardless of how many approaches are required.
This item may require a speed reduction in
This item will be paid per approach that speed
accordance with these standards which is
reductions are required to complete the works and
included in this item.
shall include other minor traffic management
requirements for the site including safe pedestrian Appropriate shadow vehicles and / or attenuator
management. shall be utilised.
This item may be paid in accordance with Traffic This item will be paid per site that this item is
Management Type C for the period that type C is utilised for.

Page 227
21.18.73 Site Specific Traffic Control 21.19.5 Supply and Use of Detergent
Diagrams (TCDs)
Measured by litres of detergent used.
Measured by number / per site.
21.19.6 Manual Sweeping of Medians, Splitter
Payment will include the labour, equipment and
Islands, etc.
materials required to compile and submit site
specific Traffic Control Diagram/s (TCD), Measured as an hourly rate per person for on-site
associated specific Risk Assessment, to the hours worked.
Superintendent’s Representative or Traffic Section
21.19.7 Travel Allowance past Stuart
staff in order to undertake the required
Highway/Arnhem Highway Intersection
maintenance works task. If the works require two
(2) or more TCDs in order to document the works − Road Sweeping Equipment: Measured per
required, or for after-hours care, this shall be kilometre from the Stuart Highway / Arnhem
included in the rate. Highway intersection to the most distant point
The TCDs and Risk Assessment shall reference of the works, by the most direct route.
the specific TMP for traffic signals maintenance, − Cycleway and Footpath Sweeping Equipment:
and ensure that it complies with this document. Measured per kilometre from the Stuart
Alternately, provide a separate summarised TMP Highway / Arnhem Highway intersection to the
where details contradict the primary maintenance most distant point of the works, by the most
TMP . direct route.
Site Specific TCDs shall join the suite of TCDs, 21.19.8 Disposal of Recovered Waste
including generic TCDs, under the Traffic Signals Not measured separately. Make allowance for
Maintenance contract TMP, and shall be reused for these items within other rates.
other works associated with this contract where
21.19.9 Traffic Control/ Provision for Traffic
possible.
Not measured separately. Make allowance for
Note: the Template TMP’s and Generic and TCD’s
compliance with the contract requirements within
required are not to be classed as chargeable items.
other rates.
21.19 STREET SWEEPING
Provision for Traffic not measured separately.
21.19.1 Scheduled Works – Sweeping of
Intersections, Median Breaks and 21.20 AERODROME MAINTENANCE
Kerbed Sections of Roads Refer to the specification text for the full extent of
work required under each scheduled item.
Measured by the number of monthly sweeping
cycles for each nominated road. Sweeping will 21.20.1 Slashing of grassed areas
include intersections, median breaks and kerbed Measured as an item for the particular aerodrome.
sections of roads. 21.20.2 Cutting of re-growth
21.19.2 Scheduled Works – Sweeping of Measured as an item for the particular aerodrome.
Cycleways and Footpaths 21.20.3 Dragging of Aerodrome
Measured by the number of monthly sweeping Measured as an item for the particular aerodrome.
cycles for each nominated cycleway or footpath. 21.20.4 Rolling of sealed runways
21.19.3 Priority Works Measured in square metres.
Road Sweeping Equipment: Measured as an 21.20.5 Rolling of gravel runways
hourly rate for on-site hours worked. Measured in square metres.
Cycleway and Footpath Sweeping Equipment: 21.20.6 Maintenance grade – Runways
Measured as an hourly rate for on-site hours Measured in square metres.
worked. 21.20.7 Maintain fences and gates
21.19.4 Urgent Works Measured in lineal metres.
Road Sweeping Equipment: Measured as an 21.20.8 Maintain aerodrome furniture
hourly rate for on-site hours worked. Measured as an item for the particular aerodrome.
Cycleway and Footpath Sweeping Equipment:
Measured as an hourly rate for on-site hours
worked.
Water not measured separately

Page 228
21.21 ROAD AND MARINE AMENITY 21.21.26 Touch Up Painting of Furniture

MAINTENANCE Measured as an item for all road amenity area
The following routine maintenance operations for furniture.
the maintenance of the nominated amenities are The following specific maintenance items are
measured by month to the specified service measured as specified.
levels:
21.21.27 Bin Placement and
Adjustments to payment for these items will be Replacement
subject to independent auditors report.
Measured by number including NTG decals
21.21.1 Rubbish Collection
21.21.2 Rubbish Removal 21.21.28 Pumping of Septic tanks
21.21.3 Bin Placement and Replacement Measured by number of operations for each
Amenity site.
21.21.4 Cleaning of Road Amenity Area
Furniture Clean Out Toilet Compost Chambers
21.21.5 Cleaning of Road Amenity Area Toilet Measured by number.
Block 21.21.29 Roadside Rubbish Collection
21.21.6 Cleaning of Amenity Area Structures Measured per kilometre including both sides of
and Furniture road.
21.21.7 Cleaning of Amenity Area Toilets and 21.21.30 Provision of Firewood Storage
Toilet Block Bins
21.21.8 Maintenance of Toilet Systems Measured by number.
21.21.9 Water Tanks and Water Maintenance 21.21.31 Removal of Dead Animals
21.21.10 Cleaning of Barbecues and Measured by number.
Provision of Firewood
Include in the rate for the specified rapid response
21.21.11 Cleaning and Pressure time and removal of both large and small
Cleaning Jetty Decks carcasses.
21.21.12 Cleaning and Pressure 21.21.32 Removal of Graffiti
Cleaning of Boat Ramp and Pontoons
21.21.13 Maintenance of Toilet Systems Measured by hours inclusive of the solvents and
procedure required to remove the graffiti.
21.21.14 Graffiti Removal
21.21.15 Grass Cutting 21.21.33 Removal of Abandoned
Vehicles
21.21.16 Grass Trimming
Measured by number.
21.21.17 Weeding
21.21.34 Illegal Rubbish Collection
21.21.18 Irrigation Systems maintenance
Measured by lots of up to 250 kilo maximum
21.21.19 Tree replacement weight
21.21.20 Water Tanks and Water Provide weighbridge dockets to verification for
Maintenance payments.
21.21.21 Cleaning and maintenance of Provide photographic evidence to verification of
Barbecues Provision of Firewood payments
21.21.22 Painting Existing Furniture 21.21.35 Repair and Replacement of
21.21.23 Repair and Replacement of Road Amenity Area Furniture
Road Amenity Area Furniture To be paid at negotiated rate between the
The following specific maintenance operations are Contractor and Superintendent.
measured as specified and directed by the
21.21.36 Painting Existing Furniture
Superintendent (travel allowance to be paid where
not mentioned separately for works in rural areas To be paid at negotiated rate between the
only) Contractor and Superintendent.
21.21.24 Information Sign 21.21.37 Tree and Plant Removal and or
Measured by number. Replacement
21.21.25 Initial Painting of Furniture To be paid at negotiated rate between the
Measured as an item for all road amenity area Contractor and Superintendent.
furniture.

Page 229
21.21.38 Maintenance for Marine Growth/

Shellfish Encrustations on Structures
To be paid at negotiated rate between the
Contractor and Superintendent
21.22 Unscheduled items/materials and
Negotiated Rate
Items not categorised in the Schedule Of Rates
will be paid for by the following items.
Unscheduled items: Instances where the
contractor has been requested to engage the sub-
contractor (such as cross-hire of equipment), or
provided unscheduled materials (freight to another
region), the unscheduled item/material rate shall
be utilised. This item is where the contractor
would be required to pay a third party.
Negotiated rate: Instances where the contractor
has been requested to provide labour items, or
provide other.
21.22.1 Unscheduled Items /material
Measured by number and / or items.
Payment shall include 10% mark-up on evidence
of cost of Unscheduled items.
Evidence of cost in the form of an invoice from the
supplier, or freight handler must accompany the
CSR for payment authorisation. Other evidence
such as timesheets, log books or photos may be
requested as evidence.
21.22.2 Negotiated Rate
Measured by number and/ or items.
To be determined as negotiated between the
Superintendent and the Contractor for
unscheduled labour, service or hire provided by
the contractor under existing conditions and
contract.
Where a type of works is described but does not
appear in the schedule of rates or is not defined in
the specification and not included in the Schedule
of Rates items, a rate shall be negotiated to cover
the works required.
The item of works may then be included in the
contract Schedule of Rates at the
Superintendents discretion.

Page 230
21.24 PAYMENT ADJUSTMENTS TABLE AND MOBILISATION DIAGRAMS
Table 21.1 Payment Adjustments

Viscosity (At 60 ºC Pa.Sec) Of Class 320
Reduction In Payment Of Seal Coat Items
Bitumen Component Of The Binder
10% reduction for each 10 Pa.sec (or part
Under 260
thereof) below 260.
260 – 380 Nil.
10% reduction for each 10 Pa.sec (or part
Over 380
thereof) over 380.
Figure 21.1 – Mobilisation Diagrams

Page 231
REFERENCED DOCUMENTS
22. REFERENCED DOCUMENTS
22.1 AUSTRALIAN STANDARDS

Table – Referenced Documents – Australian Standards
AS 1012 (set) - Method of testing concrete
AS 1074 1989 Steel tubes and tubulars for ordinary services
AS 1111(set) 2015 ISO metric hexagon commercial bolts and screws - Product grade C
AS 1112(set) 2015 ISO metric hexagon nuts
AS 1141 (set) - Methods for sampling and testing aggregates
AS 1141.0 1999 - List of Methods
AS 1141.1 2015 - Definitions
AS 1141.2 2015 - Basic testing equipment
AS 1141.3.1 2012 - Sampling - Aggregates
AS 1141.11.1 2009 - Particle size distribution – Sieving method
AS 1141.14 2007 - Particle shape, by proportional calliper
AS 1141.15 1999 - Flakiness index
AS 1141.18 1996 - Crushed particles in coarse aggregate derived from gravel
- Average least dimension - Direct measurement (nominal size
AS 1141.20.1 2000
10mm and greater)
- Average least dimension – Direct measurement (nominal size
AS 1141.20.2 2000
7mm and 5mm)
AS 1141.20.3 2000 - Average least dimension – Calculation (nomograph)
AS 1141.23 2009 - Los Angeles value
- Aggregate soundness – Evaluation by exposure to sodium
AS 1141.24 2013
sulphate solution
AS 1141.25.1 2003 - Degradation factor – Source rock
AS 1141.26 2008 - Secondary minerals content in igneous rocks
AS 1141.29 2014 - Accelerated soundness index by reflux
AS 1141.40 1999 - Polished aggregate friction value - Vertical road-wheel machine
AS 1141.41 1999 - Polished aggregate friction value – Horizontal bed machine
AS 1141.50 1998 - Resistance to stripping of cover aggregates from binders
AS 1160 1996 Bitumen emulsions for the construction and maintenance of pavements
AS/NZS 1163 2009 Cold formed structural steel hollow sections
AS 1231 2000 Aluminium and aluminium alloys – Anodic oxidation coatings
AS 1273 1991 Unplasticised PVC (UPVC) downpipe and fittings for rainwater
AS 1289(set) - Methods of testing soils for engineering purposes
AS 1289.0 2014 - Definitions and general requirements
- Soil classification tests - Sampling and preparation of soils –
AS 1289.1.1 2001
Disturbed soil samples (Includes Amdt 1:2002 and Amdt 2: 2008)
- Soil classification tests - Moisture content – Oven drying method
AS 1289.2.1.1 2005
(standard method)
- Soil classification tests - Determination of the liquid limit of a soil –
AS 1289.3.1.1 2009
Four point Casagrande method

Page 232

- Soil classification tests - Determination of the plastic limit of a soil -
AS 1289.3.2.1 2009
Standard method
AS 1289.3.3.1 2009 - Soil classification tests - Calculation of the plasticity index of a soil
- Soil classification tests - Determination of the linear shrinkage of a
AS 1289.3.4.1 2008
soil – Standard method
Soil classification tests - Determination of the particle size distribution of a

AS 1289.3.6.1 2009
soil – Standard method of analysis by sieving
- Soil classification tests - Determination of the sand equivalent of a

AS 1289.3.7.1 2002
soil using a power-operated shaker
- Soil compaction and density tests - Determination of the dry
AS 1289.5.1.1 2003 density/moisture content relation of a soil using standard
compactive effort
- Soil compaction and density tests - Determination of the dry
AS 1289.5.2.1 2003 density/moisture content relation of a soil using modified
compactive effort
- Soil compaction and density tests - Compaction control test - Dry
AS 1289.5.4.1 2007
density ratio, moisture variation and moisture ratio
- Determination of field density and field moisture content of a soil
AS 1289.5.8.1 2007 using a nuclear surface moisture density gauge – Direct
transmission mode
- Soil strength and consolidation tests - Determination of the
AS 1289.6.1.1 2014 California Bearing Ratio of a soil – Standard laboratory methods
for a remoulded specimen
AS 1289.7 (set) - - Soil reactivity tests - Determination of the shrinkage index of a soil
AS 1345 1995 Identification of the contents of pipes, conduits and ducts
AS 1348 2002 Glossary of terms - Road and traffic engineering
Specification and supply of concrete (Includes Amdt 1: 2009, Amdt 2: 2015
AS 1379 2007
& Supp 1: 2009)
Continuous hot-dip metallic coated steel sheet and strip - Coatings of zinc
AS 1397 2011
and zinc alloyed with aluminium and magnesium
AS/NZS 1477 2006 PVC pipes and fittings for pressure applications (Includes Amdt 1:2009)
Chemical admixtures for concrete, mortar and grout – Admixtures for
AS 1478.1 2000
concrete
AS/NZS 1554 (set) - Structural steel welding
AS 1579 2001 Arc-welded steel pipes and fittings for water and waste-water
AS 1580 (set) - Paints and related materials - Methods of test
- Determination of dry film thickness on metallic substrates – Non-

AS/NZS 1580.108.1 1994
destructive methods
AS/NZS 1580.205.4 1998 - Application properties – Airless spraying
AS/NZS 1594 2002 Hot rolled steel flat products
Precast reinforced concrete box culverts – Small culverts (not exceeding
AS 1597.1 2010
1200 mm span and 1200 mm height)
Precast reinforced concrete box culverts – Large culverts (exceeding 1200
AS 1597.2 2014 mm span or 1200 mm height and up to and including 4200 mm span and
4200 mm height)
AS 1604.1 2012 Specification for preservative treatment – Sawn and round timber

Page 233

Metal finishing—Preparation and pre-treatment of surfaces (Code of
AS 1627 (set) - Practice for Preparation and Pre-treatment of Metal Surfaces prior to
Protective Coating)
AS 1627.1 2003 - Removal of oil, grease and related contamination
AS 1627.2 2002 - Power tool cleaning
AS 1627.4 2005 - Abrasive blast cleaning of steel
AS 1627.9 2002 - Pictorial surface preparation standards for painting steel surfaces
AS 1672.1 1997 Limes and limestones – Limes for building
AS 1678 (set) - Emergency procedure guide – Transport
AS 1678.3A1 2004 - Group text EPGs for Class 3 substances – Flammable liquids
AS 1722 1992 Pipe threads of Whitworth form - Fastening pipe threads
AS 1725 (set) 2010 Chain link fabric fencing
AS/NZS 1734 1997 Aluminium and aluminium alloys - Flat sheet, coiled sheet and plate
AS 1742 (set) - Manual of uniform traffic control devices
AS 1742.3 2009 - Traffic control for works on roads
AS 1742.6 2014 - Tourist and services signs
AS 1742.9 2000 - Bicycle facilities
AS 1742.10 2009 - Pedestrian control and protection
AS 1743 2001 Road signs – Specifications
AS 1744 2015 Standard alphabets for road signs
AS 1906 (set) - Retroreflective materials and devices for road traffic control purposes
AS/NZS 1906.1 2007 - Retroreflective sheeting (Includes Amdt 1:2014)
AS 1906.3 1992 - Raised pavement markers (retroreflective and non-retroreflective)
The storage and handling of flammable and combustible liquids (Includes
AS 1940 2004
Amdt 1:2004 & Amdt 2:2006)
AS 2001 (set) 2001 Methods of test for textiles
- Physical tests - Determination of maximum force using the grab
AS 2001.2.3.2 2001
method (ISO 13934-2:1999, MOD)
AS 2008 2013 Bitumen for pavements
AS/NZS 2009 2006 Glass beads for pavement-marking materials
AS/NZS 2041 (set) - Buried corrugated metal structures
AS/NZS 2041.1 2011 - Design methods
AS/NZS 2041.2 2011 - Installation
AS/NZS 2041.4 2010 - Helically formed sinusoidal pipes
AS/NZS 2053.1 2001 Conduits and fittings for electrical Installations – General requirements
Methods for the determination of the flash point of flammable liquids
AS 2106.2 2005 (closed cup) - Determination of flash point - Pensky-Martens closed cup
method
AS 2144 2014 Traffic signal lanterns
AS 2150 2005 Hot mix asphalt – A guide to good practice
AS 2157 1997 Cutback bitumen

Page 234

AS/NZS 2276 (set) - Cables for traffic signal installations
AS/NZS 2276.1 2004 - Multicore power cables
AS/NZS 2276.2 1998 - Feeder cable for vehicle detectors
AS/NZS 2276.3 2002 - Loop cables for vehicle detectors
AS/NZS 2299 (set) - Occupational diving operations
AS/NZS 2299.1 2007 - Standard operational practice (Includes Supp 1:2007)
AS/NZS 2299.2 2002 - Scientific diving
AS/NZS 2299.3 2003 - Recreational industry diving and snorkelling operations
AS/NZS 2299.4 2005 - Film and photographic diving
AS/NZS 2310 2002 Glossary of paint and painting terms
AS/NZS 2311 (set) 2009 Guide to the painting of buildings
Guide to the protection of structural steel against atmospheric corrosion by
AS/NZS 2312 (set) -
the use of protective coatings
AS/NZS 2312.1 2014 - Paint coatings
AS 2339 1997 Traffic signal posts and attachments
AS 2341 (set) - Methods of testing bitumen and related roadmaking products
AS/NZS 2341.2 2015 - Determination of dynamic viscosity by vacuum capillary viscometer
- Determination of kinematic viscosity by flow through a capillary
AS/NZS 2341.3 1993
tube
AS/NZS 2341.4 2015 - Determination of dynamic viscosity by rotational viscometer
AS/NZS 2341.6 1992 - Determination of density using a hydrometer
AS/NZS 2341.9 1992 - Determination of water content (Dean and Stark)
- Determination of penetration (available obsolescent -
AS 2341.12 1993
approximately equivalent to ASTM D5)
AS/NZS 2341.13 1997 - Long-term exposure to heat and air
AS/NZS 2341.18 1992 - Determination of softening point (ring and ball method)
Methods of testing portland and blended cements - General introduction
AS/NZS 2350.0 1999
and list of methods
AS/NZS 2350.1 2006 Methods of testing portland, blended and masonry cements – Sampling
AS 2353 1999 Pedestrian push button assemblies
AS 2423 2002 Coated steel wire fencing products for terrestrial, aquatic and general use
AS/NZS 2433 1994 Plastics - Method for exposure to ultraviolet lamps
Perforated plastics drainage and effluent pipe and fittings - Perforated
AS 2439.1 2007
drainage pipe and associated fittings
Plastics pipes and fittings for irrigation and rural applications - Polyethylene
AS 2698.2 2000
rural pipe
Plastics pipes and fittings for irrigation and rural applications - Mechanical
AS 2698.3 1990
joint fittings for use with polyethylene micro-irrigation pipes
AS 2700 S (set) 2011 Colour Standards for general purposes
AS 2703 2008 Vehicle loop detector sensors
AS 2758.1 2014 Aggregates and rock for engineering purposes - Concrete aggregates

Page 235

Aggregates and rock for engineering purposes - Aggregate for sprayed
AS 2758.2 2009
bituminous surfacing
AS 2758.5 2009 Coarse asphalt aggregates
Road tank vehicles for dangerous goods - Tankers for bitumen based
AS 2809.5 2001
products
AS 2815 (set) - Training and certification of occupational divers
AS 2815.1 2008 - Occupational SCUBA diver - Standard
AS/NZS 2815.2 2013 - Surface supplied diving to 30 m
AS 2815.3 1992 - Air diving to 50 m
AS 2815.4 1992 - Bell diving
AS/NZS 2815.5 2013 - Dive supervisor
AS 2865 2009 Confined Spaces
AS 2876 2000 Concrete kerbs and channels (gutters) - Manually or machine placed
AS 2891 (set) - Methods of sampling and testing asphalt
AS/NZS 2891.1.1 2013 - Sampling – Loose asphalt
AS 2891.1.2 2008 - Sampling – Coring method
AS 2891.1.3 2008 - Sampling – Asphalt from slabs
AS/NZS 2891.3.1 2013 - Bitumen content and aggregate grading - Reflux method
- Bitumen content and aggregate grading - Centrifugal extraction
AS/NZS 2891.3.2 2013
method
AS/NZS 2891.3.3 2013 - Bitumen content and aggregate grading - Pressure filter method
- Compaction of asphalt by Marshall method and determination of
AS/NZS 2891.5 2015
stability and flow – Marshall procedure
- Determination of maximum density of asphalt – Water
AS/NZS 2891.7.1 2015
displacement method
- Determination of maximum density of asphalt – Methylated spirits
AS/NZS 2891.7.3 2014
displacement
AS/NZS 2891.8 2014 - Voids and volumetric properties of compacted asphalt mixes
- Determination of bulk density of compacted asphalt – Waxing
AS/NZS 2891.9.1 2014
procedure
- Determination of bulk density of compacted asphalt –
AS/NZS 2891.9.2 2014
Presaturation method
- Determination of bulk density of compacted asphalt – Mensuration
AS/NZS 2891.9.3 2014
method
AS 2979 1998 Traffic signal mast arms
Electrical installations (known as the Australian/New Zealand Wiring
AS/NZS 3000 2007
Rules) (Includes Amdt 1:2009, Amdt 2:2012)
Approval and test specification - General requirements for electrical
AS/NZS 3100 2009 equipment (Includes Amdt 1:2010, Amdt 2:2012, Amdt 3:2014,
Amdt 4:2015)
Approval and test specification - Particular requirements for isolating
AS/NZS 3108 1994
transformers and safety isolating transformers
AS/NZS 3191 2008 Electric flexible cords
AS/NZS 3500.1 2003 Plumbing and drainage – Water service

Page 236

AS 3568 1999 Oils for reducing the viscosity of residual bitumen for pavements
AS 3600 2009 Concrete structures
AS 3610.1 2010 Formwork for concrete – Documentation and surface finish
AS 3661.1 1993 Slip resistance of pedestrian surfaces - Requirements
Slip resistance of pedestrian surfaces – Guide to the reduction of slip
AS 3661.2 1994
hazards
AS/NZS 3678 2011 Structural steel - Hot-rolled plates, floor plates and slabs
AS 3679.1 2010 Structural steel - Hot rolled bars and sections
AS 3706 (set) - Geotextiles – Methods of test
- General requirements, sampling, conditioning, basic physical
AS 3706.1 2012
properties and statistical analysis
AS 3706.2 2012 - Determination of tensile properties – Wide strip method
AS 3706.3 2000 - Determination of tearing strength – Trapezoidal method
- Determination of bursting strength – California bearing ratio (CBR)
AS 3706.4 2001
– Plunger method
AS 3706.9 2012 - Determination of permittivity, permeability and flow rate
AS 3706.11 2012 - Resistance to degradation by light, heat and moisture
AS/NZS 3725 2007 Design for installation of buried concrete pipes
AS 3727 1993 Guide to residential pavements
Guide to properties of paints for buildings - Undercoat - Solvent borne -
AS 3730.14 2006
Exterior/interior
AS/NZS 3750.22 2008 Paints for steel structures – Full gloss enamel – Solvent-borne
AS/NZS 3845.1 2015 Road safety barrier systems and devices - Road safety barrier systems
AS 3894 (set) - Site testing of protective coatings
AS 3894.3 2002 - Determination of dry film thickness
AS 3894.5 2002 - Determination of surface profile
AS 3894.10 2002 - Inspection report- daily surface and ambient conditions
AS 3894.11 2002 - Equipment report
AS 3894.12 2002 - Inspection report – coating
AS 3894.13 2002 - Inspection Report – Daily blast and paint
AS 3894.14 2002 - Inspection Report – Daily painting
AS 3972 2010 General purpose and blended cements
AS 4049 (set) - Paints and related materials - Pavement marking materials
AS 4049.1 2005 - Solvent borne paint - For use with surface applied glass beads
- Thermoplastic pavement marking materials - For use with surface
AS 4049.2 2005
applied glass beads
AS 4049.3 2005 - Waterborne paint - For use with surface applied glass beads
AS 4049.4 2006 - High performance pavement marking systems
AS/NZS 4058 2007 Precast concrete pipes (pressure and non-pressure)
AS 4133 (set) - Methods of testing rocks for engineering purposes
AS 4191 1994 Portable traffic signal systems

Page 237

AS 4373 2007 Pruning of amenity trees
AS 4419 2003 Soils for landscaping and garden use
AS 4586 2013 Slip resistance classification of new pedestrian surface materials
AS/NZS 4671 2001 Steel reinforcing materials
AS/NZS 4680 2006 Hot-dip galvanized (zinc) coatings on fabricated ferrous articles
Earth-moving machinery - Machine-mounted forward and reverse audible
AS 4742 2003
warning alarm - Sound test method (withdrawn)
Electric cables – Polymetric insulated – For working voltages up to and
AS/NZS 5000.1 2005
including 0.6/1 (1.2) kV
Bridge design - Concrete (Includes Amdt 1:2010, Amdt 2:2010,
AS 5100.5 2004
Supp 1:2008)
AS/NZS ISO 9000 2006 Quality management systems - Fundamentals and vocabulary
AS/NZS ISO 31000 2009 Risk Management – Principles and guidelines
AS/NZS 61558 (set) - Safety of power transformers, power supply units and similar
- Particular requirements for isolating transformers for general use
AS/NZS 61558.2.4 2001
(IEC 61558-2-4:1997, MOD)
- Particular requirements for safety isolating transformers for
AS/NZS 61558.2.6 2001
general use (IEC 61558-2-6:1997, MOD)
Earth-moving machinery - Machine-mounted audible travel alarms and
ISO 9533 2010
forward horns - Test methods and performance criteria

Page 238
22.2 ACTS, REGULATIONS AND CODES APPLICABLE TO THE WORKS AND AUTHORITIES WITH
JURISDICTION OVER THE WORKS INCLUDE, BUT ARE NOT LIMITED TO;
ACTS & REGULATIONS
Aboriginal Sacred Sites Act
Bushfires Act
Control of Roads Act
Dangerous Goods Act and Regulations
Environment Protection and Biodiversity Conservation Act
Environmental Assessment Act
Environmental Offences and Penalties Act
Fair Work Act 2009
Fire and Emergency Act
Food Act 2004
Heritage Conservation Act
NT Building Act and Regulations
NT Planning Act and Regulations
NT Rail Safety Act
Poisons and Dangerous Drugs Act and Regulations
Public Health (General Sanitation, Mosquito Prevention, Rat Exclusion and Prevention) Regulations
Soil Conservation and Land Utilisation Act
Territory Parks and Wildlife Act
Territory Parks and Wildlife Conservation Act
Traffic Act and Regulations
Waste Management and Pollution Control Act
Water Act
Weeds Management Act
Work Health and Safety (NUL) Act and Regulations
CODES AND GUIDELINES
Building Code of Australia (BCA)
CASA Directives
CASA Manual of Standards
Code of Practice, Abrasive Blasting, Safe Work Australia
Code of Practice, Managing the Risk of Falls at Workplaces, NT WorkSafe
NT Code of Practice for Small On-site Sewage and Sullage Treatment Systems and the Disposal or Re-use
of Sewage Effluent.
NT Deemed to Comply Manual
NT Health and Safety Guidelines for Commercial Kitchens
AUTHORITIES
Aboriginal Areas Protection Authority (AAPA)
Development Consent Authority of the NT (DCA)
NT Department of Health and Community Services
NT Department of Health and Families
NT Department of Land Resource Management (DLRM)
NT Department Lands, Planning and Environment (DLPE)
NT Environment Protection Authority (NTEPA)
NT Fire and Rescue Service (NTFRS)
NT WorkSafe
PowerWater Corporation of the NT (PWC)
Requirements of the engaged Building Certifier (if applicable)
Requirements of the Local Municipal or Shire Councils

Page 239
22.3 OTHER REFERENCED AUTHORITIES AND DOCUMENTS

Table - Other Referenced Authorities And Documents
AAPA Australian Asphalt Pavement Association
- Guide to the manufacture, storage and handling of polymer modified binders
APAS Australian Paint Approval Scheme
APVMA Australian Pesticides and Veterinary Medicines Authority
AGBT Austroads Guide to Bridge Technology
AGPT Austroads Guide to Pavement Technology
AGPT04H/08 Austroads Guide to Pavement Technology – Part 4H: Test Methods
AGPT04K/09 Austroads Guide to Pavement Technology – Part4K: Seals
AGRD Austroads Guide to Road Design
AP-G41-08 Bituminous Material Sealing Safety Guide
AGPT/T190 Specification Framework for Polymer Modified Binders and Multigrade Bitumens
AP-T235-13 Guide to the Selection and use of Polymer Modified Binders and Multigrade Bitumens
AP-C87-15 Austroads Glossary of Terms
ARRB Specification for Recycled Crushed Glass as an Engineering Material
ASTM D86 Standard Test Method for Distillation of Petroleum Products at Atmospheric Pressure
ASTM D445 Standard Test Method for Kinematic Viscosity of Transparent and Opaque Liquids
(and Calculation of Dynamic Viscosity)
ASTM D1298 Standard Test Method for Density, Relative Density, or API Gravity of Crude
Petroleum and Liquid Petroleum Products
ASTM D5064 Standard Practice for Conducting a Patch Test to Assess Coating Compatibility
CASA Civil Aviation Safety Authority
ISSA International Slurry Surfacing Association
NATA National Association of Testing Authorities
NTCP Northern Territory Code of Practice
NTMTM Northern Territory Materials Testing Manual
NTTM Northern Territory Testing Methods
http://www.nt.gov.au/infrastructure/publications/materialstesting/index.shtml
WA 730.1 Main Roads Western Australia, Bitumen Content and Particle Size Distribution of
Asphalt and Stabilised Soil: Centrifuge Methods
NTEPA Fact Sheet “Guidelines for Water Extraction as they relate to Road
Construction and Maintenance.”
SPECIFICATIONS Electronically available: http://www.nt.gov.au/infrastructure/techspecs/index.shtml
Standard Specification for Environmental Management
Standard Specification for Small Building Works
Standard Specification for Road Works

Page 240
22.4 STANDARD DRAWINGS FOR ROAD MAINTENANCE

Table – Standard Drawings for Road Maintenance
Note: Use the most recently issued versions of drawings.
C(S) 0016 Cross Section – Shared Path Railing at Culvert Crossing
C(S) 1203 Standard Kerb Profiles

C(S) 1204 Cyclists’ Hold Rail
C(S) 1300 Flexible Guide Posts

C(S) 1301 Flood Gauge Posts
C(S) 1302 Log Barrier Fence
C(S) 1303 Standard Security Fence
C(S) 1306 Stock Fence Design and Details
C(S) 1310 Steel Beam Guard Rail
C(S) 1313 Standard Cattle Grid Plan and Sections with Approach Slab
C(S) 1314 Standard Cattle Grid Plan and Sections without Approach Slab
C(S) 1315 Standard Cattle Grid Details
C(S) 1316 Vehicle Movement Barriers
C(S) 1501 Signal Details Pole Foundation

C(S) 1505 Signal Detail Lantern Mounting Details
C(S) 1507 Signal Detail Detector Installation
C(S) 1520 Line Marking
C(S) 1521 Chevrons and RRPM’s
C(S) 2000 Northern Territory Regions Map

C(S) 2001 Road Network – Darwin Region
C(S) 2002 Road Network – East Arnhem Region
C(S) 2003 Road Network – Katherine Region
C(S) 2004 Road Network – Tennant Creek Region
C(S) 2005 Road Network – Alice Springs Region – West
C(S) 2006 Road Network – Alice Springs - East
C(S) 2100 8.0m Gravel Pavement Resurfacing - Typical Cross Section

C(S) 2101 Shoulder Maintenance Works - Gravel Pavement – Typical Cross Section B
C(S) 2102 Shoulder Maintenance on Various Width Sealed Pavement - Typical Cross Section
C(S) 2103 Shoulder Maintenance on Various Width Sealed Pavement - Typical Cross Section D
C(S) 2104 Road Maintenance Works 9m Gravel Pavement - Typical Cross Section
C(S) 2105 Road Maintenance Works 10m Gravel Pavement - Typical Floodway Cross Section

Page 241
Table – Standard Drawings for Road Maintenance

C(S) 2106 Road Maintenance Works 7m Sealed Pavement - Typical Floodway Cross Section G
C(S) 2107 Road Maintenance Works 9m Sealed Pavement - Typical Floodway Cross Section
C(S) 2108 Standard Specification 10m Carriageway with 8.0m seal – Typical Cross Section J
C(S) 2109 Standard Drawing 10.0m Carriageway with 8.0m seal – Typical Cross Section
RU3A (B95-2284) Crow Guard Lid for 200L Drum
Civil Standard Drawings Available: http://www.nt.gov.au/infrastructure/techspecs/drawings/index.shtml

Page 242

Page 243

Page 244

Page 245

Page 246

Page 247

Page 248

Page 249
23. NORTHERN TERRITORY CLIMATE ZONE TABLE
NTCZ 01 NTCZ 02 NTCZ 03 NTCZ 04 NTCZ 05
Areas north of Katherine

including Katherine, and
Creek and south of and
Areas north of Tennant
km and 50 km from the

coast or tidal estuaries
areas more than 50 km
Areas inside buildings

Areas less than 10 km
from the coast or tidal
from the coast or tidal

and areas between 10
Areas south of, and
including, Tennant
estuaries
estuaries
Creek
Atmospheric
ISO 9223 Corrosivity 3 4 5 5 2
Classification
AS 1170
Wind Region A4 B B&C C n/a
(BCA)
Service
Condition 2 3 4 5 n/a
AS 1192 Category
Corrosion
B C&F D E C
Category
AA10 Low
airborne
Thickness moisture levels
AS 1231 AA15 AA25 AA25 AA25
Grade AA15 High
airborne
moisture levels
AS/NZS Climate C5-I &
C2 C3 & T T C1
2312.1 Category C5 - M
AS 2423 Climate
B C&F F E&F n/a
AS/NZS 4534 Category
R1 R4 (White
Durability R2 (Yellow R3 (Red R1 (Green
AS 2699 (Green or blue
Classification mark) mark) mark)
mark) mark)
Corrosion
AS 3566.2 Resistance 3 4 4 4 n/a
Class
Service
Condition 3 4 5 5 n/a
Category
AS 3715
Atmospheric
Corrosivity 3 4 5 5 n/a
Classification
Corrosion
AS 4145 resistance C6 C6 C7 C7 C6
category
BCA Table Environment High -
Low Low Medium n/a
3.5.1.1a category Very High

DOI REFERENCE TEXT – August 2015
Page 250

STD Spec R DMT 2016 Online

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

STD Spec R DMT 2016 Online

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

STD Spec R DMT 2016 Online

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What is the purpose of this document?

What is the purpose of this document?

What standards are referenced in this document?

What standards are referenced in this document?

DEPARTMENT OF INFRASTRUCTURE

miscellaneous provisions ■ provision for traffic ■

This document specifies the general standards of

ABOUT THIS SPECIFICATION

This document was first published in January 1999 and has

Revised and Re-issued October 2015

Thanks to Wicking for providing

PROJECT SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS

HOLD AND WITNESS POINTS

ISSN 1835-2588 Print edition

STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD MAINTENANCE

STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD MAINTENANCE

1. MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS ........................................................................................ 7

STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD MAINTENANCE

STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD MAINTENANCE

1. MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS Provide hard copies of the text information in A4

STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD MAINTENANCE

Dry Density Ratio (DDR) PSRs

STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD MAINTENANCE

Surface Formation 1.7 PROTECTION OF CULTURALLY AND

1.8.2 Camp Site/Compound/Workshop – - Vehicle license to carry explosives.

and boundaries of Material Extraction Areas or 1.12.4 Rehabilitation of Material Extraction

STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD MAINTENANCE

STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD MAINTENANCE

STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD MAINTENANCE

1.23 ASBESTOS Negotiated Rate

STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD MAINTENANCE

1.27.5 Dive Safety Log 1.27.10 Response if a crocodile is spotted

STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD MAINTENANCE

2. PROVISION FOR TRAFFIC 2.3 DEFINITIONS

AS 4191 Portable traffic signals − be registered with a Northern Territory

2.4.8 NT Accreditation in WorkZone Traffic 2.5.3 Works on Roads

− Impact on Adjoining Road Network − The correctness and currency of accreditation

Provide amended TCDs which incorporate 1530 hours to 1730 hours.

STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD MAINTENANCE

STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD MAINTENANCE

Table 2.2 – Sign erection requirements

STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD MAINTENANCE

STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD MAINTENANCE

2.14.2 Maintenance 2.17 TEMPORARY BRIDGING – HOLD

STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD MAINTENANCE

2.18.2 Rotating Beacons on Plant 2.21 PORTABLE TRAFFIC SIGNALS

STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD MAINTENANCE

2.21.3 Time Settings 2.22 RESTORATION

STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD MAINTENANCE

3. EARTHWORKS AND DRAINAGE Management for more details on stockpile

STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD MAINTENANCE

STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD MAINTENANCE

Offset: 2 m (minimum) and 4 m Table 3.4 – Conformance Tolerances – Earthworks

STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD MAINTENANCE

4. CONFORMANCE TESTING Hold Point - The selected test methods must be

4.8.1 Conformance Testing and Payment 4.11 CONFORMANCE TESTING RESULTS

(n − 1) k = the multiplier in Table 4.3 – Multiplier Values

STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD MAINTENANCE

4.11.6 Multiplier Values for Asphalt 4.12.2 Testing – Hold Point